Website sach6789.com - Đề cương tiếng Anh 6,7,8,9 học kì 1 (2018-2019) by Dạy Kèm Quy Nhơn Official

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

MỤC LỤC UNIT 1: GREETINGS UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL UNIT 3: AT HOME UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL UNIT 5: THINGS I DO UNIT 6: PLACES UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT

Trang 2 Trang 10 Trang 19 Trang 28 Trang 39 Trang 48 Trang 58 Trang 67

Trang 1

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 1: GREETINGS I. GLOSSARY Noun / N (danh từ) 1. Greeting : lời chào hỏi 12. Miss : cô 2. Classmate : bạn cùng lớp 13. Mrs. : bà 3 Name : tên 14. Mr. : ông 4. Partner : bạn cùng cặp 15. Number : con số 5. Children : những đứa trẽ 16. Hello = hi : chào ( thân mật) 6. Thanks : lời cám ơn 17. Goodbye = bye : lời chào tạm biệt 7. Thank you : cám ơn 18. Good night : chúc ngủ ngon 8. Morning : buổi sáng (0h-12h) 9. Afternoon : buổi chiều (12h-l 8h) Adjective /Adj (tính từ) 10. Evening : buổi tối (18h-21h) 19. Fine : khỏe , tốt h h 11. Night : ban đêm (21 -24 ) 20. Old : già, cũ II. GRAMMAR 1. GREETINGS (chào hỏi) a. Hỏi và trả lời tên. Q: What’s + your name? A: I am + tên My name is + tên Ex: - What’s your name? -> I'm Lan. / -> My name is Lan. b. Hỏi sức khỏe. Q: How are you ? A: I'm fine. Thank you. And you? c. Hỏi tuổi và trả lời. Q: How old are you? A: I’m ten years old d. Hỏi khối/ lớp và trả lời. Q: Which grade are you in? A: I’m in grade 6. Q: Which class are you in? A: I’m in class 6A. e. Giới thiệu người khác. This is + tên / danh từ Ex: - This is Tom / - This is my mother. 2. PERSONAL PRONOUN (Đại từ nhân xưng) ➢ Đại từ nhân xưng giữ vai trò chủ ngữ trong câu (Subject). ➢ Dùng để thay thế cho danh từ được nói ở trước đó để tránh lặp lại. Ngôi Số ít Số nhiều Ngôi 1 - I: tôi - We: Chúng tôi Ngôi 2 - You: bạn - You: Các bạn Ngôi 3 - He: Anh ấy, chú ấy - They: Họ, chúng nó - She: Cô ấy, chị ấy - It: Nó 3. THE VERB: TOBE (Động từTobe): AM , IS , ARE (Thì , Là, Ở) I + am (‘m) Chủ ngữ ngôi thứ ba số ít + is (‘s) Chủ ngữ số nhiều + are (‘re) 4. THE SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE OF TOBE (Thì hiện tại đơn của TOBE) ➢ Các dạng câu. (+) Positive form (dạng khẳng định) (-) Negative form (dạng phủ định) (?) Question form (dạng câu hỏi) Trang 2

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 a) Yes — No question (Câu hỏi Yes, No) b) WH question (câu hỏi WH) ➢ Công thức. (+) S + am / is / are + N / Adj. (-) S + am / is / are + NOT + N / Adj. (?) Am / Is / Are + S + N / Adj. -> Yes, S + am / is / are -> No, S + am / is / are + not. WH + am / is / are + S + .... ? Ex: (+) She is a nurse. (-) ....................................................................................................................................................................................... (?) ....................................................................................................................................................................................... ➢ Rút gọn. - is not = isn’t - are not = aren’t ➢ QUESTIONS WORDS (từ để hỏi) 1. What: cái gì 4. Why: tại sao 2. Where: ở đâu 5. Who: ai 3. When: khi nào 6. How: như thế nào --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Đặt câu hỏi và trả lời tên bằng 2 cách. 1. Lan ............................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Hoa ............................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Nam .............................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Nga ............................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Long .............................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................... II. Viết các số sau bằng chữ. 8 : .................................................. 5 : .................................................. 9 : ............................................ 18 : ................................................. 15 : ................................................. 19 : ........................................... 3 : ................................................. 4 : ................................................. 7 : ........................................... 13 : ................................................. 14 : ................................................. 17 : ........................................... 20 : ................................................. 11 : ................................................. 12 : ........................................... III. Đặt câu hỏi và trả lời về tuổi 1. 9: ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. 10: ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3. 1: ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. 16: ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5. 11 ................................................................................................................................................................................ IV. Hoàn thành các câu sau 1. What ____________ your name? 6. I ____________ fine. 2. My name ____________ Hoa. 7. This ____________Lam. 3. How old ____________you? 8. Which class ____________Hanh in? 4. I____________ eleven years old. 9. This ____________ my father. 5. How____________ you? 10. I____________ ten years old. V. Sắp xếp các từ thành câu hoàn chỉnh 1. thank / are / you / fine / , / we. .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. old / I / years / fourteen / am /. Trang 3

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. today / how / ? / you / are .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. which / you / in / grade / are / ? .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. this / evening / Miss / , / Hung / good / . / Hoa / is /. .......................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Hãy viết lại các câu sau dùng dạng viết tắt nếu có thể 1. I am Hoa. ......................................................................................................................................... 2. This is Mr. Tan. ......................................................................................................................................... 3. My name is Lan ......................................................................................................................................... 4. We are fine, thank you. ......................................................................................................................................... 5. How old are you? ......................................................................................................................................... VII. Dùng đại từ nhân xưng để thay thế cho những từ gạch dưới. 1. Lan is my best friend. ................................................................................................................ 2. Nam is tall. ................................................................................................................ 3. Their sisters are in the kitchen. ................................................................................................................ 4. This cat is lovely. ................................................................................................................ 5. Khoa and I are in the same class ................................................................................................................ 6. Are you and Hoa eleven years old? ................................................................................................................ 7. Thu and I are students. ................................................................................................................ 8. The books are new. ................................................................................................................ 9. His pen is old. ................................................................................................................ 10. My father is a doctor. ................................................................................................................ VIII. Hãy tìm lỗi sai rồi sửa lại cho đúng. 1. How old you are? A B C ................................................................................................................ 2. I’m fiveteen years old. A B C ................................................................................................................ 3. My name are Linh. A B C ................................................................................................................ 4. I’m Hanh, and this Phong is. A B C ................................................................................................................ 5. I’m fine, thanks you. A B C ................................................................................................................ 6. Good mornings. Thanh. How are you? A B C ................................................................................................................ IX. Hoàn tất đoạn hội thoại sau với các từ cho sẵn trong khung. Good this How old thank you How And you I’m Goodbye Nam : (1) __________________________morning, Miss Hoa. Miss. Hoa : Good morning. Nam. (2) __________________________are you? Nam : I’m fine, (3) __________________________. And how are you? Miss. Hoa : Fine, thanks. Nam, (4) __________________________ is Nga. Nam : Hello, Nga. (5) __________________________ are you? Nga : I’m ten years old. (6) __________________________. Nam : (7) __________________________eleven. Miss. Hoa : (8) __________________________, children. Nam and Nga : Good bye. --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 1

I. Viết các từ đúng từ chữ cái cho sẵn: 1. nefi ...................................................... 4.mena ....................................... 7. leneve ................................ Trang 4

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 2. Twynte ........................................... 5. rM .......................................... 8. lod ....................................... 3. ssiM .................................................. 6.bermun ............................... 9. steexin ............................... II. Dùng Đại từ Nhân Xưng để thay thế cho những từ gạch dưới: 1. My brother is a st ........................................................................................................................... 2. Hoa and I are tall. ........................................................................................................................... 3. Her pencil is new. ........................................................................................................................... 4. Tom and Mary are my friends ........................................................................................................................... 5. His sister is a nurse. ........................................................................................................................... III. Tự giới thiệu tên và tuổi: 1. Hung / 10 : ............................................................................................................................................................. 2. Hien / 20 : .............................................................................................................................................................. 3. Phi / 15 : .............................................................................................................................................................. 4. Loan / 11 : ............................................................................................................................................................. IV. Hãy cho các câu chào thích hợp với các giờ: 1. 13:00 p.m ........................................................... 4. 22:00 p.m ....................................................................... 2. 10:00 a.m ............................................................ 5. 7:00 a.m ...................................................................... 3. 17:00 p.m ........................................................... 6. 2: 00 p.m ...................................................................... V. Hãy tự giới thiệu tên mình và tên người khác: 1. Nga / Phong ............................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam / Miss. Hoa ............................................................................................................................................... 3. Huân / Long ............................................................................................................................................... 4. Phương / Mrs. Loan ............................................................................................................................................... 5. Ba / Mr. Hưng ............................................................................................................................................... VI. Hoàn thành các câu sau: 1. What ___________ your name? 6. I ___________ fine. 2. My name ___________ Loan. 7. This ___________ Kate. 3. How old ___________ you? 8. I ___________ Tuan. 4. I ___________ 14 years old. 9. This ___________ my sister. 5. How ___________ you? 10. I ___________ 12 years old. VII. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau: 1. What’s your name? ................................................................................................................................... 2. How old are you? ................................................................................................................................... 3. Which grade are you in? ................................................................................................................................... 4. Which class are you in? ................................................................................................................................... 5. How are you? ................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

I. Đọc các từ ở mỗi dòng rồi chọn ra một từ không cùng loại với các từ còn lại: 1. one four five fine 2. morning thanks evening afternoon 3. fifteen fourteen night three 4. am old are is 5. bye hi hello good morning 6. good morning good bye good afternoon good evening 7. fine I’m fine we’re fine children 8. he I it she II. Hãy điền vào chỗ trống với dạng đúng của động từ Tobe: 1. I ________ Lan. 11. The students ________ good. 2. You ________ a student. 12. My teacher ________ beautiful. 3. My name ________ Nam. 13. What ________ it? 4. She ________ a doctor. 14. ________ he a student? 5. How________ you? 15. This ________ Mrs. Lan. 6. Lan and Hoa ________ students. 16. The books________ new. 7. Mai________ not a teacher. 17. Where________ your sister? Trang 5

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 8. Who ________ that? It________ Mai. 18. How old________ you? 9. The pen ________ new. 19. I and He________ children. 10. We________ fine. 20. We ________ children. III. Đổi các câu sau sang thể phủ định và nghi vấn: 1. I am a student. (-) ................................................................................................................................................................................... (?) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. They are nurses. (-) ................................................................................................................................................................................... (?) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. My father is an engineer. (-) ................................................................................................................................................................................... (?) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. This is my brother. (-) ................................................................................................................................................................................... (?) .................................................................................................................................................................................. IV. Đặt câu hỏi và trả lời về tuổi theo gợi ý: 1. You - 8 .................................................................................................................................................. 2. Lan - 9 .................................................................................................................................................. 3. Nga and Vinh - 10 .................................................................................................................................................. 4. Minh – 12 .................................................................................................................................................. V. Chọn từ hoặc cụm từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống: 1. “Hello”. - ________________. a. Hello b. Bye c. Good bye d. Thanks 2. I’m fine, ________________. a. thank b. thanks you c. thank you d. thank your 3. Good morning, children. How are you? ________________. a. I’m fine, thanks b. They’re fine c. We're twelve d. We’re fine, thank you 4. ________________, my name’s Mary. - Hi. I’m Nam. a. Good b. Hello c. Fine d. Bye 5. Hello , Nam. This is Mary. - ________________. a. Hi, Miss. Green b. Hi, Mary c. Fine, thanks d. Thank you 6. ________________? - My name is Trung. a. What your name b. What’s your name c. Your name’s Trung d. Am I Trung 7. “________________”. I’m twelve. a. How old are you? b. How old you are? c. I’m eleven how you are? d. How is you? 8. Two x six = ________________. a. twenty b. eleven c. twelve d. thirteen 9. Chọn từ gạch dưới có âm đọc khác. a. hi b. fine c. night d. children 10. This________________ my friend, Betty White. a. are b. is c. here d. am IV. Hãy đặt câu hỏi cho các câu trả lời sau: 1. ................................................................................................................... ? - I’m ten. 2. ................................................................................................................... ? - We’re fine. Thank you. 3. ................................................................................................................... ? - Yes, this is Tâm. 4. ................................................................................................................... ? - She’s fifteen years old. 5. ................................................................................................................... ? - My name is Minh. 6. ................................................................................................................... ? - Yes, I am a student. 7. ................................................................................................................... ? - No, they are not Lan and Hoa. V. Tìm một lỗi sai trong câu, khoanh tròn lại và sửa: 1. Hello, my name are Laura Watson. I’m from London. A B C D ........................................................................................ Trang 6

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 2. Mary Brown and I am in the classroom. A B C D ........................................................................................ 3. What’s this? It is an ruler A B C D ........................................................................................ 4. This is my sister. She is ten year old. A B C D ........................................................................................ 5. Which class are you in? -> I'm in 6. A B C D ........................................................................................ VI. Đọc đoạn văn sau và điền vào chỗ trống với từ thích hợp: Hello, my name is Trung and I am twelve years old. I am a student. I live with my father, mother and two sisters on Tran Phu Street. My father is 42 years old and he is a doctor. My mother is 40. She is a teacher. My two sisters are ten. They are students. I love my family. 1. Trung’s family has _____________ people. a. three b. four c. five d. six 2. His _____________ sisters are ten. a. two b. second c. one d. first 3. He _____________his family. a. loves b. love c. hate d. doesn’t like 4. _____________are students. a. He b. she c. Trung d. they 5. He _____________two sisters. a. has b. is c. are d. does. VII. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân: 1. Lan is at school. ........................................................................................................................................ 2. His teacher is fine. ........................................................................................................................................ 3. Yes, it is a pencil. ........................................................................................................................................ 4. My name is Hoa. ........................................................................................................................................ 5. My friend is eleven years old. ........................................................................................................................................ 6. The book is red. ........................................................................................................................................ 7. No, she is not here. ........................................................................................................................................ 8. These are her pens. ........................................................................................................................................ 9. That is a ruler. ........................................................................................................................................ 10. His name is Tuan. ........................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Điền dạng đúng của động từ “Tobe”: 1. Where your teacher (be)___________? 2. My brother (be) ___________fourteen. 3. Four and five (be) ___________nine. 4. This (be) ___________Phong. 5. They (not be) ___________my classmates 6. How old Lan (be) ___________? 7. Sue and I (be) ___________classmates. 8. The book (not be) ___________on the table. 9. How old you (be) ___________ ? 10. Kate (be) ___________ very well II. Đổi sang câu phủ định và câu nghi vấn: 1. Miss. Hoa is a doctor. (-) ....................................................................................... (?) ...................................................................................... 2. Tom and Mary are students. (-) ....................................................................................... (?) ...................................................................................... 3. Lan is here.

11. Lan (be) ___________a nurse? 12. The bag (be) ___________red. 13. Sheila (not be) ___________at home. 14. What your name (be) ___________? 15. You (be) a teacher? 16. Hoa and Minh (not be) ___________at school. 17. What his name (be) ___________? 18. They (not be) ___________here. 19. The ruler (be) ___________long. 20. Where Hoa and Minh (be) ___________? 4. We are fine. (-) ...................................................................................... (?) ..................................................................................... 5. It is my desk. (-) ...................................................................................... (?) ..................................................................................... 6. She’s fifteen years old. Trang 7

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 (-) ....................................................................................... (-) ...................................................................................... (?) ...................................................................................... (?) ..................................................................................... III. Thay các từ gạch chân bằng Đại Từ Nhân Xưng: 1. My father is thirty-five years old ............................................................................................................................... 2. This girl is beautiful. ................................................................................................................................ 3. His hair is short. ................................................................................................................................ 4. Khoa and Mai are my classmates ................................................................................................................................ 5. I and Hue are at school ................................................................................................................................ 6. Her dog is lovely. ................................................................................................................................ 7. My friends are friendly. ................................................................................................................................ 8. Her baby is ten months. ................................................................................................................................ IV. Chọn từ và cụm từ thích hợp điền vào chỗ trống: 1. ________ you a student ? a. Is b. Are c. Isn’t d. Am 2. No, I’m________. I’m at Thang Long school. a. no b. not c. isn’t d. aren't 3. ________ it a good school? a. Is b. Are c. This d. Am 4. Where ________ my pen? a. is b. it is c. there's d. is it 5. Jane and I ________ good friends. a. am b. are c. is d. to be 6. ________ are you? I’m in my classroom. a. How b. Where c. What d. Who 7. Is this your pen ? ________. a. Yes, is b. That one c. Yes, it is d. What is it? 8. Từ nào có âm dưới được đọc là /z/ ? a. is. b. thanks c. seven d. six 9. ________ it a school ? a. Is b. Are c. This d. Am 10. ________ old are you, Tom? a. What b. Who c. How d. Where 11. ________ do you live ? On Tran Phu Street. a. When b. Where c. What d. How 12. My ________ Tom Brown. a. name's b. name c. names d. names are V. Hãy kết hợp các từ trong cột A vói các từ trong cột B: A B 1. Hi, Ba a. Fine, thanks 2. How are you, children? b. Good night, Mai. 3. I'm fine, thanks. And you? c. Hello, Nga. 4. Good night, Mom d. Hello, Phong 5. How old are you? e. We're fine, thank you 6. Hello. Miss Hoa. This is Nga. f. I’m eleven years old 1. _________; 2 _________; 3 _________; 4 _________; 5 _________; 6_________ VI. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân: 1. That is a banana. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. This is a book. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Loan is at home. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They are fine. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 8

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 5. No, it isn’t a ruler. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Yes, this is my mother. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Chọn từ thích hợp để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau: Hi! My name _________ (1) Lan, and I’m from Hanoi. This is a photo _________ (2) my family. Our house is in Hue. This is my brother, _________ (3) name is Hung. He’s 15 years old. He is a student _________ (4) high school. This is my mother, _________ (5) name’s Phuong. She's 45 years old _________ (6) she’s a doctor. And this is my father, Tan. He’s _________ (7) years old and he’s a teacher. 1. a. am b. is c. are d. have 2. a. of b. at c. from d. to 3. a. he b. she c. his d. my 4. a. on b. in c. from d. with 5. a. she b. her c. he d. his 6. a. and b. but c. with d. because 7. a. fifteen b. twenty-five c. fivety d. fifty --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 9

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 2: AT SCHOOL A. COME IN

I. GLOSSARY Verb 1. Close : đóng lại, xếp 4. Sit(down) : ngồi (xuống) 2. Open : mở 5. Stand (up) : đứng (lên) 3. Come in : đi (vào) 6. Say : nói II. GRAMMAR IMPERATIVE: Câu mệnh lệnh * Định nghĩa: Câu mệnh lệnh là câu không có chủ ngữ đứng đầu. * Cách dùng: Để sai khiến, đề nghị hay ngăn cấm ai làm gì đó. a) Câu mệnh lệnh xác định Verb + object (túc từ), please Ex: - Sit down. - Open your book. - Stand up. - Close the door, please. b) Câu mệnh lệnh phủ định Don’t + Verb Ex: - Don't talk in class. - Don’t close the door. - Don’t leave, please. - Don’t open your eyes.

B. WHERE DO YOU LIVE?

I. GLOSSARY Verb 1. Match : ghép, nối 2. Live : sống, sinh sống 3. Spell : đánh vần Noun 4. Dialogue : cuộc đối thoại 9. Country : miền quê, đất nước 5. Address : địa chỉ 10. District : quận 6. City : thành phố 11. Student : học sinh, sinh viên 7. Street : đường, phố 12.Teacher : giáo viên 8. House : nhà ở, căn nhà II. GRAMMAR 1. HỎI VỀ NƠI Ở VÀ TRẢ LỜI Q: Where + do / does + S + live? A: S + live (s) + at (address) on (street) in (district, city, country). * Trợ động từ: DO / DOES - Do: dùng cho chủ từ I, You, We, They, và Danh từ số nhiều. // live - Does: dùng cho chủ từ He, She, It, và Danh từ số ít. // lives Ex: 1. Q : Where do you live ? 2. Q : Where does he live ? A : - I live on a street. A : - He lives on Hoa Binh Street. - I live in a City. - He lives in Viet Nam. - I live at 10 Nguyễn Du street. - He lives in a house. * Giới từ: on: trên in: trong at: tại up: hướng lên down: hướng xuống 2. CÂU HỎI VỀ CÁCH ĐÁNH VẦN TÊN Q: How do you spell your name? -> A: L - A - N, LAN

C. MY SCHOOL I. GLOSSARY Noun

Trang 10

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. Bag : Bao, giỏ, túi 9. Pen : Bút, cây bút mực 2. Board : Tấm bảng 10. Pencil : Bút chì 3. Book : Quyển sách 11. Ruler : Thước kẻ 4. Classroom : Phòng học 12. School : Trường học 5. Clock : Đồng hồ treo tường 13. Waste basket : Sọt rác 6. Desk : Bàn làm việc 14. Window : Cửa sổ 7. Door : Cửa ra vào 15. School bag : Cặp sách 8. Eraser : Tẩy, gôm II. GRAMMAR 1. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE : tính từ sở hữu Subject Possessive Adjective Subject Possessive Adjective I -> My : của tôi We -> Our : của chúng tôi You -> Your : của bạn You -> Your : của các bạn He -> His : của anh ấy They -> Their : của họ She -> Her : của cô ấy It -> Its : của nó - Các tính từ sở hữu trên luôn đi kèm với một danh từ để bổ nghĩa cho danh từ đó. - Tính từ sở hữu không bao giờ đứng một mình. Ex: my book her pens his bag their dog - His mother is a teacher. 2. POSESSIVE CASE (sở hữu cách) Ex: Nam’s book the boy’s mother Linh’s sisters 3. THE ARTICLE: Mạo từ A và AN * A : đứng trước danh từ đếm được số ít bắt đầu bằng phụ âm. Ex: a book; a door; a student. - I’m a teacher. * AN : đứng trước danh từ đếm được số ít bắt đầu bằng nguyên âm. - Có 5 nguyên âm: U, E, O, A, I. Ex: an apple; an eraser; an orange; an hour. - This is an apple 4. THIS / THAT: này, đây / kia, đó * This is + Danh từ số ít để chỉ người hay vật ở gần. * That is + Danh từ số ít để chỉ người hay vật ở xa. * Hỏi về đồ vật: Q: What’s this / that ? (Đây / kia là gì ?) A: It’s a / an + tên đồ vật Ex: - What’s this? - It’s a door? - What’s that? - It’s my clock. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Cho dạng đúng của động từ “Tobe’’: 1. I (be) __________ a student. 2. We (be) __________ teachers. 3. The children (not be) __________ in the class. 4. This (be) __________ my sister. 5. What (be) __________ that ? -> It (be) __________ a desk. 6. How old __________ Lan ? -> She (be) __________ eleven. 7. What (be) __________ your name? 8. The pencils (be) __________ old? 9. My name (be) __________ Linh. How old you (be) __________? 10. My friends (not be) __________ at school. 11. They (not be) __________ my sisters. 12. She (be) __________ a nurse ? Trang 11

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 13. The school (not be) __________ big. 14. Their friends (be) __________ friendly. 15. Your father (be) __________ a doctor? II. Cho dạng đúng của giới từ: 1. Stand __________, please. 5. Hang lives __________ Tran Phu Street. 2. Sit __________, class. 6. Mr. Pike lives __________ England. 3. I live __________ Tan Binh district. 7. What is this __________ English? 4. She is __________ school. 8. I live __________ 15 Dong Da Street. III. Điền A hoặc An vào chỗ trống , nếu cần thiết: 1. My brother is __________ engineer. 6. Her sisters are __________ nurses. 2. We are __________ students. 7. That is__________ inkpot. 3. This is __________ bench. 8. He and I are __________ teachers. 4. I live in __________ house 9. Those are __________ apples. 5. These are __________ desks 10. This is __________ eraser. IV. Đặt câu hỏi cho các câu trả lời sau: 1. ................................................................................................................... ? - Yes, this is my book. 2. ................................................................................................................... ? - I live on Le Thanh Ton street. 3. ................................................................................................................... ? - That is a wastebasket. 4. .................................................................................................................. ? - No, this isn’t my bag. 5. .................................................................................................................. ? - I’m eleven. 6. ................................................................................................................... ? - She is fine. 7. ...................................................................................................................7 - I live in HCM city. 8. ................................................................................................................... ? - The students are at school. 9. .................................................................................................................. ? - He lives at 378, Âu Cơ street. 10. ................................................................................................................ ? - They live on Nguyen Hue street. V. Đặt câu hỏi và trả lời về nơi ở theo gợi ý: 1. You / 356, Vo Thi Sau street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Your family / Hà Nội. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Mrs. Chi / Tân Bình district. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Their cousins / 152 Âu Cơ Street, district 11. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Linh / Viet Nam. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Mr. Hoàng / Hoang Van Thu street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Chọn đáp án đúng: 1. She (live / lives) on Au Co Street. 6. What (am / is/ are) that? 2. They (live / lives) in Tan Binh district. 7. The book is (up /down /on) the table. 3. Where (do / does) Tam live? 8. (Close/ Closing / Closes) your book! 4. Stand (up / down / in), please. 9. (Don’t / Doesn’t) open your eyes! 5. It is (an /a / two) book. 17. How (old / age) are you? 10. Hoa and Minh (is/ am / are) students. 18. She (isn’t / aren’t / am not) a nurse. 11. They (not are / is not / are not) tall. 19. Minh and I are (teacher/teachers). 12. When (am / is / are) Linh at home? 20. The girl (am / is / are) 12 years old 13. We are (in / on / at) school. 21. This is (Lan / Lan's / I) friend. Trang 12

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 14. (Do / Does) she live at 12 Le Lai? 22. How do you (spells / spell / to spell) 15. Hoa and I (live / lives) in Ha Noi. your name? 16. Where (do / does) they live? VI. Chọn từ hoặc cụm từ thích hợp: 1. _________ you a new student? a. Is b. Are c. Isn’t d. Am 2. This _________ my friend. Betty White. a. are b. here c. am d. is 3. No. I’m _________. I’m at Lam Son school. a. no b. not c. isn’t d. aren’t 4. _________it a school? a. Is b. Are c. This d. Am 5. _________old are you, Tom? a. What b. Who c. How d. Where 6. _________do you live? On Tran Phu street. a. When b. Where c. What d. How 7. Is _________ your book? a. there b. that c. these d. X 8. Where _________ my pen? a. it is b. is it c. there’s d. is 9. Jane and I _________ good friends. a. am b. are c. is d. it’s 10. Bill, _________ please! a. come here b. comes here c. to come here d. X VIII. Chọn từ thích hợp: This is my family. We _________ (1) in our living room. There are _________ (2) people in my family: my father, my mother my brother, my sister and me. This is my father, He is _________ (3), and he is a doctor. This is my mother. She is forty. She is a _________ (4). My brother is fourteen, He is a student. My sister is eight. She is a student _________ (5). 1. a. am b. is c. are d. have 2. a. five b. four c. three d. six 3. a. forty-three b. forty-two c. forty d. the same my mother 4. a. doctor b. nurse c. teacher d. house wife 5. a. with b. from c. too d. in --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 1

I. Đặt câu Hỏi và trả lời về nơi ở: 1. You and Lan / Nguyen Hue street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. His children / Ha Noi. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Huy and Binh /13 Thong Nhat street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Hung / Go Vap district. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Mr. and Mrs. Black / America. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Mary / USA. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 13

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Tìm lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng: 1. How are you? I’m ten years old. A B C D ................................................................................................................................ 2. Ịs that you teacher? A B C D ................................................................................................................................ 3. Four and sixteen are twenty. A B C D ................................................................................................................................ 4. He ịs a engineer. A BC D ................................................................................................................................ 5. What’s he name? His name ịs Tim. A B C D ................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

L Điền giới từ cho phù hợp 1. Ha lives ___________a small street. 6. My mother is ___________ a room. 2. I live ___________Huong river. 7. She is___________ a garden. 3. I live ___________HCM City. 8. The pencil is ___________ floor. 4. They are ___________the classroom. 9. He lives ___________Nha Trang. 5. The clock is ___________the wall. 10. Come___________ and sit down, II. Chọn câu trả lời đúng: 1. (Our/He / I) school is new. 9. The girls = (He / She / They). 2. (He / She / His) name is Minh. 10. Is not = (isn’s / isn’t / ‘sn’t). 3. (Where / What / When) is that? 11. This is (my / I / me) mother. 4. This is (her / hers / she) house. 12. The children (live / lives / to live) in Viet Nam 5. Sang is (my / he / me) friend. 13. Is this (your / you / yours) pencil? 6. That (is / am / are) a book. 14. What is (her / she / I) name? 7. (His / Her / I) am a student. 8. How (do/ does/ are) you spell your name? 15. How are (your / I / you)? III. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch dưới: 1. It is a book. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My father is 46 years old. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I and Lan are in the classroom. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. No. This isn’t my bag. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We live in HCM city. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. She lives on Tran Phu street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Chọn từ thích hợp để điền vào chỗ trống: 1. _____________ are you? I’m in my classroom. a. How b. Where c. What d. Who 2. No, this isn’t _____________pencil. a. my b. I c. me d. it 3. Is this _____________pen? a. you b. your c. yours d. your’s 4. I live _____________a house. a. on b. in c. at d. to 5. Where _____________she live? a. do b. does c. is d. be 6. Is Peter _____________little brother? Trang 15

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 a. you b. yours c. your d. he 7. He lives _____________Khanh Hoi street. a. in b. on c. at d. to 8. She lives _____________215 HVT street. a. in b. on c. at d. from 9. How do you _____________your name? a. to spell b. spells c. spelling d. spell 10. Is this_____________ umbrella? Yes, it _____________. a. a / is b. an / are c. an / is d. X V. Tìm lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng: 1. Is that you teacher? A B C D ............................................................................................................ 2. It is an waste basket A B C D ............................................................................................................ 3. How are you spell it? A B C D ............................................................................................................ 4. What does your teacher live? A B C D ............................................................................................................ 5. I live on a house on Nguyen Hue street. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 6. Hello, my names ịs Laura Watson. I’m from Canada A B C D ............................................................................................................ VI. Sắp xếp câu theo trật tự đúng: 1. live / do / where / you ? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. not / is / this / book / my ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. book / your / open ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. lives / she / at / LTK /15/ street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Đọc đoạn văn rồi trả lời đúng (TRUE) hay sai (FALSE): Hi. My name is Tung. That is T-U-N-G. I’m twelve years old. My parents are doctors and my sister is a teacher. My school is Le Hong Phong school. It’s on Le Hong Phong Street. I’m in class 6B. I have many new friends here. They are nice and I love them. 1. His name is Tung. ............................................................................................................ 2. His father is a doctor. ............................................................................................................ 3. His brother is a teacher. ............................................................................................................ 4. His house is on Le Hong Phong street. ............................................................................................................ 5. He loves his new friends. ............................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Đánh trọng âm: morning. evening. afternoon. student. mother teacher. television, eraser, pencil, window. II. Đặt câu hỏi và trả lời với “What”: 1. That / eraser. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. This/pencil. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. That / window. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 16

Trang 18

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 3: AT HOME A. MY HOUSE (ngôi nhà của tôi)

I. GLOSSARY 1. Armchair : ghế bành 11. Table : cái bàn 2. Living room : phòng khách 12. Television : ti vi 3. Telephone : máy điện thoại 13. Stool : ghế đẩu 4. Lamp : đèn ngủ 14. Brother : anh / em trai 5. Bench : ghế dài 15. Sister : chị / em gái 6. Bookshelf : giá sách 16. Father : cha, bố 7. Bookcase : tủ sách 17. Mother : mẹ 8. Chair : ghế tựa 18. Family : gia đình 9. Couch : trường kỹ 19. Home : nhà 10. Stereo : máy nghe nhạc 20. Parents : bố mẹ II. GRAMMAR 1. PLURAL FORMS OF NOUN : Dạng danh từ số nhiều N + S / ES : danh từ số nhiều - Thêm “s” vào sau đa số các danh từ số ít Ex: a book -> books ; an armchair -> armchairs - Thêm “es” vào sau một số danh từ số ít có tận cùng là: a. Tận cùng bằng: -X, -S, -CH, -SH, -Z (GE). Ex: class -> classes ; box -> boxes watch -> watches ; dish -> dishes ; buzz -> buzzes b. Tận cùng bằng: Phụ âm + O -> thêm es Ex: tomato -> tomatoes ; potato -> potatoes * Note: photo -> photos ; piano -> pianos c. Tận cùng bằng: Phụ âm + Y, chuyển Y=I -> thêm es. Ex: baby -> babies ; city -> cities d. Tận cùng bằng: F hay FE, chuyển F, FE = F=v -> thêm es Ex: Bookshelf -> bookshelves; Knife -> Knives * Note: handkerchief -> handkerchiefs ; roof -> roofs * Danh sách các danh từ bất qui tắc: - Child -> children : trẻ con Man -> Men : đàn ông - Foot -> Feet : bàn chân Woman -> Women : đàn bà - Mouse -> Mice : chuột nhắt Tooth -> Teeth : răng - Person -> People : con người. * Cách phát âm danh từ số nhiều có đuôi “S/ES”. /s/ /iz/ /z/ th : mouths x : boxes còn lại t : cats s : classes pens k : books z : buzzes tables p : caps sh : dishes erasers f : roofs ch : churches chairs 2. HOW MANY: Bao nhiêu Q: How many + N (s/es) + are there + …? A: There is + a/an +N There are + số lượng + N (s/es) Ex: How many chairs are there in the living room? - There is a chair. How many books are there on the table? - There are two books. 3. HỎI VỀ ĐỒ VẬT Q : What + are + these / those ? A : They + are + N (s/es) + This -> these : những cái này + That -> Those : những cái kia Ex: - What are those? They're stools. Ex: - What are these? They’re armchairs. Trang 19

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

B. NUMBERS: (con sổ): HS học các số từ 20 -> 100 trong SGK.

THERE + IS/ ARE + N : CÓ

(+) There + is / are + N(s). (-) There + is / are + NOT + N(s). (?) Is / Are + there + N(s) ? -> Yes, there + is / are -> No, there + is / are + not What + is / are + there ...? : có gì Ex: - There is a book on the table. - There isn’t a book on the table. - Are there books on the table? - There aren’t rulers in the bag.

C. FAMILIES (gia đình)

I. GLOSSARY Noun 1. Doctor : bác sĩ 7. People : nhiều người 2. Engineer : kỹ sư 8. Yard : cái sân 3. Nurse : y tá 9. Secretary : thư ký 4. Dentist : nha sĩ 10. Journalist : phóng viên 5. Houssewife : nội trợ 11. Architect : kiến trúc sư 6. Worker : công nhân 12. Police officer : nhân viên cảnh sát II. GRAMMAR 1. QUERTION ABOUT JOB: Hỏi nghề Q: What + do/does +S + do? What + is/are + sở hữu + job? A: S + am / is / are + (a/am) + job. Ex: What do you do? / What is your job? / -> I am a student 2. HỎI VỀ NGƯỜI Q: Who’s this / that ? Ai này / Ai kia? A : It’s / That’s + N (người) Ex: - Who’s this? It’s Mr. Tam. - Who’s that? lt’s my mother. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Viết dạng số nhiều của các danh từ sau: Book School House Shelf Window Ruler Son Stereo Clock Boy Street Teacher Pencil knife Student parents Baby Park tomato eraser II. Xếp các danh từ số nhiều ở mục 1 vào các dòng sau theo cách phát âm: /iz/: ................................................................................................................................................................................................ /s/: ................................................................................................................................................................................................... /z/: ................................................................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ III. Đặt câu hỏi với “How many” rồi trả lời theo các gợi ý sau: 1. clock / your living room // 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Student / your classroom //48 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. couch / your house // 3 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 20

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. people / your family// 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. stereo / your room // 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Đặt câu hỏi với “What” rồi trả lời theo các gợi ý sau: 1. this // clock. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. those // lamp ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. that // house ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. these // stereo ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Xây dựng câu: 1. There / an apple / the table. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There / not / any clocks / the wall. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There / any students / the class / ? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There / any rivers / your country / ? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Đặt câu hỏi nghề bằng 2 cách rồi trả lời: 1. You / a student ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Your mother / a housewife. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Her brother / an engineer. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They / doctors. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Chuyển các câu sau sang dạng số nhiều: 1. That is a couch. ................................................................................................................................ 2. What’s this? It’s a stool. ................................................................................................................................ 3. Is this your ruler? No, it isn’t. ................................................................................................................................ 4. There is a book in Lan’s schoolbag. ................................................................................................................................ 5. It’s an eraser. ................................................................................................................................ VIII. Dùng đại từ nhân xưng để thay thế cho các từ gạch chân sau: 1. Thu and Lan are students. ................................................................................................................................ 2. My father and I are teachers. ................................................................................................................................ 3. My book is here. ................................................................................................................................ 4. His pencils are there. ................................................................................................................................ 5. Are you and Nam students? ................................................................................................................................ 6. Yes, my mother is a nurse. ................................................................................................................................ IX. Điền vào chỗ trống các “Sở hữu tính từ thích hợp”: 1. Who’s that? That's my sister. ___________ name is Xuân. 2. We are in ___________living room. 3. He’s a student. ___________name is Binh. Trang 21

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Are they Tom and Mary? No. ___________ names are Jane and John. 5. Are those your erasers? Yes, they are ___________ erasers. 6. Nam is here. That is ___________book. 7. I have a dog. ___________ears are beautiful. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Put the accent mark over the stress syllables: mother father family brother television sister parent table armchair bookshelf. II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence: 1. My family has five ______________. a. person b. persons c. people d. peoples 2. ______________students are there in your class? -> forty students. a. What b. How many c. Who d. Where 3. a. tomatoes b. potatoes c. couches d. pencils 4. a. parks b. parents c. tables d. lamps 5. How are you ? -> I’m fine. ______________ a. thanks b. thank you c. ok d. a and b 6. ______________close your book. a. Don’t b. Doesn’t c. is d. are 7. Where______________ you live? a. does b. do c. is d.am 8. What are______________? -> They are my books a. this b. those c. these d. b and c 9. What is this? -> ______________is an eraser a. they b. it c. that d. these 10. He has two ______________. a. children b. child c. childs d. a and c III. Choose the words or phrases that aren't correct in Standard English: 1. How many table are there in the room? A B C D ............................................................................................................ 2. There ịs ten tables ịn the room. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 3. What are those? -> They are stereo. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 4. There ịs a orange on the table. AB C D ............................................................................................................ 5. This is my new friend. She name ịs Lan. A B C D ............................................................................................................ IV. Reading: A. Fill in the blanks the correct words: Lan is a student. That is ______________ (1) family. There are ______________ (2) people in her family: her father, her mother, her sister, her brother and her. That is her father. He’s ______________ (3). He’s a doctor. ______________ (4) is her mother. She is thirty- five. She’s a nurse. Her brother is fifteen. Her sister is six. ______________ (5) are students. 1. a. his b. her c. my d. your 2. a. four b. five c. six d. seven 3. a. fourteen b. forteen c. fourty d. forty 4. a. That b. Those c. These d. There 5. a. He b. She c. They d. There B. Read the paragraph then choose True or False: Hello. I’m Hung. I’m a student in Truong Chinh Junior high school. My school is on Truong Chinh street. It’s big and nice. It has four floors. My class is on the first floor. I’m in grade 6. My class is 6/5. There are forty students in my class. Trang 22

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. He is a teacher in Truong Chinh Junior High school ........................................................................................... 2. His school is on Truong Chinh street. ........................................................................................... 3. It isn’t big. ........................................................................................... 4. He is in class 6/5. ........................................................................................... 5. There are four students in his class. ........................................................................................... V. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: 1. Mary's dress (be) ______________new. 2. These (be) ______________her black shoes. 3. Your book (be) ______________black? 4. How many teachers there (be) ______________ in your school? 5. There (not be) ______________ many students in the class. 6. There (be) ______________ one hat on the chair? 7. What those (be) ______________? -> They (be) ______________my books. 8. Where they (live) ______________? VI. Make questions for the underlined words: 1. I live on Le Thanh Ton street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There is a clock on the wall. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My parents are in the living room. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Mr. and Mrs. Tam are nurses. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. There are twenty students in my class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. My father’s job is a teacher. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 1

I. Nhấn trọng âm vào các từ sau: open address classmate children morning evening question brother country student. II. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất: 1. How many ______________are there in the kitchen? a. tomato b. tomatoes c. potatos d. a potato 2. How are you? ______________ fine, thanks. a. I’m b. We’re c. I d. a and b 3. Where ______________Miss. Lan live? a. does b. is c. do d. are 4. He is in the living room with______________ mother. a. her b. she c. his d. he 5. I live ______________ CMT8 street. a. in b. on c. at d. with 6. What are these? -> ______________ are my pencils. a. Those b. These c. They d. b and c 7. What is this? -> It’s______________ eraser. a. the b. a c. an d. X 8. Mary and I ______________at school. a. are b. am c. is d. a and b 9. How many books are there ______________ the table? a. in b. at c. on d. with 10. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác: a. sisters b. televisions c. parents d. chairs III. Viết dạng số nhiều của danh từ, rồi xếp vào 3 hàng sau theo cách phát âm: Trang 23

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 Table Desk Wife Man – Engineer Bench Child Lady – Brother Person Bus Doctor – Pen Family Shoe Potato /iz/ : ............................................................................................................................................................................................ /s/ : ............................................................................................................................................................................................ /z/ : ........................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Tìm lỗi sai rồi sửa lại cho đúng: 1. Where do your family live. Khoa? A B C D ............................................................................................................ 2. What is this? -> It is a eraser. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 3. There are three mouses in the kitchen. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 4. This is my brother. Her name ịs Minh. A B C D ............................................................................................................ 5. How many people ịs there in your family? A B C D ............................................................................................................ V. Chọn từ thích hợp để điền vào chỗ trống: Nam and I ______________ (1) best friends. His house is near ______________ (2) house. His family has five ______________ (3): his father, his mother, two sisters ______________ (4) him. They are very kind. We study in the same school. ______________ (5) school is big. It is near our house so we usually walk to ______________ (6) together. 1. a. is b. are c. am d. does 2. a. he b. her c. I d. my 3. a. person b. persons c. people d. b and c 4. a. and b. but c. so d. X 5. a. we b. our c. his d. her 6. a. house b. class c. school d. home VI. Chia các động từ ở trong ngoặc: 1. They (not be) ______________doctors. 2. There (be) ______________ two lights on the ceiling? 3. These (be) ______________your books? -> Yes, they (be) ______________my books. 4. Where your house (be) ______________? 5. How many couches there (be) ______________ in the living room? -> There (be) ______________ one. 6. What he (do) ______________? He (be) ______________a businessman. 7. Where you (live) ______________? I (live) ______________ in Ha Noi. 8. Those (be) ______________ her friends. They (be) ______________ nice. 9. Who that (be) ______________? 10. There (be) ______________ a ruler on the table? -> Yes, there (be) ______________. VII. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân: 1. I am very well, thanks. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Her name is Thu ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. He's a doctor. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There are twelve chairs in the class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I’m in grade 6. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 24

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 6. It’s Mr. Vien. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

I. Match the sentences in column A with those in column B: A B 1. Where do you live? a. Yes, she is 2. How many floors are there in your school? b. In Tan Binh district. 3. What does your father do? c. There are three floors 4. Is she a nurse? d. He is ten years old. 5. How old is Minh? e. He is a farmer. 1. ______________2. ______________ 3.______________4. ______________5. ______________ II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence: 1. I am Nam. This is ______________family. a. I b. my c. me d. we 2. That is my book. ______________are your books. a. This b. That c. Those d. These 3. They are students. That is ______________ school. a. his b. her c. my d. their 4. He is ______________ engineer. a. a b. an c. these d. those 5. ______________is her brother? a. Who b. How many c. There d. This 6. They are ______________. a. bench b. stool c. armchairs d. eraser 7. I live ______________Singapore. a. in b. at c. on d. X 8. What are______________? a. this b. these c. that d. there 9. My father is ______________good teacher. a. the b. an c. a d. X 10. This is my mother. She is a teacher, ______________. a. also b. both c. and d. too III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: 1. Long (be) ______________a student. 2. There (be) ______________many tall trees in the park? 3. Minh, this (be) ______________my best friend, Toan. 4. Hoa (not be) ______________fine. 5. He (live) ______________in an old house. 6. My school (be) ______________ big. 7. We (be) ______________ at school. 8. Her dogs (be) ______________ lovely. 9. Where she (live) ______________? -> She (live) ______________at 35/2, Truong Chinh street. 10. How you (spell) ______________your name? 11. Where your parents (live) ______________? 12. What your father (do) ______________? IV. Arrange the following sentences: 1. we / HN / in / live / in / Ba Trieu street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. are / windows / in / there / my / room / two. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. how / the / chairs / are / many / there / in / bedroom? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 25

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. the / they’re / class / in. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Choose the best answer fits each blank in the passage: and an She in are is Ngoc Thao is my friend. ______________ (1) is in grade 6. She doesn’t live ______________ (2) the city. She lives in the country. There ______________ (3) five people in her family. They are: her grandmother, her parents, her brother ______________ (4) her. Her grandmother and parents are farmers. Her brother is ______________ (5) engineer. They are very friendly. VI. Answer the questions about you: 1. What does your sister do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Where does your family live? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. How many people are there in your family? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How is your school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Are you a student? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Use the given words to complete meaningful sentences: 1. How / you / spell / name? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How many students / there / your class? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There / forty-two / student / my class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Where / your friend / live? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He / live / 50, CMT8 street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. What / your brother / sister / do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Nối những câu ở cột A với những câu ở cột B: A B 1. What does your mother do? a. No, there isn’t. 2. How many pens are there in your bag? b. on Nguyen Hue street. 3. ls there any juice in the refrigerator? c. She’s a nurse. 4. Where do they live? D. Five pens. 5. How is your school? e. It’s very big. 1. ______________2. ______________ 3.______________4. ______________5. ______________ II. Chọn từ thích hợp nhất: 1. That is my sister. ______________ name’s Lan. a. She b. Her c. His d. My 2. ______________people are there in your family? - Four. a. How b. How many c. What d. How much 3. ______________that? It’s Miss Lien. a. What b. What’s c. Who d. Who’s 4. ______________is her job? - She is a doctor. a. What b. Who c. How d. Where 5. This is Mr. John Pike. He's ______________engineer. a. the b. a c. an d. one Trang 26

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 6. How many desks ______________in the classroom? a. they are b. are they c. there are d. are there 7. We are here. We are ______________ the yard. a. in b. on c. at d. out s. What does he ______________? — He’s a student. a. spell b. do c. be d. go 9. What ______________that? a. are b. is c. do d. does 10. What ______________? She’s a teacher. a. do she b. does she c. do she do d. does she do III. Đọc đoạn văn rồi chọn True (đúng) or False (sai): I’m Hoang. This is my house. It’s in the country. It isn’t big. It has five rooms: a living room, two bedrooms, a bathroom and a kitchen. There is a television, a table, a couch, an armchair and a stereo in the living room. I usually watch TV here in the evening. 1. His house isn’t in the city. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2 It’s big? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There is a bedroom in his house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. In the bathroom, there is a stereo. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He usually watches TV in the morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Chia động từ trong ngoặc: 1. They (be) ______________my friends. 2. My mother (be not) ______________forty years old. 3. Their house (be) ______________in the city. 4. The cookies (be) ______________delicious? 5. His parents (be) ______________ doctors? 6. There (not be) ______________ any water in the bottle. 7. There (be) ______________a television in the living room. 8. What this (be) ______________? 9. How old your father (be) ______________? 10. He (live) ______________in HCM city. V. Sắp xếp lại các từ sau thành câu hoàn chỉnh: 1. mother / this / my / is. Her / is / name / Mai. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. your / father / garden / the / in / is /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. not / her / those / rulers / are. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. does / what / your / do / father /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Thêm từ để thành câu hoàn chỉnh: 1. What / her friends / do /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There / a table / the kitchen. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. He / live /55 Banh Van Tran street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How many / teacher / be / there / your school /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân: Trang 27

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. They are students. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There is 1 couch in the classroom. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They are erasers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. T-U-N-G. Tung ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Trả lời câu hỏi về bản thân: 1. How old is your father? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How many rooms arc there in your house? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What does your sister do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Are there any tables in your house? .......................................................................................................................................................................................................

UNIT 4: BIG OR SMALL

A. WHERE IS YOUR HOUSE? I. CLOSSARY

1. city 2. country

Noun : thành phố : miền quê, quốc gia Adjective : to, lớn

4. small

: nhỏ, bé

5. In the country : ở miền quê 6. In the city : ở thành phố

3. Big II. GRAMMAR 1. POSESSIVE CASE (sở hữu cách) N1 of N2 = N2 ‘s N1 - N1: Vật sở hữu. N2: Chủ sở hữu. Ex The school of Phong = Phong’s school The friends of Mary = Mary’s friends - Nếu N2 là danh từ số nhiều tận cùng là s, es, ta chỉ cần đặt dấu ’ sau danh từ đó. Ex: They are boys’ pens. The babies’ hands. 2. QUESTION WITH “OR” ( hoặc, hay là ) Q: Tobe + S + O1 + Or + O2? A: S + tobe + O1 / O2 - Đây là dạng câu hỏi lựa chọn, ta không trả lời Yes, No. Ex: Q: Is your country big or small? A: It’s big. 3. Để hỏi về số lượng với động từ “TO HAVE” HOW MANY + N(s/es) + do/does + S + have? -» S + have / has + số lượng + N(e/es). Ex: How many students does your school have? -» My school / It has 400 students. How many boxes do you have? -» I have eight boxes. * Note: - Khi S là I, you, we, they, danh từ số nhiều : ta mượn trợ động từ “do” // have. - Khi S là he, she, it, danh từ số ít : ta mượn trợ động từ “does" // has.

B. MY CLASS I. GLOSSARY Noun Trang 28

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. Grade : cấp lớp, khối lớp 2. Floor : tầng (nhà) 3. Village : ngôi làng II. GRAMMAR 1. POSITION OF ADJECTIVES: Vị trí cùa tính từ - Có 2 vị trí của tính từ: ❖ Sau TOBE: S + to be + adj . Ex: The village is small. = ................................................................................. That yard is big. = .................................................................................. ❖ Trước danh từ:

He’s / She’s / It’s +a/an + adj + N. They are + adj + N (s/es). Ex: It’s a small school. = ................................................................................ They are beautiful girls. = ...................................................................................... 2. ORDINAL NUMBERS: số thứ tự ❖ Thông thường: SỐ ĐẾM + th -» SỐ THỨ TỰ Four -» Fourth (4th) ❖ Đặc biệt: One (1) -» First (1st) Two (2) -» Second (2nd) Three (3) -» Third (3rd) ❖ Ngoại lệ: Các số tận cùng bằng: 1. -e -» bỏ e + th : Nine -» ninth (9th) 2. -ve -» f + th : Five -» fifth (5th) 3. -y -» ie + th : Forty -» fortieth (40th) 4. -t -» + h : Eight -» eighth (8th) - Số đếm nào có 2 chữ số thì ta đổi chữ số sau. Ex: Twenty-one -» twenty-first (21st) Seventy-four -» seventy-fourth (74th) - Dùng số thứ tự cho xếp hạng, sinh nhật, ngày thứ. Ex: My classroom is on the first floor. April 26th, 2008 3. QUESTION WITH “Which grade / class”: Hỏi khối/ lớp Q: Which + grade/ class + be + S + in? A: S + be + in + grade ... / class.... Ex: Which grade are you in? I’m in grade 6. Which class is she in? She’s in class 6B.

C. GETTING READY FOR SCHOOL I. GLOSSARY

1. Breakfast 2. Face 3. Tooth -» teeth 4. Time

Noun : bữa ăn sáng : khuôn mặt : răng : thời gian Adjective : cao : ngắn, thấp : dài : cũ, già : muộn, trễ : mỗi, mọi

Verb 11. Brush 12. Do 13. Go 14.Wash 15. Get dressed 16. Get ready 17. Get up Expression 18. Have breakfast 19. Go to school 20. Be late for school

: đánh / chải răng : làm : đi : rửa : mặc quần áo : chuẩn bị sẵn sàng : thức dậy

5. Tall 6. Short 7. Long 8. Old : ăn điểm tâm 9. Late : đi học 10. Every (det) : trễ học II. GRAMMAR THE SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE: thì hiện tại đơn - Diễn tả một thói quen hàng ngày hay một việc làm ở hiện tại hay một sự thật.

Trang 29

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 - Thường có các trạng từ đi kèm như: every (day, week, month), always (luôn luôn), usually (thường thường), often (thường), sometimes (thỉnh thoảng), never (không bao giờ)... (+) Snhiều + V1 + O…. Positive (khẳng định) S(3)ít + Ve/es + O…. (-) Snhiều + do not/don’t + V1 + O ... Negative (phủ định) S(3)ít + does not / doesn’t + V1 + O... (?) Do / Does + S + V1 + O ...? -» Yes, S + do / does. Question (nghi vấn) -» No, S + do / does + not. (?) Wh- + do/does + S + V1 ...? * Note: - Khi chủ ngữ là I, you, we, they, danh từ số nhiều : động từ giữ nguyên mẫu (V1). - Khi chủ ngữ là he, she, it, danh từ số ít : động từ phải thêm s / es (Ve/es). Ex: (+) I go to school. She goes to school. (-) I don't go to school. She doesn’t go to school. (?) Do you go to school? -» Yes, I do Does she go to school? -» No, she doesn’t (?) Where do you go every morning? --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Use possessive case. 1. She’s the aunt of Huy. ............................................................................................................ 2. They’re the students of Mr. Binh. ............................................................................................................ 3. He’s the teacher of John. ............................................................................................................ 4. These arc the pens of Mary. ............................................................................................................ 5. Those are the schoolbags of the students ............................................................................................................ 6. These are the balls of the boys. ............................................................................................................ 7. This is Nga. This is her class. ............................................................................................................ 8. This is Minh. This is his book. ............................................................................................................ II. Make questions and answer with “OR”. 1. The book/ thin,7 thick /? // thick. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Your school/ big/ small /? // big. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The flowers/ red /yellow /? // red. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Her glasses/ black/ white/? // white. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. His hair/ long/ short/? // short. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Their chairs/ new/ old/? // new. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. They/ fat/ thin/? // thin. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. He/ strong/ weak/? // strong. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Use “HAVE/ HAS" to rewrite these sentences. 1. He/ three erasers. ..................................................................................................................................... 2. They/ four children. ..................................................................................................................................... Trang 30

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 3. Her mother/ a lot of dresses. ..................................................................................................................................... 4. His younger brother/ a bike. ..................................................................................................................................... 5. She/ a computer. ..................................................................................................................................... 6. The students/ a picnic. ..................................................................................................................................... 7. I/ a happy day. ..................................................................................................................................... 8. Lan/ a lovely cat. ..................................................................................................................................... 9. You/ some messages. ..................................................................................................................................... IV. Make questions and answer with “How many...have?”. 1. Students/ your class/ have/? // thirty-five. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Floors/ these buildings/ have/? //ten. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. People/ your family/ have/? // four. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Chairs/ the rooms/ have/? // twelve. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Children/ Ms. Nga/ have/? // two. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Pens/ Mary/ have/? // eight. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Dolls/ her daughter/ have/? // three. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Teachers/ your school/ have/? // sixty. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V- Use two ways to complete these sentences 1. The windows / big. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 2. The eraser/ small. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 3. The bookshelves/ old. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 4. The television/big. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 5. The desks / small. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 6. The car/ new. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 7. The boys/ thin. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 8. Nam / kind. ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 9. Mary / tall ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ 10. Jacky/ handsome ............................................................................................. = ................................................................................................ VI. Ordinal numbers. Trang 31

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. 1st ........................................................................................ 7. 2nd......................................................................................... 2. 9th ....................................................................................... 8. 25th ....................................................................................... 3. 10th ..................................................................................... 9. 8th ......................................................................................... 4. 20th ..................................................................................... 10. 50th .................................................................................... 5. 23rd..................................................................................... 11. 41st .................................................................................... 6. 5th ....................................................................................... 12. 3rd ...................................................................................... VII. Make questions then answer “which grade/ class". 1. Grade/ you? // 6 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Class/ she? // 3A ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Grade/ he? // 7 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Class/ they? // 83 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Grade/ Huy? // 9 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Class/ you and Minh? // 67 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Present simple tense. A. Positive. 1. They (live) ____________on the 11th floor. 2. Minh (do) ____________ his home work. 3. I (read) ____________a newspaper. 4. Dick’s brother (listen) ____________to music after school. 5. His sister (watch) ____________TV every evening. 6. The children (wash) ____________ their dishes after meal. 7. The student (study) ____________ English at school. 8. Hoa (go) ____________ to school by bus every day. 9. The baby (cry) ____________in the evening 10. The radio (work) ____________ very well. B. Negative. 1. They (not work) ____________ in the factory. 2. I (not watch) ____________ TV in the morning. 3. My parents (not go) ____________ to the zoo. 4. Lan (not have) ____________her breakfast at 7 o’clock. 5. Mary (not wash ) ____________ the dishes in the evening. 6. He (not play) ____________ soccer in the evening. 7. Nam and Binh (not do) ____________ their homework. 8. We (noi brush) ____________ our teeth three times a day. C. Interrogative. 1. You often (do) ____________your homework in the evening? 2. Thanh and Mai usually (see) ____________ a movie every Sunday? 3. Nam’s sister often (go) ____________to the zoo? 4. Miss. Nga (have) ____________on CMT8 street? 5. His younger sister (like) ____________ cats? 6. You (play) ____________ tennis every day? 7. He (work) ____________ every day? 8. They (wash) ____________their clothes every morning? 9. Where you (live) ____________? 10. How you (spell) ____________your name? IX. Change these sentences into (-) and (?). 1. Thao lives in HCM City. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 32

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My parents go to work at seven ever morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My sister watches TV every night. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My school has three floors. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We live on NQ Street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... X. Make question for the underlined words. 1. Mai lives on Tran Phu street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My family has four people. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My sisters are in grade 10. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Her father is an engineer. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... XI. Rewrite the sentences with the same meaning. 1. There are forty students in his class. His class has ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2. How many students are there in your class? How many students does ................................................................................................................................................... 3. The flowers are yellow. They’re ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What do you do? What’s......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Are there five pencils in her bag? Does she have ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6. How many people does your family have? How many books .................................................................................................................................................................. 7. The girl is beautiful. She’s a ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. My school has five floors. There are ................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. city country village breakfast armchair bookshelf doctor family II. Choose the best word or phrase that best completes each sentence. 1. There ____________four people in our family. a. is b. has c. are d. have 2. Nguyet lives ____________55 CMT8 street. a. on b. at c. to d. in 3. ____________? His flat is on the fourth floor. a. Where's Tom’s flat? b. Where are Tom’s flat? c. Is Tom’s flat on the fourth floor? d. Where does Tom live? 4. Where do you____________? In Hanoi. a. get b. live c. go d. take

ready people.

Trang 33

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 5. ____________your school big or small? a. Are b. Do c. Is d. Does 6. ____________ there any books on the table? a. Are b. Is c. Do d. Does 7. Mary’s school has____________ floors. a. second b. two c. third d. fourth 8. Are Mr. and Mrs. Long doctors or workers? a. worker b. workers c. engineer d. doctor 9. ____________40 students in her class. a. This are b. What are c. Where are d. There are 10. Is your house’s yard big? ____________. a. Yes, they are. b. No, you aren’t. c. No, it is d. Yes, it is. III. Supply the correct form of verbs. 1. There (be) ____________an apple on the table. 2. Your brother (be) ____________ a doctor or a dentist? 3. Where you (live) ____________? 4. He (live) ____________ in Hai Phong. 5. How you (spell) ____________your name? IV. Read these paragraphs. A. Cloze test This is Hoa. She is my classmate. She (1) ____________twelve years old. (2) ____________is a student. She lives in a big city. She is (3) ____________ Grade 6. She gets up (4) ____________ 6 every morning. She washes (5) ____________face at 6.10. She has breakfast at 6.15. She goes (6) ____________school at 6.30. 1. a. are b. is c. has d. am 2. a. he b. they c. she d. her 3. a. in b. on c. up d. at 4. a. on b. at c. up d. of 5. a. his b. him c. her d. hers 6. a. into b. for c. from d. to B. Read the paragraph then answer True or False. Mr. Long is a teacher. He teaches at Le Loi high school. The school is far from his house, so he always travels to work by bus early in the morning. His class starts at 7.00. In the school, there is a small canteen and Mr. Long has his lunch there. He rests for about an hour then he continues to teach in the afternoon at 1:30. There are about forty students. Mr. Long loves them very much. 1. He travels to work by car. ......................................................... 2. His class begins at 7.00. ......................................................... 3. He breaks for about an hour. ......................................................... 4. He has lunch at home. ......................................................... V. Choose the best words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. Is your father a engineer? Yes, he is. A B C D ......................................................... 2. My house are small. A B C D ......................................................... 3. Mai brothers are doctors in the hospital. A B C D ......................................................... 4. That is my friend book. A B C D ......................................................... 5. Does he tall or short? A B C D ......................................................... VI. Use the given words to complete meaningful sentences. 1. Which class / be / your sisters / in? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Minh's class / not be / the first floor. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 34

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 3. There / be / four / floor / your school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How many / book / be / there / your bag? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Your parents / be / teachers / doctors? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Make questions with the underlined words. 1. Yes. it is. It is an umbrella. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam’s classroom has forty students. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I live in HCM City. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My father is a teacher. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No. He isn’t a doctor. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOME WORK 1

I. Use possessive case. 1. She’s the sister of Huong. .......................................................................................................................... 2. Those are the pens of John. .......................................................................................................................... 3. These are the robots of the boys. .......................................................................................................................... 4. This is Binh. This is his schoolbag .......................................................................................................................... II. Make questions and answer with “OR”. 1. the dress/ long/ short/? // long ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. your house/ new/ old/? // new ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. the chair/ black/ gray/? // black ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. the books/ interesting/ boring//? // interesting ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Make questions then answer with “HOW MANY”. 1. Students / his class/ have/? // forty ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. teachers / your school/ have/? // fifty ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. dresses / she/ have/? // four ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. couches / Minh,' ha ve/? // three ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. She lives in HCM city. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Minh works in the factory. Trang 35

EXERCISE 2

I. Choose the words or phrases that best fit the space in each sentence. 1. Her sister ____________her face at six o’ clock. a. is wash b. wash’s c. wash d. washes 2. Her father works in ____________hospital. a. these b. an c. X d. a 3. ____________ Loan’s school big or small? a. are b. is c. do d. does 4. We are late ____________school. a. in b. at c. to d. for 5. Mary’s classroom is on the____________ floor. a. second b. two c. four d. three 6. It’s ____________ ruler. a. Nam b. Nam’s c. of Nam d. Nams’ 7. He washes his face then he ____________ breakfast. a. does b. have c. is d. has 8. What’s the time? -» It is ____________. a. ten ten b. right time c. late d. ten to fifty 9. I live ____________Ha Noi. a. on b. in c. at d. of 10. I’m Nhi. This is ____________sister. a. her b. my c. his d. mine II. Use the correct form of the verbs in the bracket. 1. They (brush) ____________their teeth three times a day. 2. I (noi have) ____________ a coin. 3. Where she (live) ____________? 4. How you (spell) ____________ your name? 5. Mai (live) ____________ on Nguyen Trai street. 6. My mother (get) ____________ up at 5 o’clock. 7. How many classrooms your school (have) ____________? 8. What your mother (do) ____________? 9. She (wash) ____________ her hands before meals. 10. His wife (not write) ____________ the book in the evening. III. Read these paragraphs. A. Cloze test. Hi. My name is Hoa. I'm a student. I’m in grade 6. (1) ____________ is ray school. It’s big and it’s (2) ____________the city. My school (3) ____________ four floors and my classroom is (4) ____________the second floor. There (5) ____________ twenty classrooms in my school. And there are nine hundred students in my school. 1. a. this b. there c. those d. these 2. a. on b. in c. up d. at 3. a. have b. get c. gets d. has 4. a. on b. in c. up d. at 5. a. is b. are c. has d. have B. Choose true or false. Thu Phuong is a student of Chu Van An school. She is twelve. She is in grade 6, class 6B. Her school is very big in Hai Phong. It has five floors with over 30 classrooms. There are forty-five students in each Trang 36

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 class. Phuong’s classroom is on the third floor. It’s a big, clean and bright room. It has two doors and four windows. Phuong loves her school very much. 1. Phuong is 13. ......................................................... 2. Her school is not big. ......................................................... 3. Each class has forty-five students. ......................................................... 4. Her classroom is on the third floor. ......................................................... IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. She lives in HCM City. ............................................................................................................................. 2. They are in the living room. ............................................................................................................................. 3. There are six rulers in her bag. ............................................................................................................................. 4. There arc two books on the table. ............................................................................................................................. 5. No. She is a teacher. ............................................................................................................................. 6. They have 3 apples. ............................................................................................................................. V. Arrange these sentences. 1. Hoa / with / her grandparents / lives / Ho Chi Minh City / in /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. do / you / How many / your family / have / and / rooms /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. on / is / two books / There / a pencil / and / the table /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. in the city / you / live / in / Do / or / the country/? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. the first / Her class / on / floor / is /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct ỉn Standard English. 1. Do your shoes big or small? A B C D ......................................................... 2. My school have three floors. A B C D ......................................................... 3. What is his brother name? A B C D ......................................................... 4. How many floor does it have? A B C D ......................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Positive. 1. Every day, Nga (have) ____________ breakfast at six o’clock. 2. Minh (get) ____________dressed and (wash) ____________his face. 3. My sister and I often (play) ____________volleyball in the evening. 4. I (like) ____________music. 5. He (brush) ____________his teeth every night. 6. They (clean) ____________ the table after meals. 7. Minh (get) ____________ up at 6 o’clock. 8. They (do) ____________ their homework every day. 9. She (watch) ____________ TV every day. 10. These (be) ____________ my dogs. II. Negative. 1. She (not like) ____________ any candy. 2. My baby sister (not drink) ____________ much milk. 3. Their children (not go) ____________ to Ha Noi with them. 4. They (not be) ____________ here. 5. They (not go) ____________to school on Sunday. 6. Her brother (not brush) ____________ his teeth in the evening. 7. Binh and Thu (not walk) ____________to school. Trang 37

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 8. My mother (not have) ____________ any pens in the kitchen. 9. Mr. and Mrs. White (not work) ____________ in the hospital. 10. Minh’s sisters (not eat) ____________ pizza. III. Interrogative. 1. You (play) ____________soccer in the morning? 2. She (do) ____________her home work every day? 3. Mary (get) ____________ up at 5.30? 4. What time you and your mom (get) ____________up? 5. How many rooms your house (have) ____________? 6. You (wash) ____________your hair every day? 7. Her grandparents (live) ____________ in Nha Trang? 8. Where your friends (live) ____________? 9. How you (spell) ____________ your name? 10. Your father (be) ____________a worker or an engineer? IV. Read and choose the correct words to fit in each sentence. Phong is a student. He’s in (1) ____________. His school is (2) ____________the country. It’s small (3) ____________ old. There (4) ____________ eight classrooms. There are four hundred (5) ____________ in the school. It has many tall tresses. 1. a. class b. grade c. school d. X 2. a. in b. on c. at d. of 3. a. but b. so c. and d. because 4. a. has b. have c. is d. are 5. a. teacher b. teachers c. student d. student --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 38

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 5: THINGS I DO A. MY DAY (Ngày của tôi)

I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Day : ngày, ban ngày 6. Game : trò chơi 2. Home work : bài tập về nhà 7. Housework : công việc nhà 3. Music : âm nhạc 8. Soccer : bóng đá 4. Volleyball : bóng chuyền 9. Girl : cô gái, con gái 5. Sport : thể thao VERB 10. Play : chơi 13. Watch : xem 11. Listen : lắng nghe 14. Read : đọc 12. After (adv) : sau, tiếp sau II. GRAMMAR. The simple present tense of ordinary verbs (Thì hiện tại đơn của động từ thường) Every + N(số ít): mỗi, mọi - “Every” đứng trước danh từ số ít, động từ đi sau nó luôn ở dạng sổ ít. Ex: every student : mỗi sinh viên everyone = everybody : mọi người everything : mọi thứ Ex: Don’t worry. Everything is all right.

B. MY ROUTINE (Việc làm thường ngày của tôi)

I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Routine : công việc thường ngày 5. Shower : vòi sen 2. Quarter : mười lăm phút 6. Half : một nửa, 30 phút 3. Lunch : bữa trưa 7. Dinner : bửa tối 4. Bed : cái giường VERB 8. Eat : ăn 11. From (prep) : từ 9. Start / begin : bắt đầu 12.To (prep) : tới, đến 10. End / finish : kết thúc II. GRAMMAR. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME (Giới từ chỉ thời gian) ❖ At + giờ Ex: I have class at one o’clock. + một điểm thời gian cụ thể. Ex: at Christmas, at lunchtime. at noon, at weekend. ❖ On + ngày trong tuần. Ex: I have class on Monday. + ngày tháng năm Ex: I was bom on October 31st, 1975. ❖ In: tháng, năm, mùa cụ thể Ex: My birthday is in October và các buổi trong ngày We play football in the afternoon. (- buổi tối: at night) ❖ From ... to Ex: The bank opens from 7a.m to 4.30 p.m.

C. CLASSES (Các giờ học) I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Timetable 2. Today 3. Subject 4. English 5. Geography 6. Literature 7. History

: thời khóa biểu : hôm nay : môn học : tiếng Anh : địa lý : văn học : lịch sử

11. Store VERB 12. Help 13. Wear 14. Walk 15.Leave 16. Go to bed

: cửa hiệu, tiệm : giúp đỡ : mang, mặc, đội : đi bộ : rời khỏi : đi ngủ Trang 39

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 8. Math : toán 17. Go home : về nhà 9. Class : buổi học, tiết học 18. Take a shower : tắm vòi sen 10. Thing : vật, đồ vật II. GRAMMAR. * Days of the week (Ngày trong tuần) - Monday : Thứ hai - Tuesday : Thứ ba - Wednesday : Thứ tư - Thursday : Thứ năm - Friday : Thứ sáu - Saturday : Thứ bảy - Sunday : Chủ nhật * Saying the time: (nói giờ) Q: What time is it? / What’s the time? A: It’s + giờ. 1. Giờ chẵn: It’s + giờ + O'clock. Ex: (10:00) It’s ten o’clock. 2. Giờ lẻ: Có 2 cách ❖ Giờ - phút: It’s + giờ + phút. Ex: (5:20) It’s five twenty. ❖ Phút - giờ: * Giờ hơn. It’s + phút + past + giờ + Số phút từ 1 - 30: Ex: (11:10) It's ten past eleven. * Giờ kém. It’s + phút + to + giờ + Số phút từ 31 - 59: Ex: (6:50) It’s ten to seven. * Note: - 15 phút: fifteen /a quarter - 30phút: thirty /half past - a.m: từ 1 giờ sáng đến trước 12 giờ trưa. Ex: It’s two ten a.m - p.m: sau 12 giờ trưa đến 0 giờ sáng. Ex: It’s six twenty p.m --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Fill in the blanks with the right preposition. 1. I listen _________music every night. 2. They have English _________Mondays. 3. My house is _________Le Loi Street. 4. My parents have lunch _________half past eleven. 5. The book is _________the bookshelf. 6. I have classes_________ seven_________ a quarter to twelve. 7. We usually go swimming _________the summer. 8. He is late _________school. II. Say the time with two ways. 1. 2h00 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... 2. 10h15 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... 3. 8h30 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... 4. 9h45 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... 5. 3h10 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... 6. 7h20 ........................................................................ ................................................................................... III. Use the correct form of the verbs in the bracket. Trang 40

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. He (stay) _________here with my student. 7. You (be) _________a doctor? 2. Mr. Nam (be) _________ at work. 8. How Loan (work) _________? 3. Minh (not be) _________a doctor. 9. They (go) _________to school every day. 4. This (be) _________ a board? 10. What he (do) _________? 5. Sally (live) _________in the USA. 11. She (have) _________ a doll. 6. What your friends (do) _________ 12. Where your friends (be) _________? --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. music listen soccer housework routine dinner quarter begin finish preposition. II. Choose the best word or phrase that best completes each sentence. 1. I listen _________music. a. to b. in c. on d. of 2. He _________ breakfast at six o’clock. a. has b. have c. eats d. a & c 3. Do_________ play game? a. she b. her c. you d. he 4. Does she play soccer? No, she _________. a. does b. doesn’t c. do d. don’t 5. _________ time does she have lunch? a. when b. where c. how d. what 6. What _________ you do after school? a. do b. are c. is d. does 7. I _________to school at a quarter past seven. a. am b. are c. go d. goes 8. He doesn’t have _________timetable. a. her b. his c. my d. our 9. _________do they have history? a. what b. where c. who d. when 10. What does she_________ after school? a. does b. do c. doing d. did III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. When does we have Math? A B C D .......................................................................... 2. We have it in Thursday and Friday. A B C D .......................................................................... 3. She don’t have her timetable. A B C D .......................................................................... 4. They plays games every evening. A B C D .......................................................................... 5. She do her homework every day. A B C D .......................................................................... IV. Use the correct form of the verbs in the bracket. 1. There (be) _________ 20 boys in my class. 2. Everyone (like) _________them. 3. (Stand) _________up and (read) _________this, please. 4. Who your best friend (be) _________? 5. Where your parents (live) _________? 6. They (not go) _________to school on Sundays. 7. Mr. Tan (work) _________on weekends? 8. (Not stand) _________up. (Sit) _________ down. 9. There (be) _________ a pen in the schoolbag? 10. He (do) _________ his homework after dinner. Trang 41

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 V. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. Cloze test Hi. I’m Ba. I get up at six. I take a shower. Then I eat a big breakfast. I go to school (1) _________ a quarter to seven. I have (2) _________ from seven to a quarter past eleven. At half past eleven. I have lunch. (3) _________ the afternoon, I play games. I go home at five o’clock. In the evening, I (4) _________television. I do my homework. I go (5) _________bed at ten o’clock. 1. a. in b. at c. on d. for 2. a. classrooms b. classes c. schools d. floors 3. a. in b. at c. on d. X 4. a. listen b. play c. watch d. get 5. a. to b. for c. from d. X B. Read then answer True or False. Hello. My name’s Thuy. I’m twelve and I’m a student. I have a brother, Minh. He’s 20. Our house is near a lake. It has a yard. It's a beautiful house. There is a hotel near the lake. There is a park near the hotel. There are trees and flowers in the park. There is a rice paddy near our house. 1. Thuy is twenty years old. .......................................................................... 2. She is a student. .......................................................................... 3. She has a sister. .......................................................................... 4. Her house is near a lake. .......................................................................... VI. Write. A. Make questions with the underlined words. 1. Ms. Nga is a nurse. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I have lunch with my friends. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The school has 40 rooms. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They have music on Friday. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Their cats are in the yard. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Arrange these sentences. 1. to / My brother / often / and I / the school / go / every morning / . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How many teachers / in / there / your school / are /? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Your house / big / Is / small / or /? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. in / My class / the / is / floor / first / . ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. homework music volleyball listen soccer routine quarter shower II. Choose the words or phrases that best fit the space in each sentence. 1. When_________ you have English? a. do b. does c. are 2. Do you _________ your teeth after each meal? a. wash b. brush c. washes 3. We have literature _________ Monday and Wednesday. a. in b. on c. at 4. Do you like music? - _________. a. Yes, I do b. No, I don’t c. Yes, I don’t

after begin. d. is d. brushes d. of d. a & b Trang 42

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 5. My sister_________ a shower every day. a. have b. has c. take d. takes 6. What do you do _________morning? a. in a b. at a c. in the d. at the 7. Tim listens _________music. a. to b. of c. with d. for 8. _________floors does it have? a. How much b. How many c. How old d. How 9. Do you play_________? - Yes, I do. a. games b. sports c. swimming d. a & b are correct 10. _________ do you spell it? a. What b. How c. X d. None is correct. III. Use the correct forms of the verbs in the bracket. 1. Nam and Loan (be) _________students? 2. There (not be) _________forty students in their class. 3. Our classroom (be) _________on the fifth floor. 4. There (be) _________an English book in your school bag? 5. Nam’s mother (work) _________in a factory? 6. You (go) _________to school by bicycle every day? 7. She (not brush) _________her teeth after meal. 8. Their house (have) _________a big garden in the country. 9. What your brother (do) _________ in the evening? 10. Minh (watch) _________ TV every day. IV. Choose the words or phrases are not correct ỉn Standard English. 1. Her name is Minh. She’s my mother sister. A B C D .......................................................................... 2. My grandmother has seventy-five years old. A B C D .......................................................................... 3. How many students there are in this class? A B C D .......................................................................... 4. Andrew has a sister, but be not have any brothers. A B C D .......................................................................... 5. Where does Ken from? — He’s from Canada. A B C D .......................................................................... V. Read then answer True (T) or False (F). Nam and Tam are students at Quang Trung School in Ha Noi. They go to a big school. Nam is in grade 6 and Tam is in grade 7. Nam’s father works in a factory and Tam’s mother works in a hospital Nam and Tam play soccer after school. 1. Nam and Tam are not students. .......................................................................... 3. They go to a big school .......................................................................... 2. They live in Hue. .......................................................................... 4. Tam’s mother works in a hospital. .......................................................................... V. Write. A. Make questions for the underline words. 1. Yes. I watch TV every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No. She isn’t my sister. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. No. He is Long. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There is a table in the kitchen. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My father is a worker. Trang 43

EXERCISE 2

I. Choose the word or phrase that best fits in each sentence. 1. _________ your father play badminton? a. Is b. Are c. Do d. Does 2. Does your sister go to school by bike? _________. a. Yes, she do b. Yes, she does c. Yes, he do d. Yes, he does 3. Does Lisa like to_________? a. listen music b. hear music c. listen to music d. listens music 4. John _________his homework at 10 o’clock. a. finish b. finishes c. to finish d. to finishes 5. Do you and Ann like pop music? _________. a. Yes, I do b. Yes, they do c. Yes, we do d. Yes, you do 6. _________time does he have lunch? a. What b. Who c. When d. How 7. Do_________ play games? a. children b. girl c. boy d. student 8. He doesn’t have _________timetable. a. he b. his c. she d. her 9. What time do they have history? a. how b. which c. where d. when 10. Tom listens _________music _________night. a. in /at b. on/ to c. to /in d. to /at II. Match the sentences in column A with those in column B. 1. What time do you get up? a. Yes, there are. 2. What time do you have lunch? b. On Wednesday. 3. When do you have English? c. At 7.30. 4. Do you have math on Friday? d. No, I don’t. 5. Are there some bananas on the table? e. At 12 o’clock. 1. _________, 2. _________, 3. _________, 4. _________, 5. _________ III. Read the paragraphs. A. Read then answer True or False. Nga : When do you have history? Hoa : I have it on Monday and Tuesday. Trang 44

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 Nga : When do you have geography? Hoa : I have it on Wednesday. Nga : Do Minh and Binh have literature on Friday? Hoa : Yes, they do. 1. Hoa has history on Monday and Tuesday. .......................................................................... 2. She has geography on Wednesday. .......................................................................... 3. Minh and Binh don’t have literature on Friday. .......................................................................... 4. Nga and Hoa are the same class. .......................................................................... B. Cloze test Every day, Kate gets up at 7 o’clock. She (1) _________her teeth, washes her face and has breakfast at 7:20. After breakfast, she (2) _________ dressed and goes to school at 8 o’clock, Her classes (3) _________ at 8:30 and finish at 3: 30 in the afternoon, After school, she (4) _________ volleyball and she goes home at 5 o’clock. After that, she helps her mom cook dinner. In the evening, she (5) _________TV from 7 to 8 o’clock. Then, she does her homework. At 10 o’clock, she goes to bed. 1. a. brush b. brushing c. brushes d. to brush 2. a. to get b. get c. getting d. gets 3. a. start b. starts c. begin d. a & c 4. a. play b. plays c. do d. does 5. a. watch b. listen c. watches d. listens IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs. I „ Every morning, Thu (get) _________ up at 6. 2. What time you (start) _________your classes? 3. Y our students (play) _________ soccer every after school? 4. Everyone (not /read) _________books after lunch. 5. Viet (not/have) _________ literature om Friday. 6. We (live) _________in a big city. 7. He (go) _________ to school every morning. 8. Where they (live) _________? 9. Which grade you (be) _________ in? 10. I (listen) _________ to music every night. V. Answer the questions about you. 1. When do you have Math? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. What time do your classes start? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Is your literature on Tuesday? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How many students does your class have? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Where is your classroom? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. When/ these students/ have/ math? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They/ have/ it/ Monday. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She/ brush/ her teeth/ every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He/ get/ 6 o’clock. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How many/ floor/ your school/ have? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

Trang 45

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. sister family every Geography Literature history kitchen English begin Saturday. II. Choose the word or phrase that best fits the space in each sentence. 1. On weekdays Bill _________up at 6 then he _________a shower. a. goes / takes b. gets / does c. goes / does d. gets / takes 2. He often _________ a big breakfast before going to school. a. eats b. has c. gets d. both a and b 3. He goes to school at 6.45. a. Fifteen to seven b. six forty-five c. a quarter to seven d. All a. b, c 4. He has classes _________seven _________ eleven 0’clock. a. from / by b. to / to c. from / to d. by / to 5. At half past eleven, he has _________lunch. a. an b. a c. the d. X 6. My classes start at seven and _________at eleven. a. finish b. end c. begin d. both a and b 7. In the afternoon I _________games. a. have b. play c. do d. get 8. Do you play_________? — Yes, we play volleyball and soccer. a. music b. subjects c. sports d. All a, b, c 9. In the evening Loan _________her homework. a. has b. does c. gets d. do 10. What do you do_________ school? — I watch TV. a. after b. behind c. from d. to III. Supply the correct form or tense the verbs in the brackets. 1. What time you (start) _________ your classes? 2. Tom (be) _________ my friend. He often (play) _________ sports. 3. What time your parents (have) _________ breakfast? 4. How many students your school (have) _________? 5. She (study) _________English every day. 6. Thu (help) _________her mother after school. 7. I (not travel) _________to Da Lat in the summer. 8. We (not be) _________eleven years old. 9. You (be) _________ a student? 10. How Mai (go) _________to school? - She (go) _________by bus. IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. My school has four hundred students. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She usually goes swimming in her free time. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Her sister is a nurse. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My house has four rooms. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The classes always begin at seven o’clock. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. True or False. Hi, I’m Ritchie. This is my Aunt, Margaret. She’s my father's sister. She is twenty-four years old and she’s a flight attendant. She’s pretty and she has brown hair and blue eves. She likes listening to music and reading books. She’s great. She is my favorite aunt. Her husband’s name is Jack. 1. Ritchie’s aunt is Margaret. .......................................................................... 2. She is his mother’s sister. .......................................................................... 3. Her job is a teacher. .......................................................................... Trang 46

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. She has black hair and blue eyes. .......................................................................... B. Cloze test. Sports study what time help school watch A: What do you do after_____________? B: I _____________ my parents with their housework. A: Do you play _____________? B: Yes. I play volleyball. A: _____________do you learn music? B: At 4 o’clock. A: Do you _____________television in the evening? B: No, I _____________my lessons. VI. Answer these questions about you. 1. Do you like History? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. When do you have English? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What time do you do your homework? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What do you do after school? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. He/ have/ lunch/ home/ every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. When/ they/ have/ English? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Ba/ watch/ TV/ every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What/ you/ do/ after school? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. You/ do/ the housework/ after school? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 47

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 6: PLACES A. OUR HOUSE

I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Lake : cái hồ 14. Paddy field : ruộng lúa 2. River : dòng sông 15. Village : làng 3. Well : giếng nước VERB 4. Mountain : núi 16. Work : làm việc 5. Place : nơi, chỗ 17. Love : yêu quý 6. Flower : bông hoa 18. Look(at) : quan sát, nhìn vào 7. Tree : cây 19. Meet : gặp 8. Yard : cái sân 20. Here(adv) : đây, này 9. Park : công viên 21.Near (prep) : gần 10. Town : thị trấn 22. Beautiful (adj): đẹp 11. Hotel : khách sạn 12. Rice : lúa, gạo 13. Rice paddy : ruộng lúa II. GRAMMAR. Ôn lại THERE IS / THERE ARE / Have / Has (Bài 3) a. There is / There are: Có Ex: - There is a lake near the house. - There are flowers in the yard. b. Have / has: Có (sở hữu) Ex: - She has a new car. - I have a book in my bag.

B. IN THE CITY I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. restaurant : nhà hàng 2. hospital : bệnh viện 3. factory : nhà máy 4. museum : viện bảo tàng 5. stadium : sân vận động 6. movie theater: rạp hát II. GRAMMAR. 1. WH - QUESTION

7. police station : đồn cảnh sát 8. temple : ngôi đình, miếu 9. bookstore : hiệu sách 10. store : cửa hiệu 11. neighborhood : hàng xóm, khu vực

Wh- + to be +S + ……? Wh- + do / does + S + Vo +……? Ex: - Where is your pen? - What do you do? 1. What : cái gì, gì (hỏi về vật, sự vật hay con vật, làm chủ ngữ hay tân ngữ) 2. Where : ở đâu (hỏi về nơi chốn) 3. Which : nào, cái nào (có sự lựa chọn) 4. Who : ai (dùng để hỏi về người làm chủ ngữ hay tân ngữ) 5. When : khi nào (hỏi về thời gian) 6. How : thế nào, cách nào (hỏi về cách thức, trạng thái, hay thể chất) 7. Why : tại sao (hỏi về lý do hay nguyên nhân) 8. How many + Ns/es: bao nhiêu (hỏi về số lượng) ❖ Từ để hỏi luôn luôn đứng đầu câu, trước động từ. ❖ Sau “What / Which" có thể là một danh từ. 2. CÁCH ĐỔI CÂU SỐ ÍT SANG SỐ NHIỀU I -» We He / She / It -» They This -» These Trang 48

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 That N There is is / am

-» -» -» -»

Those Ns/es There are are

C. AROUND THE HOUSE I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. toy : đồ chơi 4. photocopy store : tiệm photo 2. toy store : tiệm đồ chơi 5. bakery : tiệm bánh mì 3. drugstore : nhà thuốc tây II. GRAMMAR. PREPOSITION OF PLACE 1. behind : phía sau 8. next to / beside : kế bên, bên cạnh 2. between : ở giữa 2 người / vật 3. over : ở bên trên 9. around : xung quanh 4. under : ở bên dưới 10. with : với 5. in front of : ở phía trước 11. to the left of : về bên trái của 6. opposite : đối diện 12. to the right of : về bên phải của 7. near : gần, cạnh --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Complete the sentences use “There is/ There are”. 1. a park / near / the hotel. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. trees and flowers / in the park ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. a big yard / in front of / my house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. tall trees / behind / Tam’s house ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. three photocopy stores / next to / bakery ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. a movie theatre / opposite / restaurant ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Complete the sentences use “have/has”. 1. The park / trees and flowers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She / an crasser in her hand ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. His town / a movie theater ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The house / four windows ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My school yard / trees and flowers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. We / our lunch in a small restaurant ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Change “Have, Has” into “There is / There are” 1. His town has a movie theater. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The house has four windows. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Our school has twenty classes. Trang 49

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My house has a tall tree. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Hoa’s family has a TV. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Lan’s school has se ven hundred students. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Change “There is / There are” into “Have, Has” 1. There arc trees and flowers in the park ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There is a big yard in my house ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There is an eraser on the table ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There are many televisions in the houses ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. There is only a lake in the villages. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. There is a book on the shelf. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Change these sentences from single form into plural form. 1. This is an old book. ............................................................................................................ 2. There is a market near the factory. ............................................................................................................ 3. Is Lan‘s sister beautiful? ............................................................................................................ 4. It’s a small house. ............................................................................................................ 5. Is your room big? ............................................................................................................ 6. No, it isn’t. ỈVs new. ............................................................................................................ 7. There is a tree behind the house. ............................................................................................................ 8. He is our teacher. ............................................................................................................ VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. The house has four floors. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There is a river and a lake near my house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I am in class 6B. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My mother works in a hospital. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We don't go to the cinema because it’s raining. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. They have English on Mondays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Her school is very big. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. His sisters get up at thirty past six. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Fill in the blanks with the right preposition. 1. Look ____________ the house. 2. There is a big yard ____________ front ____________ the house. 3. There is a well ____________the left of the house. 4. To the right ____________the house, there is a flower garden. 5. There arc lots of houses ____________the street. 6. Their house is next ____________a bookstore. 7. His father works ____________a factory. Trang 50

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 8. My classroom is ____________the third floor. 9. I always get up late ____________Sundays. 10. Minh lives ____________ the city ____________ his parents and sister. 11. There is a light ____________ the ceiling. 12. Their family lives ____________the country. 13. There is a big yard ____________my school. 14. Next ____________ my house, there is a bookstore. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Put an accent mark (.) over the stressed syllables. hotel flower mountain river paddy village beautiful listen after soccer. II. Choose the word or phrase the best fits the space in each sentence. 1. Every day, Bill ____________up at 6 then he ____________ a shower. a. goes / takes b. gets / does c. goes / does d. gets / takes 2. She often ____________ a big breakfast before going to school. a. eats b. has c. gets d. both a and b 3. ____________? His flat is on the forth floor. a. Where’s Tom’s flat? b. Where are Tom’s flat? c. Is Tom’s flat on the fourth floor? d. Where does Tom live? 4. Where do you____________? In Hanoi. a. get b. live c. go d. take 5. Do you play ____________? — Yes, we play volleyball and soccer. a. music b. games c. sports d. All a, b, c 6. In the evening, Loan ____________ her homework. a. has b. does c. gets d. do 7. What do you do ____________ school? - I watch TV. a. after b. behind c. from d. to 8. There ____________ trees and flowers, a river and a paddy field in my country. a. is b. are c. has d. have 9. The restaurant is ____________the drugstore. a. next b. near to c. opposite d. behind of 10. Do ____________play games? a. children b. girl c. boy d. student III. Choose the words or phrases which are not correct in Standard English. 1. There are a couch, a table and a television in my living room. A B C D ......................................................... 2. She lives in a big house near to the park. A B C D ......................................................... 3. What is her brother name? A B C D ......................................................... 4. There is two chairs, a table and a bed in her room. A B C D ......................................................... 5. Her house is next the bakery and the drugstore. A B C D ......................................................... IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verb in the brackets. 1. Nam’s mother (work) ____________ in a factory 2. You (go) ____________to school by bicycle every day? 3. Minh (live) ____________ in the city with his sisters. 4. We (not go)____________ to school on Sundays. 5. She (not li ve)____________ in the country with her parents. 6. His parents (not be) ____________ teachers. 7. John (have) ____________ three sisters. 8. He (play) ____________ soccer with his friends after school. Trang 51

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 V. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. Cloze test. Hello, my name is Lucas. I’m twelve (1) ____________ old and I am a student. I (2) ____________ a sister, Lena. She is seventeen years old. We (3) ____________ in a house in the country. Our house has a flower garden. Near my house, there is a park. The park is (4) ____________. There are many trees and flowers in the park (5) ____________ the park, there is a river. The river is always quiet and (6) ____________. I love my house so much. 1. a. year b. years c. age d. ages 2. a. haves b. has c. have d. haven’t 3. a. live b. lives c. living d. not live 4. a. beauty b. beautify c. beauties d. beautiful 5. a. in front b. behind c. next to d. between 6. a. green b. red c. white d. yellow B. True or False. Nga is in the country with her friend, Lien. Lien lives in a beautiful house. It has a yard. There’s a vegetable garden behind the house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake. To the right of the house, there are tall trees. Nga likes the house very much. 1. Nga is in the country with her parents. ......................................................... 2. There’s a lake to the left of the house. ......................................................... 3. Nga hates the house so much. ......................................................... 4. Lien’s house isn’t nice. ......................................................... VI. Write. A. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Our house has a yard. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. He works in a factory. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They go to school at 6.30 am every day. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Her brother plays sports after school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Lan takes a shower every morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Arrange the sentences. 1. There / a table / and / is / four / in / chairs / the dinning room / . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. has / five / My family / people / . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. does / How many / your / class / students / . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Mr. / and / What / do / do / Mrs. Black /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 1

1. Put an accent mark (.) over the stressed syllables. restaurant hospital factory museum station temple theater police II. Choose the word or phrase the best fits the space in each sentence. 1. What are ____________? They are flowers. a. this b. that c. these d. there 2. ____________ the right of her house, there are beautiful flowers a. In b. At c. From d. To 3. ____________ is his house? “It’s on Nguyen Trai street”. a. What b. Where c. When d. How

stadium question.

Trang 52

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. The restaurant is ____________ the drugstore. a. next b. near to c. opposite d. behind of 5. Minh’s father is an engineer. He works in a ____________. a. factory b. bookstore c. stadium d. bakery 6. There is a well in front ____________ the house. a. from b. to c. of d. on 7. There is a house ____________ the park. a. in front b. next c. opposite d. between 8. There are two shops ____________ the cinema. a. to the right b. to the left c. on d. to the left of 9. There are houses and parks ____________ the river. a. in b. between c. on d. near 10. Tim listens ____________ music. a. to b. of c. with d. for III. Choose the words or phrases which are not correct in Standard English. 1. My grandmother has seventy-five years old. A B C D ......................................................... 2. How many students there are in this class? A B C D ......................................................... 3. How many students do the school have? A B C D ......................................................... IV. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. True or False. Lucas, Sally and their family live in the country, they have a house and a yard in front of the house. There are trees and flowers in their yard. They spend hours among the trees and the flowers in their beautiful yard. They love their house so much. 1. Lucas, Sally and their family don’t live in the country. ......................................................... 2. In front of the house, there is a beautiful yard. ......................................................... 3. There are not flowers in the yard. ......................................................... 4. Lucas and Sally love their house very much. ......................................................... B. Cloze test. Sally (1) ____________ in the country with her mother, father and two brothers. Their house is (2) ____________ a temple. On the street in their (3) ____________, there is a small bookstore, a small restaurant and a park. Near the neighborhood, there is a hospital, (4) ____________ and a small school. (5) ____________ father is a doctor, he works in the hospital. Sally’s mother is a teacher, she (6) ____________ at school. 1. a. live b. living c. lives d. not live 2. a. opposite b. next c. on d. in 3. a. house b. neighborhood c. countries d. room 4. a. factory b. a factory c. the factory d. X 5. a. Sally’s b. Sally is c. of Sally d. is Sally 6. a. teach b. teaching c. teacher d. teaches V. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Hoang (not / have) ____________ Math on Friday. 2. What time you (start) ____________ your classes? 3. Hoa often (listen) ____________ to music and (watch)____________ TV 4. She (not/brush) ____________ her teeth after meals. 5. Their house (have) ____________ a beautiful yard? 6. Where Nam’s sister (work)____________ ? 7. There (be) ____________ a small picture in your room? 8. How many books your school’s library (have) ____________? VI. Write. A. Alake questions for underlined words. 1. Sally lives in the city with her family. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 53

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 2. They have a beautiful yard. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. He lives in the city with his parents. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. No. It is a small house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. They go fishing on Sunday mornings. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Arrange the sentences. 6. swimming pool / is / There / a new / the village / in. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. are /bedrooms /my house /There / two / in. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. two / The / has / room / windows / . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. hours / have / How many / a / does / day /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. How / cities / many / have / your countries / does /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ---------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

I. Put an accent mark (.) over the stressed syllables. bakery photocopy flower drugstore behind between opposite beside under around. II. Choose the words or phrases the best fit the space in each sentence. 1. His father is a doctor. He works in the ____________. a. Factory b. School c. rice paddy d. hospital 2. Does she play soccer? - No, she ____________. a. do b. don’t c. does d. doesn’t 3. They sometimes have dinner in a ____________. a. hotel b. restaurant c. temple d. museum 4. I play ____________ after school. a. games b. math c. stereo d. dinner 5. He is ____________ engineer. a. this b. a c. that d. an 6. What's ____________ name? - His father’s name is Tuan. a. Phong father s b. Phong's father’s c. Phong’s father d. father of Phong 7. Do you live in a town ____________ in a country? a. and b. or c. but d. X 8. There’s a flower garden ____________ the house. a. in front b. at front of c. in front of d. by front of 9. “What time is it?” It’s 10:50” a. ten fifty b. ten to eleven c. ten to ten d. both a and b 10. What time ____________ breakfast? - He has breakfast at half past. a. does he have b. he has c. is he have d. does he is III. Choose the words or phrases which are not correct in Standard English. 1. How many movie theater are there in this town? A B C D ......................................................... 2. She doesn’t has classes on Saturday. A B C D ......................................................... 3. My class is at the left of the library. AB C D ......................................................... 4. There is many trees in our garden. A B C D ......................................................... Trang 54

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 5. Van and Nguyet studies at Le Loi school. A B C D ......................................................... IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verb in the brackets. 1. She’s a doctor. She (work) ____________ in General Hospital. 2. Lan (have) ____________ two brothers, Minh and Long. 3. My brother (get) ____________ up at half past six. 4. Mary (wash) ____________ the dishes in the evening. 5. When she (have) ____________ History?- On Tuesday. 6. The girls (play) ____________ soccer? 7r Their house (not have) ____________ a big garden, 8. These students (not walk) ____________ to school. V. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. Complete the passage with the suitable word. Is grade in stores eleven with has live My name’s Lan. I’m (1) ____________ years old. I’m in (2) ____________ six. My family (3) ____________ four people. I (4) ____________ in a house (5) ____________ the country (6) ____________ my parents and ray sister. There are not any (7) ____________ here. There are trees and flowers, a river, a lake and paddy fields. It (8) ____________ very quiet. B. True or False. Hi, my name is Sally. I’m a student and I’m in grade six. My class is 6C. My school is in the city. It’s very big. It has four floors. There are many trees in the school yard. My classroom is on the second floor. There are forty-one students in my class. The class is not big but I love it very much. 1. Sally is in class 6B. ......................................................... 2. Her class is on the third floor. ......................................................... 3. There aren’t any trees in her school. ......................................................... 4. She loves her class very much. ......................................................... VI. Write. A. Complete the sentences, using these cues. 1. There / an armchair / living room? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She / do / her homework / after school ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My mother/ go/work /seven/morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There/ not be/ hospital/ my neighborhood. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Our house/ have/ big garden. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. How many/ people/ your family/ have? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Answer about you. 1. What’s there opposite your house? There is ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Who do you live with? I ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. How many brothers or sisters do you have? I ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What is your father’s job? My father ................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Put an accent mark (.) over the stressed syllables. country breakfast ready

volleyball

listen Trang 55

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 routine shower dinner music restaurant II. Choose the word or phrase the best fits the space in each sentence. 1. What is in ____________ your house? - There is a big yard. a. behind b. front of c. between d. next to 2. Is there a cinema in your neighborhood? No, ____________. a. It isn’t b. there isn’t c. it is no d. there is 3. We live next ____________ a river. a. of b. from c. by d. to 4. Who are all ____________ people? a. this b. that c. those d. they 5. ____________ is the toy store? - It’s to the right of the bakery. a. Where b. What c. When d. How 6. He plays football ____________ the weekends. a. in b. at c. on d. to 7. It’s late. I want to go ____________ home now. a. X b. at c. to d. for 8. Tom is a student. He is ____________ school now. a. on the b. on c. at d. to 9. When ____________ dinner? a. have you b. do you have c. you have d. you are have 10. Which is your house? — The one is ____________. a. on right b. on the right c. at the right d. in right III. Choose the words or phrases which are not correct in Standard English. 1. My garden is on the left of the house. A B C D ......................................................... 2. There is a hospital, a factory and a museums in my district. A B C ......................................................... 3. What time do your sister get up? A B C D ......................................................... 4. The photocopy is between the bakery or the drugstore. A B C D ......................................................... IV. Supply the correct the form or tense of the verb in the brackets. 1. The children (wash) ____________ their dishes after meal. 2. How many rooms your house (have)____________ ? There (be) ____________ 20. 3. The student (study) ____________ English at school. 4. Lan (not have) ____________ her breakfast at 7 o’clock. 5. Hoa (travel) ____________ to school by bus every day. 6. My parents (not go) ____________ to the zoo. 7. You often (do) ____________ your home work in the evening? 8. She usually (not do) ____________ the homework. V. Read the flowing paragraphs. A. True or False. Quynh is ten years old. She is in grade 6. She lives in a house with her grandmother, parents and two sisters. Quynh’s father is forty-five years old. Her mother is, too. They work in a hospital. Quynh’s sister often takes her to school at 6.45 every morning. 1. Quynh lives in a house with her grandmother, parents and two sisters. ......................................................... 2. Quynh's father is forty-one years old. ......................................................... 3. Her mother is forty-five years old. ......................................................... 4. Quynh’s sister often takes her to school at 6.40 every morning. ......................................................... B. Cloze Test. Hello, I am Loan. This is my school. It is small and old (1) ____________ it’s beautiful. (2) ____________ the school, there is a (3) ____________ yard. After school in the afternoon we often play soccer there. The yard is clean and there (4) ____________ many trees and flowers there. My friend and (5) ____________ sit under these trees to review our lessons. I am proud of (tự hào) my (6)____________. Trang 56

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 1. a. and b. but c. so d. because. 2. a. in front b. next c. behind d. between. 3. a. big b. large c. old d. both A and B. 4. a. is b. has c. are d. have. 5. a. I b. my c. you d. your. 6. a. room b. school c. yard d. garden. VI. Answer about you. 1. What does your mother do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Where do you live? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What do you do in the evening? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Do you have Math on Monday? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Use the words given to complete the sentences. 1. Huong and Lien / go / the zoo / Sundays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. He / live / house / near / park. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Mai / not have / English classes /Thursdays ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There / a garden / front of / her house? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I /not/ watch / television at night. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 57

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 7: YOUR HOUSE A. IS YOUR HOUSE BIG?

I. GLOSSARY. NOUN VERB 1. Letter : lá thư 10. To write : viết 2. Friend : bạn. 11. To spend : dùng thời giờ, trải qua 3. Garden : vườn ADJ 4. Vegetable : rau 12. Old : cũ 5. Photo : bức ảnh 13. New : mới 6. Hour : giờ 14. Dear : thân mến, yêu quý 7. Bank : ngân hàng ADV 8. Supermarket : siêu thị 15.Here : đây, ở đây 9. Post office : bưu điện 16. Soon : ngay, sớm II. GRAMMAR 1. THERE IS / THERE ARE: CÓ Is there +A/An +N? -» Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t Are there + Any + N(s/es)? -» Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t Ex: Is there a garden behind the house? Yes, there is. Are there any flowers in the garden? No, there aren’t. 2. SOME VÀ ANY Some: dùng trong câu xác định (+) Any: dùng trong câu phủ định (-) và nghi vấn (?) Some + N(s/es) : một vài Any + N(s/es) : nào Any + N(không đếm được) : chút... nào Some + N(không đếm được) : một ít Ex: There aren’t any books. Ex: There are some books on the table Is there any sugar in the jar? There is some sugar in the jar. Note: Some cũng được dùng trong câu hỏi: “Would you like...?” Ex: Can I have some more coffee, please? Would you like some tea? (Mời bạn uống chút trà nhé)

B. TOWN OR COUNTRY?

I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Apartment : căn hộ 6. Picture : bức ảnh, bức tranh 2. Clinic : phòng khám 7. Shop : cửa hàng 3. Market : chợ 8. Noisy (adj) : ồn ào 4. Zoo : vườn bách thú 9. Quiet ( adj) : yên tĩnh 5. Paddy field / rice paddy: đồng lúa 10. Very (adv) : rất II. GRAMMAR. YES/ NO QUESTION Tobe + S + ...? -» Yes, S + tobe. -» No, S + tobe + not. Do/Does + S + V1 ...? -» Yes, S + do/does. -» No, S + do/does + not. Ex: Is she beautiful? - Yes, she is . / No, she isn’t. Do you go to school in the morning? - Yes, / do. / No, I don ’t. Does your sister live in the country? - Yes, she does. / No, she doesn’t. Note: Khi trợ động từ “Do/Does” dùng trong câu hỏi hoặc câu phủ định, thì động từ chính được đưa về nguyên mẫu (không s/es).

C. ON THE MOVE I. GLOSSARY. NOUN 1. Move 2. Bike/bicycle 3. Motorbike

: Sự chuyển động : xe đạp : xe máy

VERB 8. To walk 9. To travel 10. leave

: đi bộ : đi lại : rời khỏi Trang 58

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Car 5. Train 6. Plane 7. Bus

: Xe hơi : xe lửa : máy bay : xe buýt

11. To end / to finish 12. To start / to begin 13. To thank 14. So (conj) 15. Among (prep)

: kết thúc : bắt đầu : cám ơn : vì vây, cho nên : trong số

II. GRAMMAR. 1. NÓI VỀ PHƯƠNG TIỆN GIAO THÔNG: Q: How + do / does + S + V1? A: s + V1/s/es + by + phương tiện. Q: How do you go to school every day? A: I go to school by bicycle. * Note: on foot: đi bộ go + to + nơi đến + on foot. = walk + to + nơi đến. Ex: I go to school on foot = I walk to school: Tôi đi bộ tới trường. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Make questions with “Are there / Is there” and answer. 1. flowers / in / garden? // Yes ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. well / behind / house?//Yes ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Stores / on/ Street? //No ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. vegetables / in / garden? // No II. Fill in the blank with SOME or ANY. 1. I have ____________ money. 2. There aren’t ____________ rulers on the desk. 3. Is there ____________ salt in the jar? 4. Would you like ____________ tea? 5. Are there ____________ mountains behind your house? 6. They buy ____________ books in the bookstore. 7. There isn’t ____________ milk in the bottle. 8. My mother would like____________ eggs. 9. Would you like ____________ orange juice? 10. She doesn’t need ____________ bread. III. Answer the questions. 1. Do you live in an apartment? (Yes) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Does she live in an apartment? (Yes) . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Are there any Stores on the Street? (No) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Is there a market near the factory? (Yes) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Are there any schools in the village? (No) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Make questions and answer with “How”, using these words given. 1. Mrs. Lan / travel / Ha Noi? // plane ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam and Nga / go / the country? // train ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 59

EXERCISE 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. garden vegetable flower letter idea sister behind mountain bookstore noisy II. Choose the words or phrases that best fit in the blanks. 1. Is the lake to the right of the house? – ____________ . a. Yes, it is b. No, there isn’t c. No, there aren’t d. a & b 2. Are there ____________ trees in your house? Yes , there are. a. any b. some c. many d. much 3. What are ____________ ? They are houses. a. that b. this c. there d. those 4. ____________ there a restaurant near your house? a. Is b. Do c. Are d. Does 5. Is your apartment ____________ ? No, it isn’t. It’s small. a. beautiful b. big c. noisy d. quiet 6. Her house is near a market. It’s very ____________ . a. quiet b. far c. noisy d. near 7. Are there any flowers in the garden? Yes, ____________ a. there is b. there are c. there isn’t d. there aren’t 8. There ____________ trees and flowers, a river, a lake and a paddy field. a. is b. are c. has d. have 9. Are there any ____________ near your house? a. flower b. trees c. mountain d. lake 10. To the left ____________ the house, there is a lake. a. in b. on c. of d. at III. Fill in the blanks with “There is/ There are”. 1. ____________ a river near my house. 2. ____________ a flower garden behind my house. 3. ____________ five girls in the bookstore. 4. ____________ an English book on the table. 5. ____________ ten pictures on the wall. 6. ____________ many children on the playground. 7. ____________ a flower on the table. 8. ____________ some water in the bottle. 9. ____________ some cake in the refrigerator. 10. __________ water in the bottle. IV. Put the following words in their correct orders. 1. students / any / classroom / are / the / there / in /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. a / is / market / there / house / near / his. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. flowers / any / yard / are / the / there / in? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. right / tall / trees / are / there / to / the / of / house / the. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. is / beautiful / house / the. Trang 60

HOMEWORK 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. clinic market quiet neighborhood travel motorbike II. Multiple choices. 1. He lives ____________ an apartment. a. in b. at c. on 2. She lives ____________ a house ____________ town. a. in-in b. in-on c. at-on 3. There are many trees and flowers in the ____________ . a. lake b. river c. park 4. ____________ Ba live in town? Yes, he ____________ . a. Is – is b. Does - does c. Is - does 5. Is the country ____________ ? No. It is very quiet a. noisy b. quiet c. big

apartment museum

television temple

d. to d. at-in d. well d. Does - is d. small Trang 61

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 6. Does Chi live in the ____________ ? No. She doesn’t live in the City. a. town b. country c. City d. Street 7. Are there ____________ stores in the country? a. some b. any c. a d. an 8. ____________ you a student or a teacher? a. Is b. Are c. Do d. Does 9. ____________ do you spell your name? a. What b. When c. How d. Where 10. There ____________ some trees, flowers, a river and a paddy field near my house. a. are b. is c. aren’t d. isn’t III. Choose the word ( a, b, c, d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Dear Lan, Thank you (1) ____________ your letter. I’m in the country with my friend, Minh. He lives in (2) ____________ old house but it is beautiful. In front of the house, there is a (3) ____________ garden. Behind (4) ____________ the house, there is a well. To the left of the house, there are paddy fields. To the right of the house, there are (5) ____________ . Here is a photo. Love, Nam. 1. a. about b. with c. for d. of 2. a. a b. an c. the d. X 3. a. vegetable b. vegetables c. trees d. flowers 4. a. of b. from c. to d. X 5. a. tree b. flowers c. mountain d. store IV. Supply the correct form of verbs. 1. Hoa (go) ____________ to school by bus every day. 2. He (work) ____________ every day? 3. What your mother (do) ____________ ? 4. Lan (not have) ____________ her breakfast at 7 o’clock. 5. The radio (work) ____________ very well. 6. We (not need) ____________ any help. 7. They sometimes (have) ____________ dinner in a restaurant? 8. Mary (not wash) ____________ the dishes in the evening. 9. When you (visit) ____________ your grandparents? 10. The baby (cry) ____________ in the evening. V. Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. How / your father / go / work / every day? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There / be / not / milk / the bottle. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Their children / go / school / bike. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He / live / Ho Chi Minh City. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What / your mother / do / the morning? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Answer about you. 1. How do you go to school every day? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Are you a student? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What does your father do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Is there any apple juice in the fridge? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What do you do in the evening? Trang 62

EXERCISE 2

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. television mountain river mother kitchen homework computer calculator listen visit II. Choose the best word or phrase that best completes each sentence. 1. How many ____________ are there in the kitchen? a tomato b. tomatoes c. potato’s d. a potato 2. How are you? -» ____________ fine, thanks. a. I’m b. We’re c. I d. a and b 3. Where ____________ Miss. Lan live? a. does b. is c. do d. are 4. He is in the living room with ____________ mother. a. her b. she c. his d. he 5. I live ____________ CMT8 Street. a. in b. on c. at d. with 6. What are these? -» ____________ are my pencils. a. Those b. These c. They d. b and c 7. What is this? -» It’s eraser. a. the b. a c. an d. X 8. Mary and I ____________ at school. a. are b. am c. is d. a and b 9. How many books are there ____________ the table? a. in b. at c. on d. with 10. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác: a. sisters b. televisions c. parents d. chairs III. Read the paragraphs. A. Choose the best word that fits in the brackets. In any is and picture My name (1) ____________ Chi. I live in a house (2) ____________ the country. There aren’t (3) ____________ stores here. There are trees and flowers, a river, a lake (4) ____________ paddy fields. It’s very quiet. Here is a (5)____________ . B. Choose True or False. Hi, my name is Hoang. I’m a student. I get up at half past five. I take a shower and get dressed. I have breakfast, then I leave the house at half past six. The school is near my house so I walk. Classes start at seven and finish at half past eleven. I walk home and have lunch at twelve o’ clock. 1. Hoang isn’t a student. ......................................................... 2. He takes a bath and get dressed. ......................................................... 3. He goes to school at half past six. ......................................................... Trang 63

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 4. He goes to school on foot. ......................................................... 5. Classes end at thirty past eleven. ......................................................... IV. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. He (get) ____________ dressed after breakfast? 2. Miss Hoa (go) ____________ to school by bike? 3. Your father and mother (travel) ____________ to Ha Noi by train? 4. There (be) ____________ any students at school on Sunday? 5. Lan’s sister (be)____________ beautiful? 6. He (be) ____________ your teacher? 7. The children (leave) ____________ their house after lunch? 8. There (be) ____________ a big garden in your house? 9. Lien (not live) ____________ with her parents. 10. You (go) ____________ to Hong Ha school? V. Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. There / a big yard / my house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / travel / Nha Trang / train. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What / your family / do / Sundays? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I / listen / music / at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What / Lan / do / school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. There / be / orange / the table. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Nam /eat / big / breakfast. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Miss Lien / do / morning exercises / every day. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Make questions for the underlined words . 1. Yes. I live in an apartment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No. there aren’t any Stores on the Street. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. No. my house is big. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Yes. There is a hotel in the neighborhood. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No. It is very noisy here. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Yes. The flowers are beautiful. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. No. She lives in an apartment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

HOMEWORK 2

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllables. idea river village beautiful hotel restaurant museum stadium neighborhood temple. II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each sentence. 1. The school is near her house ____________ , she often walks. a. but b. and c. so d. because 2. ____________ the restaurant in the hotel? - On the second floor. Trang 64

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 a. Where b. Where’s c. When d. What 3. I have a big breakfast, but my sister ____________ a small one. a. is b. has c. do d. does 4. Is that your book on ____________ table? a. the b. a c. an d. X 5. Whose newspapers are ____________ ? a. this b. these c. that d. there 6. Is your mother ____________ home? a. in b. on c. to d. at 7. We go to school by bus every day but Tom ____________ . He walks. a. isn’t b. hasn’t c. doesn’t d. don’t 8. Which ____________ ? a. your house is it b. it is your house c. is your house d. your house it is 10. I go to school ____________ bike. a. of b. for c. with d. by 11. How ____________ to work? a. he travel b. he travels c. does he travel d. do he travel 12. ____________ does she go to school? a. How b. What c. Who d. Which 13. ____________ your father travel to work every day? a. Is b. Has c. Does d. Do 14. The train ____________ Tokyo ____________ 4 p.m. a. leaves - at b. leaves - in c. leave - at d. leave - in 15. How does she go to school? She ____________ to school. a. goes b. walks c. travels d. get III. Fill in the blanks with the correct tense. 1. Nam (get) ____________ up at six o’clock. 2. There (be) ____________ a cup of coffee on the table. 3. They (not go) ____________ to the museum with their teacher. 4. She (travel) ____________ to school by bus? 5. He (leave) ____________ his house at half past six. 6. What your father (do)____________ ? 7. Where she (go)____________ to? 8. How your father (travel) ____________ to work? 9. Listen! The bird (sing) ____________ on the tree. 10. What your mother (do) ____________ ? IV. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. He and his wife lives in an apartment. A B C D ......................................................... 2. My family spends hours on the living room. A B C D ......................................................... 3. The pictures of his friends are beautiful. A B C D ......................................................... V. Answer about you. 1. Where do you live? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. What do you do? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What do you do after school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What are you doing now? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Are there four people in your family? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 65

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Read and Choose the correct words to fit in the space. This is Minh. He (1) ____________ a student. He gets up (2) ____________ half past five. He takes a shower and gets dressed. He (3) ____________ breakfast, then he leaves the house at half past six. The school is near his house, (4) ____________ he walks. Classes start at seven and end at half (5) ____________ eleven. He always has lunch at twelve o’clock. 1. a. does b. do c. is d. are 2. a. on b. at c. in d. for 3. a. eats b. eat c. has d. a and c are correct. 4. a. and b. but c. because d. so 5. a. past b. to c. pass d. X VII. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. My father goes to work by motorbike. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. His brother is an engineer. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I go to Tan Binh school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My family has four people. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. They often visit their grandparents in Ho Chi Minh City. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 66

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 8: OUT AND ABOUT A. WHAT ARE YOU DOING?

I. GLOSSARY NOUN VERB 1. video game : trò chơi video 5. drive : lái xe ô tô 2. sky : bầu trời 6. wait : chờ đợi 3. businessman : thương gia 7. ride : đi, cưỡi 4. hospital : bệnh viện 8. take : lấy cầm 9. fly : bay II. GRAMMAR THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE (Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn) * Cách dùng: - Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn dùng để diễn tả một việc đang xảy ra ở hiện tại. * Dấu hiệu nhận biết: + now (bây giờ), right now (ngay bây giờ), at present (hiện nay), at the moment (lúc này), at this time (ngay lúc này). + Câu cảm thán (!): Look!, Listen! + Trả lời cho câu hỏi “Where + tobe”. * Công thức: am / is / are + V-ing (+) S + am / is / are + V-ing + O. (-) S + am / is / are + Not + V-ing + O. (?) Am / Is / Are + S + V-ing + O? WH + am/is/are + S + V-ing +…? Ex: I’m playing football now. * Thêm ING vào sau động từ: - Thông thường ta thêm ING vào sau động từ. Ex: read -» ____________ ; wait -» ____________ ; look -» ____________ - Nếu động từ tận cùng bằng “e âm”, ta bỏ “e” trước khi thêm ING. Ex: write -» ____________ ; ride -» ____________ ; drive -» ____________ - Nếu động từ một vần tận cùng là phụ - nguyên - phụ ta phải gấp đôi phu âm cuối rồi thêm ING. Ex: stop -» ____________ ; swim -» ____________ ; run -» ____________ - Nếu động từ hai vần, dấu nhấn ở vần thứ hai, tận cùng là phụ - nguyên - phụ , ta gấp đôi phụ âm cuối rồi thêm ING. Ex: begin -» ____________ ; forget -» ____________ * Note: Một số động từ không dùng ở thì hiện tại tiếp diễn như: Like (thích), hate (ghét), want (muốn), need (cần), love (yêu thương), feel (cảm thấy)...

B. A TRUCK DRIVER I. GLOSSARY NOUN 1. truck 2. farm 3. food stall 4. farmer 5. web -» make a web 12. lie II. GRAMMAR Subject Object I -» ME YOU -» YOU HE -» HIM SHE -» HER

: xe tải : nông trại : quầy bán hàng ăn : nông dân : lưới : giăng tơ : nằm

VERB 6. carry 7. unload 8. arrive 9. copy 10. correct 11. load

: mang, vác : bốc dỡ hàng : đến nơi : sao chép : sửa đúng, chỉnh : chất hàng

OBJECT (Túc từ) Vị trí: * Túc từ đứng sau động từ. Ex: Our mother loves us. * Túc từ đứng sau giới từ. Ex: I live with my mother and my father. Trang 67

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 IT WE THEY

-» IT -» US -» THEM

I live with them.

C. ROAD SIGN I. GLOSSARY NOUN 1. accident 2. intersection 3. road 4. road sign 5. traffic 6. traffic light 7. policeman 8. discipline VERB 9. change 10. cross 11. help 12. park II. GRAMMAR

: tai nạn : giao lộ : đường lộ : biển báo giao thông : sự giao thông, đi lại : đèn giao thông : cảnh sát : kỉ luật

13. slow down 14. stop 15.tum 16. warn ADJ 17. dangerous 18. difficult 19.careful

: thay đổi : băng qua : giúp đỡ : bãi xe

ADV 20. fast 21. ahead 22. straight ahead

: giảm tốc độ : ngừng lại : rẽ hướng : cảnh báo : nguy hiếm : khó khăn : cẩn thận : nhanh chóng : phía trước : thẳng về trước

MODAL AUXILIARY VERBS (Trợ động từ khiếm khuyết) 1. CAN (có thế): Dùng để diễn tả một khả năng, hoặc sự cho phép. (+) S + can + V1 + O. (-) S + cannot / (can’t) + V1 + O. (?) Can + S + V1 + O? 2. MUST (phải): Diễn tả sự bắt buộc, nghĩa vụ phải làm. (+) S + must + V1 + O. (-) S + must + not + V1 + O. (?) Must + S + V1 + O? * MUST NOT = MUSTN’T: mang ý nghĩa ngăn cấm. Ex: We must not walk on grass: Chúng ta không được đi trên cỏ --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Supply “ing” behind the verbs. play .................................................. brush .......................................... watch ..................................................... ride .................................................. do .......................................... run ..................................................... drive .................................................. go .......................................... swim ..................................................... walk .................................................. talk .......................................... stop ..................................................... live .................................................. write .......................................... read ..................................................... II. Supply the correct form of the verbs in present continuous tense. 1. We (play) ____________ soccer in the yard now. 2. Look! The birds (fly)____________ in the sky. 3. The children (not ride) ____________ their bike at the moment. 4. Now, She (read) ____________ a comic book in the living room. 5. Where you (be) ____________ ? -» (be) ____________ here. I (make)____________ my breakfast. 6. What you (do) ____________ at present? 7. He (not have) ____________ his lunch at this time. 8. What you (do)____________ ? I (watch) ____________ TV. III. Use the given words to complete sentences with present Progressive. 1. Nam and Nga / walk / school/ at present. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I /not/ watch / television /at this time. Trang 68

EXERCISE 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stressed syllables. accident intersection letter restaurant farmer hospital direction idea stadium museum. II. Supply “ING’ behind the verbs. fly .................................................. drive .......................................... wait ..................................................... arrive ................................................. drink .......................................... eat ..................................................... copy .................................................. swim .......................................... sleep ..................................................... unload ................................................ stop .......................................... read ..................................................... III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verb in brackets. 1. What your sister (do) ____________ at the moment? -» She (be) ____________ a nurse, but she (not work) ____________ . 2. Where you (go) ____________ now? I (go) ____________ to the zoo. 3. My brother (drive) ____________ his car into the garage at the moment. 4. There (be not) ____________ any vegetables in the kitchen. 5. Where your father (be) ____________ now? -» He (read) -» a newspaper. 6. Listen! The girl (play) ____________ the piano. 7. Mai (have) ____________ lunch at home every day. 8. I (listen) ____________ to the music. 9. Mr. Tam (not travel) ____________ to Hanoi every month. Trang 69

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 10. Where you (go) ____________ now? - I (go) ____________ to the market. 11. Mai (have) ____________ lunch at home every day? 12. I (not listen) ____________ to the music now. 13. Mr. Tam (travel) ____________ to Hanoi at present? 14. I must (go) ____________ to the hospital because I have a toothache. 15. The girl (play) ____________ the piano everyday. IV. Choose the word or phrase that best fits in each sentence. 1. ____________ is John waiting for? He is waiting for the bus. a. Which b. Where c. Who d. What 2. Where does a farmer work? ____________ . a. in a stadium b. at the zoo c. in a restaurant d. on a farm 3. ____________ is he driving? His truck. a. Who b. What c. Which d. Where 4. Where is the bank? ____________ . a. 500 meters b. on Le Loi Street c. at 7:00 d. a bank 5. Are they working? No, ____________ . a. we are b. we aren’t c. they are d. they aren’t 6. ____________ - He’s doing his math. a. What he is doing? c. What does he do? b. What does she doing? d. What is he doing? 7. Hoa is ____________ her bike now. a. riding b. rides c. ride d. driving 8. They are waiting ____________ the train. a. to b. for c. of d. X 9. He ____________ his truck now. a. drive b. drives c. driving d. is driving 10. Nam and Nga are walking to school ____________ . a. every day b. every morning c. at present d. every night V. Read and choose the correct words. Quang is twelve years old and he (1) ____________ to Quang Trung School. He gets up (2) ____________ half past five. He (3) ____________ home at six o’clock. He lives (4) ____________ the school. (5) ____________ he walks to school with his friends. His classes (6) ____________ at seven and end at eleven. He (7) ____________ home at twenty past eleven and he has lunch at twelve. (8) ____________ he is in his classroom. He is learning English. He is writing the answers in his exercise book. 1. a. go b. goes c. is goes d. to go 2. a. on b. in c. at d. for 3. a. leaves b. lives c. goes d. arrive 4. a. by b. to c. above d. near 5. a. so b. or c. because d. later 6. a. start b. starts c. star d. begins 7. a. leaves b. arrives c. lives d. go 8. a. always b. often c. now d. sometimes VI. Compete sentences, using these cues. 1. Hue / eat / breakfast /now ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My brother / not play / volleyball / in the yard / at present ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Who / you / wait / at the moment? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Where / be / Miss Huong / now? // She / go / to the market. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Mrs. Pike / clean / the floor / now? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Linh is listening to music at the moment. Trang 70

HOMEWORK 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stressed syllables. idea parent temple present student tomato visit family teacher vegetables. II. Supply the correct form or tense of the verb in brackets. 1. They ____________ their homework at this time. a. do b. does c. are do d. are doing 2. She usually plays volleyball with ____________ . a. we b. our c. us d. her 3. Would you like ____________ cookies? a. a b. the c. some d. any 4. ____________ does your father go to work? by motorbike. a. How often b. How c. What d. How much 5. What ____________ her mother ____________ ? -» a nurse. a. do/do b. does/do c. does/does d. is/do 6. ____________ you swim? a. can b. do c. are d. both a and b 7. The students ____________ drink beer. a. can b. can’t c. must d. mustn’t 8. What are you ____________ now? a. go b. going c. do d. doing 9. I would like an apple. What ____________ you like? a. can b. would c. must d. X III. Make the questions for the underlined words. 1. We can sing a English song in our class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My sister is going to school by bike at present. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Her hair is black. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She buys a tube of toothpaste. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Complete the sentences, using these cues. 1. We / should / wash / hand / before meals. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I / study / English / the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My mother / need / a dozen / eggs. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He / would like / go / see a movie / his friends. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Would / you / like / go swimming / me? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

Trang 71

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 I. Supply the correct form or tense of the verb in the brackets. 1. Look at the sign! You can (tum) ____________ right. 2. You must (be) ____________ careful when you cross the road. 3. There is an intersection ahead. We must (slow) ____________ down. 4. We must (cross) ____________ the road carefully. 5. Nam’s father (not travel) ____________ to Hue by plane. 6. My mother (have) ____________ her breakfast at 7 o’clock. 7. They (play) ____________ soccer now. 8. Look! The birds (fly) ____________ in the sky. 9. I (be) ____________ eleven years old. 10. What your father (do)____________ ? -» He (be) ____________ a farmer. II. Choose the word or phrase that best fits in each sentence. 1. Where’s your mother, Lan? She ____________ the meal in the kitchen. a. cooks b. is cooking c. cook d. to cook 2. Where is Tam going? He’s going ____________ work. a. from b. on c. to d. at 3. Which sentence is correct: a. Mai is doing her homework. b. Mai are doing her homework. c. Mai do her homework. d. Mai is done her homework. 4. You ____________ stay up late watching TV. You must go to bed now. a. mustn’t b. can’t c. must d. can 5. Oh, no! It ____________ . We can’t play tennis. a. rains b. doesn’t rain c. is raining d. isn’t raining 6. We ____________ careful when crossing the road. a. must b. must be c. can d. can be 7. Are you listening to me? - Yes, ____________ . a. I do b. I am c. I have d. I can 8. We mustn’t cross the road when the traffic light is ____________ . a. red b. green c. yellow d. blue 9. At an intersection, we must ____________ . a. go fast b. run out c. slow down d. ride quickly 10. ____________ is waiting for him? A farmer. a. Who b. What c. Which d. Where III. Reading and choose True or False. Nam is riding home from school. The Street is very busy. There are a lot of bicycles, motorbikes, cars, buses, ... in the Street. He is Corning to an intersection. The traffic lights are red, so he must stop. There is a motorbike in front of Nam. It isn’t stopping. A car is Corning from the right. It’s going straight at the motorbike. The accident happens. 1. Nam goes home on foot. ......................................................... 2. There are lots of vehicles in the street. ......................................................... 3. He must stop because the traffic lights are red. ......................................................... 4. There is a motorbike behind Nam. ......................................................... 5. Nam is riding a bike. ......................................................... IV. Put the following words in their correct orders. 1. must / you / drive / carefully / car / your. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. roads / accidents / many / are / there / our / on. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Street / can’t / you / go / into / that. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Trung’s father/ a / policeman / and / has/ a / difficult/is / he/job. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Sign / warns / us / that / must not / go / straight ahead/ you. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 72

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 V. Make the questions for the underlined words. 1. The children are playing in the park. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My father is watching television now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The girls are waiting for a train. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Mr. Tam is traveling to Nha Trang by plane. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put the mark on the stressed syllables. biology literature letter supermarket garden travel classmate afternoon eraser breakfast. II. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to complete each sentence. 1. We live ____________ 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. a. at b. in c. on d. with 2. Tam and Nam ____________ in HCM City ____________ their family. a. lives/in b. live/with c. lives/with d. living/to 3. How does she go to school? She ____________ to school. a. walks b. goes by foot c. walk d. foot 4. I go to bed ____________ half past ten. a. in b. on c. by d. at 5. Is your village ____________ ? No, it’s quiet. a. noisy b. beautiful c. big d. country 6. Where is your mother, Lan? She ____________ the meal in the kitchen. a. cooks b. is cooking c. cook d. to cook 7. The children aren’t ____________ soccer now. a. to play b. play c. playing d. plays 8. What ____________ do we have today? English and Math. a. time b. subjects c. class d. school 9. Mai ____________ the housework every day. a. does b. do c. go d. goes 10. Is that your teacher? Yes, that’s ____________ teacher. a. his b. my c. her d. your 11. Lan’s father is a worker. He works in a ____________ . a. school b. hospital c. museum d. factory 12. There aren’t ____________ books on the desk. a. an b. a c. some d. any 13. How is your mother? She is ____________ . a. forty b. beautiful c. fine d. b and c are correct 14. How many ____________ are there? There is one. a. couch’s b. stereos c. table d. photoes 15. What ____________ your mother do? a. do b. are c. does d. its III. Complete the sentences with the correct verb form. 1. Hoang (not/have) ____________ Math on Friday. 2. What time you (start) ____________ your classes? 3. Hoa(listen) ____________ to music every night. 4. You(be) ____________ in classes? 5. She (not/brush) ____________ her teeth after meals. 6. Listen! The girl (play)____________ the piano. 7. I (listen) ____________ to the music now. 8. What you (do)____________ after school? Trang 73

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 IV. Matching A and B. A B 1. Do you live in an apartment? a. Many books and pictures 2. What’s there in your room? b. There are twenty-four 3. When does she have Math? c. No. I live in a house 4. Is he an engineer? d. On Thursday 5. How many desks are there? e. No. He’s a doctor 6. Whose car is it? f. It’s her 1 ____________ , 2 ____________ , 3 ____________ , 4 ____________ , 5 ____________ , 6 ____________ . V. Complete the passage, use the words given in the box. Are waiting - so - leaves - now - arrives - goes - near - has - start - at Quang is twelve years old and he (1) ____________ to Quang Trung school. He gets up (2) ____________ half past five. He (3) ____________ home at six o’clock. He lives (4) ____________ the school (5) ____________ he walks to school with his friends. His classes (6) ____________ at seven and end at eleven. He (7) ____________ home at twenty past eleven and he (8) ____________ lunch at twelve. (9) ____________ he is in his classroom. He is learning English. He is learning the answers in his exercise book. His friends (10) ____________ for him in the school yard. VI. Make the questions for underlined words. 1. My father travels to Ha Noi by plane. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She is a teacher. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I usually watch TV after school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They are listening to music at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He gets up at 6 every day. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. My school has four floors. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Make the sentences with the givens words. 1. I / go / school / bike. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My father / travel / HN / plane. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There / an armchair / living room. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She / do / her homework / after school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How / your parents / travel / the hospital? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Put an accent mark onto the stressed syllables. opposite museum breakfast literature engineer eraser armchair eleven II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently. 1. a. name b. classmate c. paper 2. a. open b. old c. close 3. a. student b. desk c. bench 4. a. sit b. engineer c. thirty 5. a. brush b. up c. nurse 6. a. my b. thirty c. country

television goodbye. d. small d. do d. television d. window d. number d. city Trang 74

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 7. a. parks b. pianos c. windows d. rulers 8. a. tomatoes b. boxes c. watches d. buses 9. a. sisters b. parents c. stamps d. mouths 10. a. house b. horse c. hello d. hour III. Choose the best answer. 1. Are there any ____________ near your house? a. flower b. trees c. mountain d. lake 2. There ____________ trees and flowers, a river, a lake and a paddy field a. is b. are c. has d. have 3. The restaurant is ____________ the drugstore. a. next b. near to c. opposite d. behind of 4. I go to school at a quarter past seven. a. seven fifteen b. seven thirty c. fifteen past seven d. a & c are correct 5. What ____________ she do after school? a. do b. does c. is d. are 6. Do ____________ play games? a. children b. girl c. boy d. student 7. We are late ____________ school. a. in b. at c. on d. for 8. My class is on the ____________ floor. a. five b. fiveth c. fifth d. b & c 9. What ____________ ? - “She’s a teacher.” a. do you do b. does he do c. does she do d. do she d 10. I live ____________ 23/4 Tran Hung Dao street. a. at b. of c. in d. on IV. Use the correct verb form. 1. Where they (be) ____________ now? -» They (play) ____________ soccer in the yard. 2. My mother (work) ____________ in a hospital. She (be) ____________ a doctor. 3. There (be) ____________ any books on the table? 4. What time Ba (get) ____________ up? He (get) ____________ up at 6 o’clock. 5. His school (have) ____________ 3 floors and his class (be) ____________ on the third floor. 6. You can’t (park) ____________ your car here. 7. Listen! The teacher (read) ____________ the book. V. Choose True or False. Mary : What do you after school? Lan : We do the housework and watch TV. Mary : Do you play sport? Lan : Yes. We play volleyball. What about you? Mary : We play tennis, soccer and basketball in the afternoon and watch TV or listen to music in the evening. Lan : What time do you do your homework? Mary : We don’t usually have homework. 1. Lan watches TV after school. ......................................................... 2. Lan and her friends usually play tennis, soccer and basketball ......................................................... 3. Mary and her friends play game ......................................................... 4. Mary and her friends play sports in the afternoon. ......................................................... 5. Mary and her friends have homework every day. ......................................................... VI. Make questions for the undermined words. 1. She gets up at 6.30 . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Yes. There is a hotel near the park. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. He has English on Monday and Tuesday. Trang 75

TEST 3

I. Put a mark on the stressed syllables. open armchair stereo country village geography beautiful museum II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently. 1. a. he b. me c. we 2. a. ten b. seven c. she 3. a. five b. sister c. fine 4. a. come b. open. c. close 5. a. doctor b. not c. box 6. a. pen b. desk. c. children 7. a. open b. pencil c. student 8. a. bag b. stand c. match III. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each sentence. 1. Ti: Please sit down. -Teo:____________ a. Yes, I do b. please, I will c. thank you 2. Fiona ____________ go to school by bike, she ____________ . a. does/ walks b. doesn’t/ walks c. don’t walk 3. Which classes do you have ____________ Thursday? a. in b. on c. at 4. There ____________ a museum, a clinic and a park near his house a. is b. are c. aren’t 5. Nga and Lan are waiting ____________ Lien in front of their school. a. in b. on c. of 6. Nga is ____________ her bike at the moment. a. rides b. riding c. ridding 7. How do you spell 12? -» It’s ____________ . a. twelve b. twelfth c. twenty 8. “What time is it?” It’s 10:50 ” a. Ten fifty b. ten to eleven c. ten to ten 9. ____________ school do you go to?

between neighborhood. d. pen d. twenty d. nine d. old d. hot d. spell d. listen d. name d. No d. doesn’t walk d. with d. have d. for d. ride d. twevlve d. both a and b Trang 76

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 a. Where b. When c. How d. Which 10. How many ____________ are there in the classroom? a. door b. window c. benches d. chair 11. Are there ____________ chairs in the living room? a. some b. a c. any d. and 12. She doesn’t have ____________ timetable. a. his b. she c. her d. he IV. Supply the verbs in the correct form. 1. They (not be) ____________ Miss Lan’s students. 2. Mr. Ha (go)____________ to work by car every day. 3. There (not be) ____________ any stores in the country. 4. Their house (have) ____________ a beautiful yard? 5. Where Nam’s sister (work)____________ ? 6. There (be) ____________ a small picture in my room? 7. These boys (play) ____________ soccer in the school yard. 8. He (not watch) ____________ TV in the living room now. V. Make questions for the underlined parts. 1. He travels to Ha Noi by plane. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Yes. There is a drugstore near my house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My school has four floors ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. No. This isn’t my bag. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Mai goes swimming with her friends on Sundays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I have English and Math on Fridays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Put the words in the correct order. 1. Lan / the / TV / does / watch / in / evening /?/ ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. from/ I/ past/ eleven/ seven/to/quarter / classes /have / a/. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. listening / to / in / Nam / his / music / is / bedroom. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. is / the / to/ bakery / next / drugstore / the. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Complete the passage. Mimi is my pet cat. She’s 2 years old. She is (1) ____________ very lazy cat. She (2) ____________ up very late in the (3) ____________ then she (4) ____________ a small breakfast with her favorite food-fish. She (5) ____________ not go to school, so she lies (6) ____________ the sun almost all day. She doesn’t have any favorite toys, sometimes she goes to my grandma and sits next to her on the (7) ____________ . She (8) ____________ watching Tom and Jerry on TV (9) ____________ grandma. I think she likes Tom in the movie a lot. I (10) ____________ Mimi very much. 1. a. a b. the c. an d. X 2. a. takes b. gets c. puts d. washes 3. a. morning b. afternoon c. evening d. night 4. a. has b. gets c. takes d. have 5. a. do b. does c. to do d. doesn’t 6. a. on b. in c. at d. of 7. a. table b. couch c. stool d. living room 8. a. like b. liking c. likes d. is liking 9. a. in b. on c. with d. at Trang 77

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 10. a. love

b. read c. do d. likes --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 4

I. Put the stress on the right syllables of each word. classmate children family engineer country breakfast music village market motorbike. II. Multiple choices. 1. What’s this? – ____________ is a window. a. It b. They c. There d. That 2. How many ____________ are there in your class? a. boy b. student c. girl d. students 3. A: Good morning. How are you? -» B: ____________ . a. I’m fine. Thanks you. b. I’m fine, thanks. c. We fine, thank. d. We fine, thank you. 4. This is my brother. ____________ name is Long. a. My b. His c. Her d. He 5. What are these? - They’re ____________ bookshelves. a. an b. a c. the d. Ø 6. He can ____________ . a. swims b. is swimming c. swim d. swimming 7. How do you go to school? a. on bicycle b. on foot b. by foot d. bicycle 8. What is she doing? - She ____________ . a. play games b. is playing games c. playing games d. plays games 9. Is your father a doctor or an engineer? – ____________ . a. He’s a doctor b. He’s a engineer c. Yes, he is d. No, he isn’t 10. What is ____________ your house? a. next b. in front of c. front of d. between 11. My mother takes care of sick people in the hospital. She’s a ____________ . a. nurse b. teacher c. engineer d. worker 12. What are these? a. They’re a boxes. b. They’re box. c. They’re an boxes. d. They’re boxes. 13. Tom, ____________ , please! a. come here b. comes here c. to come here d. Ø 14. ____________ are you? - I’m in my living room. a. How b. Where c. What d. Who 15. My classroom is on ____________ floor. a. second b. the second c. two d. secondth III. Sully the correct form.. 1. She (be) ____________ a doctor. She (work) ____________ in a hospital. 2. I (read) ____________ a comic book at the moment. 3. Hoa (not / brush) ____________ her teeth after meals. 4. You must (do) ____________ your homework carefully. 5. There (be) ____________ a table, a chair and a light in this room. 6. My family (have) ____________ four people. 7. You (play) ____________ soccer now? - Yes, I am. 8. She (go) ____________ to school by bike? IV. Read and complete the passage, use the words given. start have student breakfast leave get dressed end at bike near Hi. My name is Trang. I’m a (1) ____________ . I get up (2) ____________ six o’clock. I take a shower and (3) ____________ . I have (4) ____________ , then I (5) ____________ the house at half past six. The school is (6)

Trang 78

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 ____________ my ____________ house, so I go to school by (7) ____________ . Classes (8) ____________ at seven and (9) ____________ at half past eleven. I go home and (10) ____________ lunch at twelve o’clock. V. Complete the sentences, using these cues. 1. It / be / old / book. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There / be / forty-five / student / my class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / go / school / foot. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The restaurant / be / next/ house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Make the questions for underlined words. 1. My name’s Linh. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I’m a student. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She doesn’t go to school because she’s sick. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Her friends are playing volleyball in the garden now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He jogs in the park every day. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Answer about you. 1. Which class are you in? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Which school do you go to? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What do you do every night? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Is there a yard in your house? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Are these your books? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 5

I. Put the stress onto the correct syllables. apartment hospital engineer geography literature police routine living room television between. II. Multiple choices. 1. Do you go to work ____________ bicycle? a. on b. with c. by d. at 2. ____________ ? His flat is on the fourth floor. a. Where’s Tom’s flat b. Where are Tom’s flat c. Is Tom’s flat on the fourth floor d. Where does Tom live 3. There’s a flower garden ____________ the house. a. in front b. at front of c. in front of d. by front of 4. The school is ____________ my house, ____________ I walk. a. near - but b. near - so c. near - because d. near - however 5. Is that your classroom? -» ____________ . a. No, I’m not b. Yes, itis c. Yes, lam d. a & c 6. What time do they have history? a. How b. Which c. Where d. When 7. Do you live in town ____________ in the country? a. and b. or c. but d. X Trang 79

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 8. She lives in ____________ in the country. a. a house beautiful b. beautiful a house c. house a beautiful d. a beautiful house 9. The train ____________ Tokyo ____________ 4 p.m. a. leaves - at b. leaves - in c. leave - at d. leave - in 10. How many floors does your school have? Which sentence is the same meaning? a. How many floors is there in your school? b. how many floors your school has? c. How many floors are there in your school? d. how many floors are your school have? 11. What’s ____________ name? -» His father’s name is Tuan. a. Phong father’s b. Phong’ s father’s c. Phong’s father d. father of Phong 12. What time does Tom have lunch? – ____________ . a. At seven o’clock b. In the morning c. At night d. At eleven o’clock 13. It’s late. Her children want to go ____________ home now. a. for b. at c. to d. X 14. I am rideing my bike at the moment. A B C D 15. What do you spell your name? A B C D 16. My parents and I have lunch at eleven a quarter. A B C D III. Supply the correct form. 1. Oh, no! It (rain) ____________ . It always (rain) ____________ a lot in April. 2. I (read) ____________ a very good book right now. 3. She’s a doctor. She (work) ____________ in General Hospital. 4. You (look) ____________ for Tom? He’s out. 5. She (live) ____________ with an English family in London. 6. Lan (have) ____________ two sisters. 7. My brother (get) ____________ up at half past six. 8. Kate can’t come to the phone because she (wash) ____________ her hair. IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Mrs. Baker is a doctor. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No. we aren’t playing soccer at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. No. They are workers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She often walks to the supermarket with her friends. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We are in class 6C . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Read and choose “True or False”. Xuan’s family lives in a small house in the country. It’s beautiful. There are many flowers in front of her house. Behind the house, there is a well. To the right of the house, there is a rice paddy. To the left of the house, there are tall trees. It’s very quiet here and Xuan loves her house very much. Her father is a worker. He works in a big factory. Every day he goes to work by motorbike. He works in the factory from Monday to Friday. He doesn’t work on Saturdays and Sundays. 1. Xuan’s house is very beautiful. ......................................................... 2. Her mother is a worker. ......................................................... 3. Every day he works in the hospital from Monday to Friday ......................................................... 4. She likes her house very much. ......................................................... Trang 80

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Compete the sentences, using these cues. 1. She / go / swim / her friends. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / sometimes /go / the zoo / their friends. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / read / comic book / my bedroom / now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How / you / travel / Nha Trang / your family? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 6

I. Put a mark onto the stressed syllables. number open engineer country geography children routine noisy between flower. II. Choose the word or phrase that completes each sentence. 1. Does she play soccer? - No, she ____________ . a. do b. don’t c. does d. doesn’t 2. They sometimes have dinner in a ____________ . a. hotel b. restaurant c. temple d. museum 3. I play ____________ after school. a. games b. math c. stereo d. dinner 4. He is ____________ engineer. a. a b. these c. those d. an 5. Lan and I ____________ students. a. am b. is c. are d. have 6. Her house is near a market. It’s very ____________ . a. quiet b. noisy c. far d. fine 7. “Coop Mark” is a big ____________ . a. stadium b. museum c. supermarket d. apartment 8. Does she live in a house? - Yes, ____________ . a. she is b. she isn’t c. she does d. she do 9. We can take a bus at the ____________ . a. bus station b. bakery c. bookstore d. stadium 10. She goes to school ____________ bike. a. on b. by c. in d. with 11. My friends and I ____________ games now. a. are playing b. am playing c. are doing d. am doing with 12. His father is a doctor. He works in the ____________ . a. factory b. school c. rice paddy d. hospital III. Complete the sentences with the right form of the words in blankets. 1. She (travel)____________ to work by train? 2. Where your parents (live)____________ ? 3. Mrs. Lan (not / visit) ____________ her friends by car. 4. Tom (have) ____________ Math on Monday. 5. Alice and Mary (not / go)____________ to bed late. 6. The children (go) ____________ to the zoo now. 7. What time her friends (start) ____________ the second class? 8. Her family (not / live) ____________ in the country. 9. Let’s (help) ____________ Mom, Lan. She (clean) ____________ the floor. 10. She usually (watch) ____________ TV after school, but today she (tidy) ____________ her room. IV. Read the following passage and then fill in the blank with a suitable word. in the after at relax end your every day Trang 81

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 my homework start in the morning Nam : Hello, Ba. What time do you get up (1)____________ ? Ba : I get up at 5:30 Nam : Do you go to school (2)____________ ? Ba : No, I do not. I go to school in the afternoon. Nam : When do (3) ____________ classes start? Ba : My classes (4) ____________ at one o’clock and (5) ____________ at 5:15. ' Nam : What do you do (6) ____________ school? Ba : I go home and (7)____________ . Nam : What do you do (8) ____________ evening? Ba : I stay (9) ____________ home and do (10) ____________ V. Find a mistake (A, B, C or D) and correct it. 1. How much teachers are there in your school? A B C D ......................................................... 2. Bill’s brother often plays game after school. A B C D ......................................................... 3. I ride bike to the country every Saturday A B C D ......................................................... 4. There are a teacher and forty students in our classroom. A B C D ......................................................... 5. What do Thu and her sister often does in the evening? A B C D ......................................................... VI. Write meaningful sentences, using the words given. 1. He / live / house / near / park. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How / Lan / go / school / every day /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Mai / not / have / English classes /Thursday . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There / a vegetable garden / front of / her house? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Where / she / travel / the summer? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. My mother / go / work / seven / morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 7

I. Put an accent mark over the stressed syllables. armchair beautiful stadium hotel museum river II. Vocabulary and grammar 1. Every morning, John usually breakfast at home. a. have b. has c. is 2. She ____________ in a factory. a. work b. working c. works 3. There are a lot of flowers in ____________ of the house. a. front b. at c. on 4. Do you like ____________ to music? a. listen b. listens c. listenes 5. My grandparents’ flat is on the ____________ floor. a. five b. fifth c. fifteen 6. I don’t have ____________ bread for breakfast. a. some b. any c. a few

neighborhood apartment. d. are d. workes d. behind d. listening d. fivth d. one Trang 82

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 7. ____________ do we have literature? On Tuesday. a. when b. how c. what d. where 8. How many pencils ____________ your younger sister have? a. do b. are there c. does d. is there 9. His father is a taxi driver. He ____________ a car. a. drive b. driving c. drives d. to drive 10. The children ____________ their bikes at the moment. a. riding b. are riding c. are rideing d. is riding 11. There ____________ many people at the meeting. a. have b. has c. is d. are 12. There is a lake to the left ____________ the house. a. at b. in c. off d. of 13. My job starts at 8 a.m and ____________ at 4 p.m. a. finishes b. ends c. begins d. a & b 14. There ____________ some milk in the bottle. a. have b. are c. has d. is 15. Nam ____________ his homework every day. a. do b. does c. doesn’t d. don’t 16. We can take a bus at the ____________ . a. bus station b. bakery c. bookstore d. stadium 17. My garden is on the left of my house. A B C D 18. She is runing. She runs very fast. A B C D III. Use the correct form or tense of the verb. 1. They (travel) ____________ to Da Lat by bus. 2. Where your aunt (live)____________ ? 3. What time your sister (get) ____________ up? 4. Thanh usually (watch) ____________ TV in the evening. 5. They can (swim) ____________ . 6. Hoa (read) ____________ a comic book at this time. 7. Binh and Hoa (not have) ____________ English on Friday. 8. There (be) ____________ any chairs in the room? 9. How your father (go) ____________ ? 10. Listen! Mrs. Chau’s children (sing) ____________ a song. 11. I (go) ____________ to school on foot every day. 12. There (not be) ____________ any water in the bottle. 13. We (not live) ____________ in Ha Noi. 14. What your mother (do)____________ ? 15. What you (be) ____________ , Nam? I (study) ____________ English in my class. IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. My father goes to work by motorbike. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She has 2 rulers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There are some trees in front of my house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They go to school at 6 a.m every morning. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He lives in the city with his aunt and uncle. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. No. there isn’t any orange juice in the bottle. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 83

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 7. No. She is Lan. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. They usually go fishing in their free time. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. My father is a worker. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. Her friends have math on Wednesday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 8

I. Match the sentences in column A with those in column B. A B 1. Where do you live? a. Workers. 2. Do you go to school on foot? b. A vegetable garden. 3. What is there next to your house? c. Yes, I do. 4. What do your parents do? d. In the countryside. e. In the Street. 1 ____________ 2 ____________ 3 ____________ 4 ____________ II. Choose the best answer to complete each sentence. 1. ____________ is her house? It’s on Vuon Lai Street. a. what b. where c. when d. how 2. The hospital is ____________ to the restaurant. a. behind b. front c. opposite d. next 3. Ba’s mother is a worker. She works in a ____________ . a. bookstore b. hospital c. factory d. bakery 4. On Sunday Peter ____________ up at 6 then he ____________ a shower. a. get/take b. goes/takes c. gets/takes d. get/takes 5. I have classes ____________ 1 p.m. a. on b. of c. in d. at 6. What do you do ____________ school? a. after b. behind c. next d. about 7. Viet ____________ literature on Saturday. a. have b. has c. is d. are 8. Where ____________ your parents ____________ ? a. does/lives b. do/lives c. do/live d. does/live 9. Her brother ____________ school at 5 p.m. a. goes b. go c. leave d. leaves 10. There ____________ 10 lights on the ceiling. a. is b. are c. have d. has 11. Is there ____________ water in the glass? a. some b. any c. a d. an 12. ____________ people are there in your family? a. How much b. How many c. Where d. Which 13. I go to the zoo ____________ . a. on food b. by foot c. on foot d. by feet 14. ____________ does your sister go to school? By bicycle. a. How far b. How long c. How often d. How 15. I ____________ TV at this time. a. watching b. is watching c. are watch d. am watching III. Answer the questions about you. 1. How many floors does your school have? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. When do you have math class? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 84

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 6 HỌC KỲ 1 3. How do you go to school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What time do you have lunch? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What do you do after school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. What are you doing now? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Use the given words to write meaningful sentences. 1. There/ a rice paddy / near her house. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She/ leave/ the house/ a quarter to seven. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My brother/ walk/ school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. We/ not have/ geography class/ Monday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Her friends/ do/ their homework/ now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. How/ she/ go/ work/ in the morning? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Read and choose the correct words. Quang is twelve years old and he goes to Quang Trung School. He gets up (1) ____________ half past five. He (2) ____________ home at six o’clock. He lives near the school, (3) ____________ he walks to school with his friends. His classes (4) ____________ at seven and end at eleven. He (5) ____________ home at twenty past eleven and he has lunch at twelve. (6) ____________ he is in his classroom. He is learning English. He is writing the answers in his exercise book. 1- a. on b. in c. at d. for 2. a. leaves b. lives c. goes d. arrive 3. a. so b. or c. because d. later 4. a. start b. starts c. star d. begins 5. a. leaves b. arrives c. lives d. go 6. a. always b. often c. now d. sometimes --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 85

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

MỤC LỤC UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION UNIT 3: AT HOME UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK UNIT 8: PLACES

Trang 2 Trang 11 Trang 21 Trang 31 Trang 40 Trang 49 Trang 59 Trang 69

Trang 1

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL A. FRIENDS I. GLOSSARY:

NOUN ADV 1. uncle : chú, bác, dượng 8. back : trở lại, lại 2. aunt : cô, dì, thím 9. again : lại, nữa 3. lunch room : phòng ăn nhẹ 10. still : vẫn, vẫn còn 4. parent : cha hoặc mẹ 11. pretty : khá, tương đối -» parents : cha mẹ VERB APJ 5. to see : gặp, thấy, xem 12. nice : tốt, đẹp, hay 6. to meet : làm quen với, gặp 13. different : khác (from) 7. to miss : nhớ, nhớ nhung 14. unhappy : không vui. - Nice to meet / see you : rất vui được gặp bạn (làm quen) - See you later : hẹn gặp lại II. GRARMMAR: 1. Adverb of time: STILL (vẫn còn) ❖ Vi trí: + đứng trước động từ thường + đứng sau động từ Tobe + đứng giữa trợ động từ và động từ thường Ex: (1) It is still raining. (2) He still lives in London. (3) Do you still live in Hue? 2. Adverbs SO and TOO (cũng vậy; cũng thế) ❖ Dùng để biểu thị sự đồng tình hoặc đồng ý trong câu khẳng định. ❖ Vi trí: + Too đặt cuối câu, cách bằng dấu phẩy. + So đặt đầu câu nhưng chủ từ và động từ phải đảo vị trí. * TO BE /Modal verbs: So + be/Modal Verb + S Ex: (1) He is tired. (2) She can speak English. -» So am I / I am, too. -» So can I. / I can, too. (3) My father is a doctor. (My brother) (4) Lam must go to school now. (Her sister) -» .................................................................................. -» .......................................................................................... -» .................................................................................. -» .......................................................................................... * Ordinary verbs (động từ thường): ta dùng trợ động từ (auxiliary verbs) So + do / does +S S + do / does. too. Ex: (1) They like coffee. (2) My friend misses the bus. -» We do, too. / So do we. -» I ............................................................................... (3) We do our homework. (4) His brother learns hard. -» She ................................................................... -» He ............................................................................ 3. COMPARISION (So sánh): * SHORT ADJ (tính từ ngắn) Tính từ ngắn là tính từ có 1 âm tiết. Tuy nhiên những tính từ có hai âm tiết nhưng tận cùng bằng “y”, “er”, “ow” cũng được xem như tính từ ngắn và áp dụng theo công thức của Adj ngắn. Ex: clever -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... narrow -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... pretty -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... Nguyên tắc chung: Comparative (so sánh hơn): ADJ + ER Superlative (so sánh nhất): THE ADJ + EST Trang 2

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 ADJ COMPARATIVES SUPERLATIVES 1. short shorter the shortest 2. tall ............................................................. ......................................................................... 3. old ............................................................. ......................................................................... 4. new ............................................................. ......................................................................... * Lưu ý: Nếu tính từ tận cùng bằng: 1. Một phụ âm “e”: chỉ thêm R, hoặc ST Ex: large -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... nice -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... 2. Phụ âm + nguyên âm + phụ âm: ta phải gấp đôi phụ âm cuối trước khi thêm ER hoặc EST Ex: big -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... thin -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... 3. Một phụ âm + y: đổi y -» i trước khi thêm ER hoặc EST Ex: happy -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... pretty -» ......................................................... ......................................................................... * Các trường hợp ngoại lệ: ADJ COMPARATIVES SUPERLATIVES good better the best bad worse the worst many / much more the most little less the least far farther / further the farthest / the furthest * Công thức: So sánh hơn: S + be + short Adj + ER + than + Noun / Pronoun So sánh nhất: S + be + the + short Adj + EST Ex: (1) Tom is older than Mary. (2) This book is thicker than that one. (3) She is the youngest daughter in the family. (4) This City is the biggest of three cities. 4. INDEFINITE QUANTIRERS (từ chỉ lượng bất định) * Much, Many (nhiều): Many + Ns (Danh từ đếm được số nhiều) Much + UN (Danh từ không đếm được) - Dùng trong câu hỏi và câu phủ định. - Chỉ dùng trong câu xác định khi có các trạng từ đi kèm như: very, too, so. Ex: (1) I don’t have much time to read. (2) There aren’t many books on the bookshelf. (3) We have so many exercises to do. (4) He drinks too much beer. * A lot of / lots of (nhiều): A lot of / lots of + Ns (đếm được) + UN (không đếm được) - Thường dùng trong câu khẳng định. Ex: (1) He drinks a lot of milk. (2) Nam has lots of friends. (3) 1 have a lot of gifts on my birthday.

B. NAMES and ADDRESSES I. CLOSSARY: NOUN 1. family name = surname: họ 2. middle name: tên đệm 3. bus stop: trạm xe buýt 4. distance: khoảng cách

8. means of transport: phương tiện giao thông 9. stone: cục đá ADJ 10. far: xa Trang 3

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 5. survey: sự khảo sát, điều tra 11. successful: thành công 6. survey form: bàn khảo sát, phiếu điều tra ADV 7. courtyard: sân trong 12. about: khoảng chừng II. GRAMMAR: * HOW FAR (bao xa): dùng để hỏi về khoảng cách, quãng đường. Q: How far is it + from ... to ...? A: It’s (about) + .... meter(s)/kilometer(s) Ex: How far is it from your house to school? It’s about one kilometer. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Make sentences, using “TOO, SO”. 1. They are in class 7A. -» I .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. She is from Ha Noi. -» We .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Loan has Math on Monday -» They ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I like tea. -» My friend ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5. Peter and Mary are playing chess. -» We ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. He can drive a car. -» His sister ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7. He lives in HCM City -» She ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. They speak English very well. -» My friends .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Mary should brush her teeth after meals. -» You ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. I must go home now. -» They ...................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Complete sentences, using comparatives of short adjectives. 1. Nobody is (happy) ___________Maria. 2. The Empire State building is (tall) ___________the Statue of Liberty. 3. Trains are (fast) ___________buses. 4. A book is (thin) ___________a dictionary. 5. The vegetables in this shop are (fresh) ___________ the ones in the supermarket. 6. She looks about 60, but in fact she’s much (young) ___________ she looks. 7. Nam is (strong) ___________his cousin. 8. Wool is (warm) ___________cotton. 9. Thailand is (hot) ___________Korea. 10. Reading a book is (good) ___________ watching TV. III. Complete sentences, using superlatives of short adjectives. 1. Nam is (tall) ___________student in my class. 2. The Mekong River is (long) ___________river in Viet Nam. 3. Miss Lan is (pretty) ___________girl in my neighborhood. 4. Mt. Everest is (high) ___________mountain in the world. 5. Mr. Khoa is (fast) ___________runner. 6. This is (big) ___________house which I’ve seen. 7. Lan is (smart) ___________ student in my class. 8. Miss. Lien is (clever) ___________ dressmaker. 9. Sahara is (large) ___________ desert in the world. Trang 4

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 10. His brother is (good) ___________boss. IV. Complete sentences with “much, many, a lot of /lots of”. 1. Her father never drinks ___________coffee for breakfast. 2. Viet Nam has ___________beautiful beaches. 3. I don’t have ___________time to read this book. 4. There are too___________ pictures on the wall. 5. He grows ___________rice in his paddy fields. 6. Mary’s new school has___________ students. 7. Her friends drink ___________Coca-Cola. 8. This hotel doesn’t have ___________rooms. 9. She drinks too ___________ tea. 10. He doesn’t have ___________money in his pocket. V. Make questions with “How far” and give the answers. 1. Your house / Ben Thanh market? // 5 kilometers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Lan’s Club / the zoo? // three kilometers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Here / your school? // a short walk. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Your friend’s house / the stadium? // 10 kilometers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The market / the bus stop? // 400 meters ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. different uncle calculator visit parent destination eraser pretty beautiful travel II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. Jane lives in New York but her parents___________ in Washington. a. still live b. live still c. live d. a & c 2. ___________class is he in? a. What b. Which c. When d. a & b 3. Basketball is different ___________baseball. a. of b. with c. for d. from 4. ___________is it from your house to school? - About 20 meters. a. How far b. How long c. How often d. How old 5. Jane and I are___________ the same class ___________ school. a. at / at b. in / in c. in / at d. on / at 6. He likes swimming, and___________ does his brother. a. and b. too c. so d. but 7. They live ___________5A Nguyen Du Street. a. at b. on c. in d. to 8. ___________are these dresses?” - “I think they’re fifty dollars each.” a. How many b. How much c. How far d. How long 9. When we are free, we always help our Mum ___________ the housework. a. for b. about c. doing d. with 10. Mr. Jones can’t see you now. He’s busy. a. out b. sick c. not at home d. not free Trang 5

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. Marry’s brother lives still in USA with her uncle. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. I like fried chicken very much and my younger sister likes. too A B C D ..................................................................... 3. They are going to visiting their old teacher tomorrow. A B C D ..................................................................... 4. Would you like play volleyball with us? A B C D ..................................................................... 5. How many student are there in your class? A B C D ..................................................................... IV. READ. A. Read and choose the item (a, b, c, d). Dear, Ben. I am writing to ___________ (1) you about my new school. It’s about ten kilometers from my house, so I often go to school by bus. Mr. James is a teacher___________ (2) my school and he is very nice. His sister is also a teacher at school. My ___________ (3) friend is not at my school. She goes to a small school near her ___________ (4). Now tell me about your new school. Is it a big ___________ (5) beautiful school? Who is your teacher? Is he or she good? Please write to me ___________ (6). Love, Sarah. 1. a. say b. tell c. speak d. talk 2. a. in b. at c. on d. a and b are correct 3. a. best b. most c. best d. a and b are correct 4. a. home b. country c. school d. house 5. a. or b. and c. as well as d. but 6. a. now b. as soon as c. soon d. X B. Read and choose True or False. Lan is a new student in class 7A. Her new school is in HCM City. It’s bigger than her old school. She is from Dong Nai. She lives with her grandparents in HCM City. She has a lot of friends in Dong Nai. But she doesn’t have any friends in HCM City. So she is very unhappy. She misses her parents and friends. 1. Lan isn’t an old student in class 7A. ......................................................................................................... 2. Her old school is smaller than her new one. ......................................................................................................... 3. She lives with her parents in HCM City. ......................................................................................................... 4. She has lots of friends in HCM City. ......................................................................................................... V. Supply the correct forms or tenses of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Hoa (have) ___________lots of friends in Ha Noi. 2. Nhan (miss) ___________ his family because he (be) ___________ away from house. 3. Who Loan (stay) ___________ with now? 4. Nice (meet) ___________you, Miss Ha! 5. Everything (be) ___________OK! 6. Lan (go) ___________to HCM City next week. 7. Loan (not have) ___________ many friends in her new school. 8. Hung (come) ___________from Vinh but he (stay) ___________with his relatives in HCM City at the moment. 9. Where your new friend (live) ___________, Nga? 10. She should (come) ___________to her class early. VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. I never go to school late. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. It’s cool in the fall. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I’d like a dozen eggs, please. Trang 6

TEST 2

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. mountain teacher student listen sister computer television population homework present II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. I am a student and___________. a. she am, too b. she is, too c. so she is d. so am she 2. Hung___________ television with his family at the moment. a. watch b. watches c. is watching d. watching 3. “___________are you so late?” a. What b. Why c. When d. Where 4. Her cooking is ___________than my wife’s. a. bad b. good c. bader d. worse 5. Sue is the ___________student in her class. a. hardest b. harder c. hard d. a & b 6. Scott often goes to school ___________foot. a. at b. on c. at d. by 7. London is a big City, but it is ___________than Mexico City. a. the smaller b. smaller c. the smallest d. smallest 8. She ___________with her parents. a. live b. is living c. still lives d. lives still 9. He is usually late ___________school. a. in b. for c. on d. at 10. Look! My aunt ___________. a. corning b. comes c. come d. is corning III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. I write diary every night and so write Lan. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. The weather today is gooder than yesterday. A B C D ..................................................................... 3. Look! The children is flying the kites. A B C D ..................................................................... 4. This dress is the prettier one in the store. A B C D ..................................................................... 5. She is learning English but I am. too. A B C D ..................................................................... IV. READ Trang 7

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 A. Fill the blank with the suitable words. bus stop post office address family name movie theater bookstore stadium hospital restaurant market 1. Her home’s ___________is 53A Tran Hung Dao Street. 2. His father is a doctor. He works at Trung Vuong ___________. 3. 1 am going to the ___________to send a letter. 4. They usually go to the ___________to have dinner. 5. They are waiting for a bus at the___________. 6. Their children like going to the ___________to read comic books. 7. My mother often walks to Ben Thanh___________ every morning. 8. We are going to the ___________to see an interesting film. 9. There is an interesting soccer match at the___________. 10. His ___________is Tran. B. Complete the dialogue. Mr. Brown : Good morning. What’s your name? Huy : My name is Huy Mr. Brown : What (1) ___________? Huy : It’s Tran Mr. Brown : How (2) ___________? Huy : I’m fourteen years old. Mr. Brown : Good. And which (3) ___________? Huy : I’m in grade 7. Mr. Brown : What (4) ___________? Huy : I study at Quang Trung school Mr. Brown : And the last question. Where (5) ___________? Huy : 145 Truong Chinh street. V. Supply the correct tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. We (not like) ___________hot weather. 2. She (like) ___________cool drinks? 3. My parents (live) ___________in HCM City. 4. He (come) ___________ to Ha Noi next week. 5. Hoa (visit) ___________her friends this summer vacation? 6. I (not go) ___________ to the movie theater in mv free time. 7. Minh (not play) ___________badminton at the moment. 8. Hoa (be) ___________a student in class 7A? 9. There (be) ____________a lot of oranges in the basket. 10. There (not be) ___________any tea in the pot. VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Phong often goes fishing in his free time. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My mother goes jogging twice a week. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They are going to go camping next week. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. No. He doesn’t often visit his íriends. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Ms. Loan is going to travel to Hue. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIL Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. Mrs. Hong / go / work / bus / everyday? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Tomorrow, / I / come / English Club. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. How many / window / your class / have? Trang 8

TEST 3

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. television destination vacation housework computer hotel successful middle family nationality II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. My father never drinks ___________coffee for breakfast. a. much b. many c. a lot of d. a & c 2. This tree is ___________that tree. a. taller to b. taller than c. more tall to d. more tall than 3. ___________ is it from Hue to HCM City? a. Where b. What c. How far d. When 4. Hello, Nga. It’s ___________to meet you again. a. happy b. nice c. glad d. a, b & c 5. My family name is Nguyen and my ___________ name is Thi. a. between b. Ø c. Central d. middle 6. She lives ___________Tran Hung Dao street___________ her family. a. on / with b. in / with c. on / at d. in / in 7. She can speak English and ___________. a. her sister can. too b. her sister. too c. so can her sister d. a & c 8. What’s your ___________season? a. favorite b. lovely c. best d. good 9. It’s good to do something in your ___________time. a. fun b. rest c. play d. spare 10. How far is it ___________your house ___________school? a. to / from b. from / to c. in / at d. from / at III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. I always go to school in time. A B C D .............................................................................................. 2. Who is the girl talks to Miss Lien? A B C D .............................................................................................. 3. Sometimes. I am going to school on foot. A B C D .............................................................................................. 4. Her new school is different in her old school. A B C D .............................................................................................. 5. She doesn’t have lot of pictures on the wall. A B C D .............................................................................................. IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Who you (talk) ___________to on the telephone now? 2. Would you like (visit) ___________my new house? 3. We can (enjoy) ___________sea food in this restaurant. 4. You must (drink) ___________much water every day. 5. She never (get) ___________up late. She always (be) ___________on time. 6. (not talk) ___________in class. 7. There (be) ___________many books in your local library? &. They always (talk) ___________ on the telephone together. 9. Pete (travel) ___________to Hue in September and So (be) ___________ Loan. 10. I (not play) ___________soccer at present. V. READ Trang 9

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 A. Read and answer the questions. John is a new student in class 7A. His parents live in New York, and he lives with his uncle in California, He bas a lot of friends in New York, but he doesn’t have any friends in California. Many things are different. His new school is bigger than his old school. His new school has many students. His old school doesn’t have lots of students. John is unhappy. He misses his parents and his friends so much. * Answer the questions 1. Which class is John in? ...................................................................................................... 2. Who does he live with? ...................................................................................................... 3. Does he ha ve many friends at his new school? ...................................................................................................... 4. Is this new school bigger than his old school? ...................................................................................................... 5. Who does he miss so much? ...................................................................................................... B. Read and choose True or False THE NEW SCHOOL YEAR Most of boys and girls in the seventh form are back to school for a new school year after the summer holidays. They are ready to work in classroom, workshops and Laboratories. Old classmates are so happy to meet again because they are once more in the same class. However, there are also some newcomers. It is difficult for them to make friends and get into games in a new school. Some of the old students are eager to help the new members of the class. First, they get acquainted with newcomers, and then tell them about the new regulations of their school and their class. 1. The students come back to school before the summer holidays ..................................................................... 2. Almost students like to work in laboratories and workshops. ..................................................................... 3. The old students are unhappy to meet again. ..................................................................... 4. All of the old students are eager to help the new ones. ..................................................................... 5. The old students don’t like to get acquainted with the newcomers. .............................................................. VII. Transformation. 1. Why don’t we go to the beach? What about ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Ba is thirteen years old, Hoa is thirteen years old too. Ba is ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. Where do you live? What is ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. When is your birthday ? What is ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What does your father do? What is........................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 10

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION A. TELEPHONE NUMBERS

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 9. talk : nói với 1. information : thông tin, tin tức 10. last : kéo dài, lâu, bền 2. personal information : thông tin cá nhân ADJ 3. telephone number : số điện thoại 11. free : rảnh, rảnh rỗi 4. telephone directory = telephone book 12. sure : chắc chắn : danh bạ điện thoại 13. great : rất tốt, tuyệt vời 5. party : bữa tiệc 14. late : trễ, muộn VERB 15. sorry : rất tiếc, xin lỗi 6. call : gọi, gọi điện thoại 16. sweet : ngọt (có vị ngọt) 7. tell : kể về ADV 8. answer : trả lời 17. out : ở ngoài, ra ngoài - Excuse me : xin lỗi (làm phiền ai đó) - All right: được thôi (dùng để chi sự đồng ý, tán thành) II. GRAMMAR: 1. FUTURE SIMPLE TENSE (Thì tương lai đơn) a) Form: (+) S + will/ shall + V1 + O. (-) S + will / shall + not + V1 + O. (?) Will/ Shall + S + V1 + O? -» Yes, S + will / shall. -» No, S + will / shall + not. (?) Wh- + will / shall + S + V1? Ex: (+) I will / shall come to her birthday party next week. (-) .............................................................................................................................................................................................. (?) .............................................................................................................................................................................................. b) Usage: - Dùng để diễn tả một hành động hay sự việc sẽ xảy ra ở tương lai. - Các trạng từ chỉ thời gian đi kèm: tomorrow (ngày mai), someday (một ngày nào đó), tonight (tối nay), next week / month / year (tuần, tháng, năm tới), soon (chẳng bao lâu nữa, ngay) … * Rút gọn: will = ‘ll I will = I’ll He/She/ It will = he’ll / she’ll/ it’ll You will = you’ll We / They will = we’ll / they’ll Ex: (1) I will call you tomorrow. = I .................................................................................................................................... (2) She will come back soon. = She............................................................................................................................... * Rút gọn: will not = won‘ll Ex: They will not go to the party tonight. = They ......................................................................................................... * NOTE: Người Anh thường dùng will hoặc shall cho các đại từ ở ngôi thứ nhất. Nhưng ngày nay will được dùng phổ biến hơn shall. 2. WOULD YOU LIKE ... ? (Bạn có muốn....?) Dùng để hỏi một cách lịch sự, như một lời mời hay một lời đề nghị. WOULD YOU LIKE + N? WOULD YOU LIKE + to V1? Đồng ý Không đồng ý Đồng ý Không đồng ý • Yes, please. • No, thank you. • Yes, I’d love to • I’d love to, but I’m busy. • No, thanks. • That sounds great. • I’d love to, but I can’t. • That’s a good idea. Ex: (1) Would you like to go to movies tonight? - Yes, I’d love to. / I’d love to, but I’m busy. (2) Would you like some tea? Trang 11

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 - Yes, please. / No, thanks.

B. MY BIRTHDAY I. CLOSSARY

NOUN 1. date of birth : ngày (tháng) sinh 13. worry (about) 2. birthday : sinh nhật 14. invite (to) 3. registration : sự đăng kí 15. join (in) 4. invitation : lời mời, sự mời 16. imagine 5. adresse : địa chỉ 6. calendar : tờ (lịch) 17. finish 7. moment : khoảnh khắc 18. hope 8. date : ngày tháng 19. appear 9. invitation card : thiệp mời 10. guest: khách 20. nervous 11. Leap year : năm nhuận 21. worried 12. fun : sự vui thích, cuộc vui 22. Happy 23. except (prep) : ngoại trừ, trừ ra II. GRAMMAR: 1. MONTHS OF THE YEAR (Các tháng trong năm) - January : tháng giêng - July - February : tháng hai - August - March : tháng ba - September - April : tháng tư - October - May : tháng năm - November - June : tháng sáu - December 2. OROINAL NUMBERS (Số thứ tự) * Đặc biệt: One (1) -» First (1st) Two (2) -» Second (2nd) Three (3) -» Third (3rd) * Thông thường: SỐ ĐẾM + th -» Ex: Four + th -» Six + th -» Fifteen + th -» * Ngoại lê: Các số tận cùng bằng: • -e -» bỏ e + th : nine -» ninth (9th) • -ve -» f + th : five -» fifth (5th) • -y -» ie + th : forty -» fortieth (40th) • -t +b : eight -» eighth (8th) * Số đếm nào có 2 chữ số thì đổi chữ số sau. Ex: Twenty - one -» twenty - first (21th) Seventy - four -» seventy - fourth (74th) * Dùng số thứ tự cho xếp hạng, sinh nhật, ngày trong tháng. Ex: My classroom is on the first floor. April 26th, 2008. * Cách đọc và viết ngày, tháng, năm. a. Cách đọc: - Ngày: The + số thứ tự - Khi đọc ngày tháng: có 2 cách + Đọc ngày trước, tháng sau Ex: The first of July. + Đọc tháng trước, ngày sau Ex: July (the) first. b. Cách viết: - Thứ , tháng ngày , năm

VERB : lo lắng : mời : tham gia : tưởng tượng : kết thúc : hi vọng, mong : xuất hiện ADJ : lo lắng, căng thẳng : lo lắng, bồn chồn : vui sướng, hạnh phúc

: tháng bảy : tháng tám : tháng chín : tháng mười : tháng mười một : tháng mười hai

SỐ THỨ TỰ fourth (4th) sixth (6th) fifteenth (15th)

Trang 12

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 Ex: Monday, August 2nd, 2002. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Hoa (visit) ___________her old teacher tonight. 2. My family (go) ___________to Nha Trang next month. 3. He (join) ___________ us for lunch tomorrow. 4. We (not go) ___________ swimming on the weekend. 5. They (not have) ___________ dinner at home tonight. 6. You (be) ___________ 11 years old next birthday? 7. How long your family (stay) ___________in Da Lat? 8. What he (do) ___________ tomorrow? II. Make sentences with the Future Simple tense. 1. Lan / be / 14 / next month. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I / play / soccer / my friends / tomorrow. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She / not / invite / him / her birthday party/ tonight. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Peter / go camping / his friends / next summer? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How / you / go / the zoo / tomorrow? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Lan (have) ___________ a new house. 2. What Marry and David (do) ___________? 3. I (not be) ___________a student. 4. My father (go) ___________to work every day. 5. Hoa and Minh (not like) ___________playing computer games. 6. The children (eat) ___________breakfast at the moment? 7. Minh and his friends (not talk) ___________on the telephone now. 8. Where David (go) ___________now? 9. Look! The girl (cross) ___________this Street. 10. Where your mother (be) ___________? She (plant) ___________ flowers in the garden. 11. Their sister (buy) ___________a new house next week? 12. He (not be) ___________a teacher next year. 13. What Minh (learn) ___________next Monday? 14. I (be) ___________15 years old tomorrow. 15. We (invite) ___________our friends to the party tonight. IV. Ordinal Number. 1. 21st : ......................................................................... 5. 50th : ........................................................................ 2. 12th : ......................................................................... 6. 18th : ........................................................................ th 3. 35 : .......................................................................... 7. 33rd : ........................................................................ 4. 42nd : ......................................................................... 8. 5th : ......................................................................... V. Change into English, by two ways. 1. 30/04: ....................................................................... ........................................................................................ 2. 01/05: ...................................................................... ........................................................................................ 3. 02/09: ...................................................................... ........................................................................................ 4. 19/05: ...................................................................... ........................................................................................ 5. 01/01: ....................................................................... ........................................................................................ 6. 23/12: ....................................................................... ........................................................................................

TEST 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable.

Trang 13

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 kitchen information person party homework busy December children second visit II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. I think she ___________the party tomorrow. a. will enjoy b. enjoy c. enjoys d. is enjoying 2. January is the ___________month of the year. a. one b. first c. second d. two 3. I will see you ___________tomorrow. a. an b. at c. in d. Ø 4. “Would you like to see a movie?” – “___________”. a. just fine b. me, too c. Sure d. pretty good 5. I will invite all of my friends ___________my birthday party. a. to b. into c. come d. Ø 6. ___________ you be free tomorrow? a. Do b. Axe c. Will d. Have 7. It’s her ___________ birthday tomorrow. a. fivteen b, fivteenth c. fifteen d. fifteenth 8. The book opens in front___________ her on the desk. a. of b. to c. with d. Ø 9. Will you be free on Sunday? a. not at home b. not busy c. not late d. back 10. ___________ year is a year in which February has 29 days instead of 28. a. Rest b. Leap c. Four d. Last III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. His new school is different with his old school. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. She lives at Tran Hung Dao street with her parents. A B C D ..................................................................... 3. I don’t know much cheap restaurants to eat. A B C D ..................................................................... 4. This new dress is beautifuller than that new dress. A B C D ..................................................................... 5. These boys have so many money they don’t know what to do with it. A B C D ..................................................................... IVÉ Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. My father (jog) ___________every morning. 2. We (visit) ___________ Huong Pagoda next week. 3. She (be) ___________14 on her next birthday and 90 will I. 4. They (live) ___________with their grandparents. 5. Where your father (go) ___________next week? 6. Mai always (brush) ___________her teeth after meals. 7. Lan (not have) ___________a meeting tonight. 8. My mother (go) ___________to the market four times a week. 9. Minh (invite) ___________some friends to her birthday party on Sunday. 10. How he (travel) ___________ to work? — By car. V. READ A. Read and choose True or False. Next Saturday is a holiday. Lan will have no class. She is going to have a trip with her classmates to Vung Tau. Unfortunately, her parents will go to Ha Noi on business on that day. She worries who’ll look after the house, the garden and the dogs. In the end, she may not go anywhere. She likes going to the seaside very much. She thinks the fresh air there is good for her health. 1. Lan will have English class next Saturday. ................................................................................................... 2. At last she may have to stay at home. ................................................................................................... Trang 14

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 3. Her parents will go to Vung Tau on business. ................................................................................................... 4. Fresh air is good for her health. ................................................................................................... B. Read and fill the blank with the suitable word. Lam is twelve years old. She is a student. She will be 13 on Friday, May 25th. She will have a party on her birthday. She will invite some friends. She lives at 20 Nguyen Du street. Her telephone number is 825652. The party will be at her house at seven o’clock and finish at half past eight in the evening. ______________________ (1) Minh, I’m having a birthday party on ______________________ (2). The party will be at ______________________ (3) from ______________________ (4) to ______________________ (5). I hope you will come and enjoy it. Love, ______________________ (6). Tel: ______________________ (7). VI. Make questions with the underlined words. 1. My father will have bread, eggs for supper. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam and Ba are in the living room. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Tuan needs four English books. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Sang’s father often has dinner at seven o'clock. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. They will go to the stadium this Sunday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I will buy a new house next week ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Complete sentences, using these cues. 1. What / your / telephone / number /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Would / like / have / dinner / mv house / tonight /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / sorry /. / mother /out / moment /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. We / meet / front / movie / theater / 6.45 / tonight /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. What / your / date / birth / ? / It / November / tenth /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Thirty/ will/ Davis / on/ be /birthday/ his / next /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Match the questions with the answers. 1. What’s your telephone number? a. Sorry, she’s out. 2. What time will the party finish? b. At her house. 3. Who are talking on the phone? c. They will play some games. 4. Where will we meet? d. In front of the movie theater. 5. When will your friend call back? e. All her friends. 6. Where will the party be? f. 8990990 7. Who will she invite to her party? g. Tam and Lan are. 8. What will they do? h. It’ll finish at ten. 9. How will you go to the party? i. After seven. 10. Can I speak to Lan, please? j. By bike. 1. ___________, 2. ___________, 3. ___________, 4. ___________, 5. ___________, 6. ___________, 7. ___________, 8. ___________, 9. ___________, 10. ___________. -------------------------------------------------------Trang 15

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

TEST 2 I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. April document nationality worry parent correct calculator finish appear fifteen II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. Hoa has ___________friends in Hue. a. lot of b. lots of c. much d. any 2. Jane ___________14 on her next birthday. a. is b. will be c. will d. will is 3. Her date of birth is ___________November fourth. a. of b. on c. at d. in 4. Would you like ___________badminton? a. play b. playing c. to play d. plays 5. When ___________your birthday party? a. have you b. will you have c. you are having d. you have 6. ___________will we meet? In front of the movie theater. a. When b. Where c. What d. Why 7. ___________are the girls? They are new classmates. a. What b. Who c. Where d. Which 8. Which is the third month of the year? a. February b. April c. March d. August 9. What is her date of birth? It’s on___________. a. May two b. May of second c. Mav second d. two May 10. How far is it here ___________Ben Thanh market? a. from / to b. about / to c. by / to d. by / from III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. I think I do well in my English exam next week. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. September is the nineth month of the year. A B C D ..................................................................... 3. She is on holiday in the moment, but she’ll be back next week. A B C D ..................................................................... th 4. She will be 14 in Sunday, May 25 . A B C D ..................................................................... IV. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. What (be) ___________today? - Today is Sunday. 2. David (be) ___________ here next week. 3. What Tom and Mary (do) ___________ at the moment? 4. My sister always (do) ___________her homework at six o’clock. 5. I (not get) ___________up late tomorrow morning. 6. My father usually (have) ___________ a cup of tea in the morning 7. What Mary and David (do) ___________next Sunday afternoon? 8. How many lights there (be) ___________on the ceiling? 9. What you (do) ___________ now? 10. She (be) ___________here tomorrow. V. READ. A. Read and choose True or False. Celia is twelve years old. She lives with her parents in Cambridge. Her address is 10 Station Road. Her telephone number is 8 262 019. She will be thirteen on her next birthday. It’s on Sunday, April 24 th. She will have a small party for her birthday. She will invite some friends to her house. They will eat cake and sweet. And they will have a lot of fun. At the moment, she is writing some invitations. 1. Celia’s address is Cambridge. ............................................................................................................ 2. She will be thirty on her next birthday. ............................................................................................................ th 3. Her birthday is on Sunday, 24 of April. ............................................................................................................ Trang 16

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

day.

4. She will invite some her friends. ............................................................................................................ 5. Her mother is writing some invitations. ............................................................................................................ B. Read and choose the item (a, b, c, d). Kate : Can I go to a party on Thursday? Kate’s mother : Who’s having the ___________ (1)? Kate : Chris. He’s a boy ___________ (2) my class. Kate’s mother : What time does it start? Kate : Eight o’clock. Kate’s mother : Mm. That’s rather late. What time does it ___________ (3)? Kate : About eleven, I think. Kate’s mother : Well, you must come home ___________ (4) ten. Kate : Please! Kate's mother : No, Kate. You can’t stay _________ (5) than ten. You have to go to school the next

1. a. day b. party c. time d. cake 2. a. in b. at c. on d. Ø 3. a. last b. have c. finish d. past 4. a. after b. behind c. in front of d. before 5. a. late b. later c. latest d. more late VI. Make questions for the underlined words: 1. They want three kilos of meat. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Hai’s aunt will go to England tomorrow. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Her new jeans are green. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. These are her sister’s clothes. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Lan will have History class on Wednesday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. This is my book. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIL Put the words in the correct order. 1. is / out /he/ ? /will / later / call / I / him /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. speak / can / I /Ngoc / to / ?. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. be / she / back / will / 7 o’clock / about / at / . ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. free / will/ you / tomorrow / be / night / ? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. him / tell / I’ll / please / call / after / 5 / again /. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. love / my/ I / school/ it / because / beautiful/ is / very/. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Transformation. 1. My class will go camping this weekend. My class is ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2. Would you like to go to the movie theater with us tonight? Do you ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I like fish. My parents like fish. I like fIsh and my parents .................................................................................................................................................. 4. No mountain is higher than Phanxipang in Viet Nam. Phanxipang is the .................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 17

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 5. Nam is taller than Khoa. Khoa is ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. What is Sally’s age? How ............................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. information calendar directory imagine invite registration different successful nervous survey II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. April is the ___________month of the year. a. forth b. fourth c. third d. three 2. My birthday is on May 25th. a. date of birth b. day of birth c. party d. dates 3. What is your___________? a. telephone number b. numbers c. number d. a & c 4. It’s raining heavily ___________ go out. a. Not b. Doesn’t c. Don’t d. Do 5. How old will you be on your ___________birthday? a. last b next c. recent d. to 6. I ___________you will come and join the fun. a. want b. like c. hope d. wish 7. What is her___________ name? – It’s Tran. a. family b. father c. mother d. Ø 8. Her parents still live there ___________ her grandparents. a. for b. at c. with d. beside 9. Trung is doing his___________. a. homework b. homeworks c. home work d. home’s work 10. They always go to school ___________ bus. a. by a b. on the c. by d. in the III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. You (be) ___________free next Sunday morning, Tan? - No, I and my brother (visit) ___________ our grandmother 2. Trang (not be) ___________ in her room at the moment. She (cook) ___________ in the kitchen. 3. Would you like (have) ___________breakfast with eggs, chicken. 4. Lien (not go) ___________to the movie theater tomorrow. She (stay) ___________ at home and (watch) ___________TV. 5. You (like) ___________your new school, Mai? - Yes, but I'm unhappy because I (not have) ___________ many friends. 6. Mai (have) ___________ a party for her birthday soon. 7. I hope my school team (win) ___________ next week. 8. Mr. Johnson (not come) ___________next month. IV. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. She will be back at thirty minutes. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. Lan will has a party for her birthday. A B C D ..................................................................... 3. She will be 14 at her next birthday. A B C D ..................................................................... 4. Does she likes her school? Yes, it is beautiful. A B C D ..................................................................... V. READ: A. Fill the blank with the suitable word. Trang 18

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 evening afternoon be at and for My friend is Lan. She is 12. She will ___________ (1) 13 on Sunday, May 10th. She will have a party ___________ (2) her birthday. She will invite me ___________ (3) some of her friends. She lives ___________ (4) 24 Hoang Van Thu Street. The party will be at her home. It will start from seven to nine in the ___________ (5). B. Read and choose True or False. Today is the first day of the new school year. Behind the school gate, everything looks bright and clean. The smell of fresh paint greets hundreds of boys and girls in uniform. The new students clutch their parent’s hands and look at everything with curious eves. The old ones gather in a small group and talk to one another. Everyone looks eager to start the new school year. 1. Everything in the school looks bright and clean. ..................................................................... 2. The new students hold their parents’ hands. ..................................................................... 3. The writer goes to school with her father. ..................................................................... 4. Every student is keen on starting the new school year. ..................................................................... 5. The students don’t wear uniform. ..................................................................... VI. Answer the questions about yourself. 1. What’s your name? ............................................................................................................ 2. What’s your address? ............................................................................................................ 3. What’s your telephone number? ............................................................................................................ 4. How old are you? ............................................................................................................ 5. How do you go to school? ............................................................................................................ 6. How far is it from your house to school? ............................................................................................................ 7. When’s your birthday? ............................................................................................................ 8. How old will you be on your next birthday? ............................................................................................................ VII. Complete sentences. using these cues. 1. I / hope / you / come / join / fun / my birthday party. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Party / be / my house/ 10 / Thang long Street / 6.00 / 9.00. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Lan / be / twenty / Saturday, September 14th. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Hoa / be / the / pretty/ girl / my class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How old / she / be / next birthday? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I / take/ my children/ school/ tomorrow. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. This road /be/ safe/ that one. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. This house / not be/ big/ that one. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Transformation. 1. There are forty students in my class. My class .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Hoa can speak English fluently. Her sister can, too. Hoa can speak English fluently and .............................................................................................................................. 3. Nobody is taller than Khang in my class. Khang is the ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. His old school is smaller than his new one. His new school is ................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I usually walk to school every day. I usually go .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6. They will have a garden in the new house next week. There ......................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 19

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 7. They want to buy a new bike. They would ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8. The dictionaries are thicker than the books. The books are ......................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 20

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 3: AT HOME A. WHAT A LOVELY HOME I. GLOSSARY:

NOUN VERB : chỗ ngồi 17. forget : quên, không nhớ đến : phần còn lại, 18. shop : đi mua sắm số còn lại. (thường dùng go shopping) 3. sink : bồn rửa ADJ 4. tub : bồn tắm 19. awful : kinh khủng, tồi tệ 5. shower : vòi sen 20. comfortable : dễ chịu 6. washing machine : máy giặt 21. lovely : xinh xắn, đáng yêu 7. dryer : máy sấy 22. bright: sáng sủa 8. refrigerator = fridge: tủ lạnh 23. pink : màu hồng 9. dishwasher : máy rửa chén 24. favorite : được ưa thích 10. stove : cái lò, cái bếp 25. delightful : thích thú, thú vị - electric stove : bếp điện 26. delicious : thơm ngon 11. complaint : lời phàn nàn 27. modem : hiện đại 12. compliment : lời khen ngại 28. amazing : làm kinh ngạc, sửng sốt 13. closet : tủ nhỏ 29. safe : an toàn 14. journalist : nhà báo 30. expensive : đắt tiền ≠ cheap 15. kitchen : nhà bếp 31. wet : ẩm ướt 16. apartment : căn hộ 32. boring : nhàm chán, buồn tẻ 33. interesting : thú vị 34. convenient : tiện lợi EXP: - Have a seat = Take a seat: ngồi - To be at work: đang làm việc - Of course: đương nhiên, chắc chắn II. GRAMMAR: 1. EXCLAMATIONS (Câu cảm thán) - Dùng để biểu lộ cảm xúc hoặc thái độ (ngạc nhiên, thán phục, thú vị, tội nghiệp...) trước một người, một sự vật hay một sự việc nào đó. - Loại câu cảm thán được mở đầu bằng What dùng để diễn tả lời khen hay lời than phiền. What + (a/an) + Adj + N (+ S + V) Ex: (1) What a boring party! (2) What an interesting book! (3) What beautiful cars she has! * NOTE: Với các danh từ không đếm được hoặc danh từ số nhiều không dùng a/an. Ex: (1) What awful weather! (2) What pretty girls! 2. THERE IS / THERE ARE (Có cái gì ở đâu) (+) There is + a/ an +N + ...: có... There are + N(s) + … (-) There is / are + not + N(s) + ...: Không có (?) Is there + a/ an + N + ...? Are there + any + N(s) + ...?: Có ...không? -» Yes, there + is/ are. -» No, there + is / are + not. Ex: (+) There is a television in the living room. There are two boys in the class. (-) There isn’t a ruler on the table. There aren’t students in the playground today. (?) Is there a picture on the wall? - Yes, there is. Are there any people in the room? - No, there aren’t. 3. 1. seat 2. rest

Trang 21

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 It's (not) + Adj + To V1 +... Ex: It’s difficult to find an apartment in this city.

B. HOA’S FAMILY I GLOSSARY:

NOUN 1. cattle : gia súc 13. find : tìm thấy 2. primary school : trường tiểu học, cấp I 14. look for : tìm kiểm 3. advice : lời khuyên ADJ 4. center : trung tâm 15. sick : bị bệnh 5. photo : bức ảnh, bức hình - sick child : bệnh nhi 6. newspaper : báo 16. easy : dễ dàng 7. news : tin, tin tức ≠ difficult : khó khăn 8. place : nơi, chỗ, địa điểm 17. empty : trống, trống không 9. meal : bữa ăn 18. suitable : thích hợp, phù hợp VERB 19. horrible : khủng khiếp 10. grow : trồng 20. terrible : kinh khủng 11. raise : chăn nuôi ADV 12. furnish : trang bị đồ đạc, nội thất 21. luckily : may mắn II. GRAMMAR: 1. COMPARISON (So sánh) Long Adjective (tính từ dài): là tính từ có 2 âm tiết trở lên. * Nguyên tắc chung: Comparative (so sánh hơn): MORE + ADJ Superlative (so sánh nhất): THE MOST + ADJ * Form: Comparatives: S + be + more + long Adj + than + N/ ProN. Superlatives: S + be + the most + long Adj. Ex: Adj Comparatives Superlatives beautiful more beautiful the most beautiful expensive more expensive the most expensive Ex: (1) She is more beautiful than her sister. (2) Benches are more comfortable than armchairs. (3) It’s the most expensive house of three houses. (4) Huy is the most intelligent student in our school. * Các trường hợp ngoại lệ: ADJ COMPARATIVES SUPERLATIVES good better the best bad worse the worst many / much more the most little less the least far farther / further the farther / the further 2. HỎI VỀ NGHỀ NGHIỆP: Q: What + do/ does + S + do ? What + be + one's job ? Ex: Q: What do you do? = What is your job? A: I am a student. 3. ÔN LẠI THE SIMPLE FUTURE VÀ THE SIMPLE PRESENT. -------------------------------------------------------I. Write exclamatory sentences. 1. She is a good child. 2. It’s an exciting trip. 3. You have a lovely doll.

EXERCISE

.................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... Trang 22

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 4. They’re old books. .................................................................................................................... 5. The weather is very awful. .................................................................................................................... 6. The book is very interesting. .................................................................................................................... 7. Lan has a beautiful collection of stamps .................................................................................................................... 8. These dresses are extremely expensive .................................................................................................................... 9. The day is wet. .................................................................................................................... 10. This milk is sour. .................................................................................................................... 11. That student is excellent. .................................................................................................................... 12. These boys are very naughty. .................................................................................................................... II. Use “There is / There are” to make the following sentences. 1. a hospital/ near your town? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. two lights/ on the ceiling. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. not / any students/ in the schoolyard. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. a bottle of milk/ in the refrigerator. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. empty apartments/ near here. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Rewrite sentences use “It’s (not) + ADJ + to V1”. 1. Difficult / do / this work. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Easy / find / a cheap apartment / in this City. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Hard/ do/ this math exercise. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Not / easy / bake / this cake. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Not / difficult / drive / a car. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Write the comparative and the superlatives of these adjectives. Adj Comparatives Superlatives 1. far ........................................................... .................................................... 2. clever ........................................................... .................................................... 3. strong ........................................................... .................................................... 4. fast ........................................................... .................................................... 5. pretty ........................................................... .................................................... 6. famous ........................................................... .................................................... 7. big ........................................................... .................................................... 8. wet ........................................................... .................................................... 9. beautiful ........................................................... .................................................... 10. narrow ........................................................... .................................................... 11. expensive ........................................................... .................................................... 12. good ........................................................... .................................................... V. Write the correct comparatives for these sentences. 1. She is (friendly) ______________________her manager. 2. Pasteur Street is (narrow) _____________________Ng Hue street. 3. Her first book is (interesting) ______________________her second book. 4. I think Scotland is (beautiful) ______________________ England. 5. Good health is (important) ______________________money. 6. Today is (hot) ______________________yesterday. 7. Trung speaks English (good) ______________________me . 8. This hotel’s (comfortable) ______________________the other one. Trang 23

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 9. I think this shop is (good) ______________________that one. 10. This restaurant is (expensive) ______________________the other one. VI. Complete each sentence with a superlatives. 1. The people in this area are (poor) ______________________ in the country. 2. This shop sells (fresh) ______________________vegetables. 3. It’s (boring) ______________________program on TV. 4. This is (dangerous) ______________________road in the country. 5. Why does he always come to see me at (bad) ______________________moment? 6. Alaska is (large) ______________________ State in the USA. 7. It is (expensive) ______________________dress in the shop. 8. He is (good) ______________________player in the team. 9. This is (happy) ______________________day of my life. 10. Ca Mau is (far) ______________________town in the South of Vietnam. VII. Fill in each blank with an appropriate preposition. 1. My mother works hard ___________ morning___________ night. 2. The girl is hiding ___________the wall. 3. I’ll wait in front ___________ the movie theater. 4. We’ll be back here ___________fifteen minutes. 5. Don’t go to school or you’ll give mumps ___________others. 6. lf you pass the post office, please send this letter ___________me. 7. Education is very important ___________ me. 8. I live ___________ 12 Pham Ngu Lao street. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put an accent mark over the stress syllable. shower forget dishwasher journalist kitchen apartment II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. What ___________ nice girl! a. a b. an c. some 2. The family usually sits and watches TV in the ___________. a. bathroom b. kitchen c. living room 3. She lives___________ the farm. a. in b. on c. from 4. What___________ awful weather! a. a b. an c. some 5. Come in and have a___________. a. chair b. table c. seat 6. What a___________ bathroom! a. beautifully b. beautiful c. beauty 7. You___________ tired after your long walk. a. are b. should be c. must be 8. It is ___________ table in my classroom. a. news b. newer c. the newest 9. A ___________ works on a farm. a. doctor b. teacher c. farmer 10. What___________ colorful picture! a. a b. an c. the 11. What ___________ great idea! a. a b. an c. the 12. The TV___________ is to the window. a. next b. near c. on 13. I have ___________ good news for you. a. a b. some c. many

complaint comfortable

compliment favorite

d. Ø d. bedroom d. to d. Ø d. sit d. beautify d. will are d. newest d. journalist d. Ø d. Ø d. in front d. much Trang 24

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 14. What ___________ expensive dress! a. a b. an c. the d. Ø 15. There ___________ a sink, a tub and a shower in the bathroom. a. is b. are c. have d. has III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. There are a large, modem bathroom and a kitchen in the apartment A B C D ................................................. 2. I don’t want telling him about the money. A B C D ................................................. 3. It’s not easy find a cheap apartment in Ho Chi Minh City. A B C D ................................................. 4. Her parents enjoy to live on their farm. A B C D ................................................. 5. My uncle is in work and my aunt is shopping. A B C D ................................................. IV. Put the verbs in the correct tense. 1. What (you, read) ___________ right now? - I (read) ___________ book. 2. Robert (cook) ___________ his own dinner every evening. 3. Ann (sit) ___________ at her desk. She (not do) ___________ her homework. She (write) ___________ a letter to her parents. Tomorrow she (write) ___________ a letter to her friend in Brazil. 4. Hurry up or we (be) ___________ late for the concert. 5. (You, be) ___________ in class tomorrow? - Yes, I will. 6. Lan (not be) ___________ in her room at the moment. She (work) ___________ in the yard. 7. She (not / go) ___________ to the 7.00 tomorrow. 8. Minh (be) ___________ at school now ? 9. My uncle (be) ___________ an engineer next year. 10. What your father (do) ___________? - He (be) ___________ a farmer. V. READ. A. Read and choose the item (a, b, c, d). Mrs. Mai ___________ (1) a house in the countryside. It’s a nice house ___________ (2) a large yard and a pretty flower garden in front of the house. In the house. there ___________ (3) a living room, a dining room, a bedroom, a bathroom, and a kitchen. Near her house has a river. She often ___________ (4) fishing with her neighbors there. They___________ (5) friendly. ___________ (6) she loves her house and her neighbors. 1. a. have b. is c. are d. has 2. a. in b. of c. with d. at 3. a. are b. is c. being d. has 4. a. goes b. go c. going d. to go 5. a. is b. are c. has d. have 6. a. and b. if c. there d. so B. Read and choose True or False. We live in a small village. Our house is quite big. It’s an old farmhouse. There are five rooms downstairs: a living room, a dining room, a kitchen, a bathroom, and a small one, too. And there is a large hall, too. Upstairs there are four bedrooms and another bathroom. There's a wonderful view from our bedroom. We really like the house and the village is nice, too. It’s very quiet and our neighbors are very friendly. 1. They live in a City. ................................................. 2. Their house has five rooms downstairs. ................................................. 3. It has a small hall. ................................................. 4. There is a wonderful view from their bedroom. ................................................. VI. Rewrite the following sentences, keeping the meaning. 1. What is her father’s job? What ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The movie is interesting. What ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ! Trang 25

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 3. His apartment has four floors. There are .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. It’s a lovely view. What ........................................................................................................................................................................................... ! 5. What is her date of birth? When .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The school has three floors. There .......................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Complete the sentences with the words given. 1. The girl / have/ nice doll /? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / not be/ do/ their homework / at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What nice /bike / she/ have/! ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. It/ be/ easy/ make friends/ in new school? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. There/ be/ water/ in the bottle? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. This radio/ be/ expensive/ of three ones. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Match column A with B. A B 1. What’ll you do tomorrow? a. You’ll be late for school. 2. “Time is money,” b. because she’s having a headache. 3. I’ll buy some pens. c. No, I won’t. 4. Shall I clean the floor for you? d. Yes, let’s. 5. Why doesn’t he come? e. No, thank you. I can manage. 6. If we have spare time, f. so don’t waste it. 7. Shall we go to the cinema? g. We’ll come to visit our friends. 8. If you don’t get up early. h. because his mother is sick at home. 9. Don't come here late next time. i. I’ll stay at home, do my homework 10. Hoa has to take an aspirin. j. If I pass by the stationers. 1.__________, 2. __________, 3. __________, 4. __________, 5. __________, 6. __________, 7. __________, 8. __________, 9. __________, 10. __________. II. Choose the correct answer (a, b, c, d). 1. I will buy __________vegetables for dinner. a. any b. some c. and d. so 2. The cheapest will be the __________for you. a. good b. better c. best d. most 3. There is the good one__________ two bedrooms at number 27. a. of b. on c. at d. with 4. Is it easy __________find an apartment in Ha Noi? a. with b. or c. to d. for 5. My brother is a journalist. He writes __________ a Youth newspaper. a. in b. for c. on d. at 6. People usually cook food in the__________. a. bathroom b. kitchen c. living room d. bedroom 7. This hotel is the __________in town. a. new b. newer c. newest d. the newest 8. I never drink __________orange juice for breakfast. a. much b. a lot of c. many d. a & b Trang 26

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 9. Will you be free this afternoon? a. not at home b. not busy c. not late d. back 10. Her birthday is __________June nineteenth. a. in b. at c. on d. Ø 11. May is the __________month of the year. a. five b. fiveth c. fifth d. fivth 12. It’s difficult__________ his fast English. a. for understanding b. understanding c. to understand d. for me understanding III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. There (not be) __________any stores in the country. 2. I’ll help you (study) __________ English. 3. My mother (shop) __________ at the supermarket now. 4. He (work) __________hard on the farm from morning till night. 5. I’m glad (see) __________you again. 6. After school, Mai (catch) __________the bus home. 7. What they (do) __________ tomorrow morning? 8. You (watch) __________TV tonight? - Yes, I will. 9. Miss. Thuy (teach) __________in a primary school next year. 10. The house (have) __________great bedrooms and a large bathroom. IV. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. There is a good apartment has two bedrooms. A B C D ................................................. 2. Peter isn’t here. What's the matter with he? A B C D ................................................. 3. His younger sister doesn't like listen to rap music. A B C D ................................................. 4. Don’t forget bring the umbrella with you. A B C D ................................................. V. READ. A. Read and choose True or False. It’s a modem kitchen, nice and clean with a lot of things. There is a washing machine, a refrigerator, and an electric stove, but there isn’t a dishwasher. There are some lovely pictures on the walls, but there aren’t any photographs. There’s a radio near the stove. There are some flowers, but there aren’t any plants. On the table, there are some apples and oranges. Ah! And there are some glasses and plates next to the sink. 1. The kitchen is modem, nice and clean. ................................................. 2. It has a washing machine, a refrigerator, and a dishwasher ................................................. 3. There isn’t any stove in the kitchen. ................................................. 4. There is some fruit on the table. ................................................. B. Read and choose the item (a, b, c, d). Jen : Hi, Pete. How is the new apartment? Pete : Great! It has everything! Jen : Oh, yeah? Like what? Pete : Well, there __________ (1) a living room, a __________ (2) room, and two bedrooms. Then there __________ (3) two bathrooms and a kitchen. And there are __________ (4) windows, so it’s very sunny. Jen : Is there a garage? Pete : Yes. There is a pool, __________ (5). And a balcony. Jen : Wow! __________ (6) can I visit? 2. a. is b. are c. has d. have 3. a. dinening b. dining c. dinning d. b & c 4. a. is b. arc c. has d. have 5. a. a lot of b. lots of c. many d. All are correct 6. a. too b. also c. soon d. All are correct Trang 27

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 7. a. When b. What c. Where d. Why VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. My mother is a journalist. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She always studies in the library after school ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There are many big trees in our school yard. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Yes. I’ll be fourteen on my next birthday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Ben is talking to his teacher. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The weather is very awful. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Transformation. 1. There is a television in the living room. The living room ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The weather is very hot. What. ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It’s a lovely girl. What ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Let’s go to the beaches on vacation. Why.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. Nam is taller than Khoa. Khoa is ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Doing the homework is difficult. It’s .................................................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 3

I. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. There __________a kitchen, a bedroom and a bathroom. a. has b. are c. have d. is 2. It’s hard __________this exercise. a. to do b. doing c. does d. do 3. Would you like__________ some coffee? a. drink b. to drink c. drinking d. drink 4. My brother__________ in a hospital. a. working b. work c. to work d. works 5. The nurses take care__________ sick people. a. off b. of c. on d. for 6. __________an expensive dress! a. What b. How c. Why d. Which 7. Which is __________suitable apartment? a. more b. the more c. the most d. most 8. What __________your mother do? - She is a housework. a. is b. do c. does d. are 9. Summer is __________than spring. a. hottest b. hotter c. the hotter d. hoter 10. He writes articles for a newspaper. He is__________. a. a tourist b. a writer c. a journalist d. doctor II. Read carefully and then Choose the best word to complete the passage. My aunt Thuy lives in Ha Dong. She works in a hospital in the center __________ (1) Ha Noi. Every morning, she __________ (2) the bus to the hospital. She takes care of sick children. She loves the children. She always says that children are very __________ (3). Now she’s doing her __________ (4) with great pleasure. But next year she __________ (5) to Ho Chi Minh city with her husband. She is very __________ (6). Trang 28

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 1. a. in b. from c. at d. of 2. a. drives b. catches c. travels d. rides 3. a. interesting b. awful c. lovely d. horrible 4. a. job b. clinic c. doctor d. nurse 5. a. will move b. moves c. moving d. to move 6. a. happy b. sad c. unhappy d. b & c III. Choose the words or phrases that aren’t correct in Standard English. 1. Watching TV is the most interesting than reading books. A B C D ................................................. 2. There are a sink, a tub, a shower in the bathroom. A B C D ................................................. 3. What is a clever boy! A BC D ................................................. 4. They are in there living room. A B C D ................................................. 5. How are you spell your name? A B C D ................................................. IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Would you like (go) __________to the concert? 2. She (go) __________to the movie theater tonight. 3. Lan (visit) __________ Huong pagoda next week. 4. You work too much. You should (take) __________a rest. 5. Lan (not be) __________late for school every day. 6. Look! Lan (swim) __________faster. 7. She (be) __________a teacher someday. 8. Nam’s sister (work) __________ in a factory next week? 9. My sister enjoys (play) __________badminton in the evening. 10. The doctors (take) __________ care of sick people. V. Fill in each blank with an appropriate preposition. 1. Her date of birth is __________November 4th. 2. Jane is playing piano __________present. 3. Hurry up! We are waiting __________you. 4. My parents work __________the farm__________ the countryside. 5. She always takes care __________her children. 6. Do you want us to go __________ you? 7. What do you usually do __________your free time? 8. Tell me more__________ your family? VL WRITE. A. Make questions for the underlined word 1. Hoa and Lan are talking about the film. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No. There isn’t any milk in the bottle. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Tan’s grandfather will be 80 on his next birthday. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Put these words in the right order. 1. more / she / her / exercises / does / younger sisters/ than. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. is / Nile River / the longest / in / river / the world. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. tomorrow / a / they / morning / will / test / have. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... C. Rewrite these sentences. 1. No one can run faster than Quang. Trang 29

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 Quang is .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Minh is thirteen years old. Mr. Tuan is thirty years old. Minh is younger .................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The red dress is cheaper than the blue One. The blue dress is ................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 30

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL A. SCHEDULES

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 16. math = mathematics 1. schedule = timetable: thời gian biểu 17. after - school activities 2. physics : môn vật lý 3. music : nhạc, môn nhạc 18. school assemble 4. physical education: môn thể dục 19. class meeting 5. subject : môn học 20. mountain range 6. uniform : đồng phục 21. world 7. school uniform : đồng phục học sinh VERB 8. break : sự tạm nghỉ, giải lao 22. to study 9. cafeteria : quán ăn tự phục vụ 23. to cook 10. snack : món ăn nhẹ, món ăn 24. to change nhanh ADJ 11. lunchtime : giờ ăn trưa 25. past 12. baseball : bóng chày 26. several 13. literature : văn học, môn văn 27. popular 14. home economics : môn kinh tees gia đình ≠ unpopular 15. basketball : bóng rổ 28. important II. GRAMMAR: 1. ASK AND ANSWER ABOUT THE TIME (hỏi và trả lời về giờ): Q: What time is it? / What’s the time? A: It’s + giờ. a. Giờ chẵn: It’s + giờ + O'clock. Ex: (10:00) It’s ten o’clock. b. Giờ lẻ: Có 2 cách ❖ Giờ - phút: It’s + giờ + phút. Ex: (5:20) It’s five twenty. - Nếu phút < 10. Ex: 7:05 đọc là: It’s seven five hoặc It’s seven oh five. ❖ Phút - giờ: + Số phút từ 1 - 30: It’s + phút + past + giờ Ex: (11:10) It's ten past eleven. + Số phút từ 31 - 59: It’s + phút + to + giờ

: môn toán : hoạt động ngoại khoá : hội đồng giáo dục : buổi họp lớp : dãy núi : thế giới, địa điểm : học, nghiên cứu : nấu, nấu nướng : đổi, thay, thay đổi : quá khứ, qua : vài : phổ biển, được ưa thích : không được ai ưa chuộng : quan trọng

Ex: (6:50) It’s ten to seven. * Note: - 15 phút: fifteen /a quarter - 30phút: thirty /half past - a.m: từ 1 giờ sáng đến trước 12 giờ trưa. Ex: It’s two ten a.m (2:10): 2 giờ 10 sáng. - p.m: sau 12 giờ trưa đến 0 giờ sáng. Ex: It’s six twenty p.m (6:20) 6 giờ 20 chiều 2. PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn) * FORM: am / is / are + V- ing * USAGE (cách dùng): - Diễn tả 1 hành động đang xảy ra ở hiện tại (ngay khi đang nói) - Dấu hiệu nhận biết: Trang 31

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 + now, right now, at present, at the moment, at this time. + Câu có dấu (!): Look!..., Listen!.... + Trả lời cho câu hỏi “Where” (+) S + am/is/are + V-ING + O. (-) S + am/is/are + NOT + V-ING + O. (?) Am/Is /Are + S + V-ING + O? Yes, S + am/ is / are. No, S +am/is/axe + not. Wh- + am/is/are + S + V-ING + ….?

B. THE LIBRARY

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 13. copy : bản in, ấn bản 1. Library : thư viện 14. employee : nhân công -» librarian : thủ thư 15. alphabetical : bảng chữ cái 2. rack : giá đỡ 16. author : tác giả 3. magazine : tạp chí 17. rocket : pháo hoa, tên lửa 4. shelf : kệ, giá 18. adventure : sự phiêu lưu, sự mạo -» shelves : số nhiều hiểm. 5. science : khoa học VERB 6. chemistry : hoá học 19. to show : cho thấy, cho xem 7. biology : sinh học 20. to receive : nhận được, tiếp nhận 8. dictionary : từ điển 21. to contain : chứa, đựng, bao gồm 9. reader : sách đọc thêm 22. to follow : đi theo sau 10. novel : tiểu thuyết 23. to copy : sao lại, chép lại 11. reference book : sách tham khảo 24. wonderful (adj) : phi thường, kì diệu, 12. congress : quốc hội (Hoa Kỳ) rất ngạc nhiên - At the back (of) : ở phía sau, ở cuối - In the middle (of) : ở giữa - On the left / right : ở bên trái / phải - In space : trong không gian - You’re welcome : không có chi (trả lời lịch sự đối với những lời cám ơn) II. GRAMMAR: 1. Either ... or ... (hoặc ….hoặc) Ex: (1) Either Tom or Jack. (hoặc Tom hoặc Jack) (2) Either the red pen or the blue pen. * NOTE: Nếu nhóm chữ Either …or... làm chủ ngữ trong câu thì động từ phải hợp với danh từ hoặc đại danh từ đứng sau or. Ex: (1) Either you or I am right. (2) Either you or he is right. 2. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME (Giới từ chỉ thời gian) * AT: + giờ Ex: I have class at one o’clock. + một điểm thời gian cụ thể Ex: at Christmas, at lunch, at noon, at recess. * ON: + ngày: trong tuần Ex: I have class on Monday. + ngày tháng năm Ex: I was bom on October, 31st, 1975. * IN: tháng, năm, mùa cụ thể, và các buổi trong ngày (trừ buổi tối: at nigh) Ex: (1) My birthday is in October. (2) We play football in the afternoon. * FROM... TO... Ex: The bank opens from 7a.m to 4.30 p.m. 3. DEMONSTRATIVES (đại từ chỉ định): THIS / THESE and THAT / THOSE a. THIS / THESE (này): đứng trước một danh từ, dùng để chỉ người, vật, sự việc, nơi chốn ở gần người nói hoặc người viết. This + N / These +N(s) Ex: (1) This book is very interesting. (2) These racks have magazine. Trang 32

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 b. THAT / THOSE (kia, đó): đứng trước một danh từ, dùng để chỉ người, vật, sự việc, nơi chốn ở xa người nói hoặc người viết. That + N/ Those + N(s) Ex: (1) That book is more interesting than this book. (2) Those people are waiting for a bus. * THIS/ THAT/ THESE/ THOSE có thể dùng như đại từ, không có danh từ đi sau. Ex: This is my brother and these are my two sisters. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Write the time in words (two ways). 1. 10:20 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 2. 11:50 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 3. 1:45 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 4. 2:15 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 5. 7: 55 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 6. 9:30 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 7. 5:40 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... II. Supply the correct form of the verbs. 1. My mother (make) ____________ a dress now. 2. Nam (help) ____________ his father repair the radio at this time. 3. Mrs. Mai (make) ____________ all her own clothes. At the moment she (make) ____________ a dress for her daughter. 4. My mother (plant) ____________ flowers in the garden at the moment. 5. Where is your mother? - She (prepare) ____________ dinner in the kitchen. 6. Everybody (wait) ____________ for Ba in the hall now. 7. Nga is now in her room. She (iron) ____________ her clothes. She always (do) ____________ it herself. 8. Be careful! The children (cross) ____________ the street. 9. My grandparents (plant) ____________ some roses in the garden now. 10. My older sisters often (read) ____________ books in the evening but now they (listen) ____________ to music. 11. Where (be) ____________ you? - I (be) ____________ upstairs. I (take) ____________ a bath. 12. Let’s (go) ____________ to Lan’s birthday party. I (pick) ____________ you up at 7 tonight. 13. He (be) ____________ twenty years old next year. 14. Where (be) ____________ your brother? - He (plant) ____________ trees in the garden. 15. We (go) ____________ to school late tomorrow. 16. Be quiet! Her baby (sleep) ____________. 17. Your friends (come) ____________ here soon? 18. Lan (speak) ____________ on the phone at the moment. 19. Who Mr. Tan (talk) ____________ to in the school yard at present? 20. We (not / go) ____________ to school late again from now. III. Change these sentences into negative form and interrogative form. 1. We are corning here at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam goes to English club every Saturday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Look! The birds are flying in the blue sky. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Nam’s house has a big garden. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 33

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 5. We will go to the drama club next Sunday. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Make questions for the underlined words or phrases. 1. We have Literature and English on Fridays and Saturdays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No, he isn’t. He isn't at home now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. We can find a lot of interesting books in our local library. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Hung and Lan are doing experiments in Physics class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The children are going to the Water Park. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Use the correct form of the adjectives or adverbs in parentheses. 1. Airplane is (fast) ____________ means of transportation. 2. Is the London (beautiful) ____________ than Paris? 3. Nile River is (long) ____________ river in the world. 4. Tokyo is (safe) ____________ New York. 5. He is (important) ____________ person in the meeting. 6. The weather gets (hot) ____________ today. 7. Who is (old) ____________ person in your family? 8. Vung Tau is (far) ____________ than Dai Nam from HCM City. VI. Use the given words to complete sentences. 1. The students / do / their test / now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / learn / English / the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / play / football / my brothers / present. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Lan / learn / play / piano / now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Hoa / buy / food / drink / the party / the moment. .......................................................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 1

I. Write the time in words (two ways).

WHAT TIME IS IT? 1. 7.20 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 2. 6.30 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 3. 9.45 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 4 5.50 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 5. 2.05 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... 6. 8.15 : ................................................................................ ................................................................................... II. Supply the correct form of the verbs. 1. Lan (go) ____________ to school every day. 2. They (have) ____________ a party tonight. 3. The students (visit) ____________ their old teacher next week? 4. She (not eat) ____________ bread for breakfast. 5. What you (do) ____________ at the moment? I (watch) ____________ TV. 6. We (be) ____________ students in four years. 7. A new school (build) ____________ near our school now. 8. Where you (be) ____________, Khoa? - I (be) ____________ here. I (do) ____________ my homework in the living room. 9. You (be) ____________ angry if he refuses to help you? Trang 34

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 10. How many rooms your house (have) ____________? III. Make questions for the underlined words or phrases. 1. Lan is studying Physics at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Yes. My favorite subject at school is English. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The school cafeteria opens only at lunchtime. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I like History because it’s an interesting and important subject. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. They are playing volleyball in the yard now. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Thanh can run fastest in his team. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Use the correct form of the adjectives or adverbs in parentheses. 1. Tea is (good) ____________ coffee. 2. Jacob is (clever)____________ child in his family. 3. Motorbikes are (fast) ____________ bicycles. 4. Jane is (beautiful) ____________ her sister. 5. This book is (interesting) ____________ of three books. 6. This chair is (comfortable) ____________ that one. 7. Living in the city is (noisy) ____________ living in the countryside. 8. This girl is (thin) ____________ in her class. V. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English: 1. This book is the worse of the three I have. A B C D ................................................................................................... 2. The bank is at the left at the end of the street. AB C D ................................................................................................... 3. Her birthday is on twentieth of June. A B C D ................................................................................................... 4. The party will start at thirty to seven. A B C D ................................................................................................... 5. He is learning swimming at this time. A B C D ................................................................................................... VI. Choose the word (a, b, c or d) that best fits each of the blank or spaces: Ann has a busy day today. (1) ____________ Literature, she reads a book and writes about what she reads. In home Economics, she learns (2) ____________ and what our bodies need. In history, she studies the past and (3) ____________ the world changes. In (4) ____________ , she studies the world, its rivers and mountain ranges. But her (5) ____________ subject is Biology, because she loves animals and plants. 1. a. In b. At c. On d. a & b 2. a. cook b. cooking c. to cook d. b & c 3. a. why b. when c. what d. how 4. a. Physics b. Math c. Geography d. Music 5. a. hobby b. favorite c. interesting d. most VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. It’s a quarter past four. It’s .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. When do you have English? What ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. What’s your favorite subject? Which ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. They have two breaks that last twenty minutes. They have two .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How many books does the Library of Congress have? Trang 35

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 How many books .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. She is the most intelligent in her class. No one ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

L Complete these sentences using appropriate preposition. 1. The children go to bed ____________ half past ten. 2. The United States’ Library of Congress is one of the largest library ____________ the world. 3. There arc some English books ____________ the shelves next ____________ the study area. 4. The Math books are ____________ the right. 5. Magazine and newspapers are ____________ the racks ____________ the middle. 6. She works ____________ a library. 7. The magazines are ____________ the rack ____________ the comer ____________ the left. 8. There is a big table ____________ the middle of the staff room. 9. A librarian is often ____________ her desk to help readers. 10. Can I speak ____________ you for a moment? There’s something I want to ask you. II. Put the adjective in the correct form. 1. Who is (rich) ____________ person in the world? 2. The food here is (delicious)____________ the food there. 3. This road is (busy)____________ that road. 4. Who is (old) ____________ person in your family? 5. Nam looks (happy) ____________ his brother. 6. This hat is (expensive) ____________ of all. 7. Which is (difficult) ____________, English or Math’s? 8. It is (bad)____________ it looks. III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English, 1. She is liking to play basketball because it is interesting. A B C D .................................................................. 2. The biggest desk is at the middle of the room. A B C D .................................................................. 3. On History, we study the past and how the world changes. A B C D .................................................................. 4. Either they or I are in the party. A B C D .................................................................. 5. In his free time, he learns cooking. A B C D .................................................................. IV. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space ín each sentences. 1. We have two ____________ breaks. a. twenties-minute b. twenties-minutes c. twenty-minute d. twenties-minutes 2. The library is in the capital ____________ the USA. a. in b. at c. on d. of 3. English is my favorite ____________. a. study b. topic c. subject d. object 4. The most popular ____________ activities are basketball, baseball and football. a. next-school b- behind-school c. post-school d. after-school 5. Hoa has Physics ____________ Tuesday ____________ 7.50. a. from - to b. on - at c. at - on d. on - in 6. Either Mary or we ____________ here this weekend. a. come b. comes c. is corning d. are corning 7. Does Mr. Brown have ____________ children? a. the b. any c. some d. a few 8. ____________ this medicine. and you’ll be fine again. a. Drink b. Eat c. Have d. Take 9. The boy is ill ____________ he can't go to school. Trang 36

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 a. because b. if c. so d. but 10. Would you like ____________ some water? a. drink b. drinking c. drinks d. to drink 11. ____________ is it from the hospital to the bus stop? a. How high b. How long c. How d. How far 12. Her date of birth is ____________ the fourth of November. a. in b. at c. on d. to V. Write the correct word from the list in the box in each blank. name in title chemistry have look on easy How do you find a book in a library? You (1) ____________ in the card index. If you know the author's (2) ____________, go to the author card. Find the (3) ____________ of the book and check the shelf mark. These shelves (4) ____________ the left have mathematics and science books such as (5) ____________ , physics and biology. Those shelves on the right (6) ____________ history and geography books, dictionaries and literature in Viet Nam. Those books at the back of the library are (7) ____________ English. If you don’t know the author's name, however, go to the title card. It's (8)____________ to find a book with either the author or the title. VI. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above. 1. The weather here is warmer than at home The weather at home............................................................................................................................................................ 2. We have two breaks that last fifteen minutes. We have two .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. My sister can speak English well. She is ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. The table is in front of the armchair. The armchair ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. The weather today is very nice. What ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Mr. Lam has a lot of cattle in his farm. There .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. She takes care of sick people. She is a .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. We have a break that lasts thirty minutes We have ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Fill in the blank with the suitable preposition. 1. Schools in the USA are different ____________ schools in Viet Nam. 2. Students often go to the school canteen ____________ breaks. 3. New dictionaries are ____________ the racks over there. 4. We have Physics class ____________ 7.00 ____________ Monday morning. 5. You can find readers ____________ the shelves ____________ the middle ____________ the reading room. 6. Those books ____________ the back ____________ the library are ____________ English. 7. There is a computer next ____________ my bed ____________ my room. 8. Newspapers are ____________ the back ____________ the library. II. Supply the correct form of the verbs. 1. Either I or they (go) ____________ to the zoo on Sunday. 2. Don’t worry. I (do) ____________ the washing up. 3. Willy (not write) ____________ a dialogue at the moment. 4. You (lend) ____________ me $20? 5. My father never (smoke) ____________ cigarettes. 6. He (meet) ____________ you at the airport? 7. Jane often (travel) ____________ to Ha Noi by train? Trang 37

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 8. Our grandmother (tell) ____________ us some stories every night. III. Put the adjective in the correct form. 1. My house is (large) ____________ her house. 2. Hang is (thin) ____________ girl in my class. 3. These machine are (modern) ____________ those. 4. Hamble don is (pretty) ____________ village in England. 5. Math book is (thick) ____________ the Biology book. 6. Who is (beautiful) ____________, Mai or Chi? 7. Phanxipang is (tall) ____________ mountain in Viet Nam. 8. This cushion is (comfortable) ____________ that one. IV. Write the correct word or phrase in each blank: Tom : Good morning. Librarian : Good morning. ________________________ ? Tom : Yes. Where can I find the English books, please? Librarian : They are on the shelves at the back. Tom : ________________________ science books here? Librarian : Yes, we do. They are on the shelves on the left. Tom : And ________________________ magazines, please? Librarian : They are on the racks in the middle. Tom : Thanks. Librarian : ________________________. V. Complete sentences with given words. 1. I / go / school / half past six. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. My English / start/ nine. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Literature /I / read/ book / write / what I read. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. When / you / have / Music class? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. These racks / the left / be / magazines and those racks / right / be / newspapers. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. This girl/ be/ beautiful/ that one ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. You/will not/ have/ a cup/ tea? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. They/ need/ send/ a new book/ their new friend ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above. 1. There is not a Math class today. We don’t ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. There are 5 books in her bag. She ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. These racks are on the left. They have magazines. These racks on ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I like Music more than any other subject. Music is ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The Science books are on the shelves on the right. They are interesting. The Science books on the shelves ................................................................................................................................................. 6. The girls are very pretty. They ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. Does she want this nice dress? Would ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ Trang 38

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 8. What is your favorite book? Which ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 39

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY A. IN CLASS

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 1. class : giờ học, tiết học 12. problem : vấn đề 2. Computer : máy vi tính 13. essay : bài văn, tiểu luận 3. map : bản đồ 14. event : sự kiện, tiết mục 4. experiment : thí nghiệm 15. globe : quả địa cầu 5. electronics : điện tử học 16. atlas : tập sách bản đồ 6. household : hộ gia đình 17. graph : đô thị 7. appliance : thiết bị 18. equation : phương trình, công thức 8. light : đèn điện 19. calculator : máy tính 9. art club : CLB nghệ thuật 20. price : giá 10. drawing : tranh vẽ 21. temperature : nhiệt độ 11. artist : họa sĩ, nghệ sĩ VERB 22. to use : sử dụng, dùng 26. to draw : vẽ 23. to enjoy : yêu thích, thưởng thức 27. to try : cố gắng 24. to repair : sửa chữa (máy móc) 28. to cost : trị giá 25. to fix : chữa, sửa chữa 29. to erase : tẩy, xóa ADJECTIVE 30. interested (in) : thích, quan tâm đến 32. right : đúng 31. famous : nổi tiếng 33. wrong : sai II. GRAMMAR: 1. Adverbs of frequency (trạng từ chỉ tần suất]: - Dùng để mô tả mức độ thường xuyên của hành động. - Dùng để trả lời cho câu hỏi “HOW OFTEN” always : luôn luôn seldom : hiếm khi usually : thường thường rarely : hiếm often : thường never : không bao giờ sometimes : thỉnh thoảng, đôi khi * Vị trí: - Đứng trước động từ thường. - Đứng sau động từ TOBE và các MODAL VERB. - Ngoài ra ta còn có các cụm trạng ngữ chỉ tần suất như: Every (day, week, month); once a week; twice a week... * Vị trí: - Đứng ở cuối câu. - Riêng Every (day, week, month) còn có thể đứng ở đầu câu. 2. Câu Hỏi “What... learn...?” Q: What + do/does + S + learn + in Môn Học? A: S + learn(s) + to V1 + about + N + how + to V1 3. Asking about the price (hỏi về giá cả) Q: How much + do/ does + S + cost ? How much + tobe + S ? What is the price of +N Ex: How much does this dictionary cost? -» It costs 200.000 dong

B. IT’S TIME FOR RECESS I. CLOSSARY: 1. recess

: giờ giải lao, ra chơi

NOUN 8. headphone

: tai nghe Trang 40

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 2. bell 3. catch 4. marbles 5. pen-pal 6. goal 7. earphone

: cái chuông : trò rượt bắt : trò chơi bẩn bi : bạn qua thư : bàn thắng : nút tai nghe

9. hoop : rổ 10. fun : trò vui 11. blind man’s bluff : trò bịt mắt bắt dê 12. junior high school : trường THCS 13. senior high school : trường THPT

14. to ring 15. to chat 16. to score 17. to swap 18. to shoot

: reo, vang lên : tán gẫu : ghi (bàn, điểm) : trao đổi : ném

24. noisy 25. same 26. energetic 27. whole

: ầm ĩ, ồn ào. : cùng một, giống như : hiếu động, năng nổ : toàn bộ, trọn vẹn

VERB 19. to relax 20. to skip 21. to borrow 22. to take part in 23. to play catch ADJ 28. portable 29. common 30. excited

: nghỉ ngơi, thư giản : nhảy dây : vay, mượn : tham gia vào : chơi đuổi bắt : có thể xách tay : phổ biến, thông thường : phấn khởi, hào hứng

ADV 31. indoors : ở trong nhả 33. mainly : chính, chủ yếu 32. outdoors : ở bên ngoài 34. worldwide : khắp thể giới. * until (conj) : cho đến khi, trước khi * all over the world : khắp thế giới * at the same time : đồng thời, cùng một lúc * as well as : và cả, và cũng II. GRAMMAR: - Ôn lại thì hiện tại đơn (Bài 1 phần B) - Ôn lại thì hiện tại tiếp diễn (Bài 4 phần B) --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Make questions and answers with “How often”. 1. She / go swimming / ? // once a week ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / go to the park / ? // sometimes ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Your family / travel to Thailand / ? // never ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. You / watch TV /? // every evening ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Your father / go fishing /?// never ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. We / wash our hands / ? // usually ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. He / go out for dinner at an expensive restaurant / ? // rarely ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words given in the box. Physics Biology Geography Math History Art Electronics Literature 1. We study different countries, rivers, mountain ranges in ____________ . Trang 41

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 2. We study how to repair household appliances in ____________ . 3. We study how things work in ____________ . 4. We study graphs, equations, calculator in ____________ . 5. We study the life of plants and animals in ____________ . 6. We study how to draw a picture in ____________ . 7. We study past events in Viet Nam as well as different countries in ____________ . 8. We study stories, poems and write essays in ____________ . III. Make questions answer with “What....learn” 1. You / Geography / ? // different countries, rivers, mountain ranges ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Mai / Math / ? // graphs, equations, calculations ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They / Electronics / ? // how to repair household appliances ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Your friends / Art / ? // how to draw a picture ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Loan / History / ? // past events in Viet Nam ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs. 1. Ba (be) ____________ my friend. He (live) ____________ in Ha Noi with his parents. They (be) ____________ teachers. Ba (go) ____________ to Quang Trung School. 2. Lan and Nga (be) ____________ in class 7A. They (eat) ____________ lunch together. After school, Lan (ride) ____________ her bike home and Nga (catch) ____________ the bus home. 3. At the moment, Lan (do) ____________ her homework. She (write) ____________ an English essay. 4. His sister usually (travel) ____________ to work by motorbike but today she (ride) ____________ a bike. 5. What newspaper your father often (read) ____________ ? - The Viet Nam news. 6. In my free time, I often (help) ____________ my parents with the housework. 7. Tomorrow, my class (go) ____________ camping. 8. Either Hoa or they like (play) ____________ volleyball very much. 9. What the students often (do) ____________ at recess? 10. A: What they (do) ____________ now? B: They (play) ____________ blind man’s bluff. V. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. We are ____________ some experiments. a. doing b. learning c. making d. studying 2. Talking is ____________ common wav of relaxing. a. more b. the most c. most d. a & c 3. I and Lan are the same ____________ . a. old b. age c. years old d. all are correct 4. She enjoys ____________ to music. a. listen b. to listen c. listening d. b & c 5. She is the same age ____________ me. a. as b. like c. such as d. All are correct. 6. We don’t have time ____________ now. a. stop b. to stop c. stopping d. to stopping 7. He practices ____________ the piano every afternoon. a. play b. to play c. playing d. b & c 8. He is very popular ____________ his students. a. to b. for c. of d. with Trang 42

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 9. His father always ____________ coffee for breakfast. a. drink b. drinks c. is drinking d. are drinking 10. Ba always gets up early, so he is ____________ late for class. a. usually b. often c. sometimes d. never VI. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. To make this experiment, you’ll need two eggs. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. I am really not interested of going to high school. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. They start usually singing when I am trying to study. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. The students are eating and drinking as good as chatting. A B C D ....................................................................... 5. Listen! The girl playing the piano in the classroom. A B C D ....................................................................... 6. She likes talking to her friend about music in recess. A B C D ....................................................................... VII. Complete these sentences using in, at, on, from... to. 1. I usually talk with my ____________ friend recess. 2. My father is jogging ____________ the park. 3. My class always begins ____________ 7:30. 4. We le am how to use computer ____________ computer class. 5. I and my friends usually go swimming ____________ the summer. 6. We go to school ____________ Monday ____________ Saturday. 7. Lan has Physics class ____________ Tuesday and Friday. 8. My brother is good ____________ English. 9. All the students enjoy camping ____________ summer vacation. 10. How many countries will take part ____________ the Sea Games? VUI. Complete the following sentences in such a way that it means nearly the same as the one above. 1. Nam is taller than any student in his class. Nam is the ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Watching TV is more interesting than reading books. Reading books is ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It’s an exciting trip. What ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The view is very wonderful. What ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Hoa is at school now and I’m, too. Hoa is at school now and .................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Minh likes eating fish. His brothers like eating fish. Minh likes eating fish and .................................................................................................................................................................. 7. How much are these shoes? How much do ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8. She has a son. He’s seven years old. She has a ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. The students has a summer vacation that lasts three months. The students has a ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10. Tomatoes are 5000 dong. Tomatoes........................................................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 1

I. Put the mark over the main stress of the words. deferent computer chemistry experiment appliance refrigerator

geography literature

science physics

biology history Trang 43

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 II. Give the correct tenses or form of the verbs. 1. Hoan (play) ____________ computer games in his free time. 2. Many American students usually (have) ____________ portable CD palavers. 3. Nhung (skip) ____________ rope with her friends now. 4. We (go) ____________ to historical places every summer. 5. How often they (practice)____________ karate? 6. Let’s (go) ____________ to the movie. 7. She (water) ____________ the trees in the garden at present. 8. Be careful! The boy (cross) ____________ the zebra. 9. Would you like (join) ____________ us? 10. Everyday my father (go) ____________ to work at 6 a.m and (come) ____________ back home at 5 p.m. Sometimes he (go) ____________ to work earlier and (get) ____________ home later. At present he (not/work) ____________. He (listen) ____________ to music. III. Make questions and answer with “What… learn”. 1. Lan and Ba / Physics / ? // how things work ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. He / Literature 1111 stories, poems and write essays ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She / Biology / ? // the life of plants and animals ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They / History / ? // past events in Viet Nam as well as different countries ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Use “Question words” to complete these sentences. 1. .................................. does she learn in art? - How to draw a picture. 2. .................................. do you have Math? - On Monday, Tuesday and Friday. 3. ............................... does Mai’s class start? - At 7 o’clock. 4. ............................... classes does Mai have? - Four classes. 5. ............................... does your brother do? - A journalist. 6. ............................... does Mai think about Geography and English? - They’re difficult. 7. ............................... do you do your homework? - Every day. 8. ............................... is a student in Quang Trung school? - Lan 9. ............................... does he go to school? - On foot. 10. ............................... is that shirt? - 150,000 dong. V. Change these sentences into negative form and interrogative form. 1. She goes to school six days a week. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They are talking with their friends at recess. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Classes always begin at seven o’clock. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. We learn how to use computer. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My father is always busy on Sundays. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Use the words given to complete the sentences. 1. Why don’t / go / fish / us? Trang 44

TEST 2

I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the other. 1. a. essay b. relax c. bell d. event 2. a. junior b. cub c. fun d. bluff 3. a. invitation b. dictionary c. equation d. education 4. a. calculator b. marble c. famous d. erase 5. a. indoors b. school c. hoop d. shoot II. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in parentheses. 1. Everybody (wait) ____________ for the president in the hall now. 2. I (be) ____________ 14 years old next week and so will she. 3. My brother (brush) ____________ his teeth every day. 4. My mother always busy. She loves (work) ____________ on her farm. 5. We can (enjoy) ____________ traditional music. 6. She Learns how (use) ____________ a computer in her computer science class. 7. Mai thinks Geography and Physics (be) ____________ difficult. 8. Where your father (go) ____________ next week? 9. Let's (play) ____________ some computer game. 10. I think you (be) ____________ a famous singer someday. III. Supply the correct form of the word in the bracket 1. Mai thinks geography is ____________. (DIFFICULTY) 2. These shelves on the right have math and ____________ books. (SCIENTIST) 3. I like history. It’s an ____________ and important subject. (INTEREST) Trang 45

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 4. I have a ____________ sister (YOUNG) 5. These are ____________ stories. (FUN) 6. Nile River is the ____________ river in the world. (LONG) 7. She speaks English very ____________ (GOOD) 8. This street is very ____________ (NOISE) 9. I’m ____________ in studying English. (INTEREST) 10. He hates the ____________ of the drill. (NOISY) 11. My ____________ is very good. (HEALTHY) 12. She is ____________ because she doesn’t have any friends in her school (HAPPY) 13. We're really ____________ about the trip this weekend. (EXCITE) 14. The ____________ often sits at her desk. (LIBRARY) 15. What a ____________ view! (WONDER) IV. Complete the letter, use the words given in the box. school sometimes history student listening live favorite walk Dear Hanh, I’m a (1)____________ at a school in Cambridge and I’m 16 years old. I don’t (2) ____________ in a town just outside. I go to (3) ____________ by bus. I like (4) ____________ to music and playing tennis. At weekends, I go out with mv friends. (5) ____________ we go to the cinema and sometimes we just go for a (6) ____________. I speak English and French, but I don’t speak Vietnamese. My (7) ____________ subjects at school are Physics and Math, but I don’t like (8) ____________ . Please write to me, Best wishes, John. V. Choose the words or phrases thai fit the space in each sentences. 1. At school, we learn ____________ a lot of things. a. in b. at c. to d. about 2. I le also ____________ his art club after school. a. goes to b. takes part in c. joins in d. All are correct 3. We have a fifteen-minute break every day. a. recess b. school day c. class d. lesson 4. Let’s wait until the rain stop. a when b. before c. after d. till 5. I ____________ to do this math question now. a. try b. is trying c. are trying d. am trying 6. We often go to English club ____________ school. a. before b. after c. until d. when 7. What ____________ intelligent student! a. is a b. a c. is an d. an 8. Look! The teacher ____________ here. a. come b. comes c. is corning d. are corning 9. It’s time ____________ lunch now. a. at b. for c. to d. of 10. Jane always gets up very early, so she is ____________ late for class. a. usually b. often c. sometimes d. never VI. Rewrite these sentences without changing the meanings. 1. That phone card is one hundred thousand dong. It is ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Let's go abroad for our holiday this year. Why don’t ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. She has a lovely doll. What ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Do you find it’s easy to make friends? Are you good ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 46

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 5. How much is this book? How much ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. At recess we all like talking best. Talking is the most ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. Math is my favorite subject. I like ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. Which subject do you like best? What is your .............................................................................................................................................................................................. VU. Sentence building. 1. What / she / learn / Geography class? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Your sister / know / how / play / baseball? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The boys / play / marbles and the girls/ talk/ their friends / this time. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Ba / be / good / fix / things. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. She / play catch / at the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. How often / you / study / the library? ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Some girls / chat / together / the moment. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Hung / be / energetic / boy. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. My favorite subject is Literature. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Vietnamese students go to school six days a week. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Lemonade and sandwich are 5000 dong. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. We often play soccer after school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Loan has Math and English today. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. She doesn’t go to school because of the heavy rain. .......................................................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 3

I. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs. 1. Mary always (study) ____________ English in the evening. 2. Would you like (go) ____________ to the cinema with me? 3. He enjoys (collect) ____________ stamps and coins. 4. He (not /come) ____________ to the meeting tomorrow. 5. Keep silent! The teacher (come) ____________ . 6. She is interested in (read) ____________ books. 7. They (write) ____________ their lessons in class now. 8. The children must (be) ____________ back by six o’clock. 9. (not /forget) ____________ to do your homework. - No, I won’t 10. She is fond of (speak) ____________ in English. II. Choose one sentence that has the same meaning as the root one. 1. My brother goes to Nguyen Du School. a. My brother comes to Nguyen Du School. b. My brother travels to Nguyen Du School. Trang 47

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 c. My brother is a student at Nguyen Du School. d. My brother is going to Nguyen Du School 2. Mai thinks she is very interested in computers. a. She thinks computer is difficult. b. She doesn’t like computer very much. c. She is learning computer now. d. She likes computer very much. 3. He is good at fixing things. a. He fixes things very well. b. He fixes things slowly. c. He cannot fix very well. d. He doesn’t know how to fix things. 4. Three bananas cost 1,800 dong. a. Three bananas need 1,800 dong. b. The weight of three bananas is 1,800 dong. c. The price of three bananas is 1,800 dong. d. Three bananas are 1,800 dong. 5. study / changes / world / we / in / how / Geography / the a. We changes in Geography how the world study. b. We study how the world changes in Geography. c. In Geography how the world changes we study. d. How the world changes in Geography we study. III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. You should practice speak French before you go to France. A B C D ................................................. 2. Sometimes we read or studding at the same time. A B C D ................................................. 3. She is very good of wittings essays. A B C D ................................................. 4. What does she usually do at her free time? A B C D ................................................. IV. Choose the best word to complete the passage. At a quarter to three, the bell rings and all the students go (1) ____________ the yard. It’s time for recess. They are all happy and (2) ____________. At recess, many are talking about the last classes or last night’s movies. Some (3) ____________ and drinking as well as chatting. Some (4) ____________ students are playing catch. 1. a. in b. into c. out d. at 2. a. exciting b. interesting c. excited d. excite 3. a. eat b. will eat c. are eating d. ate 4. a. difficult b. happy c. energetic d. easy V. Read the passage carefully, then choose True or False. The boys and girls in Miss Lien’s class go to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday. There are no lessons on Sunday. It’s a holiday. School day starts at seven o’clock and finishes at a quarter past eleven. The students have a fifteenminute recess each day. They are all happy and excited when the bell rings. They often take part in many different activities at recess. But the most popular activity is chatting. So, the yard is usually very noisy until the bell rings again. 1. The students in Miss Lien’s class don’t go to school on Sunday. ................................................. 2. School day lasts four hours and fifteen minutes. ................................................. 3. The students don’t like recess. ................................................. 4. One of the most popular activities is playing marbles. ................................................. 5. The yard is usually very noisy at recess. ................................................. VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. She is a student in Le Loi school. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Mai learns how to use computer in computer class. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. American students often play basketball at recess. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He's never late for school. Trang 48

UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL

A. WHAT DO YOU DO? I. CLOSSARY: NOUN 1. cafeteria : quán ăn tự phục vụ 2. idea : ý kiến 3. sport : thể thao 4. team : đội 5. activity : hoạt động 6. acting : việc đóng kịch 7. pastime : trò tiêu khiển 8. member : thành viên 9. group : nhóm 10. theater group = drama group: nhóm kịch 11. play : vở kịch 12. anniversary : lễ kỉ niệm 13. celebration : sự tổ chức ăn mừng 14. president : chủ nhiệm, chủ tịch 15. stamp : con tem 16. circus : gánh xiếc, rạp xiếc 17. collection : bộ sưu tập, sự thu gom

18. collector 19. cornices VERB 20. relax 21. practice 22. come along 23. enjoy 24. rehearse 25. collect 26. lie 27. tidy ADJECTIVE 28. sporty ADVERB

: người sưu tầm, thu gom : truyện tranh : thư giãn : thực hành, luyện tập : tham gia, di vói ai : thích, thưởng thức : diễn tập : sưu tầm, thu thập : nằm : dọn dẹp : ham mê thể thao

29. together : cùng nhau, với nhau 30. maybe : có lẽ, có thể 31. at present = now : bây giờ Trang 49

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 II. GRAMMAR: 1. Modal verb: Should (nên) (+) S + should + bare infinitive (V1) . (-) S + shouldn’t + bare infinitive (V1) . (?) Should + S + bare infinitive (V1) ? -» Yes, S + should -» No, S + shouldn’t Ex: (1) You should drink a lot of water. / She should do morning exercise. (2) We shouldn’t come home late. / Tom shouldn’t smoke. (3) Should Peter drink a lot of coffee? Yes, he should / No, he shouldn’t. 2. Making suggestions Let's + bare infinitive. Why don’t we / you + bare infinitive... ? What about + V-ing / N... ? Ex: (1) Let’s play catch. / Let’s go swimming. (2) What about going to Vung Tau? / What about a cup of tea? (3) Why don’t we try to do this math? / Why don’t you wear the red hat? 3. How often...? - Dùng đề hỏi về mức độ thường xuyên của một thói quen hay một hành động ở hiện tại. - Các trạng từ và cụm từ chỉ tần suất (always, often,...) thường được dùng để trả lời. How often + do / does + s + bare infinitive (V1) ? Ex: (1) How often do you go to the library? - I usually go there in the morning. (2) How often does John go swimming? - He goes swimming twice a week.

B. LET’S GO!

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 21. environment : môi trường 1. healthy body : cơ thể khỏe mạnh 22. clean – up : sự làm sạch, vệ sinh 2. healthy mind : đầu óc minh mẫn 23. campaign : chiến dịch 3. assignment : bài làm, nhiệm vụ 4. survey : khảo sát, điều tra. VERB 5. teenager : thanh thiếu niên 24.jump : nhảy 6. youth : thanh niên, tuổi trẻ 25. keep fit : giữ cơ thể khỏe mạnh 7. organization : tổ chức 26. find : tìm thấy 8. scout : hướng đạo sinh 27. attend : tham gia 9. guide : người hướng dẫn 28. Paint : sơn, quét vôi 10. musical instrument : nhạc cụ 11. coin : tiền đồng ADJECTIVE 12. mode l: mô hình 29. bored : buồn chán 13. plane : máy bay 30. tired of sth : chán cái gì 14. pleasure : niềm vui 31. striped : có sọc, có viền 15. wedding : đám cưới, lễ cưới 32. conceded about sth : lo lắng, quan tâm 16. community : cộng đồng 17. community service: phục vụ cộng đồng ADVERB 18. volunteer : người tình nguyện 33. anyway : dù sao đi nữa 19. stripe : sọc viền 34. Even : thậm chí 20. wear : mang, mặc II. GRAMMAR: 1. Would you like ? (đưa ra một lời mời, đề nghị lịch sự) Would you like + to V1? Would you like + Noun? -» Yes, I would / Yes, I'd love to. -» Yes, please. -» I'm sorry. I can't. -» No, thank you. -» I'd love to but.... -» No, thanks. Ex: (1) Would you like to come to my house for dinner? - Yes, I’d love to. / I’m sorry. I can’t Trang 50

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 (2) Would you like some tea? - Yes, please. / No, thanks. 2. The Near Future Tense (Thì tương lai gần) a. I sage: nói lên một dự định, một kế hoạch sắp xảy ra trong tương lai. b. Adverb of Time: tonight, tomorrow, next, on Sunday, on the weekend, ... c. Form: AM / IS / ARE + GOING TO + V1 (+) S + am/ is/are + going to + V1. (-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V1. (?) Am / is /are + S + going to + V1? * NOTE: Đối với động từ “go to” và “come” thì chia “THÌ HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN”. Ex: (1) They are corning back home on the weekend. (2) Look at those black clouds! It is going to rain. (3) I am not going to see a movie tonight. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Complete these sentences with “should or shouldn’t”. 1. We ____________ eat a lot of fruit and vegetables. 2. You ____________ help your mother with the housework. 3. ____________ I go to the doctor? — Yes, you ____________ . 4. You ____________ drink beer. It’s not good for your health. 5. She ____________ brush her teeth after every meal. 6. Students ____________ go to school late. 7. ____________ they stay up late? — No, they ____________ . 8. Children ____________ work too much. 9. It’s getting dark. You ____________ stay at home. 10. You ____________ talk in class. II. Using “Let’s..., Should we...?, Why don’t we...?, What about...?” 1. eat in fast food restaurant ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. invite him to the party ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. do homework together ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. go swimming this weekend ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. play football after school ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Using the Near Future Tense to complete the sentences. 1. Nam (go) ____________ to the movies on Sunday. 2. I (not /travel) ____________ to Vung Tau tomorrow. 3. Nga (watch) ____________ a new movie tomorrow evening? 4. They (play) ____________ soccer next Sunday. 5. We (go) ____________ to the cinema tonight. Trang 51

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 6. He (jog) ____________ tomorrow morning? 7. Look at the cloud! It (rain) ____________ . 8. Sally buys a fishing-rod. She (go) ____________ fishing with Tom. 9. We (visit) ____________ our grandparents this weekend. 10. I (have) ____________ a birthday party next week. IV. Make questions and answer with “How often”. 1. you / go swimming // three times a week. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam / play Computer games // sometimes. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. you/ go to the zoo // once a year. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. they / study in the library // usually. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Sally / write to Tim // every month. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Make sentences using “Would you like...?'” then answer. 1. a soda pop? / Yes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. go shopping? / No ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. this dress? / No ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. sit down?/ Yes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. go for a walk? / Yes ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Use the correct form of the words in the bracket 1. She is a ____________ . She works at the library. (LIBRARY) 2. They are ____________ singers. They sings well (WONDER) 3. It is to ____________ swim in the dirty river. (SAFE) 4. The ____________ makes me wake up at night. (NOISY) 5. I ____________ go to the movie with my friend. (RARE) 6. The summer is a ____________ holiday. (DELIGHT) 7. Charlie is one of the most famous ____________ . (WRITE) 8. That artist paints this picture ____________ . (BEAUTY) --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put the mark over the main stress of the words. relax cafeteria idea celebration comic pastime collector president II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. What about ____________ to the movies? a. go b. goes c. going 2. Let’s ____________ homework together. a. do b. does c. doing 3. What should we ____________ this evening? a. do b. does c. doing 4. Would you like ____________ to my house for dinner? a. come b. comes c. corning 5. Thanks for ____________ me. a. invite b. invites c. inviting 6. Would you like to go swimming? – ____________ . a. Yes, I do b. I’d love to c. Yes, I like

volunteer rehearse d. to go d. to do d. to do d. to come d. to invite d. OK. I’d like Trang 52

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 7. Daisy is a good girl. She ____________ tidies her house and helps her mother. a. often b. rarely c. never d. seldom 8. Should we ____________ to the cafeteria? - I’m sorry. I can’t. a. goes b. go c. to go d. going 9. Lan ____________ an essay now. She usually ____________ her assignments after school. a. writes / does b. is writing / does c. is writing / do d. is writing / is doing 10. On Sunday mornings, I stay in bed ____________ 8 o’clock. a. until b. at c. from d. to III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. He thanks her about inviting him to the party. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. She is going to the pool in Friday afternoon. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. He is very concerned of his grandpa’s health. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. My best friend lives in Ha Noi, the capital in Viet Nam. A B C D ....................................................................... 5. In Electronics class, she learns what to repair household appliances. A B C D ....................................................................... IV. READ. A. Choose the word (a, b, c, d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Tom and his younger brother enjoy different activities (1) ____________ school hours. Tom wants to be an actor. Acting is his (2) ____________ pastime. He is a member of the school theater group. At present, his group (3) ____________ a play for a school anniversary (4) ____________ . He also plays soccer and volleyball in his free time. Tim’s (5) ____________ are different from elder brother. He’s not very sporty. After school, he usually goes home and watches TV. (6) ____________ he reads a library book or a comic but most of the time he lies on the couch in front of the TV. 1. a. in b. on c. after d. before 2. a. common b. popular c. interested d. favorite 3. a. rehearse b. rehearses c. is rehearsing d. will rehearse 4. a. celebrate b. celebrating c. celebrated d. celebration 5. a. pastime b. pastimes c. free time d. free times 6. a. Sometimes b. Now c. Many times d. Never B. Choose True or False. My name is Huy and fishing is my favorite sport. I often fish for hours without catching anything. But this doesn’t worry me. Some fishermen are unlucky. Instead of catching fish, they catch old boots and rubbish. I am even less lucky. I never catch anything, not even old boots. After morning on the river, I always go home with an empty bag. “You should give up fishing”, my friends say. “It’s a waste of time”. But they don’t know that I’m not really interested in fishing. I’m only interested in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all. 1. Huy often fishes for one hour without catching anything. ....................................................................... 2. He always goes home with an empty bag. ....................................................................... 3. His friends don’t know that he is really interested in fishing. ....................................................................... 4. He enjoys sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all. ....................................................................... V. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. My father never (drink) ____________ coffee but today, he (have) ____________ coffee with milk. 2. Nam likes (play) ____________ basketball but he doesn’t love (do) ____________ aerobics. 3. I (do) ____________ my homework at the moment. 4. Children shouldn’t (stay) ____________ up late. 5. He enjoys (collect) ____________ stamps and coins. 6. Long is usually interested in (play) ____________ volleyball after school. Now he (play) ____________ volleyball in the sports ground. 7. Next year, my brother (be) ____________ an engineer. 8. I (be) ____________ 13 years old on my next birthday. Trang 53

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Supply the correct form of the word in the brackets. 1. He is ____________ in playing soccer. (INTEREST) 2. He is going to visit some ____________ places in Nha Trang. (FAME) 3. You should do exercises to have a ____________ body. (HEALTH) 4. He is a ____________ . He collects many stamps. (COLLECT) 5. Lucas loves playing sports. He is ____________ . (SPORT) 6. He is good at learning English. He learns English ____________. (GOOD) 7. They are interested in ____________ on the phone. (TALK) 8. Our school team always needs more ____________ . (PLAY) VII. WRITE. A. Make questions for underlined words. 1. I usually play volleyball after school. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They are going to see a movie tonight. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She always travels to work at half past seven. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Vietnamese teenagers help old people by cleaning their yards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. You should invite our classmates to your birthday party. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. They are going to visit old friends in September. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Rewrite the sentence without changing its meaning. 1. They like to travel to Nha Trang on their vacation. They enjoy ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Do you want to go to the movie with us? Would you like ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What subject do you li ke best? What's ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Minh studies English very well. Minh is ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. They are interested in scoring the goals. They like .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. There are 40 students in my class. My class .................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Put the mark over the main stress of the words. enjoy activity acting pastime community collection concerned teenager anniversary rehearse II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. Ba ____________ the guitar every day after school. a. is practicing b. practices c. will practice d. practice 2. ____________ do you study in the library ? - 3 times a week. a. How much time b. How often c. How many times d. How long 3. Sally’s theater group is ____________ a play for the school anniversary celebration. a. rehearsing b. practicing c. acting d. learning 4. Nam is not very ____________ . He never plays any sports. a. sport - loving b. sportive c. sportsman d. sporty 5. There aren’t any good movies on ____________ the moment. a. in b. on c. by d. at 6. Let’s go to my house. a. Let we b. Let us c. Let has d. Let is Trang 54

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 7. We’re going to see a movie. Why don’t you come ____________ ? a. in b. across c. out d. along 8. She plays volleyball ____________ the school team. a. of b. with c. for d. on. 9. The orchestra will give a concert ____________ the anniversary celebration. a. in b. at c. for d. of 10. I want to relax because I am tired ____________ my work. a. on b. in c. of d. at III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. The recess really makes her happily and excited. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. You should do your homework before to go swimming. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. I can’t help you doing your homework. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. Becky is a president in the stamp collector’s club. A B C D ....................................................................... 5. He's learning to play the piano at recess. A B C D ....................................................................... IV. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. I am ____________ with the match. (BORE) 2. What a ____________ doll you have! (LOVE) 3. I have many ____________ instruments at home. (MUSIC) 4. They take part in the ____________ services in the city. (COMMUNIST) 5. English is an ____________ subject. (INTEREST) 6. Hai has a large ____________ of stamps. (COLLECT) V. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. We enjoy (read) ____________ novels in our free time. 2. Would Lucas like (go) ____________ to the concert with Sally? 3. How about (watch) ____________ television? 4. Energetic students practice (score) ____________ at recess. 5. They love (work) ____________ on their farm. 6. I am interested in (play) ____________ football. 7. Can you (help)____________ me? -I need (repair)____________ my bike. 8. The radio (not / work) ____________ now. I (take) ____________ it to repair. VI. Fill in the blank with the suitable word in the box. plays lies entertainments community rehearsing models collecting instrument survey organization watches 1. The children like ____________ stamps. 2. Hung ____________ on the couch and ____________ television. 3. There are many kinds of ____________ at the village fair. 4. A magazine ____________ shows that many teenagers like pop music. 5. Many people are doing ____________ service. 6. She ____________ violin in the school orchestra. 7. They are ____________ a new play. 8. My brother likes making ____________ of things such as cars or planes. 9. You should learn to play a musical ____________ such as the guitar. 10. Attend youth ____________ such as scouts and guides. VII. Read the passage carefully, then choose True or False. Our neighbor, Mr. Duong, will sail from Cam Ranh tomorrow. We will meet him at the harbor early in the morning. He will be in his small boat, Lac Viet. Lac Viet is a famous little boat. Mr. Duong will leave at eight o’clock, so we will have a lot of time. We will see his boat and then we will say goodbye to him. He Trang 55

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 will be away for two months. We are very proud of him. He will take part in an important race across the Atlantic. 1. Mr. Duong will leave Cam Ranh by a boat tomorrow. ....................................................................... 2. Lac Viet is a famous large boat. ....................................................................... 3. He will be away for nine months. ....................................................................... 4. He will take part in an important race across the Atlantic. ....................................................................... VIII. WRITE. A. Use the words given to complete the sentences. 1. Lam / be / music room / now / and / he / learn / play / guitar. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How often / her sister / practice / piano / Youth Club? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Tom / spend / most / the time / lie / the couch / front / the TV. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My sister / never / cook / good / meal. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Susan / not travel / Russia / next month. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. They/ fly / HCM City / in December? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaning. 1. Making friends in new class is not easy. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. I have a holiday which lasts seven days. I have a ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They spend more time playing video games. It takes ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They have a wonderful house. What ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Going out at night is unsafe for children. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. It takes Hoa two days to travel Hanoi by bus. Hoa ........................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Put the mark over the main stress of the words. assignment attend organization instrument wedding even environment campaign II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. He ____________ reading different books in the library. a. likes b. enjoys c. is interested in 2. He likes playing sports ____________ soccer and tennis. a. such as b. such like c. as 3. I want to thank you ____________ helping me. a. of b. about c. for 4. Peter is going to learn ____________ . a. swim b. to swim c. swimming 5. Could you help me ____________ the washing-up? a. about b. for c. of 6. We are ____________ some experiments. a. doing b. learning c. making 7. Loan is good at ____________ his friends laugh. a. make b. making c. having

model pleasure d. all are correct d. a & c d. to d. b & c

d. with d. studying d. have Trang 56

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 8. It takes Sally two days to drive from Ho Chi Minh City to Hanoi. ↠ Sally ____________ two days ____________ from Ho Chi Minh City to Hanoi. a. spend / driving b. spend / to drive c. spends / to drive d. spends / driving 9. Sally and Jacky are excited ____________ a new novel. a. in b. of c. about d. at 10. The students enjoy different ____________ at school a. activity b. activities c. acting d. action III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct. 1. I should love to, but I have too many assignments. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. Her brother helps her of her homework. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. Children are interested in watching cartoon and play computer games. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. Why don’t we going to the movies tonight? A B C D ....................................................................... IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. I promise Lucas (call) ____________ you when he comes back. 2. Tomorrow (be) ____________ Sunday. 3. She (invite) ____________ some of her friends to her house for dinner. 4. Where (be) ____________ your father ? - He (plant) ____________ trees in the garden. 5. Children are interested in (watch) ____________ cartoon and (play) ____________ computer games. 6. Would you like (have) ____________ hot drink? 7. He likes (swim) ____________ but Sally doesn’t. 8. What you (do) ____________ this weekend? V. Supply the correct form of the word in brackets. 1. They are ____________ about their new work. (EXCITE) 2. ____________ is my pastime when I have free time. (SHOP) 3. He’s rehearsing a play for the school anniversary ____________ . (CELEBRATE) 4. They are ____________ of their examinations. (TIRE) 5. You should listen ____________ to what I say. (CAREFUL) 6. The school yard is very ____________ at breaks. (NOISE) VI. Choose the word (a, b, c, d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. A magazine survey shows that what American teenagers like to do in their free time. Here are five most (1) ____________ activities. Many teenagers like (2) ____________ in the fast food restaurants. Others learn (3) ____________ a musical instrument such as the guitar. Besides, many young people like to do (4) ____________ service. They help elderly people with their housework. Some people work as hospital (5) ____________ . People call them “candy stripers” because the striped pink and white uniform they wear. Others are concerned about the environment and work (6)____________ neighborhood clean-up campaign. 1. a. popular b. common c. convenient d. a & b 2. a. eat b. to eat c. eating d. b & c 3. a. play b. to play c. playing d. to playing 4. a. community b. leisure c. elderly d. organization 5. a. nurse b. doctor c. worker d. volunteer 6. a. for b. of c. on d. in V. WRITE. A. Rewrite the sentence without changing its meaning. 1. They enjoy playing soccer very much. They are ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Driving so fast is very dangerous. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. I spend two days flying to America. Trang 57

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 It takes ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. It takes Sally three weeks to finish the report Sally ......................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Make questions for underlined words. 1. It takes a long time to forget the sad stories. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Sally practices speaking English after school. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I have too many assignments to do. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They will go to Hanoi on business. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... C. Use the words given to complete the sentences. 1. They / love / work / the farm? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. We / practice / score / now. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Lana and David / help / elderly people / their housework / tomorrow. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I would like/ thank you/ drive me /the airport. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 58

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK A. STUDENT’S WORK I. CLOSSARY: NOUN 1. vacation 2. Easter 3. Thanksgiving 4. Christmas VERB 9. to last 10. to hear 11. to find 12. to celebrate ADJECTIVE 17. hard 18. true 19. interesting 20. important 21. few ADVERB 26. quite 27. almost 28. really II. GRAMMAR:

: ngày nghỉ lễ, kỳ nghỉ : Lễ Phục sinh : Lễ tạ ơn : Lễ Giáng sinh

5. public holiday 6. hour: giờ 7. worker 8. firework

: ngày lễ

: kéo dài : nghe, nghe thấy : tìm thấy : tổ chức

13. to spend : trải qua 14. take a look at = look at: nhìn vào 15. To review : ôn lại, xem xét lại 16. like + V-ing : thích làm gì

: vất vả : thật, đúng : thú vị : quan trọng : một vài, một ít

22. easy 23. typical 24. keen 25. lazy

: dễ dàng : điển hình, tiêu biểu : năng nổ, sắc sảo : lười biếng

: tương đối, khá : gần như, hầu như : thật sự, rất

29. Definitely 30. during (prep)

: chắc chắn, nhất định : trong suốt

: công nhân : pháo bông

COMPARATIVE and SUPERLATIVE Review “grammar of Unit 1 (part A) and Unit 3 (part B)

1. Short Adjective: S + be + short Adj + ER + THAN + noun / pronoun. S + be + THE + short Adj + EST. Ex: (1) John is taller than his brother. (2) She is the youngest daughter in the family. 2. Long Adjective: S + be + MORE + Long Adj + THAN + Noun/ Pronoun. S + be + THE MOST + Long Adj. Ex: (1) She is more beautiful than her sister. (2) It’s the most expensive house of three houses.

B. THE WORKER I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 1. photo 2. mechanic 3. machine 4. shift 5. golf 6. buffalo 7. pig 8. field VERB 17. repair 18. prefer 19. feed 20. grow

: ảnh, bức ảnh : thợ máy : máy, máy móc : ca / buổi làm việc : môn đánh gôn : con trâu : con heo : cánh đồng

9. crop 10. animal 11. shed 12. coop 13. speed 14. day off 15. money 16. homeless people

: vụ, vụ mùa : động vật : chuồng, nhà kho : chuồng gà : tốc độ : ngày nghỉ : tiền bạc : người vô gia cư

: sửa chữa : thích hơn : cho ăn : trồng, mọc

21. rest 22. clean 23. take care of 24. come true

: nghỉ ngơi : lau dọn, làm sạch : chăm sóc : trở thành sự thật Trang 59

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 ADJECTIVE 25. pleased : vui mừng, hài lòng 27. main : chính, chủ yếu 26. local : địa phương 28. real : thực sự ADVERB 29. part - time (adj) : bán thời gian 31.per : trên, mỗi 30. off : nghỉ, không làm việc II. GRAMMAR: 1. COMPARISON OF NOUN a. Comparative of superiority. (so sánh nhiều hơn) S + V + more + N(s) + than + N / Pronoun + (do /does). Ex: (1) Mary has more pens than her friends do. (2) They need more soup for that party. b. Comparative of inferiority (so sánh ít hơn, kém hơn) * COUNTABLE NOUN S + V + fewer + Ns + than + N / Pronoun + (do/ does). Ex: (1) There are fewer people in the meeting than the last one. (2) She has fewer friends in her new school. * UNCOUNTABLE NOUN S + V + less + N + than + N / Pronoun + (do/ does). Ex: (1) I spend less money than you. (2) He drinks less milk than I do. 2. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES (tính từ ghép) (a / an) số đếm - Noun (số ít) + N(s/es)) Ex: (1) A ten-day vacation (2) An eighty-dollar dress (3) Two twenty-minute breaks --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Put the adjectives in the correct forms. 1. She is (friendly) ____________ her manager. 2. Ca Mau is (far) ____________ town in the South of Vietnam. 3. Pasteur street is (narrow) ____________ Nguyen Hue Street. 4. Her first book is (interesting) ____________ her second book. 5. The people in this area are (poor) ____________ in the country. 6. Alaska is (large) ____________ state in the USA. 7. I think Scotland is (beautiful) ____________ England. 8. This is (dangerous) ____________ road in the country. 9. Summer vacation is (long) ____________ vacation. 10. Bill is (good) ____________ you. 11. These shoes are (expensive) ____________ those shoes. 12. Nha Trang is (beautiful) ____________ place in Viet Nam. 13. The exercise 10 is (difficult) ____________ the exercise 8. 14. Summer is (hot) ____________ spring. 15. Winter is (cold) ____________ season in the year. II. Complete the sentences. Put in “a little or a few”. 1. I have to go to the post office because I have ____________ letters to mail. 2. “Would you like some more cake?” - “Yes, please, but only ____________”. 3. ____________ flowers are blooming in the garden. 4. There are only ____________ people at the beach. 5. Let’s go and have a drink. We have ____________ time before the train leaves. 6. Vung Tau has beautiful ____________ tourist sites. 7. Lan’s sister can speak ____________ Japanese. 8. I enjoy my life here because I have ____________ friends and we meet quite often. Trang 60

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 9. They will have ____________ milk for breakfast. 10. There are ____________ letters in the letter - box. 11. She has ____________ water in the bottle. 12. They need to buy ____________ meat for the dinner. III. Complete these sentences with “fewer, less, or more”. 1. Hoa’s class has (many) ____________ girls than Lan’ s class. 2. Mr. Nam produces (much) ____________ rice than Mr. Quang. 3. My mother works (few) ____________ hours than my father. 4. Mrs. Trang buys (little) ____________ beef than Mrs. Nga. 5. Vietnamese students have (few) ____________ vacations than American ones. 6. He drinks (little) ____________ wine than Mr. Hai. 7. This old man has (much) ____________ money than all of his daughters. 8. He has (few) ____________ days off than Tim’s mother. 9. When there is (little) ____________ work, he goes to the city. 10. We will have (little) ____________ work and (much) ____________ money to spend. IV. Complete these sentences with “more... than; fewer...than; less...than”. 1. I have 20 books. My friend has 18 books. My friend has ____________ books ____________ I do. I have ____________ books ____________ my friend. 2. Lan drinks two glasses of milk a day. Nga drinks three glasses of milk. Nga drinks ____________ milk ____________ Lan. Lan drinks ____________ milk ____________ Nga. 3. Hoa has four vacations a year. Tim has six vacations a year. Hoa has ____________ vacations ____________ Tim. Tim has ____________ vacations ____________ Hoa. 4. Tan eats two slices of beef. Ha eats one slice of beef. Tan eats ____________ beef ____________ Ha. Ha eats ____________ beef ____________ Tan. 5. Mr. Tuan has four days off a month. His wife has eight days off a month. Mr. Tuan has ____________ days off ____________ his wife. Mr. Tuan’s wife has ____________ days off ____________ he does. V. Rewrite the following sentences, using compound adjectives. 1. We have a break that lasts twenty minutes We have a ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The students have a summer vacation that lasts three months. The students have a .............................................................................................................................................................. 3. My class will have a tour that lasts six days. My class will have a ............................................................................................................................................................. 4. He has two rests that last ten minutes. He has two ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5. This is my report that longs three pages. This is my ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. His stamp costs five hundred dong. He has a .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Today, I have a class that lasts two periods. Today, I have a ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Their baby is four years old. They have a ............................................................................................................................................................................. VL Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Hoa always (help) ____________ her parents on their farm in her free time. 2. Our summer vacation (start) ____________ in June and (last) ____________ for almost three months. 3. What do you like (do) ____________ during your vacation? 4. It’s ten to seven. Hurry up or you (be) ____________ late for school. 5. We (go) ____________ swimming every afternoon. Trang 61

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 6. Hoa (have) ____________ breakfast with her uncle now. 7. He (not / come) ____________ to the party tomorrow night. 8. They (talk) ____________ about Hoa’s work at the moment. 9. She (meet) ____________ her old friends tonight. 10. Mr. Jones (get)____________ seven public holidays each year? 11. Mai loves (play) ____________ the piano. 12. Minh (eat) ____________ his lunch now. 13. You (have) ____________ lots of friends soon. 14. Students should (review) ____________ their work before tests. 15. Look! The children (ride) ____________ their bikes. VII. Use the correct form of the words given to complete each sentence. 1. Michael Faraday is one of the great British ____________ . (SCIENCE) 2. New York is ____________ for its skyscrapers. (FAME) 3. ____________ stamps can be a very expensive hobby. (COLLECT) 4. My teacher always asks us not to make ____________ in class. (NOISY) 5. At school we have a lot of ____________ . (ACT) 6. He’s quite an ____________ person. He plays a lot of sports and goes running every day. (ENERGY) 7. He accepts her ____________ right away. (INVITE) 8. They will have an amazing show for anniversary ____________ . (CELEBRATE) 9. He is very ____________ . He plays sports regularly. (SPORT) 10. He is a stamp ____________ , he has many stamps. (COLLECT) VIII. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning. 1. I have less free time than you. You have ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She walks to school. She goes .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She eats more chocolate than I do. I eat ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. I have fewer books than my elder brother. My elder brother ................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No one is taller than Nam in the class. Nam is ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. She likes to play the guitar. She enjoys ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. We enjoy playing football very much. We are interested ................................................................................................................................................................ 8. I walk to school in twenty minutes. It takes ...................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put an accent mark onto the stressed syllable. vacation Christmas celebrate holiday important worker assignment community II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentences. 1. Which Vietnamese vacation is ____________ ? a. long b. longer c. longest 2. Mr. John repairs machines in a factory. He’s a ____________ . a. shop assistant b. nurse c. farmer 3. I find this book ____________ . a. is interesting b. is interested c. interesting 4. He usually works very ____________ before tests. a. hard b. hardly c. keen 5. It ____________ her two hours each day to do her homework. a. take b. takes c. need

easy environment d. the longest d. mechanic d. interested. d. lazy. d. needs Trang 62

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 6. Their family often goes to the seaside ____________ vacation. a. in b. at c. on d. for 7. My sister loves ____________ stamps. a. collecting b. to collecting c. collect d. collects 8. At recess, ____________ activity is talking. a. more popular b. most popular c. popular d. the most popular 9. Students have to ____________ their work before tests. a. do b. practice c. review d. learn 10. Vietnamese students often have a ____________ summer vacation. a. three - months b. months - three c. three - month d. month - three 11. I am very ____________ to see you here. a. please b. pleased c. pleasure d. pleasing 12. Hoa’s working week is ____________ than some workers. a. much b. many c. most d. more III. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. She is a keen student and she works very hardly. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. A student have to do a lot of homework before tests. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. His friend has two seven-year-old children. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. It take him two hours to travel from the airport to his house A B C D ....................................................................... 5. These racks on the left are on English. A B C D ....................................................................... 6. They sit in his living room at the moment. A B C D ....................................................................... IV. Read the following passage, then write True or False after each sentence. In America, the school year is from early September to the following June. Students go to school every day from Monday to Friday. Many students go to school in school bus that picks them up near their homes and takes them back again in the evening. At the age of 16, students often go to school in their own car, or borrow their parents’ cars. After school, students can choose from many activities. They may join chess, computers, acting, or cooking clubs. They may work on the school newspaper or play in a sport team. 1. American students go to school on Monday and Friday. ....................................................................... 2. They are at school from morning till evening. ....................................................................... 3. Students can drive cars to school when they’re 16. ....................................................................... 4. There are lots of activities for students after school. ....................................................................... 5. Some students go to school by school bus. ....................................................................... 6. The students can’t choose the activities. ....................................................................... V. Read the following cloze, then circle the best answer to fit each space. Many people think that students have an (1) ____________ life because they only work a few hours a day, and have long vacations. In fact, students have to work (2) ____________ at school and (3) ____________ home. They have five (4) ____________ a day, six days a week. That is about 20 hours a week -fewer hours than any workers. But they may have about 20 hours of (5) ____________ every week. And a student (6) ____________ review his or her work ____________ before tests. This makes their working week about 45 hours. 1. a. easy b easier c. ease d. more easy 2. a. hard b hardly c. lazy d. lazily 3. a. in b. at c. on d. from 4. a. recess b. breaks c. games d. periods 5. a. homework b. housework c. homeworks d. houseworks 6. a. have to b. has to c. have d. has VI. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. Trang 63

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 1. She (have) ____________ a part - time job as a waitress in a small restaurant. 2. They (want) ____________ to go fishing today? 3. Our teacher often (play) ____________ tennis in his free time. 4. Nam practices (play) ____________ the violin every evening. 5. Loan is good at (paint) ____________ pictures. 6. I’d like (go) ____________ camping with my friends. 7. They enjoy (skip) ____________ in the yard in the afternoon. 8. After (listen) ____________ to music, I feel happier. 9. Keep silent! The teacher (come) ____________ . 10. Where your mother (be)____________ , Nam? - She (cook) ____________ in the kitchen. VII. Use the correct form of the words in the bracket. 1. The shopping is ____________ to me. (INTEREST) 2. I ____________ enjoy the trip to the zoo every summer. (REAL) 3. We have many different ____________ instruments in the shop. (MUSIC) 4. They can ____________ finish the report tonight. (EASY) 5. I find the soccer match ____________ . (BORE) 6. Fast ____________ can cause many accidents. (DRTVE) 7. She is ____________ to fail the final exam. (HAPPILY) 8. This is one of the most popular ____________ at school. (ACT) VIII. Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meaning. 1. They like to travel to Nha Trang on their vacation. They enjoy .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Do you want to go to the movie with us? Would you like ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3. What subject do you like best? What’s ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Nobody is more beautiful than Lan in her family. Lan is the .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. The weather is very awful. What .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. They spend two weeks traveling around HCM City. It takes ...................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence. 1. How about ____________ me a hand? - Sure, I’d glad to help. a. give b. giving c. to give 2. I’d like to help old people ____________ their shopping or cleaning. a. with b. for c. to 3. He has ____________ picture books, you may borrow one. a. little b. few c. a few 4. Tim’s father has ____________ days off than his mother. a. much b. more c. few 5. There’s ____________ milk in the bottle than in a glass. a. little b. few c. least 6. Brenda likes going to the cinema and ____________ . a. So am I b. I am, too c. so do I d. so I do 7. What ____________ he ____________ ? - He’s a taxi driver. a. do / do b. is / do c. does / be 8. He loves ____________ lunch for homeless people a. cook b. cooking c. is cooking 9. ____________ any chairs in the living room? a. Are there b. Has there c. Is there

d. gives d. by d. a little d. many d. less

d. does/do d. cooks d. Have there Trang 64

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 10. Listen! Someone ____________ . a. come b. corning c. is corning d. are coming 11. We usually spend time ____________ our family. a. for b. with c. on d. to 12. What do you like doing ____________ your vacations? a. for b. during c. on d. in II. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. She finds it is difficulty to remember people’s names. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. They grow much beautiful flowers in their garden. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. His family usually goes to Florida at vacation. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. What a interesting book she has! A B C D ....................................................................... 5. You look like a three - years - old baby. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Hurry up! We (wait) ____________ for you. 2. I (be) ____________ rich someday. 3. Your family (visit) ____________ to Vietnam next summer holiday? 4. What your uncle (do) ____________ at the moment? 5. She doesn’t want (get) ____________ up late every day. 6. I enjoy (listen) ____________ to music now. 7. We learn how (draw) ____________ a picture in Art. 8. I’m interested in (watch) ____________ action movies. IV. Use the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. Eating and talking are the most common ways of ____________ . (RELAX) 2. How ____________ the girl is singing! (WONDER) 3. You work quite ____________ than Lan (QUICK) 4. I am ____________ to hear you are fine. (PLEASURE) 5. We have ____________ money to spend. (LITTLE) 6. The ____________ students often play basketball at recess. (ENERGY) V. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Summer vacation lasts for three months. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The longest vacation is summer vacation. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I usually visit my grandparents during my vacation. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My mother works eight hours a day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. She spends three weeks finishing the report. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Use the given words then complete sentences. 1. You / have / few / vacation/ than / American students. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Ba / be / interested / computer games? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Lan / often practice / play / the piano / every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. America / people / usually / spend time / their families / public holidays. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Summer vacation / be / the long / vacation / Vietnam. Trang 65

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Read the following cloze, then circle the best answer to fit each space. My uncle Thanh lives in Thu Duc. He (1) ____________ in a travel company in the center of Ho Chi Minh City. He enjoys his job, because he meets lots of different (2) ____________. He lives in a very nice(3) ____________ , but he wants to move. “I like my job,” he says, “but I travel a (4) ____________ way to work. It takes a long (5) ____________ and it costs a lot of money.” Now he is looking for a house near his office. Houses in the center of the city are very (6) ____________ . There are some comfortable houses, but he wants to buy a smaller and cheaper one. 1. a. makes b. does c. works d. stays 2. a. people b. animals c. things d. person 3. a. office b. house c. building d. town 4. a. short b. far c. high d. long 5. a. time b. hours c. journey d. travel 6. a. busy b. crowded c. reasonable d. expensive VIII. Read the paragraph, then answer True or False. Mrs. Mai is Hoa’s mother, she is a doctor. She works in a big hospital in the City center. She takes care of sick people. She works five days a week for about 40 hours . Once a week she works on the night shift. She has fewer hours off than Hoa’s father, a teacher at a high school. Mrs. Mai often gets home at half past six. She makes dinner with the help of her husband and her daughter, Hoa. After dinner, she helps Hoa with homework or relaxes by watching TV. 1. Hoa works in a big hospital in the City center. ....................................................................... 2. Mrs. Mai works about forty hours a week. ....................................................................... 3. Her father is a teacher at a high school. ....................................................................... 4. Mrs. Mai makes dinner without any help. ....................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Put an accent mark onto the stressed syllable. vacation uniform celebration concert instrument compliment library volunteer mechanic community II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence. 1. When there is ____________ work, her father often goes to the city. a. few b. fewest c. less d. more 2. The summer vacation ____________ for almost three months. a. goes b. takes c. works d. lasts 3. Hoa is definitely not ____________ because she works 45 hours a week. a. keen b. lazy c. hard d. happy 4. Do Vietnamese students have more or fewer vacations than American ____________ ? a. students b. ones c. vacations d. a & b 5. My father gets about seven ____________ holidays every year. a. part-time b. working c. public d. favorite 6. I ____________ this book very interesting. a. miss b. look c. find d. meet 7. I hope the ____________ can repair our car quickly. a. worker b. journalist c. mechanic d. fireman 8. She works ____________ hours than any worker. a. few b. fewer c. more d. b & c are correct 9. Jane is ____________ beautiful than her sister. a. more b. little c. the most d. fewer 10. Mr. Tuan has ____________ days off than Mr. Jones. a. many b. much c. less d. fewer 11. Hoa’s friend is very interested ____________ writing letters. a. to b. of c. in d. at 12. He prefers the morning ____________ because he has more time to relax. a. work b. shift c. hour d. job Trang 66

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 III. Choose the word (a, b, c, d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Nga’s parents are farmers. They work very (1) ____________ on their farm. They usually start their work at six in the morning. After they have breakfast, they (2) ____________ the buffaloes, pigs, chickens, and (3) the eggs. From about nine in the morning (4) four in the evening, they work in the (5) ____________ . They grow some rice, but their main (6) ____________ is vegetables. Four or five times a year when there is (7)____________ work. Her father takes a day off. He goes to the City with her mother. A farmer has (8) ____________ real vacations. 1. a. hard b hardly c. lazy d. lazily 2. a. feeds b. feeding c. feed d. is feeding 3. a. collecting b. is collecting c. collects d. collect 4. a. to b. until c. till d. all are correct 5. a. farm b. field c. farms d. all are correct 6. a. tree b. plant c. crop d. all are correct 7. a. less b. few c. much d. many 8. a. not b. no c. none d. nothing IV. Read the paragraph then answer True or False. My family lives in a small house in the village. My father is a farmer, he works in the field, he also raises pigs and chickens. My mother is a teacher, she teaches at the village school. My brother is a worker, he works for a Steel factory. My aunt is a nurse, she helps doctor to take care of sick people in hospital. My uncle is a journalist, he writes articles for a local newspaper. I’m a student. I’m studying at a high school in town. 1. The writer’s father works in a factory. ....................................................................... 2. His brother raises pigs and chickens in the field. ....................................................................... 3. His aunt writes article for a local newspaper. ....................................................................... 4. His mother is a teacher in the village school. ....................................................................... V. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. Mrs. Brown eats a few fruit for breakfast. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. Long usually stays up lately to do his homework. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. How much hours does Hoa’s brother work a week? A B C D ....................................................................... 4. Hung lies on the couch and watch TV after school. A B C D ....................................................................... 5. Lan likes drinking lemon juice and I like, too. A B C D ....................................................................... 6. A farmer needs feeding the animals every day. A B C D ....................................................................... VI. Supply the correct form of the word in the brackets. 1. It is ____________ to find a cheap apartment in this city (EASE) 2. Person who repairs the machine is called a ____________ . (MACHINE) 3. It is ____________ to talk on the telephone with friends. (EXCITE) 4. She is a new student, so she has ____________ friends in her new school. (FEW) 5. She is keen on ____________ art. (DRAW) 6. The report is ____________ , so you don’t need to finish it on time. (IMPORTANCE) VII. Supply the correct form or tense of verbs. 1. It is six thirty in the evening. Lan (write) ____________ an English essay. 2. They practice (score) ____________ goals at recess. 3. She learns how (use) ____________ computer in her computer class. 4. Hoa often helps her brother (do) ____________ his homework. 5. I (stay) ____________ at home to do my homework tomorrow. 6. Dung (not / watch) ____________ television in the evening. 7. Next week, my family (travel) ____________ to Da Lat. 8. Where they (meet) ____________ tonight? Trang 67

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 9. Hung loves (plant) ____________ the trees in the garden. 10. She usually practices (play) ____________ violin at home. 11. You (be) ____________ a doctor someday? 12. What you (do) ____________ now, Nam? - I (practice) ____________ the piano. VIII. WRITE. A. Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning. 1. My favorite subjects are English and History. I’m interested in .................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Let’s go to the zoo and have some fun. Why don’t we ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3. I like Math best. My favorite .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. He works more hours than his wife. His wife works ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The market is very noisy. What ...................................................................................................................................................................................... B. Make the sentences with the words given. 1. Our best friend, Nam / the good / student / my class. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. It / take /me / two hours / do / my homework. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Mr. Nam / produce / much / rice than / Mr. Hung. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He / enjoy / play soccer / his friends. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Hoa’s father / work / more / hours / Mr. Jones? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... C. Answer about you. 1. What do you do in your free time? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Who is the tallest person in your family? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. How often do you play games? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. What do you do at recess? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Do you have a three-month summer vacation? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 68

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 8: PLACES A. ASKING THE WAY

I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 1. way : lối đi 7. hardware store : quầy bán dụng cụ 2. direction : sự chỉ dẫn kim loại 3. tourist : khách du lịch 8. guess : sự phỏng đoán, ước chừng 4. souvenir : vật lưu niệm 9. change : tiền lẻ, tiền thừa 5. souvenir shop : quầy hàng lưu niệm 10. bridge : cái cầu 6. shoe store : hiệu bán giày VERB ADECTIVE 11. to show : chỉ, chỉ ra 12. opposite : đối diện, trước mặt ADVERB 13. straight ahead : thẳng phía trước 14. Excuse me : xin lỗi ( dùng khi làm phiền) 15. have/ make a guess: đoán, phỏng đoán 16. up a mountain : trên núi II. GRAMMAR: 1. Asking for the way (Hỏi đường) Khi muốn hỏi đường, địa chỉ nào đó ta dùng cấu trúc sau: - Could you show me the way to the post office? - Could you tell me how to get to the post office? - Please tell me the way to the post office? 2. Giving directions (Chỉ đường) - go straight ahead : hãy đi thẳng - go along this Street : đi theo đường này - take the first/ second on the left : rẽ ở đường thứ nhất, thứ hai bên tay trái - tum right into Thang Long street : rẽ phải vào đường Thăng Long - over there : ở đằng kia - on the right / left : ở phía tay phải/ trái - in front of : ở phía trước - next to : cạnh - behind : đằng sau - near : gần - between : ở giữa 3. How far (bao xa) Q: How far is it from .... to ? A: It’s ....meter(s) / kilometer(s)

B. AT THE POST OFFICE I. GLOSSARY: NOUN 1. mail 2. envelope 3. local stamp 4. phone card 5. overseas mail VERB 10. to mail 11. to take 12. to pay ADJECTIVE 16. overseas

: bưu phẩm : phong bì : tem trong nước : thẻ điện thoại : thư tín quốc tế

6. writing pad 7. item 8. cost 9. plain

: tập giấy viết thư : món hàng : phí tổn, chi phí : đồng bằng

: gửi (thư, bưu kiện...) qua bưu điện : nhận, lấy : trả, thanh toán

13. to receive 14. to send 15. to cost

: nhận, lãnh, thu : gửi : trị giá

: ở nước ngoài

18. ordinary

: thông thường Trang 69

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 17. total : tổng, toàn bộ ADVERB 19. altogether : tổng cộng 20. regularly : thường xuyên II. GRAMMAR: 1. Buying things Khi muốn hỏi mua một cái gì, ta sử dụng: • I would like to buy + a/an/some+ Noun. • Can I have + a / an/some + Noun, please? • I need to buy + a/an/some + Noun. Ex: (1) I would like to buy an English book . (2) Can I have some notebooks, please ? (3) I need to buy a pencil. 2. Asking for price (hỏi giá tiền) How much + is/are + S? How much + do/does + S + cost ? Ex: (1) How much is this stamp? - It’s five hundred dong. (2) How much does it cost? - It costs five hundred dong. 3. How + Adj + Be + S? Hỏi về giá cả, trọng lượng, kích thước hay tính chất của một vật đến mức độ nào. Ex: (1) How high is the Everest ? (2) How heavy is the suitcase ? 4. Need/ (cần, cần phải) S + need(s) + Noun/ To - infinitive Ex: (1) I need a dictionary. (2) She needs to finish that work today --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Use the cues and the map to make questions and answers. Ex: tell / the souvenir shop? A: Could you tell me how to get to the souvenir shop, please? B: Go straight ahead. Take the third street on the left. The souvenir shop is on the left, next to the market.

1. tell/bank? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. show/park? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 70

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. tell/school? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. show / restaurant? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. tell / super market? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Make questions and answer by using “How far”. 1. Vinh to Da Nang / 472 kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Hue to Da Nang /103 kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Vinh to Ho Chi Minh / 1407 kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Da Nang to Ho Chi Minh / 935 kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Hanoi to Ha Long Bay / 170 kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Make sentences by using the structure “S + would like + to V / Noun” 1. Hoa / some local stamps ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They / buy some oranges ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / a packet of tea ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Liz / send this letter to the USA ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I / a sandwich and a glass of milk ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Make questions and answers about the price. 1. the stamps /9.500 dong ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. an envelope / 200 dong ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. postcards / 11.500 dong ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. a phone card / 50.000 dong ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. a writing pad /2.500 dong ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Make questions and answers by using “How + adj”. 1. long / the river / ? //100kilometers ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. tall / you / ? // 1.7 meters ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. high / these buildings / ? // 145 meters ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. heavy / your baby / ? // 5 kilos ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. deep / the well / ? //10 meters ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 71

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Fill in the blank with a suitable preposition: in, at, on, between, opposite, next. 1. My house is ____________ the bookstore and the school. 2. There is a market ____________ front of my house. 3. The bus stop is ____________ the right. 4. I will be ____________ home all day. 5. The post office is ____________ the movie theater. 6. There are two pictures ____________ the wall. 7. There is a bus station ____________ to my house. 8. Minh lives ____________ a beautiful house ____________ the city. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put the mark over the main stress of the words. direction tourist souvenir opposite idea receive item assignment education campaign II. Choose the word that best fits each of the blank spaces. and more breakfast at but in so Hoa’s father, Mr. Tuan, is a farmer. He works (1) ____________ hours than Tim’s father. He usually starts working (2) ____________ six in the morning. He has (3) ____________ then he feeds the buffalos, pigs and chicken’s, and collects the eggs. From about nine in the morning until four in the afternoon. Mr. Tuan works (4) ____________ the field with his brother. They grow some rice, (5) ____________ their main crop is vegetables. From 12 to 1 o’ clock. Mr. Tuan rests (6) ____________ eats lunch. III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Lan and Hoa (go) ____________ to the post office now. 2. Liz (need) ____________ some stamps and envelopes. 3. Hoa needs (buy) ____________ a phone card. 4. I (mail) ____________ this letter tomorrow. 5. He (phone) ____________ his parents three or four times a week. 6. Nam wants (send) ____________ this postcard to his pen pal. 7. We would like (visit) ____________ Ngoc Son Temple. 8. That (be) ____________ 11.500 dong altogether. 9. The stamps for your letter (cost) ____________ 9.500 dong. 10. How you (get) ____________ there from your home? IV. Read the passage, then choose True or False. Ba is the president of the stamp collectors’ Club. On Wednesday afternoons. he and his friends get together and talk about their stamps. If they have any new stamps, they usually bring them to school. Ba’s American friend, Liz, gives him a lot of American stamps. 1. Ba is a stamp collector. ........................................... 2. He and his friends get together and talk about their stamps in the evening. ........................................... 3. Liz is Ba’s American friend. ........................................... 4. She gives him some American stamps. ........................................... V. Write the sentences, using the cue words. 1. How much / these envelops / cost? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I / need / buy / phone card. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Could / tell / me / how / get / the souvenir shop? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. How much / a letter / America? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. She / would like / buy some postcards. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. Answer about you. 1. What should we do this evening? Trang 72

TEST 2

I. Put an accent mark onto the stressed syllable. ahead hospital regularly hotel restaurant market thousand about souvenir station excuse second II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence. 1. Go ____________ ahead. The souvenir shop is on the right, opposite the post office. a. right b. left c. in front d. straight 2. Take the second street ____________ the left. a. in b. at c. on d. of 3. How far is ____________ from your house to the bakery? a. there b. it c. that d. Ø 4. The super market is ____________ of you. a. near b. opposite c. behind d. in front 5. Could you tell me how ____________ there? a. get b. to get c. getting d. to getting 6. The bank is ____________ the restaurant and the hotel. a. opposite b. right c. in front d. between 7. How ____________ is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city? a. often b. far c. near d. all are correct 8. ____________ there a post office near here? a. Are b. Is c. Does d. Do 9. How ____________ does it take to get to Hanoi by coach? - About 18 hours. a. far b. long c. much d. many 10. There is a souvenir shop ____________ Tran Phu street. a. on b. at c. from d. to HI. Read the following dialogue, then choose True or False. Lan : You are from Hue. How far is it from Hanoi, Hoa? Hoa : I’m not sure. It takes about 18 hours to get to Hanoi by coach. Lan : Have a guess. Hoa : I think it’s about 680 kilometers. Lan : And how far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh City? Hoa : I think it’s about 1,030 kilometers. 1. Hoa is from Hue. ........................................... Trang 73

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 2. It takes Hoa about 18 hours to get to Hanoi by coach. ........................................... 3. It’s about 680 kilometers from Hue to Hanoi. ........................................... 4. Lan is from Hanoi. ........................................... 5. It’s about 1,680 kilometers from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city. ........................................... IV. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. The bank is on the middle the hotel and the restaurant. A B C D ........................................... 2. She tells me what to get to the market. A B C D ........................................... 3. They need buying a new house for their family. A B C D ........................................... V. Choose the word (a, b, c, d) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Tourist : Excuse me. Is there a supermarket (1) ____________ here? Tim : Yes. There is one on Elm street. Tourist : Could you tell me how (2) ____________ there? Tim : Go straight ahead. Take the second Street (3) ____________ the left. The supermarket is on the left, (4) ____________ to the shoe store. Tourist : Thanks. Tim : My (5) ____________ . 1. a. get b. near c. from d. of 2. a. get b. to get c. getting d. to getting 3. a. in b. at c. on d. from 4. a. opposite b. next c. left d. right 5. a. please b. pleased c. pleasant d. pleasure VI. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. The hotel is opposite the museum. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I would like to drink some orange juice ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It’s about two kilometers from my house to the market. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. It takes about twenty minutes to go to school by bus. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. These envelopes are 5.000 dong. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Use the given words to complete the sentences. 1. there / souvenir shop / near here? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. could / tell / me / how / get there? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. could /show / me / the way / super market, please? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. the bank / between / hotel / restaurant. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. it / take / about /18 hours / get / Ha Noi / coach. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Put an accent mark on the stressed syllable. tourist America receive regular altogether envelop letter local II. Choose the words or phrases that fit the space in each sentence. 1. I’ll mail this letter at the comer when I ____________ Lan home. a. take b. will take c. am taking

direction opposite d. can take Trang 74

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 2. He is a ____________ . He delivers letters everyday. a. worker b. mailman c. musician d. journalist 3. She wants to buy a birthday cake for her daughter, so she goes to a ____________ . a. restaurant b. bakery c. souvenir store d. market 4. Would you ____________ this letter to the post office, please? a. send b. carry c. take d. bring 5. You canh post this letter without ____________ . a. an envelope b. a writing pad c. a post card d. a packet 6. Could you tell me a little ____________ yourself, please? a. with b. to c. by d. about 7. It takes ten minutes to go ____________ my house ____________ the school by bike. a. in / to b. from / to c. at / to d. to / from 8. ____________ is it from the bus stop to school ? - About 2 kilometers. a. How b. How far c. How long d. How often 9. He helps me ____________ my housework. a. to do b. do c. with d. All are correct 10. How ____________ does it take to get to Hanoi by coach? - About 18 hours. a. far b. long c. much d. often III. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, d). Kim : Excuse me. How much are these postcards? Clerk : The small postcards are 0.15£ each, and the large ones are 0.25£ each. Kim : Can I have these four, please? Clerk : That’s 0.6£. Kim : How much is this yellow T-shirt? Clerk : It’s 8£, plus 0.66£ tax. Kim : I’ll take it, please. Clerk : That’s total of 9.26£. Kim : Here you are. Clerk : Thank you. Out of ten. Here your change 0.74£. Kim : Thank you very much. 1. What is the price of four postcards? a. 0.15£ b. 0.25£ c. 0.6£ d. 0.74£ 2. What kind of postcard does she buy? a. small b. large c. medium d. no information 3. How much does the T-shirt cost? a. 60£ b. 8 £ c. 8.66£ d. 9.26£ 4. How much is that altogether? a. 10 £ b. 9.26£ c. 9 £ d. 8.66£ 5. How much does she give the clerk? a. 10 £ b. 10.10 £ c. 10.20 £ d. 10.30£ IV. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. Hoa needs some stamps and a pad of letter papers. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. A letter to America is 9,500 dong. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Liz will send these letters to her friends. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He would like some beefsteak. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Ba is going to the bakery. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. The girl wants buy some stamps for oversea mail. A B C D ........................................... Trang 75

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 7 HỌC KỲ 1 2. He needs taking a bus to go to his school. A B C D ........................................... 3. Nga’s friend need some local stamps. A B C D ........................................... VI. Rewrite the following sentences in order. 1. take / how long / it / to / Hanoi / does / get / to / plane / by? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. mother / breakfast / eggs / her / eats / for / bread / and / often. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. milk / and/ would / sandwiches / glass / Tommy / like / a / of. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. always / present / friend / from / her / a / receives / Nga / birthday / best. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. call / a / you / make / phone card / use / to / can / phone / a. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Rewrite the sentence without changing its meaning. 1. I like eating hamburgers. My sister likes eating hamburgers. I like eating hamburgers and my sister ....................................................................................................................... 2. Hoa drinks more milk than her sister. Hoa’s sister ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Lan is taller than her sister. Lan’s sister is .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4. This is a beautiful girl. What .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No one is more intelligent than Nam in his class. Nam is the ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6. They have a vacation that lasts two days. They have a ............................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 76

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

MỤC LỤC UNIT 1: MY FRIEND UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS UNIT 3: AT HOME UNIT 4: OUR PAST UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE

Trang 2 Trang 12 Trang 20 Trang 30 Trang 40 Trang 50 Trang 60 Trang 70

Trang 1

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 1: MY FRIEND I. LISTEN AND READ 1. to seem (v) 2. to receive (v) 3. next-door (adj)

: có vẻ, dường như -» next door (adv): trong, bên trong nhà : nhận / phòng bên cạnh : ngay bên cạnh, kế 4. smile (n) : nụ cười bên (nhà, văn phòng) -» to smile (at sb / sth): mỉm cười

II. SPEAK 5. blond (adj) : (tóc) vàng hoe 9. bald (adj) : hói, trụi 6. slim (adj) : mảnh mai, thon 10. dark (adj) : (màu sắc) thẫm, sẫm 7. straight (adj) : thẳng 11. fair (adj) : (da) trắng, (tóc) vàng hoe 8. curly (adj); quăn, xoắn 12. brown (adj) : màu nâu III. READ 13. lucky (adj) : may mắn ≠ unlucky 19. orphanage (n) : trại mồ côi -» luckily (adv) : may mắn -» orphan (n) : trẻ mồ côi 14. character (n) : tính cách, cá tính 20. hard-working (adj): làm việc năng nổ 15. Sociable (adj) = outgoing (adj): dễ chan và cần thận hòa, dễ gần gũi, hòa đồng 21. grade (n) : hạng, loại, điểm ≠ reserved (adj) : kín dáo, dè dặt 22. humor (n) : tính hài hước, tính chất 16. extremely (adv) : rất, cực kỳ vui, khôi hài 17. generous (adj) : rộng lượng, rộng rãi, -» humorous (adj): có tính hài hước, hào phóng tính hài. -» generosity (n) : sự rộng lượng 23. joke (n) : chuyện dừa, lời nói đùa 18. volunteer (adj, v) : tình nguyện -» tell a joke : nói đùa -» volunteer (n) : người tình nguyện IV. WRITE 24. rise - rose - risen (v): mọc (mặt trời, mặt 29. Mars (n) : Sao Hỏa trăng) 30. to annoy (v) : làm khó chịu, làm bực 25. to set (v) : lặn mình 26. planet (n) : hành tinh 31. shy (adj) : nhút nhát, rụt rè 27. Earth (n) : trái đất 32. appearance (n) : bề ngoài, diện mạo 28. Mercury (n) : Sao Thủy -» appear (v) : xuất hiện ≠ disappear (v) V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. ATTRIBUTIVE and PREDICATIVE ADJECTIVES (Tính từ thuộc ngữ và tính từ vị ngữ) a. Attributive adjectives (Tính từ thuộc ngữ) - Là tính từ đứng trước danh từ để miêu tả cho danh từ đó Ex: (1) The new secretary doesn’t like me. (2) He is a rich businessman. b. Predicative adjectives (Tính từ vị ngữ) - Là tính từ theo sau động từ be, become get, seem, look, feel, sound, smell, taste, ... Ex: (1) The baby is asleep. (2) He looks afraid. * NOTE: Phần lớn các tính từ đều có thể ở cả 2 vị trí thuộc ngữ lẫn vị ngữ trong câu. Ex: (1) He became famous for his fairy tales. (2) Julia Roberts is an American famous actress. 2. ENOUGH... TO... (đủ ...để có thể) S + be (+ not) + ADJ + ENOUGH + (for O) + to V. S (+ not) + V + ADV + ENOUGH + (for O) + to V S (+ not) + V + ENOUGH + NOUN(s) + (for O) + to V. Ex: (1) She is old. She can do what she wants. (enough) -» She is old enough to do what she wants. (2) It is cold. We should wear heavy jacket. -» ......................................................................................................................................................................................... (3) He ran fast. He won the first prize. Trang 2

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 -» ......................................................................................................................................................................................... (4) That car is too expensive. I canh buy it. (enough) -» I don‘t ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3. ADJECTIVE ORDER (Trật tự tính từ) GROUP EXAMPLE 1. Determiners a, the, this, my, some, several, ... 2. Cardinal adjective one, four, ten, ... 3. Opinion lovely, nice, wonderful, great, terrible, ... 4. Size long, short, tall, big, small, enormous, fat, ... 5. Quality quiet, boring, important, famous, sunny, warm, fast, wise, ... 6. Age new, old, young, elderly, ... 7. Shape round, oval, square, ... 8. Color red, blue, green, ... 9. Origin Vietnamese, Chinese, American, ... 10. Material stone, plastic, steel, paper, leather, ... 11. Purpose bread, beer, flower, coffee, ... Ex: (1) Một cái bàn cà phê làm bằng gỗ màu nâu mới. -» ........................................................................................................................................................................................ (2) Ba váy đầm dài lớn màu đỏ rất dễ thương. -» ........................................................................................................................................................................................ (3) Một bình hoa nhỏ bằng nhựa từ Ý của anh ấy. -» ........................................................................................................................................................................................ * NOTE: - Tính từ chỉ kích thước và chiều dài thường đứng trước tính từ chỉ hình dáng và chiều rộng. Ex: (1) She is a tall thin girl. (2) It is a long narrow street. - Tính từ chỉ thứ tự đứng trước tính từ chỉ số lượng. Ex: I stayed in Hanoi for the first two days. - Nếu tính từ cùng loại, thì tính từ ngắn thường đặt trước tính từ dài. Ex: It is a cold windy day. - Khi có 2 hay hơn 2 tính từ chỉ màu sác, ta dùng liên từ “and”. Ex: (1) a black and white dress. (2) a red, white and green flag. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence. Use ADXECTTVE + ENOUGH + TO INFINITIVE. 1. My sister is old. She can drive a car. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. She is beautiful and intelligent. She can become Miss World. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. The weather was fine. We could go camping. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. The worker is clever. He can make fine things from wood. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. They are rich. They can buy that expensive house. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. He worked hard. He could pass the examination. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. They are tall. They can reach the shelves. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. The test is easy. He can get ten points. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 3

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 II. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence. Use NOT + ADJECTIVE + ENOUGH (FOR S.O) + TO INFINITIVE. 1. The radio isn’t small. You can’t put it in your pocket. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The coat isn’t warm. I don’t wear it in winter. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Those apples aren’t ripe. We can’t eat them. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Mr. Robinson isn’t rich. He can’t buy this house. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. The little boy is not strong. He cannot lift this suitcase. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. Mr. Smith didn’t feel well. He can’t go to work this morning. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. The piano is not light. He can’t move it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. The water isn’t safe. We can’t drink it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. III. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence. Use NOT + ADJECTIVE + ENOUGH (FOR S.O) + TO INFTNITIVE. 1. She is too young. She can’t get married. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. That table is too heavy. The porter can’t move it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Jimmy is very stupid. He can’t understand what his father said. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. The mountain is very high. We can’t climb it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. This dress is very old. I can’t wear it any more. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. The sound is very soft. We can’t hear it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. This grammar point is very difficult. The children can’t understand. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. It was very cold yesterday. We couldn’t go out. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. IV. Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into One sentence. Use NOT +ENOUGH + NOUN (FOR S.O) + TO INFINITIVE. 1. There weren’t any chairs. Everyone can’t sit down. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Nam didn’t finish the exam. He didn’t have much time. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. I don’t have much money. However I’d like to go on holiday. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. She couldn’t make coffee for everyone. There weren’t any cups. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. He doesn’t have experience. They don’t offer that job to him. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. V. Arrange the adjectives in bracket in the correct order. 1. It is a (wooden / round) table. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. She is wearing a (green / new / beautiful) dress. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. What a (sunny / lovely) day! Trang 4

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. My uncle lives in a (old / lovely / small) house. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. That girl has (blue / nice / big) eyes. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. He gave me (black / leather) gloves. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. My teacher has a (round / pink / small) face. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. It’s a (small / metal / black) box. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. VI. Put the verb in brackets into the present simple tense. 1. She (not /drink) ___________ coffee. She (drink) ___________coke. 2. It (be) ___________ often hot in the summer. 3. What you (do) ___________every evening? 4. The earth (circle) ___________the sun once every 365 days. 5. I (see) ___________ her very often. 6. Most rivers (flow) ___________ into the sea. 7. Vegetarians (not/eat) ___________meat. 8. Bees (make) ___________ honey. 9. Rice (not/grow) ___________in the cold climates. 10. Where Martin (come) ___________from? He (be) ___________Scottish. VII. Put the verb in brackets into the correct form. Vichai is my pen pal. He (1. be) ___________ 14 years old. He (2. live) ___________ in a town house with his family in Bangkok, Thailand. Yesterday I (3. receive) ___________his letter he said “I usually (4. have) ___________ boiled rice for breakfast, and chicken with fried rice or a bowl of noodles for lunch. In the evening, I (5. eat) ___________ the food my mother (6. cook) ___________. Her food (7. be) ___________ the best in the whole world”. Last week, I (8. write) ___________ a letter to him. I (9. introduce) ___________ myself and (10. send) ___________ him a photograph of my family. VIII. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answer. My best friend’s full name is Stuart Kenneth Young. His family calls him Ken, for short, but his nickname at school is “Sky”. He was born in Manchester, but now he lives in Newcastle. Sky is fifteen years old. He is 1.65 m tall and he weighs 50 kilos. He’s got short brown hair and dark brown eyes. He is interested in all kinds of sport and music. His favorite group is U2, but his favorite singer is Bryan Adams. Sports view is his favorite TV program. Sky’s favorite food is pizza. He hates people who smoke all the time. I like Sky because he has sense of humor. I also like him because he is a great dancer. 1. Who is Stuart Kenneth Young? a. My best friend b. The author’s best friend c. Sky’s classmate d. Sky’s next-door neighbor 2. Where does he live? a. In Newcastle b. In Manchester c. In the United States d. A & B 3. Stuart likes___________. a. all kinds of sport and music b. U2 c. Bryan Adam d. All are correct. 4. Stuart is good at___________. a. music b. sport c. dancing d. All are correct. 5. Which of the following is not true? a. Stuart is fifteen years old. b. Stuart’s eyes are dark and brown. c. Stuart likes pizza and people who smoke all the time. d. Stuart has a good sense of humor. IX. Combine the following sentences by using ADJ + ENOUGH + TO INFINITIVE. 1. The ladder wasn’t very long. It didn’t reach the window. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 5

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 2. The fire isn’t very hot. It won’t boil a kettle. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. You are quite thin. You can slip between the bars. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Nam was very foolish. He told lies to the police. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. It’s not very dark. We can’t see the stars clearly. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fill in the blank. 1. Lan and Hue are twin but their ___________are different. a. appearance b. age c. characters d. jokes 2. His friends like him because of his sense of ___________ a. fun b. humor c. talent d. characters 3. Peter ___________quite sad because he can’t go to his friend’s birthday party. a. looks b. feels c. is d. all are correct 4. The sun always___________ in the East and sets in the West. a. rises b. raises c. goes d. grows 5. Many people like making friends with him he is funny. a. because b. if c. so d. however 6. My exam___________ on Monday. a. start b. starts c. will start d. is started 7. ___________you often ___________to music in your free time? a. did/ listen b. do/ listen c. are/ listening d. will/ listen 8. Mai usually ___________at 5 o’clock every morning ___________her lessons. a. gets up/ to review b. gets up/ review c. get up/ to review d. get up / reviewing 9. ___________at me like that! a. not look b. not looking c. don’t look d. doesn’t look 10. The water is ___________for you to bathe. a. warm enough b. enough warm c. warm d. not warm 11. When the phone___________, please answer it! a. ring b. rings c. is ringing d. ringing 12. He is ___________enough to help me with my homework. a. kind b. reserved c. active d. handsome II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. Generous is a part of the American character. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. He didn’t get the job because he wasn't enough experienced. A B C D ..................................................................... III. Supply the correct forms of verbs in brackets. 1. I (live) ___________in Hanoi, though I (stay) ___________ in Da Lat at the moment. 2. The bicycle isn’t here today because Nga (use) ___________it. She generally (use) ___________the motorcycle, but it is broken. 3. The water in the lake seldom (freeze) ___________in winter. 4. We usually (stay) ___________ at home on Fridays, but we came out tonight because we (celebrate) ___________ Nga‘s birthday. 5. I (stay) ___________ with my uncle and my aunt at the moment, though I (have) ___________my own eat. 6. They usually (work) ___________at weekends, though they (not work) ___________ at the moment. 7. He (teach) ___________ in a language school, though he (work) ___________ in a factory at the moment because the school’s on holiday. 8. My uncle’s grocery store usually (make) ________ money, though it (do) ________rather badly just now. Trang 6

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 IV. Use the correct word form of the word given in each sentence. 1. After his parents died, he was sent to an___________. (ORPHAN) 2. Some of my ___________are going to my birthday party. (CLASS) 3. Huy makes friends very easily because he is very___________. (SOCLAL) 4. We like our math teacher for his sense of ___________. (HUMOROUS) 5. Is this bag big enough for these ___________? (GROCER) 6. He is the most respected person in my ___________. (NEIGHBOR) 7. Tam and Quang rarely talk freely about themselves. They’re very ___________. (RESERVE) 8. I find Peter is not ___________. (COMMUNICATE) V. Complete the responses, using (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive. Ex: Can Daisy help me? (kind) Yes, she is kind enough to help you. 1. Can Peter repair the bike? (skillful) No, he .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Will you take a rest after lunch? (tired) Yes, I ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Can I work with these men? (old) No, you .................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Can she join our Club? (old) Yes, she .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. Can they hang the picture on the wall? (tall) No, they ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6. Did you wear this coat last winter? (cold) No, it was ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7. Can you listen to the music on the radio? (clear) No, it ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Will you buy the new CD of that band? (good) Yes, the songs are ............................................................................................................................................................. 9. Can we swim early in the morning these days? (warm) Yes, the water is ................................................................................................................................................................ 10. Why don’t we sit outside? (cool) Yes, it’s .................................................................................................................................................................................. VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. I am lucky enough to have a lot of friends. However, each of us has a different character. Nam is the sociable; he is also kind and generous. Ba and Thanh are quite reserved in public. Both of them enjoy school work and sports. Ba is very good at football and he is a member of the school team. Thanh likes swimming and reading books in the school library. I am not as outgoing as Nam, but I enjoy telling jokes when we have free time. My friends usually enjoy my sense of humor. Although we have different characters, all of us are very close friends. 1. My friends and I have different characters. ..................................................................... 2. Nam likes helping other people. ..................................................................... 3. Thanh is very sociable. ..................................................................... 4. Thanh likes reading books in the school library. ..................................................................... 5. Ba plays for school football team. ..................................................................... 6. I am more sociable than the others. ..................................................................... VII. Choose the correct answer to complete the passage. Daisy is fifteen years old. She is a pretty girl (1) ___________long black hair. She (2) ___________ to school every day and usually goes out with her friends on Saturday afternoons. She likes (3) ___________to pop music. She lives with (4) ___________parents in (5) ___________ large apartment. She has a lot (6) ___________ interesting pictures and books. She enjoys (7) ___________at her pictures and reading books (8) ___________her free time. 1. a. at b. with c. for d. in 2. a. goes b. arrives c. reaches d. is Trang 7

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 3. a. listen 4. a. she 5. a. a 6. a. off 7. a. look 8. a. in

b. listening c. listened d. listens b. hers c. herself d. her b. an c.  d. the b. of c. on d. in b. looks c. to look d. looking b. at c. on d. for --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to mi in the blank. 1. I ___________a letter from my old friend last week. a. sent b. gave c. received d. took 2. “Would you ___________to go to the movies with me?” – “I’d love to.” a. like b. want c. love d. mind 3. He is not ___________get married. a. enough old to b. old enough to c. enough old for d. old enough for 4. She is wearing a ___________dress. a. red new pretty b. new pretty red c. pretty red new d. pretty new red 5. I find Peter is not communicative. He’s rather___________ in public. a. kind b. reserved c. sociable d. humorous 6. The River Amazon ___________into the Atlantic Ocean. a. flow b. is flowing c. flowed d. flows 7. He’s tall and thin. He has ___________ a. black hair short b. short black hair c. hair short black d. black short hair 8. She spends most of her free time ___________ volunteer work. a. doing b. to do c. do d. for doing 9. His friends like him because of his sense of ___________ a. fun b. humor c. talent d. character 10. He enjoys ___________ to music while he is studying. a. to listen b. listen c. listening d. to listening II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. When he is four, Michael came to London with his parents. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. All of us would like seeing a world in which we don’t have hunger, war or disease A B C D ..................................................................... III. Supply the correct forms of verbs in brackets. 1. We oughtn’t (work) ___________ lazily and carelessly. 2. She used (be) ___________ my next-door neighbor in Hue. 3. Minh’s father (teach) ___________ him how to ride a bike when he was seven. 4. The sun (rise) ___________in the east. 5. Yesterday I (receive) ___________a letter from my aunt. 6. I’d like (go) ___________ on holiday but I haven’t got enough money. 7. Mr. Smith didn’t feel well enough (go) ___________ to work this morning. 8. Look! The cat (run) ___________very slowly and she seems tired. 9. The train (leave) ___________ HCM City at 7.15 tonight. 10. Mary usually (go) ___________ to the library twice a week, but last week she (go) ___________ once. IV. Use the correct word form of the word given in each sentence. 1. Her gloves are very___________. (DIRT) 2. The shoes are nice but ___________. (COMFORTABLE) 3. Nam is very ___________, kind and generous. (SOCIAL) 4. What a ___________ day. (LOVEY) 5. She has short ___________ hair. (CURL) 6. Can you give me some ___________about the tour to Hue, please? (INFORM) 7. Sang is ___________ kind to his neighbors. (EXTREME) Trang 8

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 8. ___________, the barber cut my hair too short. (LUCK) V. Choose the correct answer to complete the passage. Last year, I (1) ___________ on a horse stay to the United States. I lived (2) ___________ the Johnson family in the State of California. When I (3) ___________ there, I went to school with my American friend, Julie. At first (4) ___________English everyday was hard. I was homesick. But (5) ___________ I started to enjoy my home stay. English was easier. School was (6) ___________ I like living with the Johnsons. 1. a. met b. went c. bought d. arrived 2. a. for b. in c. at d. with 3. a. am b. be c. was d. were 4. a. introducing b. speaking c. living d. watching 5. a. just b. so c. then d. while 6. a. fun b. friendly c. interesting d. all are correct VI. Read the passage careful]y. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Do you have any close Mends? I think everybody at Least has one close friend in their life. And so do I. I have two close friends, Hong and Thuy. We are in the same class at the primary school, and then secondary school. We are also neighbors so we spend most of our time learning and playing together. Hong is a beautiful girl with big black eves and an oval rosy face. She is an intelligent student who is always at the top of the class. She likes reading, and she often goes to the library whenever she has free time, Thuy isn’t as beautiful as Hong, but she has a lovely smile and looks very healthy, Thuy is very sporty. She spends most of her free time playing sports. Thuy is a volleyball star of our school. She is also sociable and has a good sense of humor, Her jokes always make us laugh. I love both of my friends and I always hope our friendship will never die. 1. The writer has more than one close friend. ..................................................................... 2. Thuy is more beautiful than Hong. ..................................................................... 3. Hong is the best student in her class. ..................................................................... 4. Thuy is humorous and outgoing. ..................................................................... VII. Combine each of the following pairs of sentence into one sentence. Using (NOT) ADJECTIVE + ENOUGH + TO INFIRNITIVE. 1. Chi is unwell. She can’t go on the picnic with her classmates. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The water here is unsafe. We can’t drink it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. The candlelight is dim. We can’t read with it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. We are young. We can’t vote in the corning election. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. My uncle’s eyesight is bad. He can’t join the army. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. My granddad‘s eyes are good. He can read the small print without glasses. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. These paintings are good. They can enter for the competition. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. The room is large. It can hold 80 people. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fìll in the blank. 1. Davis has a good ___________of humor. a. scene b. scent c. sense 2. I don’t have enough money ___________. a. for a holiday b. to go a holiday c. going on holiday 3. In Britain, school always___________ in September. a. begin b. begins c. began

d. cent d. to a holiday d. beginning Trang 9

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Her new glasses change her ___________. a. appear b. appears c. appearances d. appearance 5. Surely 15 minutes is enough time ___________. a. for you to have a bath b. to you for having a bath c. to you to have a bath d. for you for having a bath 6. He wasn’t ___________the job. a. experienced enough to b. enough experienced to c. experienced enough for d. enough experienced for 7. Is there enough room ___________in the car? a. to me b. for me c. for I d. to I 8. It was generous___________ you to share your food with me. a. about b. to c. for d. of 9. Reading books ___________one of my hobbies. a. be b. is c. are d. will be 10. Tim enjoys ___________ to the zoo with his friends at the weekends. a. go b. goes c. going d. to go 11. What do you often do ___________Christmas? a. at b. in c. for d. on 12. It ___________Hoa 25 hours a week ___________ her homework. a. takes/ do b. take/ to do c. takes/ to do d. took/ doing II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. Many foreigners will come to visit Viet Nam every year. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. Mary has an important exam so she works very hardly. A B C D ..................................................................... III. Use the correct word form of the word given in each sentence. 1. Nam, you look ___________ today? (HAPPYLY) 2. His stories are full of ___________. (HUMOROUS) 3. I like the ___________ and quiet of the country. (PEACEFUL) 4. They are ___________ enough to escape___________. (LUCK/ PUNISH) 5. He was an orphan so he had to spend his ___________ in an ___________. (CHILD / ORPHAN) 6. Ba is a ___________boy. He has got a ___________sense. (FUN / HUMOR) 7. Nhan is always ___________to his mother. (HELP) 8. Marconi was the___________ of the radio. (INVENT) IV. Supply the correct forms of verbs in brackets. Nam (1. enjoy) ___________ (2. climb) ___________ mountains. He (3. go) ___________ (4. climb) ___________ whenever he (5. have) ___________ time. Most of the time he (6. climb) ___________ with his best friend, Nien. Last Friday (7. be) ___________a public holiday. They (8. decide) ___________ (9. climb) ___________ Chau Thoi mountain. “We (10. return) ___________ before dark”, they (11. tell) ___________ their parents before they (12. set) ___________off. It (13. take) ___________them for 4 hours (14. climb) ___________ up to the top of the mountain. (15. stand) ___________ from that height, they (16. can) ___________ see the whole village below. What a marvelous sight! V. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. All of my friends, I like Amanda best or she is my best friends. She is a pretty girl with bright eyes, smooth skin, delicate lips and a quick clever mind, making her so remarkable not only in the class but also at school. She does so well in studying that our teachers often take her as an example for us. Amanda has many hobbies, but she likes singing and acting best. Sometimes she is chosen to act in some school plays. Amanda and I have many things in common. I love the things she loves. She hates the things I hate. What a wonderful friendship we have! 1. Amanda looks nice and intelligent. ..................................................................... 2. Amanda is popular only in the class. ..................................................................... Trang 10

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 3. Amanda is an excellent student. ..................................................................... 4. Amanda likes taking part in school plays. ..................................................................... 5. Talking about hobbies, Amanda and I don’t share anything. ..................................................................... VI. Read the following passage and then answer the question. My name’s Ellen and my husband's name is Peter. We’ve got three children - two sons and a daughter. Our sons’ names are Ian and Ben. They’re twins, but they are not identical (giống hệt). Ian has got dark hair, but Ben’s hair is fair. Our daughter’s name is Tracy. She is eight years old. The boys are four. 1. How many people are there in Ellen’s family? ..................................................................... 2. How many children do they have? ..................................................................... 3. What do their sons look like? ..................................................................... 4. How old is Ben? ..................................................................... 5. What is the name of Ellen’s daughter? ..................................................................... VII. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown so that the meaning stays the same. 1. Mary can't go to school because she is too young. Mary isn’t ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Are you very tall? Can you reach that picture? Are you tall .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3. There are ten people in the room but there are only eight chairs. There aren’t ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4. This picture is $10.50, I have only $9.50 so I can’t buy it. I don’t have ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How much is that shirt? How much does ................................................................................................................................................................. 6. Let’s go out tonight. Shall we ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. His hobby is to collect stamp. He enjoys ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8. Lan spends three hours a day doing her homework. It takes .................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 11

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS I. GETTING STARTED 1. to arrange (v)

: sắp xếp, sắp đặt, thu 4. address book (n) : sổ ghi địa chỉ xếp 5. mobile phone (n): điện thoại di động -» arrangement (n): sự sắp đặt, sự thu xếp 6. telephone directory (n): danh bạ điện thoại 2. fax machine (n) : máy fax 7. answering machine (n): máy tự động 3. public telephone (n): điện thoại công cộng trả lời (điện thoại) II. LISTEN AND READ 8. downstairs (adv) : ở tầng dưới, dưới lầu 12. cousin (n) : anh, chị, em họ (con của 9. upstairs (adv): ở tầng trên, ở trên lầu chú bác hoặc cô dì) 10. hold on (v) : chờ, dừng lại (thường 13. to agree (v) : đồng ý, bằng lòng, thỏa dùng ờ dạng mệnh lệnh) thuận 11. I’m afraid... (exp): tôi e rằng...(dùng để từ -» agreement (n): sự thỏa thuận, đồng ý chối một cách lịch sự) -» assistance (n): sự giúp đỡ III. READ 14. junior high school (n): trường phổ thông cấp 2. 22. to conduct (v): thực hiện, tiến hành 15. to emigrate (v) : di cư 23. to come up with sty (v): nghĩ ra, nảy -» emigration (n) : sự di cư ra (một câu trả lời, một giải pháp) 16. deaf-mute (n) : người vừa câm vừa 24. device (n) : thiết bị, công cụ, máy điếc móc 17. to experiment (v) : làm thí nghiệm 25. to introduce (v): giới thiệu, đưa ra -» experiment (n) : thí nghiệm 26. message (n) : thông bảo, lời nhắn 18. to transmit (v) : truyền, phát (tín hiệu, 27. to demonstrate (v): trình bày, trình chương trình) diễn -» transmission (n): sự phát (thanh) -» demonstration (n): sự trình bày truyền (hình) 28. countless (adj) : vô số, vô kể 19. speech (n) : lời nói 29. exhibition (n) : cuộc triển lãm, cuộc 20. to invent (v) : phát minh, sáng tạo trưng bày -» invention (n) : sự / việc phát minh -» to exhibit (v) : trưng bày -» inventor (n) : người phát minh 30. commercial (adj): thuộc thương mại 21. to assist (v) : giúp đỡ, cộng sự -» commerce (n) : sự buôn bán, thương -» assistant (n) : người giúp đỡ, phụ tá nghiệp IV. WRITE 31. service (n) : dịch vụ, sự phục vụ -» stationery order (n): hàng văn phòng 32. delivery (n) : sự phân phát, việc giao phẩm đặt trước thư, hàng 36. to reach (v) : liên lạc với ai (bằng điện -» delivery service (n): dịch vụ giao hàng thoại) 33. furniture (n) : đồ đạc (trong nhà) 37. racket (n) : cây vợt 34. customer (n) : khách hàng -» tennis racket (n): vợt tennis 35. stationery (n) : văn phòng phẩm 38. to trick (v) : lừa gạt, đánh lừa V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. Neither ... nor (không ... mà cũng không) * “neither ... nor” được dùng để kết nối hai ý phủ định. Ex: (1) My father neither smokes nor drinks. (2) The hotel is neither spacious nor comfortable. (3) Neither she nor her husband was at home. * Đôi khi có nhiều hơn hai ý được kết nối bởi “neither ... nor”. Ex: (1) He neither smiled, spoke, nor looked at me. (2) She neither eats, speaks nor cries when her husband dies. * Khi hai chủ từ được nối với nhau bằng “neither... nor” thì động từ phụ thuộc vào chủ từ thứ hai. Ex: (1) Neither she nor her parents like this restaurant. (2) Neither her parents nor she likes this restaurant. 2. Be going to (sẽ, sắp) Trang 12

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

có.

Subject + am / is / are + going to + bare inf + O. a. Talk about intentions (Diễn tả ý định) - Be going to dùng để nói về một dự định sẽ được thực hiện trong tương lai hoặc một quyết định sẵn

Ex: (1) We are going to spend our holiday in Florida this year. (2) I am going to get a new car. * NQTE: - Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn (present progressive tense) cũng có thể được dùng để nói về dự định (thường là những dự định đã được sắp xếp như sắp xếp gặp một người nào đó, sắp xếp đi đâu đó hoặc những kế hoạch đã định, nhất là khi đã xác định thời gian và nơi chốn). Ex: (1) We are going to Mexico next summer. (2) I am meeting Tom at the airport at six. b. Make predictions (Đưa ra những dự đoán) - Be going to được dùng để dự đoán tương lai dựa trên tình trạng hiện tại - nói rằng một hành động hoặc một sự việc sắp xảy ra hoặc bắt đầu xảy ra. Ex: (1) She is going to have another baby in June. (2) Look at the sky! It’s going to rain. (3) Oh, no! We are going to crash! 3. Adverbs of place (Trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn) * Trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn cho biết sự việc xảy ra ở đâu. Ex: here (ở đây); there (ở kia); outside (ở bên ngoài); inside (ở bên trong); upstairs (ở tầng trên); downstairs (ở tầng dưới); around (quanh); in London (ở London); out of the window (ở ngoài cửa sổ), ... * Trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn thường đứng cuối mệnh đề. Ex: (1) The children are playing upstairs. (2) Come and sit here. * NOTE: Trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn thường đứng trước trạng từ chỉ thời gian. Ex: (1) She lived in London in 1989. (2) Don’t be late. Make sure that you’ll be here by 8 o’clock. ---------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Compete the sentences, using the appropriate words in the box. in on there outside out inside upstairs here downstairs 1. The children love Disneyland. They want to go ___________ again. 2. I open the box and look ___________. 3. She ran ___________to open the door for him. 4. I'm afraid I can’t drink coffee with milk ___________. 5. Wait ___________, I’ll be back ỉn a minute. 6. He ran up the stairs to see what happened ___________. 7. What’s ___________ at the Rex Theater this week? 8. Last night someone broke into the kitchen and stole the microwave oven while we were ___________. II. Use "be going to" with the verbs in brackets. 1. Look out! She (fall) ___________off the rail. 2. I (not have) ___________ breakfast this morning. I‘m not hungry. 3. My Mends (get) ___________ married in July this year. 4. Where we (spend) ___________ the night tonight? 5. You (invite) ___________the newcomer of our class to your party? 6. Look! The ambulance is coming. I (wait) ___________ to the driver. 7. We feel tired. We (lie) ___________ down for some sleep. 8. My hair is dirty. I (wash) ___________it. 9. I (visit) ___________Ha Noi this summer vacation. 10. Susan likes a leather bell. She (buy) ___________it next week. III. Write a question with “going to” for each situation. Use the words in brackets. Trang 13

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 1. My brother’s going to university in September. (What / he / study?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Mr. and Mrs. Smith are going shopping. (What / they / buy?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Ba iss working hard for his exams. (When / he / have exams?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. It’s my birthday next week. (You / have a birthday party?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. Hoa’s not going by bicycle. (She / go / bus?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. We are not going to have a meeting on Friday. (you / have a meeting / Saturday?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. I’m thirsty. (What / you / drink?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. I have just bought a poster. (Where / you / put it?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. My parents are going to China next summer. (How / they / travel?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10. I’m too busy to paint the door today. (you / paint it / tomorrow?) .................................................................................................................................................................................................. IV. Rewrite each sentence, using “Neither...nor...” 1. She didn’t write and she didn't phone. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. John doesn’t smoke. He doesn‘t drink, either. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Jim hasn’t got a car. Carol hasn’t got a car, either. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Jenifer wasn’t able to attend the party last week. Her parents weren’t able to attend the party last week, either. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. Both Sally and other children don’t believe in the tooth fairy. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. V. Fill in the blanks with a suitable preposition. 1. The post office is not far ___________ my house. 2. Let’s meet ___________the City Theater ___________7 o’clock. 3. She was born ___________ May 16,h, 2001 ___________Nha Trang. 4. He worked ___________deaf-mutes ___________Boston University. 5. Mrs. Lien said you could reach her ___________8603423. 6. Snow is falling all ___________ the country. 7. Will you pick me ___________after the party? 8. The secretary took a message ___________her boss. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fill in the blank. 1. I have to leave to pick up the kids at school. a. must b. should c. ought to 2. Come ___________and see the garden! a. inside b. outside c. insides 3. They ___________ buy a new car next month. a. are going to b. will c.  4. He fell ___________and broke his leg. a. upstairs b. upstairs c. downstair 5. I ___________with some friends until I find a flat.

d. need to d. outsides d. a & b d. downstairs

Trang 14

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 a. live b. lives c. am living d. lived 6. I said it was a good film, but Jackson ___________with me. a. agrees b. disagrees c. agreed d. disagreed 7. Are you going to visit anybody ___________? a. last night b. tomorrow c. yesterday d. yesterday morning 8. ___________is a building in which movies are shown. a. Movie theater b. University c. Aquarium d. Restaurant 9. There was a(n) ___________ about the meeting. a. advice b. news c. message d. information 10. I ___________ town next Saturday. a. am going to b. am going c. go to d. am going to go 11. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. a. patient b. address c. assistant d. distance 12. Choose the word whose main stress syllable is placed differently from the others. a. message b. furniture c. cousin d. invent II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. I am thinking Sydney is an interesting city to visit. A B C D ..................................................................... 2. Look out! The chair broke if that man sits on it. A B C D ..................................................................... III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form or tense. 1. Bad driving (cause) ___________ many accidents. 2. Nga and Hoa (see) ___________ a movie tonight. 3. Sue can (speak) ___________Vietnamese very well. 4. Mozart (write) ___________ more than 600 pieces of music. 5. How you (learn) ___________ to drive? - My father (teach) ___________me. 6. We usually (go) ___________to the library three times a week, but last week we (go) ___________twice. IV. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. Tom is working as an ___________ to professor Brown. (ASSIST) 2. I can think of ___________ reasons for not attending the meeting. (COUNT) 3. At the exhibition, Bell presented his ___________ to the public. (INVENT) 4. We are making ___________ for the trip to Dien Bien next week. (ARRANGE) 5. They are ___________ a new Computer System at the Computer Exposition. (DEMONSTRATION) 6. Some ___________are not very satisfied with the service of Thang Loi hotel. (CUSTOM) 7. The company has arranged for the ___________ of the furniture to Mrs. Lien’s home. (DELIVER) 8. The play was a ___________success. (COMMERCE) V. Kill in each blank in the passage with ONE suitable. Use the words given in the box. My village is about 50 kilometers (1) ___________the city center. It is a very beautiful and peaceful place where people (2) ___________ flowers and vegetables only. It’s very famous (3) ___________ it’s pretty roses and picturesque scenes. The air is quite fresh and the smell of the roses makes people feel cool in spring. my village looks like a carpet with plenty of colors. (4) ___________come to visit it so often. Nowadays, with electricity, it doesn’t take the villagers much time (5) ___________ the roses. And even at night people can walk along the path and enjoy the good (6) ___________of the flowers. 1. a. in b. to c. from d. about 2. a. arrange b. grow c. raise d. rise 3. a. by b. with c. and d. for 4. a. Tourist b. Tourism c. Villagers d. Tourists 5. a. to water b. watering c. water d. watered 6. a. taste b. flavor c. smell d. beautiful VI. Read the passage carefully, then decide whether each of the following statements is True (T) or False (F). I have many neighbors. Some of them are teachers, some are workers and some are officials.

Trang 15

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 My neighbors are very friendly. They do not quarrel with one another. Most of them are educated and rich. They do not like to talk against one another. They do not like to disturb others. They speak softly so that others may not get angry. My neighbors are also helpful to one another. If someone is ill, they call a doctor to attend him to the hospital as quickly as possible. I am indeed very happy to live with such neighbors. 1. The neighbors have many different careers. ..................................................................... 2. They often have quarrels. ..................................................................... 3. They are poor and ill- educated. ..................................................................... 4. They do not speak aloud to annoy others. ..................................................................... VII. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown so that the meaning stays the same. 1. I intended to come over to pick you up. I’m ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2. Hoa is older than Nien. Nien is ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The table was light. She can carry it The table .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. The work is hard. She has to ask her friend for some help. The work .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5. The weather is too bad. They can’t go for a walk. The weather is not ........................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fill in the blank. 1. Mary, you ___________the exam if you don’t work more. a. will fail b. are failing c. fail d. failed 2. I thought I heard noise ___________. a. upstair b. upstairs c. Ø d. b & c 3. I’ll ask my personal ___________ to deal with this. a. assist b. assistant c. assistance d. assisting 4. Look! The baby ___________ going to eat the dog’s food! a. is b. was c. are d. were 5. Don’t come in. Please wait ___________ for a few minutes. a. inside b. outside c. insides d. outsides 6. I’ll come ___________to pick her up. a. in b. on c. over d. up 7. There are many ways ___________doing it. a. of b. for c. to d. about 8. They found some electrical ___________in the room. a. devices b. device c. advices d. advice 9. The school decided to try an ___________ in language teaching. a. experimented b. experiments c. experiment d. experimental 10. I tried to phone him countless times but he wasn’t there. a. few b. little c. much d. many 11. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. a. fishing b. cousin c. invent d. furniture 12. Choose the word whose main stress syllable is placed differently from the others. a. countless b. service c. transmit d. answer II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. We liked the hotel so much that we are going to there again next year. A B C D ............................. 2. We talked about which film we wanted to see, but there was not many agreement. A B C D ............................. III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form or tense. Trang 16

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 1. What (be) ___________ today? Today (be) ___________ Monday. 2. Elvis (be) ___________ here next month. 3. What Trang and Mai (do) ___________ at the moment? 4. My brother always (do) ___________his homework at 9 o’clock. 5. I (not get) ___________up late tomorrow morning. 6. Her granddad usually (have) ___________a cup of milk in the morning. 7. What Vinh and Khoa (do) ___________next Saturday evening? IV. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. She was a highly ___________ mind. (INVENT) 2. He can walk only with the ___________ of crutches. (ASSIST) 3. My ___________ will now demonstrate the machine in action. (ASSIST) 4. There was an ___________ of paintings at the Art Gallery. (EXHIBIT) 5. This old man is ___________in one ear. (DEAFEN) 6. There was still no ___________on what to do next. (AGREE) 7. His ___________made us surprised. (DEMONSTRATE) 8. The label tells the consumers the ___________ between two machines. (DIFFERENT) V. Fill in each blank in the passage with ONE suitable. Use the words given in the box. Dear Jane and Robin, How are you (1) ___________? Well, I hope. We’re OK, working (2) ___________, usual. Can I ask you a favor? I’m (3) ___________ London for two (4) ___________next week, Thursday and Friday. Can you (5) ___________me a bed? I would be really grateful. Give me a ring (6) ___________there’s a problem. Book that Greek restaurant again! It’s my tum to pay! Love to the kids. See you soon. Peter. 1. a. all b. both c. each d. every 2. a. hard b. hardly c. careful d. lately 3. a. in b. at c. on d. when 4. a. hours b. nights c. weeks d. months 5. a. give b. to give c. giving d. to giving 6. a. when b. if c. so d. although VI. Read the passage carefully, then decide whether each of the following statements is True (T) or False (F). Graham Bell was bom in Scotland in 1847, but when he was a young man of twenty - three, he moved with his parents to Canada. Before the year was over, young Graham had left his family and gone to Boston. Though Bell was a dreamer, he was also a practical thinker and a man of action. In Boston, where he worked by day as a teacher of the deaf, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound. This led to the invention of the telephone. 1. He emigrated to Canada in 1865. .................................................... 2. He went to Boston when he was twenty-three. .................................................... 3. Graham Bell worked with the deaf in Boston. .................................................... 4. He experimented with the electrical transmission of the sound by day. .................................................... VII. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown so that the meaning stays the same. 1. I’m too busy to paint the door today. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Minh is planning to visit his parents on Saturday. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. She goes to the library every day. Her friends go to the library every day, too. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Jane is so young that she can’t stay alone at home. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. What do you plan to cook for dinner tonight? .................................................................................................................................................................................................. -------------------------------------------------------Trang 17

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

TEST 3 I. Choose the most suitable word or phra.se to fill in the blank. 1. He fell ___________and broke his wrist. a. into b. off c. out d. in 2. Hoa: I can't reach that apple. Lan: Don’t worry. I ___________ you. a. help b. will help c. am going to help d. helped 3. A ___________ is a person who could neither speak nor hear. a. blind b. deaf-mute c. cousin d. customer 4. They ___________buy a new car next month. a. are going to b. will c. Ø d. a & b 5. Let’s go ___________and sit ___________ the sun. a. inside / by b. outside / in c. out / under d. there / beside 6. Pete’s cousin has ___________ to buy a superman toy. a. money enough b. so much money c. too much money d. enough money II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. conduct b. customer c. upstairs d. introduce 2. a. upstairs b. fair c. straight d. downstairs III. Choose the word whose main stress sailable is placed differently from the others. 1. a. invention b. demonstrate c. arrangement d. agreement 2. a. exhibition b. introduction c. emigration d. stationery IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. That man is going to gets wet because he doesn’t have an umbrella. A B C D .................................................... 2. Tom said you could reach him in 8 3645 082 after dinner. A B C D .................................................... 3. Why are you going to spend two weeks in New York last month? A B C D .................................................... 4. She took the list of visitors’ names and arranges them into groups of four. A B C D .................................................... V. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form or tense. 1. My friends (get) ___________married in September this year. 2. Alexander Graham Bell (introduce) ___________ the telephone in 1876. 3. She (write) ___________to me every week. 4. My hair is dirty. I (wash) ___________it. 5. It is safe (keep) ___________drugs and Chemicals in locked cupboards. 6. Would you like (come) ___________to dinner tomorrow? 7. - “What you (do) ___________ next summer vacation?”. - “I (visit) ___________ my grandparents in Nha Trang. VI. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. Ho Chi Minh City is an important ___________ center. (COMMERCE) 2. We’re thinking of ___________ to Australia. (EMIGRATE) 3. He was ___________in demonstrating his invention. (SUCCESS) 4. The audience felt sleepy because of the long___________ . (SPEAK) 5. Can I leave the ___________ of the tables to you? (ARRANGE) 6. Marconi was the ___________of the radio. (INVENT) 7. There’s a very ___________ film on TV tonight. (INTEREST) 8. He is not ___________ enough to lift up the vase by himself. (STRENGTH) VII. Choose the correct answer to complete the passage. You may use the telephone every day but how (1) ___________ do you know about it? The telephoned was (2) ___________ by Alexander Graham Bell in 1876. Bell was bom in Scotland in 1847. But later he (3) ___________to the USA. Bell was always (4) ___________ in sound. He wanted to be able to send sound through a wire. He had a workshop in his house in America and did many experiments there. Trang 18

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 One day, he was doing an experiment in his workshop. He was (5) ___________ and spilt some boring liquid onto his clothes. Talking into his telephone, Bell said, “Mr. Watson, I want you to come over here immediately, please.” His assistant was in another room far away from the workshop. (6) ___________, he heard Bell clearly on his own telephone. Quickly, he ran to Bell’s workshop. “Mr. Bell, I heard every word you said!” Watson shouted excitedly. Bell succeeded. He invented the first telephone. Later, other inventors made better ones. 1. a. many b. much c. long d. far 2. a. invented b. made c. discovered d. explored 3. a. lived b. reached c. emigrated d. arrived 4. a. interest b. interested c. interesting d. to interest 5. a. easefully b. carelessly c. careful d. careless 6. a. Besides b. Therefore c. However d. Moreover VIII. Read the passage carefully, then decide whether each of the following statements is True (T) or False (F). John Loge Baird, who is called “the father of television” was bom in Scotland in 1888. He became an inventor at the age of 26. In 1923, he became interested in the idea of pictures by radio. He started working in his bedroom with a torch, a knitting needle, a few parts from a radio; a wooden box and some cardboard. He worked for several months, and the following year he succeeded in transmitting the first “television” picture a few meters across the room. In 1926 he showed it to the public at the Royal society. In 1928, he transmitted the first picture across the Atlantic and in 1929, the BBC and the German Post Office began to broadcast TV with his System. There was another System in America called the Marconi-Emi System. That System used electronics instead of moving parts. In 1936, the BBC decided to choose the electronic System from Emi after the competition between the two Systems. Baird was very unhappy, but there was nothing that he could do. For the rest of his life, he tried to develop new ideas but had no success. In the end, he became ill and died in 1946 at the age of 57. 1. Baird became an inventor in 1914. .................. 2. He conducted his first experiments in his workshop. .................. 3. He succeeded in transmitting the first TV picture a few meters across the room in 1924. .................. 4. Baird was the winner in the competition between two Systems. .................. IX. Rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown so that the meaning stays the same. 1. Playing with matches is very dangerous. It .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Nam can answer that question because he is very intelligent. (enough) Nam ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. They plan to invite their close friends for dinner tonight. (be going to) They are ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Jose is too young to see the horsy film. (enough) Jose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How about going to the movie theater tonight? Let’s ....................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 19

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 3: AT HOME I. LISTEN AND READ 1. chore (n): công việc trong nhà, việc vặt 5. saucepan (n) : cái xoong 2. cupboard (n) : tủ ly, chạn 6. frying-pan (n) = fry-pan (n): cái 3. steamer (n) : nồi hấp, chõ chảo (dùng để rán thức ăn) -» to steam (v) : hấp 7. rice cooker (n) : nồi cơm điện 4. sink (n) : bồn rửa bát 8. rug (n) : thảm dày trải sàn II. READ 9. precaution (n): sự phòng ngừa, đề phòng -» electrical socket (n): ổ cắm điện 10. safe (adj) : an toàn 19. electricity (n) : điện, điện năng -» safety (n) : sự an toàn, sự chắc chắn -» electrical (adj): thuộc về điện -» safety precautions (n): sự giữ gìn an toàn -» electric (adj): chạy bằng điện, tạo ra 11. chemical (n) : hóa chất điện -» Chemical (adj) : (thuộc) hóa học -» electrician (n) : thợ điện -» chemist (n) : nhà hóa học -» electrify (v) : điện khí hóa -» chemistry (n) : ngành / môn hóa học 20. to kill (v) : giết chết, làm chết 12. drug (n) : thuốc 21. object (n) : vật, đồ vật 13. to make sure (of sth) (exp): làm cho rõ, 22. reach (n): tầm tay làm cho chắc chắn -» out of one’s reach (exp): ngoài tầm tay / 14. match (n) : que diêm với 15. to destroy (v) : tiêu hủy, phá hủy, tàn phá -» within one’s reach (exp): trong tầm tay / -» destruction (n) : sự tàn phả, sự hủy diệt với 16. to cover (v) : bọc, phủ, che 23. bead (n) : hạt (của chuồi hạt) 17. to injure (v) : làm bị thương, làm hại 24. scissors (n) : cái kéo -» injury (n) : sự tổn hại, chỗ bị thương 25. knife (n) : con dao 18. socket (n) : ổ, hốc, lỗ III. WRITE 26. folder (n) : bìa kẹp hồ sơ 28. towel (n) : khăn lau, khăn tắm 27. wardrobe (n) : tủ quần áo 29. beneath (prep) : ở dưới, xuống dưới IV. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS (đại từ phản thân) I myself It itself You yourself We ourselves He himself You yourselves She herself They themselves * Usage: (Cách dùng) - Dùng làm tân ngữ của động từ khi chủ ngữ và tân ngữ là cùng 1 người hay 1 vật. Ex: (1) He bought himself new car. (2) Don’t worry. The children can look after themselves. - Dùng làm từ nhấn mạnh cho chủ ngữ hoặc tân ngữ, có nghĩa “chính người đó / vật đó và không ai / không gì khác”. Trong trường hợp này đại từ phản thân đứng ngay sau từ được nhấn mạnh. Ex: (1) The manageress herself spoke to me. (2) The name itself sounds foreign. (3) I’ll go and see the president himself. * NOTE: - Khi nhấn mạnh chủ ngữ, đại từ phản thân có thể đứng cuối câu. Ex: The manageress spoke to me herself. - By + reflexive pronoun = alone Ex: He lives by himself in that large house = He lives alone in that large house. 2. Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO a. Must (phải, cần phải) (+) S + must + Vo (-) S + mustn’t + Vo... Trang 20

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 (?) Must

+ Vo ?

* Usage: - Dùng để đưa ra một lời khuyên hoặc một đề nghị được nhấn mạnh. Ex: (1) You must take more exercise. Join a tennis Club. (2) He mustn’t see that film. It’s for adults only. - Diễn tả sự bắt buộc đến từ phía người nói, bày tỏ cảm xúc và ước muốn của người nói - ví dụ như ra lệnh (cho mình hoặc cho người khác). Ex: (1) I must stop smoking. (2) You must be here before eight o’clock tomorrow. b. Have to (phải) (+) S + have to / has to + Vo... (-) S + do / does + not + have to + Vo... (?) Do / Does + S + have to + Vo...? - Chủ vếu được dùng để chỉ sự bắt buộc đến từ “bên ngoài”- ví dụ từ luật pháp, nội quy, thỏa thận và lệnh của người khác... Ex: (1) I have to stop smoking. Doctor’s orders. (2) You have to wear uniform on duty. * NOTE: - Trong tiếng Anh của người Mỹ, must và have to được dùng như nhau để chỉ sự bắt buộc (have to được dùng phổ biến hơn, nhất là trong văn nói). - Have to dùng để thay thế must ở thì tương lai (will have to) và quá khứ (had to). - Ở thể phủ định: + must not/mustn’t (không được): chỉ sự cấm đoán + do / does not have to (không cần phải, không phải): chỉ sự không cần thiết c. Ought to (nên, phải) (+) S + ought to + Vo... (-) S + ought not to + Vo... (?) Ought + S + to + Vo...? * Ought to được dùng để diễn đạt lời khuyên hoặc lời đề nghị. Ex: (1) You ought to drive more carefully. (2) What time ought I to arrive? 3. Why (Tại sao) — Because (vì; bởi vì) * Why là trạng từ nghi vấn được dùng dể hỏi lý do hoặc nguyên nhân. * Because là một liên từ dùng để chỉ lý do, nguyên nhân hoặc dể trả lời cho câu hỏi “Why?” Why + be + S + ...? / Why + Aux. V + S + V0...? -» Because + S + be/V + ... Ex: (1) Why were you late for class this morning? — Because there was a traffic jam. (2) Why did she do it by herself? — Because it was her duty. (3) Why are you nervous? — Because I’ll have a test next period. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

1. Fill in the gaps with reflexive pronouns. 1. I hurt ___________badly falling down the stairs. 2. He built a boat all by ___________. 3. Maria and Alison, you really should look after ___________better. 4. The children did everything ___________ without any help. 5. I burnt___________ on the oven yesterday. 6. Forget it! I’ll do it ___________. 7. Bill taught ___________to type last summer. 8. She blames ___________for what happened. 9. We all enjoy ___________very much on the picnic. 10. I talk to all___________ the time. It doesn’t mean I’m crazy. II. Fill in each blank, using a correct REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. Trang 21

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 1. I cut___________ shaving this morning. 2. My sister often looks at___________ in the mirror. 3. Mark made ___________a sandwich. 4. This refrigerator defrosts ___________. 5. Jane and I ___________saw that accident yesterday. 6. Did you pay for ___________? 7. The children can look after ___________ for a few days. 8. Please help me I can’t do it ___________. III. Complete each sentence using REFLEXIVE PRONOuNCES with one of these verbs (in the correct form). Blame burn cut enjoy express look after hurt put 1. George ___________when he was shaving this morning. 2. Bill fell downs some steps but fortunately, he didn't ___________ badly. 3. It isn’t her fault. She really shouldn’t___________. 4. Please try and understand how I feel___________ in my position. 5. They had a great time. They really___________. 6. Be careful! That pan is very hot. Don’t___________. 7. Sometimes I can’t say exactly what I mean. I wish I could ___________. 8. Don't worry about Jane and me. We can ___________. IV. Complete the sentences with MUST or HAVE / HAS TO. Sometimes both are possible. 1. Oh, it’s later than I thought. I ___________ go. 2. She’s a really nice person. You ___________meet her. 3. You can’t tum right here. You ___________tum left. 4. You ___________ do something. 5. I haven’t phoned Ann for ages. I ___________phone her tonight. 6. I ___________ get up early tomorrow. There are a lot of things I want to do. 7. My eye sight isn’t very good. I ___________wear glasses for reading. 8. George can’t come out with us this evening. He ___________work. V. Complete the sentences with MUST or HAVE / HAS TO. 1. It’s 11 o’clock. I ___________go now. 2. Vietnamese children ___________ wear uniform when they go to school. 3. Last night mv sister was ill. We ___________call the doctor. 4. I have bad toothache. I ___________make an appointment with the dentist. 5. I don’t want to ___________ wait in a queue for ages. 6. This is a terrible party. We ___________ go home. 7. If there are no taxis, we’ll ___________walk. 8. Daniel ___________go to the bank. He hasn’t any money. VI. Fill in the blanks with MUST NOT or DON’T / DOESN’T HAVE TO. 1. Cars ___________park in front of the entrance. 2. They___________ work on Saturday. 3. Visitors___________ feed the animal. 4. Tim ___________wear uniform at school. 5. You ___________touch that switch. It’s very dangerous. 6. The dentist has told Hoa she ___________eat any more sweet things. Her teeth are in bad condition. 7. You ___________read my diary. It’s private. 8. I’ve already finished all my work, so I ___________study tonight. VII. Complete the sentences using don’t / doesn’t /didn’t have to + one of these verbs. do go get up pay wake shave wait work 1. I’m not working tomorrow, so I ___________ early. 2. The car park is free. You ___________to park your car there. 3. I went to the bank this morning. There was no queue so I ___________. 4. Sally is extremely rich. She ___________. 5. We’ve got plenty of time. We ___________yet. 6. Jack has got a beard, so he ___________. Trang 22

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 7. I’ve got a few things to do but I ___________them now. 8. Don’t make so much noise. We ___________ the baby. VIII. Give advice with OUGHT TO or OUGHT NOT TO. Use the word given. 1. I feel sick. (go to the doctor) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Minh looks very tired. (go to bed late) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. My parents are going to visit France. (learn a few French words) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. There's a traffic jam and the people are rushing forward. (drive like that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. It’s eight o’clock. Helen is still sleeping. (get up early) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... IX. Give advice with OUGHT TO or OUGHT NOT TO. Use the word given. 1. I failed my English test. (study harder) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nam goes to school late. (go to bed early) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Mr. Hung is very thin now. (have a balanced diet) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Lisa needs three stamps and envelopes now. (go to the post office) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My tooth aches. (see the dentist) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... X. Make questions for the underlined words. 1. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... I had to go to the police station last week because mv bike was stolen. 2. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... I have to lend him some money. 3. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Jane has to go away for a long time. 4. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... You ought to practice English frequently. 5. ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Children have to obey their parents because parents always want the best for their children. XI. Prepositions. 1. Keep those medicines ___________of the children’s reach. (in /at / out) 2. Kitchen is not a suitable place ___________children to play. (with / to/for) 3. There is a bus station ___________the end of this road. (at /in / on) 4. You shouldn’t let children play___________ matches. (up /with / to) 5. There is a refrigerator___________ the right comer of the room. (at / in / to) 6. Please put these books ___________the bookshelf. (at/on/ in) 7. The secretary took a message ___________her boss. (to / on /for) 8. Khai and Song are quite reserved ___________public. (in / with /for) 9. ___________Sunday night I went to bed at 11 o’clock. (in / on/ to) 10. This led ___________the invention on the telephone. (off /to / with) 11. He came up___________ a new idea for increasing sale. (from /to / with) 12. Can you help me ___________ this heavy bag? (with /to /in) XII. Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. My sister is old enough (go) ___________ to school by herself 2. I (receive) ___________a letter from my friend yesterday. 3. Would you like (go) ___________ to the movies? - Yes, I’d love to. 4. I (phone) ___________ you as soon as I arrive in Ho Chi Minh City. 5. My Mom was out so I (take) ___________a message for her. Trang 23

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 6. They usually go (fish) ___________on the weekend. XIII. Supply the correct word form. 1. We’re keeping you here for your own ___________. (SAFE) 2. Nam’s father is doing a ___________ experiment in his laboratory. (CHEMIST) 3. Don’t leave the lights on. It wastes ___________. (ELECTRIC) 4. This machine has an ___________ fault. (ELECTRIC) 5. The ___________of atom bomb is very terrible. (DESTROY) 6. The disco was so ___________that you couldn’t hear yourself speak. (NOISE) XIV. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one. 1. Playing with matches is very dangerous. It .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. To read this novel is very interesting. It ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Putting a knife into an electrical Socket is dangerous. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. It is interesting to go swimming in the river in summer. Going ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Leaving the medicine around the house is not safe. It ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. It isn’t necessary for you to go to school so early. You don’t .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. It isn’t necessary for Hoa to water that tree every day. Hoa doesn’t ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8. It is necessary to revise your lesson before tests. Revising .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. She can’t speak. She can’t hear. She can .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. It took Nam twenty minutes to write a letter. Nam spent ............................................................................................................................................................................... 11. I enjoy telling jokes. I am interested ...................................................................................................................................................................... 12. The porter couldn’t carry this heavy suitcase because he was weak. The porter wasn’t ................................................................................................................................................................. 13. He stays up too late and he is always tired the next morning. He should ................................................................................................................................................................................. 14. No one helped Thanh repair his bike. Thanh repaired ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15. She intends to visit her grandfather this afternoon. She is ......................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the most suitable words or phrases to fill the blanks. 1. The children are old enough to look after ___________. a. them b. their c. themselves d. them self 2. We ought ___________ the wardrobe in the comer opposite the bed. a. put b. push c. to put d. to push 3. You should go to the ___________to buy some fish and vegetables. a. market b. post office c. kitchen d. theater 4. I ___________work every dãy from 8.30 a.m. to 5.30 p.m. a. ought to b. must c. should d. have to 5. The calendar is ___________the clock, ___________the picture and the lamp. a. on / next to b. under / between c. behind / between d. above / on 6. You ___________come to my party next week. I’d really like you to be there. a. have to b. must c. mustn’t d. don’t have to Trang 24

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 7. Let’s paint the house___________. It will be much cheaper. a. yourself b. herself c. ourselves d. themselves 8. These shoes are very well - made. They ___________a long time. a. lasts b. will last c. must not last d. must last 9. Nam often makes other people laugh because he likes telling ___________. a. assistant b. jokes c. directory d. arrangement 10. By 1877 the first telephone was in ___________use. a. commerce b. commercial c. invente d. invention II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. Alex doesn’t have to take his medicine yesterday because he was better. A B C D ........................................ 2. It is not safe leaving small objects around the house. A B C D ........................................ 3. Please try being quiet when you come home because everyone will be asleep. A B C D ........................................ 4. He said that my sister is a good cooker. A B C D ........................................ III. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. She’s always worried about the ___________of her family. (SAFE) 2. Bao thinks the food in this restaurant is ___________. (TASTE) 3. This river is very ___________for swimmers. (DANGER) 4. I’m ___________ sorry for the delay. (EXTREME) 5. I tried to lead a ___________ lifestyle - lots of exercises, fruit, and no junk foods. (HEALTH) 6. You have to keep all ___________ objects out of children’s reach. (DANGER) 7. You ought to do the test ___________. (CAREFUL) 8. I’m ___________in working in the garden. (INTEREST) IV. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. You should practice (play) ___________the piano every day. 2. He gave up (smoke) ___________2 years ago. 3. Her teacher asks her (spend) ___________ more time on Math. 4. It’s necessary (revise) ___________ new words regularly. 5. Look at those black clouds. It (rain) ___________. 6. There used to (be) ___________a temple here. 7. I’d rather (go) ___________out than stay home. 8. How you (get) ___________there yesterday? V. Read the passage carefully and choose True or False. We are all destroying the Earth. In seas and rivers are too dirty to swim in. There’s so much smoke in the air that it is unhealthy to live in many of world’s cities. We have cut down so many trees that there are now vast areas of wasteland all over the world. As a result, farmers in parts of Africa cannot grow enough to eat. In certain countries in Asia there is too little rice. (vast: rộng lớn; wasteland: hoang mạc) 1. We can swim in the seas and rivers. ........................................ 2. Smoke in the air makes us healthy. ........................................ 3. People are destroying the Earth. ........................................ 4. Africa farmers cannot grow enough to eat. ........................................ VI. Choose the word that best fits each of the blank spaces I’m a student (1) ___________ Bristol University. I share a house with three other students. It’s quite a (2) ___________ house. We all have our own (3) ___________. There (4) ___________ a bed, a desk, a chair and a wardrobe in the room. It has a washbasin and a mirror in the comer, too. We all share the kitchen, the living room and the bathroom. We sometimes have arguments about things, like someone spends too long (5) ___________the bathroom, but we have a lot of fun, (6) ___________. 1. a. in b. at c. on d. inside 2. a. tall b. big c. heavy d. old 3. a. rooms b. flats c. houses d. apartment Trang 25

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. a. has b. have c. is d. are 5. a. on b. over c. at d. in 6. a. too b. either c. neither d. a & b VII. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first one. 1. They plan to invite him for dinner tonight. They are ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Nobody helped Mike fix the CD player. Mike ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. David is too short to reach that shelf. David is not ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Children shouldn’t play in the kitchen. Children oughtn’t ............................................................................................................................................................... 5. My house has 4 bedrooms and a large kitchen. There ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Let’s meet inside the center, at the cafe comer. How ............................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. feed b. clean c. sweep d. head 2. a. floor b. four c. room d. door 3. a. sink b. fire c. rice d. knife 4. a. counter b. house c. couch d. ought 5. a. fry b. candy c. many d. happy II. Choose the most suitable words or phrases to fill the blanks. 1. My younger brother often makes toys ___________. a. themselves b. itself c. himself d. myself 2. It is ___________to leave drugs and Chemicals around the house. a. great b. safe c. dangerous d. suitable 3. Don’t let the children___________ in the kitchen. a. playing b. play c. not play d. to play 4. How long will he ___________stay there. a. must b. has to c. should d. have to 5. The chairs are ___________the table, ___________the lighting fixture. a. beside / above b. under / beside c. around / under d. around / above 6. You must___________ electrical sockets so that children don’t try to put anything into them. a. cover b. keep c. place d. make 7. Can she come to the movie? No, she has to___________ her chores. a. make b. think c. wash d. do 8. Where did you find the fish? In a ___________. a. chore b. tank c. garbage d. floor 9. Each year, ___________destroys home and injures children. a. fire b. match c. kitchen d. soft drink 10. What is she doing? She’s___________ the floor. a. doing b. sweeping c. dusting d. feeding III. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. Hoa was annoyed finding herself going red. A B C D ............................................................ 2. When he is four, Michael came to London with his parents. A B C D ............................................................ 3. Young children should not be allowed to go swimming by himself. A B C D ............................................................ 4. Are you have to do a lot of homework today? A B C D ............................................................ Trang 26

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 IV. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. These shoes are small, but they are very ___________. (COMFORT) 2. Bell ___________demonstrated his invention. (SUCCESS) 3. ___________, I lost my keys on the way home. (FORTUNATE) 4. Each of my friends has ___________ characters. (DIFFERENCE) 5. The boys shouted ___________. ( EXCITE) 6. You must put all medicines in ___________cupboards. (LOCK) 7. Those clothes are ___________for cold weather. (SUIT) 8. Most teenagers like talking part in ___________service. (COMMUNAL) V. Use the correct tense or form of the verb given in each sentence. 1. On the way home I stopped (buy) ___________ a newspaper. 2. Tom told me (not/come) ___________late for school. 3. You should practice (play) ___________the piano every day. 4. Yesterday we (take) ___________him home by car. 5. She often (cook) ___________really delicious meals. 6. Each of us (have) ___________ different character. 7. One of ray friends (be) ___________ Lan. 8. There (be) ___________a new school in our city next year. VI. Read the passage carefully and choose TRUE or FALSE. Marie was bom in Poland in 1876. She learnt to read when she was 4 years old. She was intelligent and had an excellent memory. She finished high school when she was only 15 years old. When she grew up, Marie went to Paris to study Mathematics and Chemistry at the University. She won the Nobel Prize for Physics in 1903 and 8 years later she received the Nobel Prize for Chemistry. Marie Curie died in 1934. 1. She finished high school in 1891. ............................................................ 2. She studied Mathematics and Chemistry at the university in Paris. ............................................................ 3. She won the Nobel Prize for Physics when she was 28. ............................................................ 4. Marie is Dutch. ............................................................ VII. Choose the word that best fits each of the blank spaces Isaac Newton is one of (1) ___________ men in history of scientists. He was bom in the small village ___________ (2) England. His father was a poor farmer. When the boy was fourteen, his father died. Newton left school and (3) ___________ his mother on the farm. But the boy didn’t like farming, he was fond of the poetry and mathematics, so Newton was sent to (4) ___________. After he (5) school, Newton studied at Cambridge University. He lectured on mathematics at Cambridge University after (6) ___________. His greatest discovery is the law of gravitation. 1. a. the greatest b. the most great c. more great d. greater 2. a. in b. on c. of d. at 3. a. help b. helped c. helping d. to help 4. a. orphanage b. hospital c. factory d. school 5. a. left b. emigrated c. conducted d. introduced 6. a. graduate b. graduating c. graduated d. to graduate VIII. Rewrite the following sentences. 1. Nhung wasn’t well. She couldn’t join the party yesterday. (enough) Nhung wasn’t .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Peter is too young to see the horror film. Peter is not ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It’s possible for anyone to break into this house. Anyone can .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. ls it necessary for me to speak ỉn English? Do I .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. It would be a good idea if Harry took a holiday. Harry ought ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6. Shall we go to the cinema tonight?. Trang 27

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 Let’s ........................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. 1. a. beneath b. scissors c. wardrobe d. cover 2. a. cooker b. folder c. destroy d. injure 3. a. frying b. towel c. socket d. include 4. a. chemical b. precaution c. electric d. destruction 5. a. remember b. dangerous c. vegetable d. opposite II. Choose the most suitable word or phrases to fill the blanks. 1. They ___________from Canada to America to find work. a. started b. demonstrated c. delivered d. emigrated 2. She is ___________enough to make friends with. a. reserved b. sociable c. countless d. commercial 3. There is an ___________of new cars down town. Would you like to go and see? a. invention b. exhibition c. action d. emigration 4. Bell ___________with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. a. emigrated b. took c. left d. experiment 5. She spends her free time ___________ volunteer work at a local orphanage. a. do b. does c. to do d. doing 6. Her parents won’t let her ___________out with her friends. a. going b. go c. gone d. went 7. It takes a long time ___________ a language, a. learn b. to learn c. learning d. learns 8. He fell off his bicycle and injured himself a. hurt b. destroyed c. cut d. painted 9. It was ___________of you to share your food with me. a. reserved b. shy c. sociable d. generous 10. We can some money by making toys from waste paper. a. make b. earn c. find d barrow III. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting 1. “Have something to eat. You have to be hungry”. A B C D ............................................................ 2. Can you tell her I’ll come over and picked her up? A B C D ............................................................ 3. He did the job skillful and the employer was satisfied with him. A B C D ............................................................ 4. The armchair is in the living room, among the television and the sofa. A B C D ............................................................ IV. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. It was cold yesterday, so I (wear) ___________a warm coat. 2. In England the Sun (not shine) ___________ every day. 3. Last year the 22nd Sea Game (take) ___________ place in my country. 4. It’s difficult (climb) ___________ this mountain. 5. We hope (have) ___________ a good time at the party. 6. It's dangerous to let children (play) ___________ in the kitchen. 7. We ought (put) ___________ the wardrobe in the comer opposite the bed. 8. He prefers watching to (play) ___________ football. V. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Bell and Watson___________ demonstrated the invention at countless exhibitions. (SUCCESSEUL) 2. Last week, Bao actively ___________ in social work. (PARTICIPATION) 3. Tm not___________ with tho way he cut my hair. (SATISEACTION) 4. He always talks about his son ___________. (PRIDE) 5. Nam likes acting and outdoor ___________. (ACT) Trang 28

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 6. is that ladder ___________? (SAFETY) 7. We need to ___________ the whole country as soon as possible. (ELECTRIC) 8- Hard work a]ways brings ___________. (SUCCEED) VL Choose the word that best fits each of the blank spaces Can you imagine what life would be (1) ___________if there were no telephone? You could not call your fiends on the phone and talk to them. When a (2) ___________ broke out in your house you could not call the fire department. (3) ___________ somebody were sick, he could not call a (4) ___________. Therefore, we should (5) ___________ our deep thanks to Alexander Graham Bell, a (6) ___________who invented the telephone in 1876. 1. a. like b. of c. for d. as 2. a. light b. fire c. sunlight d. match 3. a. Because b. So c. If d. So that 4. a. dentist b. farmer c. doctor d. engineer 5. a. given b. gave c. giving d. give 6. a. Dutch b. Mexican c. Scotsman d. Vietnamese VII. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are True or False Frank is now the head of a very large business company. But as a boy, he used to work in a small shop. It was his job to repair bicycles and he used to work fourteen hours a day. He save money for years and in 1938 he bought a small workshop of his own. During the war, Frank used to make spare time for planes. At that time he had two helpers. After the war, the small workshop became a large factory which employed seven hundred and twenty eight people. Frank smiled when he remembered his hard early years and the long road to success. 1. Frank used to repair bicycles when he was a boy. ....................................................... 2. He is an employee in a large business company now. ....................................................... 3. His small workshop had become a large factory at the end of the war. ....................................................... 4. There were 728 employees in the factory. ....................................................... VIII. Rewrite the following sentences. 1. It is a good things for her to keep the house clean and tidy. She should ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2. It isn’t necessary for you to finish the work today. You don’t .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. We shouldn’t allow children to play in the kitchen We mustn’t let ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I’d like to go on holiday but I haven’t got enough money. I haven’t got ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5. What do you intend to buy Loan for her birthday? What are you .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6. To go out at night is dangerous. It’s ............................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 29

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 4: OUR PAST I. LISTEN AND READ 1. past (n) : quá khứ -» equip (v) : trang bị 2. great - grandma (n) : bà cố 7. light - lit - lit (v) : thắp, đốt, châm 3. great - grandpa (n) : ông cố 8. folktale (n) : chuyện dân gian 4. sound (v) : nghe 9. tale (n) : chuyện kể -» sound (n) : âm thanh 10. traditional story (n) : truyện cổ tích 5. without (prep) : không có, thiếu 11. once (adv) : trước kia, xưa kia 6. equipment (n) : thiết bị 12. conversation (n) : bài đối thoại II. LISTEN 13. moral lesson (n) : bài học đạo đức 15. greedy (adj) : tham lam, tham ăn 14. foolish (adj) : ngu ngốc, ngớ ngẩn -» greed (n) : lòng tham -» fool (n) : người ngu xuẩn 16. gold (n): vàng -» golden (adj): bằng vàng III. READ 17. lose - lost - lost (v) : mất, thất lạc -» choice (n) : sự chọn lựa 18. daughter (n) : con gái 31. poor (adj) : tội nghiệp 19. die (v) : chết, từ trần, hi sinh 32. none (pron) : không ai / cái gì -» death (n) : sự chết, cái chết 33. fairy (n) : tiên -» dead (adj) : chết 34. appear (v) : xuất hiện 20. marry (v) : kết hôn, cưới ≠ disappear (v) : biến mất -» marry S.O = get married to S.O -» appearance (n) : sự xuất hiện, vẻ bề ngoài 21. unfortunately (adv): rủi thay 35. magical (adj) : kỳ diệu, thần thông -» unfortunate (adj): bất hạnh, rủi ro -» magically (adv) : kỳ diệu, thần kỳ 22. cruel (adj) (+ to) : độc ác, ác nghiệt 36. change (v, n) : thay đổi 23. upset (adj) : buồn phiền, lo lắng 37. rag (n) : giẻ rách 24. broken heart (n) : đau lòng, đau buồn -» rags (n) : quần áo rách 25. hold - held - held (v): tổ chức 38. drop (v) : đánh rơi 26. festival (n) : ngày hội, lễ hội 39. own (v) : sở hữu, có -» harvest festival (n): lễ tạ mùa -» owner (n) : người sở hữu, chủ nhân 27. excited (adj) : phấn khởi, hào hứng 40. fit (v) : vừa, hợp 28. prince (n) : hoàng tử 41. immediately (adv) : ngay lập tức 29. princess (n) : công chúa -» immediate (adj) : lập tức, tức thì 30. choose - chose - chosen (v): chọn, lựa 42. fall in love with S.O (exp): phải lòng ai IV. WRITE 43. bum (v) : đốt 50. master (n) : ông chủ -» bum (n) : vết phỏng 51. wise (adj) : khôn ngoan, sáng suốt 44. escape (v) : thoát ra , trốn thoát -» wisdom (n) : trí khôn 45. tie (v) : cột 52. rope (n) : dây thừng 46. graze (v) : gặm cỏ 53. straw (n) : rơm 47. nearby (adj, adv) : gần đó 54. stripe (n) : sọc, vàn 48. say - said - said (v) : nói -» striped (adj) : có sọc, có vằn 49. servant (n) : đầy tớ V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. THE SIMPLE PAST TENSE (Thì quá khứ đơn) a. FORMATION: Positive (+) S + was / were + A / N. S + V2- ed + O. Negative (-) S + was / were + not + A / N. S + did not / didn’t + V1 + O. Was / Were + S + A / N ? Did + s + V1 + o ? Interrogative (?) Wh- + was / were + S + ? Wh- + did + S + V1 +...? b. USAGE: - Diễn tả một hành động đã hoàn thành trong thời gian xác định ở quá khứ. Ex: (1) They arrived here yesterday. (2) I saw him three days ago. Trang 30

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 * Cách dùng này thường dùng với các trang từ: yesterday, ago, last month, last year, the other day, at that time, in + năm (in 1875) ... - Diễn tả một hành động kéo dài trong một khoảng thời gian ở quá khứ. Ex: (1) They lived in Nha Trang for five years. (2) He worked as a teacher from 1998 to 2000. - Diễn tả một thói quen hay hành động lặp đi lặp lại trong quá khứ. Ex: (1) When he was young, he went fishing twice a month. (2) She often cooked dinner when she was in VN two years ago. * Nó thường đi với các trang từ: twice a month, every, often, usually ... 2. USED TO Used to là từ được dùng để diễn tả thói quen hoặc tình trạng, sự việc chỉ tồn tại trong quá khứ (hiện nay không còn). (+) S + used to + V (bare). (-) S + didn’t use to + V (bare). (?) Did + S + use to + V (bare)? Ex: (+) They used to live there when they were ten. (-) ............................................................................................................................................................................................. (?) ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME (Giới từ chỉ thời gian) * AT: dùng cho thời gian trong ngày và những dịp lễ Ex: - at 12 o’clock - at sunset (lúc hoàng hôn) - at night (vào ban đêm) - at noon (lúc giữa trưa) - at midnight (lúc nửa đêm) - at dawn ( lúc bình minh) - at lunchtime (lúc ăn trưa) - at Easter (vào lễ Phục Sinh) - at Christmas (vào lễ Giáng Sinh) * ON: dùng cho thứ, ngày, ngày tháng, ngày tháng năm và các ngày cụ thể Ex: - on Christmas Day (vào ngày Giáng - on Wednesday Sinh), on Sunday morning (vào sáng - on 17 Pebruary Chủ Nhật) - on 23 July 1996 - on my birthday (vào ngày sinh nhật của tôi) * IN: dùng cho thế kỷ, năm, tháng, mùa và các buổi trong ngày Ex: - in the 21st century - in January - in 1970s - in the winter / fall / summer / spring - in 1998 - in the morning / afternoon / evening,... * FOR (trong khoảng thời gian) Ex: for two hours, for five minutes, for a long time, for ages, for a week,... * SINCE (từ, từ khi) Ex: since 1997, since last week, since yesterday, since Monday, since last year,... * TILL / UNTIL (cho đến khi) * UP TO (đến, cho đến) * BEFORE (trước khi) * BETWEEN (giữa) * AFTER (sau khi) * DURING (trong suốt) --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. \Write the past form of the following verbs. Infinitive Past Simple/ Past Participle 1. be .............................................................. 2. use .............................................................. 3. light .............................................................. 4. make .............................................................. 5. fit .............................................................. 6. go ..............................................................

Infinitive 21. find 22. fall 23. escape 24. graze 25. lose 26. choose

Past Simple/ Past Participle .............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. .............................................................. Trang 31

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 7. appear .............................................................. 27. come .............................................................. 8. hold .............................................................. 28. break .............................................................. 9. say .............................................................. 29. tell .............................................................. 10. bum .............................................................. 30. drop .............................................................. 11.leave .............................................................. 31. speak .............................................................. 12. know .............................................................. 32. give .............................................................. 13. hit .............................................................. 33. write .............................................................. 14. fly .............................................................. 34. forget .............................................................. 15. drive .............................................................. 35. run .............................................................. 16. read .............................................................. 36. have .............................................................. 17. learn .............................................................. 37. take .............................................................. 18. begin .............................................................. 38. buy .............................................................. 19. cut .............................................................. 39. sing .............................................................. 20. win .............................................................. 40. eat .............................................................. II. Using the past simple of the verbs in brackets. 1. Mai (walk) ____________ to work yesterday. 2. Hai never (make) ____________ so many mistakes in spelling when he was in grade 6. 3. Last year, his flat (be) ____________ on the tenth floor. 4. Nam (not be) ____________ a keen student in his class last year. 5. The three girls (go) ____________ to the concert every week two years ago. 6. The film isn’t good. He (not enjoy) ____________ very much. 7. All of them (be) ____________ bom in Hanoi, but they (move) ____________ to Ho Chi Minh City in 1998 to get good jobs. 8. I was in a hurry, so I (not have) ____________ time to phone you. 9. We went to Kate's house but she (not be) ____________ at home. 10. Sheila and Ken (not talk) ____________ to each other a week ago. 11. The weather (be) ____________ fine yesterday? 12. His sister (answer) ____________ all the difficult questions yesterday morning? 13. What his sister (do) ____________ last Sunday? 14. What you (do) ____________ when you finished your work yesterday? 15. Why she (go) ____________ to bed so early last night? 16. Mozart (play) ____________ the piano when he (be) ____________ here. 17. I (brush) ____________ my teeth every night, but last night I (forget) ____________ to brush them. 18. When I was a child, I always (walk) ____________ to school. 19.1 (noi like) reading when I traveled by car. 20. ____________ (you watch) the interesting show on the TV last night? 21. You (meet) ____________ Tim when you were in New York. 22. Where Tom (spend) ____________ his last holiday with his family? 23. The old people often think of all the things they (do) ____________ when they (be) ____________ young. 24. Everybody (stop) ____________ laughing when we (come) ____________ in. 25. After she had been at the party, her heart (be) ____________ full of strange emotion. III. Rewrite the following sentences, using “USED TO”. 1. She lived in Hue when she was young. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I played football ten years ago. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Long did not work very hard, but he does now. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Did you usually go to the movies last year? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Fred didn’t play baseball a lot, but now he does every day. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. What did you usually read as a child? ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 32

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 7. There was a bookshop beside the cinema. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. There were lots of trees along this Street. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. My sister didn’t get to work on time, but she does nowadays. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. What has happened? David never did his work poorly. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Complete the sentences with used to or didn’t use to. 1. My father gave up smoking two years ago. He (smoke) ____________ a packet of cigarettes a day. 2. There (be) ____________ a movie theater here but it closed 3 years ago. 3. Mr. An (drink) ____________ coffee but he likes it now. 4. Peter (have) ____________ a motorbike, but last month he sold it and bought a car. 5. I (like) ____________ her but we are best friends now. 6. My sister (play) ____________ tennis but now she doesn’t play very often. 7. They came to live in the city last year. They (live) ____________ in a small village in the country. 8. When I was a child, I (study) ____________ hard. Now I’m a good student. 9. My father (walk to his office) ____________ . Now he goes to work by car. 10. Paula (be)____________ fat, but now she is so fat. 11. We (go out late)____________ but now we stay at home at night. 12. Mr. Thai (smoke a lot) ____________ but he gives up smoking now. 13.1 (climb the trees) ____________ every day when I was a little girl. 14. There (be) ____________ an aquarium but it was closed three years ago. 15. She (be a famous singer) ____________ when she lived in New York. V. Complete the sentences with Preposition of Time: 1. Mozart was bom ____________ Salzburg ____________ 1756. 2. They got married ____________ April 2002. 3. I’m usually free ____________ 8 pm and 10 pm. 4. What do you usually do ____________ Sunday? - We often go for long walks in the ____________ country weekends or ____________ holidays. 5. The course begins ____________ 12 May and ends sometimes ____________ August. 6. She works hard ____________ the week, so she likes relaxing ____________ weekend. 7. I’ll leave ____________ 7 o’clock, so you should call me ____________ 7. 8. My English class finishes ____________ 7.30. Let’s meet ____________ 7.30. 9. Do you give each other presents ____________ Christmas? 10. There are usually a lot of parties ____________ New Year’s Eve. 11. He asked me to come ____________ 11:30, not ____________ noon. 12. I suddenly felt ill ____________ the examination. 13. The book was easy to read, so I read it ____________ a day. 14. She started dancing ____________ 6 and now she is a great star. 15. Call me again ____________ 11 o’clock because my classes will finish ____________ 11:00. 16. Did you phone your teacher the day ____________ yesterday? 17. My parents will get back from their holiday the day ____________ tomorrow. 18. Mr. Brown enjoys walking around his garden ____________ night. 19. Let’s wait ____________ it stops raining. 20. He took a boat and reached the island ____________ half an hour. 21. My mother used to wear long dresses ____________ special occasions. 22. The bills always arrive ____________ the first of the month. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. His wife ____________ five years ago. a. die b. died c. dies 2. We usually open our present ____________ midnight.

d. was dying Trang 33

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 a. in b. at c. on d. when 3. ____________ Thanksgiving Day, families come together for a special dinner. a. in b. at c. on d. when 4. She is dying ____________ cancer. a. with b. by c. of d. because of 5. The frog changed ____________ a handsome prince. a. into b. to c. in d. from 6. I don't want to leave here without ____________ goodbye. a. say b. to say c. saying d. said 7. His wife recently gave a birth to a ____________ . a. niece b. daughter c. nephew d. children 8. You have nothing to ____________ by telling the truth. a. loose b. lose c. loss d. lost 9. He’s getting very excited about his holiday. a. interested b. worried c. pleased d. eager 10. It is a ____________ to sing “Auld Lang Synge” on New Year’s Eve. a. exciting b. tradition c. happy d. all correct * Choose the word whose main stress is different from the others. 11. a. without b. equipment c. conversation d. traditional 12. a. beneath b. destroy c. upset d. daughter II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. At Christmas Eve, Santa comes down the chimney and puts present under the tree. A B C D ............................. 2. The company is losting money all the time. A B C D ............................. 3. She ate all the chocolates - there are no in the box. A B C D ............................. III. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Sally was very tired when she (catch) ____________ a cold two days ago. 2. He (not come) ____________ to the meeting last week. 3. They (finish) ____________ (build) ____________ this house last month. 4. Nam (not write) ____________ a letter to his friend, Liz. 5. Sally is now in her room. She (iron) ____________ her clothes. She always (do) ____________ it herself. 6. I usually (go) ____________ to the stamp collection club on Sunday. 7. I would like (tell) ____________ you about my family. 8. Why you (be) ____________ absent from school yesterday? IV. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. Our life is much better with the help of modem ____________ . (EQUIP) 2. All the dancers wore ____________ costumes. (TRADITION) 3. ____________ , I lost my keys on the way home. (FORTUNATE) 4. She was ____________ enough to believe him. (FOOL) 5. A fairy ____________ changed Little Pea’s rags into beautiful clothes. (MAGIC) 6. Everyone was very ____________ after hearing that news. (EXCITE) 7. Her father soon died of a ____________ heart. (BREAK) 8. You made a wise ____________ when you chose to study Spanish. (DECIDE) 9. Her daughter has a good ____________ . (APPEAR) 10. Who is the ____________ of this building? (OWN) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. One day, two men (1) ____________ in the woods. Suddenly, they saw a huge black bear. One man immediately (2) ____________ down, took off his backpack, and took out his sneakers. He began (3) ____________ off his hiking boots. The other man looked (4) ____________ him and said, “Are you crazy? Do you think you can run (5) ____________ than that bear” - “No” replied the first man. “But I can run faster than (6) ____________!” 1. a. hiked b. are hiking c. was hiking d. were hiking Trang 34

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 2. a. sits b. sat c. stands d. stood 3. a. take b. taking c. to take d. b and c 4. a. on b. at c. for d. after 5. a. fast b. faster c. more fast d. b and c 6. a. him b. it c. me d. you VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. I remember the days when I was a little girl. When the New Year came, my mother used to tell me not to cry, she used to take me to the market and buy new clothes for me, she used to make sticky rice square cakes and cook them all night. She used to go to the flower market to buy some fresh flowers. My father used to paint the walls and redecorate the house and he used to help my mom with housework. Now my parents are old and I am grown up so I do everything myself. But I remember the days... 1. When the New Year came, author’s mother used to tell me not to cry. ............................. 2. She remembers the days when she was young. ............................. 3. The author’s mother used to go to the market to buy some fresh flowers and new clothes for her. ............................. 4. Her father used to paint the walls and decorate the house. ............................. VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. She usually got up late when she was young. She used to .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. To go out at night is dangerous. It is .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Because of his laziness, he fails in his exam. Because he ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She is no longer a famous singer. She used to .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5. Roses can't possibly grow in such poor ground. Growing .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The river is not clean enough for me to swim. The river is .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7. The film was so boring that we turned off the TV. The film was ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8. I spent two hours cooking dinner. It took ........................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. I used ____________ fishing. a. enjoying b. enjoy c. to enjoying d. to enjoy 2. It’s hard work looking ____________ three children all day. a. after b. before c. about d. at 3. I can’t stand people who are cruel ____________ animals. a. with b. to c. on d. about 4. He died ____________ a heart attack. a. because b. with c. of d. by 5. He was late, but fortunately his friends waited for him. a. luckily b. magically c. cruelly d. lately 6. Children believe a fat, jolly man brings gifts ____________ Christmas Eve. a. in b. on c. at d. when 7. I ____________ gardening, but I don’t have time for it now. a. use to enjoy b. used to enjoy c. used to enjoying d. use to enjoying 8. Costa Rica sounds ____________ a great place for a relaxing vacation. a. as b. same c. similar d. like 9. I thought there was some coffee in the cupboard, but there’s ____________ there. Trang 35

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 a. no b. none c. none coffee d. any coffee 10. The factory ____________ down last year. a. flamed b. turned c. fired d. burned * Choose the word whose main stress is different from the others. 11. a. foolish b. greedy c. appear d. cruel 12. a. festival b. magical c. master d. nearby II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. We used to see a movie called “King Kong” last summer. A B C D ............................................................................. 2. We took all the rubbish outside and bum it. A B C D ............................................................................. 3. I tried to ask a question, but just made myself look fool. A B C D ............................................................................. III. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Lisa (not go) ____________ to work yesterday because she was sick. 2. It (not rain) ____________ very much last summer. 3. Most people (use) ____________ the bamboo (make) ____________ fire a long time ago. 4. Listen to those people. What language (they / talk) ____________ ? 5. Mozart (write) ____________ more than 600 pieces of music. 6. We are used (get) ____________ up early (do) ____________ exercise. 7. It’s her birthday. She (have) ____________ a meal with her friend. 8. That bag looks heavy. I (help) ____________ you with it. IV. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. My mother was very ____________ when her cat was run over by a car. (SET) 2. The tiger wanted to see the farmer’s ____________ . (WISE) 3. Most British homes have a ____________ of six TV channels. (CHOOSE) 4. In the story, the prince got ____________ to a poor girl. (MARRY) 5. My uncle is an ____________ engineer. (ELECTRIC) 6. His sudden ____________ must be a shock to her and her family. (DIE) 7. Cinderella’s step-mother was very ____________ to her. (CRUELTY) 8. It was an ____________ fairy tale. (EXCITE) 9. There wasn't any ____________ in our village two years ago. (ELECTRIC) 10. The hungry boy looked at the cakes with ____________ eyes. (GREED) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Once (1) ____________ a time, there is a girl called Little Red Riding Hood, because of the red hood she always wears. The girl walks through the woods to give her grandmother some food. A wolf wants to eat the girl but is (2) ____________ to do so in public. So, he suggests the girl to (3) ____________ some flowers, which she does. After that, he goes to the grandmother’s house. He eats the grandmother, and waits for the girl, disguised (4) ____________ the grandmother. When the girl arrives, he eats her too. A (5) ____________, however, comes to the house and cuts the wolf. Little Red Riding Hood and her grandmother come out (6) ____________. 1. a. upon b. into c. late d. recently 2. a. scared b. afraid c. panic d. excited 3. a. pick b. cut c. get d. take 4. a. like b. in c. as d. into 5. a. hunter b. mechanic c. woodcutter d. a doctor 6. a. harmful b. harmless c. harmfully d. unharmed VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Legends are stories about the past. Some of the stories come from ancient history. But not all legends are ancient. There are modem legends too. They are often called urban legends, because the stories happen in modem cities. Ten years ago, there was a rumor (tin đồn) that there were crocodiles under New York. The rumor was soon a newspaper story, and the newspaper story was soon a legend. So, today, many people in New York believe that there are crocodiles under the ground there! Trang 36

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 1. All legends are about the past and few of legends are about the present. ............ 2. Urban legends are the stories which happened in the modem cities. ............ 3. There was hearsay that the crocodiles were under New York ten years ago. ............ 4. Now, many New Yorkers don’t think that there are crocodiles under the ground of New York. ........... VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. It’s not safe for children to play in the kitchen. Playing ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. You don’t need to finish your report by Saturday. It is not ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The bookcases are too heavy for us to move. We are not ................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. I lived on a farm once, but I don’t live any more. I used .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No one helped me to repair the radio. I repaired .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. We intended to have a picnic on the weekend. We planned .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7. My father doesn’t smoke and my brother doesn’t, either. Neither ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. She didn’t speak English fluently. She was ...................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. I found the book on a ____________ table. a. near b. nearly c. nearby d. nearside 2. He decided ____________ what would happen. a. to stay and to see b. staying and seeing c. to stay and see d. to staying and seeing 3. Flowers and chocolates are popular gifts ____________ Valentine's Day. a. in b. on c. at d. during 4. I went to every shop, but ____________ of them had the book I wanted. a. none b. no c. some d. few 5. Ann ____________ downstairs and hurt her back. a. fall b. fell c. fallen d. felt 6. It’s late, it’s time ____________ home. a. we’ll go b. we went c. we are going d. we go 7. ____________ is a story passed on in spoken form from one generation to the next. a. Novel b. Fiction c. Legend d. Folktale 8. They wanted to know ____________ early. a. why she left b. when she left c. why did she leave d. where she left 9. She feels ____________ that her husband didn’t tell her the truth. a. cruel b. greedy c. upset d. happy 10. When the ____________ failed, he stuck the match to find candles. a. electrical b. electric c. electrify d. electricity 11. My mother never permits young children ____________ in the kitchen. a. to play b. playing c. play d. to playing 12. We haven't got ____________ on holiday at the moment. a. money enough to go b. enough money to go c. money enough for go d. enough money for go 13. It really ____________ me when people forget to say thank you. a. annoys b. destroy c. injures d. appears 14. My mother use to live ____________ a farm when she was young. a. in b. on c. at d. during 15. An oil ____________ burned in the darkness. Trang 37

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 a. lamb b. lamp c. lam d. lame * Choose the word yvho.se main stress is different from the others. 16. a. princess b. wisdom c. servant d. disappear 17. a. folktale b. moral c. excited d. owner II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting 1. James had to chose between getting a job or going to college. A B C D ............................................................................. 2. When he told me the price. I nearly died for shock. A B C D ............................................................................. 3. How could you be so cruel with someone who never did you any harm? A B C D ............................................................................. 4. At Christmas, my neighborhoods are beautiful decorated with many bright lights. A B C D ............................................................................. III. Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets. 1. He made me feed like a ____________ when he used me an example. (FOOLISH) 2. He drives car ____________ and he causes a serious accident (CARE) 3. The police came ____________ . (IMMEDIATE) 4. It’s always ____________ to write down important points. (WISDOM) 5. He always wears a ____________ shirt. (STRIPE) 6. We stopped at some ____________ shops to buy some food. (NEAR) 7. I find the travel ____________ . (INTEREST) 8. Standards of ____________ seem to be dropping. (MORAL) 9. The sun ____________ appeared from behind a cloud. (SUDDEN) IV. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. I (not know) ____________ how to dance when I was six. 2. I am not too strong (move) ____________ that heavy luggage. 3. Last night, my father (arrive) ____________ home at 10:30. 4. They promise they (repair) ____________ that bridge next week. 5. I told my friend (not be) ____________ late. 6. They’re thinking about (travel) ____________ to Hawaii. 7. The Greens (not he) ____________ here last night? 8. It is happy for us (pass) ____________ the final exam. 9. Please be quiet! You (continuality interrupt) ____________ . 10. Hey, you! What (you /think) ____________ you’re doing? V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Once, a farmer lived in a village. He was very poor. His income was very small. He passed his days with (1)____________ . One day, someone gave him a hen. It gave a golden egg every day. He sold the eggs every day. Soon he (2) ____________ a rich man. All began to respect him in the village. He became greedy. He thought that (3) ____________ the hen there must be a storehouse of (4) ____________ eggs. He should get them in a day. Then he would be the (5)____________ man in the village. He took a knife and cut the stomach of the hen. He did not get even a single egg. He lost not only the golden eggs (6) ____________ the hen also. 1. a. difficulty b. difficult c. difficultly d. X 2. a. become b. became c. becomes d. becoming 3. a. insides b. inside c. outsides d. outside 4. a. goldenseal b. golden c. goldenly d. a golden 5. a. richest b. more rich c. most rich d. most richer 6. a. although b. so c. but d. and VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Once, a beautiful princess had a golden ball. Unfortunately, one day she dropped her ball into the water. She was unhappy and started crying. Suddenly a green frog appeared and offered to help her if she let him li ve with her in the palace. The princess agreed. So the frog gave her the ball. She took the ball and forgot all about the frog. Trang 38

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 The frog was angry and told his story to the King. The King asked his daughter to take the frog to her room and look after him carefully. The princess cried again, but she took the frog and put him on her bed. The frog asked her to kiss him, so she did. Immediately, the frog turned into a handsome prince. Of course, he and the princess fell in love. And they lived happily ever after. 1. She was happy and started crying when she dropped her ball into the water. ............ 2. She took the ball and forgot all about the frog before the frog gave her the ball. ............ 3. The King asked his daughter to take the frog to her room and take care of him carefully. ............ 4. The frog changed into a handsome prince after the princess kissed him. ............ VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. Playing with fire is very dangerous. It is .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The holiday made every student exceled. Every student was ................................................................................................................................................................ 3. I find the football match boring. I am ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. She is no longer a famous actress. She used .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My friend won the race. My friend was ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Let’s meet at the cafe comer. Danny suggested .................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Mark is too young to ride his bike to school. Mark is not ............................................................................................................................................................................... 8. What’s your opinion of Kaka’s new book? What do you think ................................................................................................................................................................. 9. They gave Lucas a nice gift on his 17th birthday. Lucas ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. He is such a rich man that: he can huy everything he likes. (enough) The man..................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 39

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 5: STUDY HABITS I. GETTING STARTED 1. habit (n) : thói quen 2. study habit (n) : thói quen học tập II. LISTEN AND READ 3. report card = report (n): sổ liên lạc 7. semester (n) : học kì 4. excellent (adj) : rất tốt, tuyệt vời 8. Spain (n) : nước Tây Ban Nha -» excellence (n) : sự xuất sắc, sự ưu tú -» Spanish (n) : tiếng Tây Ban Nha -» excellently (adv) : (một cách) xuất sắc, 9. pronounce (v) : phát âm nổi trội -» pronunciation (n) : cách phát âm 5. proud (adj) (of sb/sth): tự hào, hãnh 10. try one’s best (exp) : cố hết sức diện (về ai / cái gì) 11. promise (v) : hứa -» pride (n) : niềm tự hào -» promise (n) : lời hứa -» take pride in sth / doing sth 12. believe (v) : tin, tin tưởng -» pride oneself on sth / doing sth -» belief (n) : niềm tin 6. improve (v) : cải thiện, cải tiến -* believable (adj) : dáng tin, có thể tin -» improvcment (n) : sự cải thiện được -» improvable (adj) : có thể cải tiến III. LISTEN 13. behave (v) : cư xử, đối xử -» satisfactions (n) : sự thỏa mãn, sự toại -» behavior (n) : cách cư xử, hành vi nguyện 14. participate (in) (v) : tham gia (vào) -» satisfy (v) : làm hài lòng, làm thỏa mãn -» participation (n) : sự tham gia -» satisfied (adj) : cảm thấy hài lòng, thỏa 15. co-operation (n) : sự hợp tác, cộng tác mãn -» co-operate (v) : chung sức, hợp tác 18. poor (adj) : xấu, kém 16. fair (adj) : khá 19. sign (v) : kí tên 17. satisfactory (adj) : thỏa đáng, khá tốt -» signature (n) : chữ kí ≠ unsatisfactory (adj): không thỏa đáng 20. comment (v) : phê bình, bình luận -» satisfactorily (adv): (1 cách) hài lòng, -» comment (n) : lời phê bình khá tốt IV. READ 21. meaning (n) : nghĩa, ý nghĩa 28. not only... but also... (idm): không -» meaningful (adj) : đầy ý nghĩa, có ý những... mà còn... nghĩa ≠ meaningless (adj): vô nghĩa 29. revise (v) : ôn lại, đọc lại 22. mother tongue (n) : tiếng mẹ đẻ -» revision (n) : sự ôn lại, xem xét lại 23. learn sth by heart (exp): học thuộc lòng 30. necessary (adj) : cần thiết 24. stick - stuck - stuck (v): dán, dính, cài -» necessity (n) : sự cần thiết, nhu cầu; 25. come across (v) : tình cờ gặp vật cần thiết 26. underline (v) : gạch chân 31. memorize (v) : ghi nhớ 27. highlight (v) : làm nổi bật -» memory (n) : trí nhớ V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 32. sore (adj) : đau, nhức nhối 34. mend (v) = fix (v) : sửa chữa -» sore throat (n) : đau họng 35. aloud (adv) : to, thành tiếng 33. replant (v) : trồng lại 1. ADVERBS OF MANNER (Trạng từ chỉ thể cách) a. Đinh nghĩa: Trạng từ chỉ thể cách cho biết điều gì đó xảy ra, hoặc được thực hiện như thế nào. Câu hỏi cho loại trạng từ này là “How”. Adjective + ly = Adverb Ex: careful -» carefully -» beautiful -» bad -» happy -» noisy -» possible b. Vi trí: - Trạng từ chỉ thể cách thường đứng cuối câu (sau túc từ) Ex: He ate his breakfast quickly. - Đứng trước động từ thường. Trang 40

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 Ex: The ship slowly sailed away. c. Chức năng: - Trạng từ chỉ thể cách bổ nghĩa cho động từ. Ex: She angrily tore up the letter. - Tính từ bổ nghĩa cho chủ từ, danh từ. Ex: (1) I was angry with myself for making such a stupid mistake. (2) She is the most beautiful girl I have ever met. d. Một số trạng từ đặc biệt: 1. good -» well 6. deep -» deep 2. hard -» hard 7. high -» high 3. fast -» fast 8. wrong -» wrong 4. late -» late 9. right -» right 5. early -» early 10. near -» near Ex: (1) Jack loves fast cars. He drives very fast. (2) The eagle circled high overhead. (Con đại bàng lượn vòng cao trên đầu.) (3) She left right after saying goodbye. e. Chú ý: • Lately = recently : gần đây Ex: He has come to see me lately. • Hardly = scarcely: rất ít, hiếm khi Ex: I’m not surprised John didn’t find a job. He hardly tried to find one. • Nearly = almost: hầu như Ex: I nearly missed the bus. • Highly = very, very much: rất, rất nhiều, hết sức, vô cùng Ex: We highly appreciate any of your contributions. • Deeply = very, very much Ex: He is deeply interested in the project. 2. SHOULD (nên, phải) - Đưa ra lời khuyên, lời đề nghị, sự bắt buộc hoặc bổn phận. S + should (not) + bare inf. + O. Ex: (1) You should stop smoking. (2) Children shouldn’t stay up late. - Trong câu hỏi, "should" được dùng để hỏi xin lời khuyên hay lời chỉ dẫn. Ex: (1) Should I go and see them? (2) What should we do now? 3. REPORTED SPEECH (Lời nói gián tiếp) a. IMPERATIVES: (Câu mệnh lệnh) * Form: S + asked / told... + O + (not) + to V1 ... * NOTE: • Các động từ giới thiệu là: asked (yêu cầu), told (bảo), ordered (ra lệnh), offered (đề nghị), advised (khuyên), warned (cảnh báo), invited (mời), beg (van nài), ... • Bỏ dấu và “please” (nếu có) • Biến đổi các đại từ nhân xưng, đại từ sở hữu, tính từ sở hữu cho phù hợp. • Biến đổi một số trạng từ: - now -» then - these -» those - here -» there - today -» that day - this -» that - tonight -» that night Ex: (1) She asks him: “Lend me the books, please.” She asks him to lend her the books. (2) They told us: “Be careful.” They told ........................................................................................................................................................................ (3) Mai asked her friends: “Don’t wait for me!” Mai asked her friends not to wait for her Trang 41

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 (4) “Don’t leave your room, John”, she said. She told ............................................................................................................................................................................ * Câu yêu cầu trong lời nói gián tiếp cũng được làm như câu mệnh lệnh. Ex: (1) Jack said: “Can you meet me after class, Lisa?” Jack asked Lisa .............................................................................................................................................................. (2) “Would you mind closing the window?”, I said to Tom. I ............................................................................................................................................................................................ * Put the following into indirect speech. 1. “Don't believe these things”, he warned me. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. “Don't watch late-night horror movies”, I warned them. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Don't touch that switch, Mary”, I said. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. “Don't hurry”, he said. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Help your mother, Daisy”, Mr. Pitt said. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “Come to the cinema with me”, he asked her. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Look at the paper”, he said to her. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. “Remember to write to your mother”, I said to them. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. “Will you help me, please?”, she said. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. “Could you sew on this button for me?”, Tom asked Ann. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... b. ADVICE IN RJEPOR.TED SPEECH: (Lời khuyên) S + told + O + (that) + S + should + (not) +V1... Ex: (1) “You should stop smoking”, she said. She told me (that) I should stop smoking. (2) “You shouldn’t drive so fast, Tom”, she said. She told Tom (that) ............................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Supply the correct form of words in brackets: adjective or adverb. 1. ____________ students write their exercises ____________ . 2. I learned the ____________ words. I learned the words ____________ . 3. She speaks ____________ I can't understand ____________ speech. 4. She sings songs ____________ . She sings ____________ songs. 5. He has ____________ pronunciation. He pronounces words ____________ . 6. It's ____________ to go on a trip. 7. ____________ , he passed the final test. 8. He told me about a ____________ story. 9. Peter speaks English very ____________ . 10. Mr. Tan buys his ____________ newspaper. He buys an ____________ edition. 11. She ____________ enjoys stories. She enjoys ____________ stories. 12. I heard ____________ movements. ____________ , I heard movements. 13. We often ____________ got home last year. 14. That work was ____________ for those men. Everyone worked ____________ . 15. ____________ , I passed the driving test. I hate ____________ examinations.

(CAREFUL) (EASY) (FAST) (BEAUTIFUL) (GOOD) (INTEREST) (LUCK) (FUN) (FLUENT) (EARLY) (REAL) (SUDDEN) (LATE) (HARD) (FINAL) Trang 42

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 16. It was raining ____________ when I left home. (HEAVY) 17. All my classrooms are ____________ decorated. (BEAUTY) 18. I am so ____________ to see you again. (HAPPY) 19. Children played games ____________ on the yard. (HAPPY) 20. Tom is a ____________ player. (SKILL) 21. He did it ____________ . (SKILL) 22. Our Dad always drives his car ____________ . (CAREFUL) 23. Our Dad is a ____________ driver. (CAREFUL) 24. We like wearing ____________ clothes. (TRADITION) 25. ____________ , we wear Ao Dai on special occasions. (TRADITION) II. Fill in each blank with “should” or “shouldn’t”. 1. The students ____________ make so much noise. 2. The film was interesting. You ____________ go and see it. 3. Tom ____________ drive carefully. The traffic is very heavy. 4. You ____________ smoke so much. 5. You ____________ give up smoking. 6. You ____________ spend more time on your homework. 7. The English girl wants to live in Vietnam. She ____________ learn Vietnamese. 8. He ____________ drink so much coffee before bedtime. 9. Tom has a bad toothache. He ____________ go to the dentist’s. 10. You ____________ go to bed so late every night. III. Give advice with SHOULD or SHOULDN’T. 1. My salary is very low. (look for another job) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Sue drives everywhere. She never walks. (use her car so much) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I have a headache. (take some medicine) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. It’s not safe to drive a motorbike without a helmet. (wear helmet while driving) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Tom is often late for his morning class. (stay up too late) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. You look very pale and terrible. (see a doctor) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. My father works until 11 o’clock every night. (work so hard) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. He always gives me the mong advice. (listen to him) ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... IV. Reported speech. A. Put the following commands and requests into reported speech. 1. "Can you put my books onto the bookshelf over there, Huy?" Lien asked Huy ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2. "Can you help my son with his English, please?", Mai asked her friend. Mai asked her friend .......................................................................................................................................................... 3. "Could you lend me your History book?", Nam said to Linh. Nam ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. "Get back home by half past ten, Loan?" Loan's brother told ............................................................................................................................................................. 5. "Please turn off the radio". Phuong told Tuan ................................................................................................................................................................ 6. She told him, “Don't swim in the sea!” She told .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. "Get up early to learn your lesson, Toan", his father said. Toan’s father told him ....................................................................................................................................................... Trang 43

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 8. "Please remind Nam to practice speaking English, Mrs. Hang." Nam's teacher told Mrs. Hang ........................................................................................................................................ 9. “Don’t tell me anymore”, Mary warned her friend. Mary warned ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10. "Please help me with this exercise", he said to us. He ............................................................................................................................................................................................. B. Put the following advice into reported speech. 1. "You should spend less time on watching television, Tuan." Tuan’s father told ................................................................................................................................................................ 2. "You should change the way you learn English, Mai." Ba said ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Miss Jackson said, "You should improve your English pronunciation, Tim" Miss Jackson said ................................................................................................................................................................. 4. The doctor said to Lan, "You shouldn’t go out". The doctor said that ........................................................................................................................................................... 5. "You should spend more time on English writing”, the teacher said to Tim. The teacher told ................................................................................................................................................................... 6. "You shouldn’t go to bed late", said my Mom. Mom said ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. "You should spend more time doing your homework", said Mr. Nam. Mr. Nam told me .................................................................................................................................................................. 8. "You’d better ask your parents before doing this", he advised me. He said ..................................................................................................................................................................................... c. Put the following requests/ advice into reported speech. 1. “Please tum off the radio”, Ba said. Ba told Tam .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I said to him, “Stay at home." I told ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “You should concentrate on your study at school”, said my father. My father told me ................................................................................................................................................................ 4. “You shouldn’t stay up too late, John”, said I. I told ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Could you open the door, Linh?” He asked Linh ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Mr. Brown told Ann, “Please give me some food!” Mr. Brown asked ................................................................................................................................................................. 7. The teacher said to us, “You should learn harder for the test.” The teacher told ................................................................................................................................................................... 8. "Can you show me how to work this out?", she said to him. She ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. The teacher said, "We should collect old books for the poor students". The teacher said .................................................................................................................................................................. 10. "Shut the door but don’t lock it", he said to us. He told .....................................................................................................................................................................................

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase that best complete the sentence. 1. Minh can run very ____________ . a. fast b. good c. slow 2. I am looking forward to ____________ you some day. a. seeing b. saw c. see 3. He is a hard worker. He works very ____________ . a. hardly b. hard c. the hard 4. When my mother was young, she ____________ to the movies. a. used go b. used to went c. used to go

d. bad d. sees d. the hardly d. use to go Trang 44

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. My sister often does her homework by ____________ . a. myself b. himself c. themselves d. herself 6. She told me ____________ you that present a. giving b. to give c. gave d. given 7. Nam likes ____________ the piano. a. playing b. plays c. played d. play. 8. The teacher told us ____________ talk in class. a. don’t b. didn’t c. not to d. not 9. You ____________ get up early in order to do exercises. a. should b. ought c. must d. shouldn't 10. She seems very ____________ today. a. sleepily b. sleepy c. happily d. seriously II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. They are very proud about their new house. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. The first question in the exam was very hardly. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. However, he needs to improve his listen skills. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. We should clean the floor as quick as possible. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Choose the word or phrase that best fits each blank. Tet or the Lunar New Year holiday is the (1) ____________ important festival in Viet Nam. Tet is a (2) ____________ festival which occurs in late January or (3) ____________ February. It is a time for families (4) ____________ and decorate their houses, wear new clothes and enjoy special meals such (5) ____________ sticky rice cakes. Family members who live apart try to be together (6) ____________ Tet. 1. a. best b. least c. worst d. most 2. a. joy b. joyless c. joyful d. joyfully 3. a. late b. early c. beginning d. after 4. a. cleans b. cleaning c. to clean d. clean 5. a. more b. as c. like d. many 6. a. in b. to c. on d. at IV. Read the passage and decide if the following statements are TRUE or FALSE. Chiang Mai is a City in Thailand that has a wonderful night market. In the evening, the main street is lined with small stands and shops that almost anything you can imagine. Some stands sell jewelry or clothing, others sell traditional Thai crafts, and still others sell fresh fruit and spices. It’s easy to spend an entire evening just looking at everything. If you decide to buy something, you won’t be disappointed. The prices are very reasonable. There are a lot of wonderful attractions in Chiang Mai, but the night market is a favorite for many people. 1. Chiang Mai is a remote town with a wonderful night market in Thailand. .............................................. 2. There are small stands and shops in its main streets. .............................................. 3. They don’t sell jewelry and clothing in Chiang Mai. .............................................. 4. Things don’t cost much here. .............................................. V. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. She always talks about her son ____________ . (PRIDE) 2. Sit down and ____________ your dinner, please. (ENJOYMENT) 3. They always ____________ kindly towards their neighbors. (BEHAVIOR) 4. ____________ in the sports competitions is open to everyone in our school. (PARTICIPATE) 5. You don’t have to ____________ the grammar rules to be able to do these exercises. (MEMORY) 6. Very few people can ____________ my name properly. (PRONUNCIATION) 7. She looks back on her career with great ____________ . (SATISFY) 8. Food and clothing are ____________ of life. (NEED) VI. Supply the correct forms or tenses of the verbs in brackets. 1. She (ride) ____________ a new bike to school every day. Trang 45

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 2. They (not/see) ____________ their old friends last time. 3. I enjoy (get)____________ up early in the morning and (watch) ____________ the sunrise. 4. I learned how (swim) ____________ when I was around six or seven. 5. Nga (do) ____________ her homework now. 6. I want (stay) ____________ home and (go) ____________ to bed early. 7. He often (watch) ____________ TV after dinner? 8. Ha (come) ____________ back a moment ago. Now, she (sit) ____________ in the sofa in the living room and (watch) ____________ TV. She (look) ____________ a bit tired. VII. Complete the sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. "Could you buy me an English exercise book, Ha?" Nam asked Ha ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2. "You should not make noise in here, Peter", the teacher said. The teacher told ................................................................................................................................................................. 3. She is a wonderful dancer. She dances ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4. They are good teachers at Math. They teach .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5. You should look after your daughter carefully. You should take ................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word or phrase that best complete the sentence. 1. She is looking forward to ____________ from her friends. a. hear b. hears c. heard d. hearing 2. I think playing in the rain is ____________ . a. danger b. endanger c. dangerous d. dangerously 3. As you’re so unhappy there, you ____________ look for another job. a. should b. ought c. need d. has to 4. Sally ____________ him to come home early. a. tell b. told c. say d. ask 5. I tried ____________ my not to laugh. a. good b. well c. better d. best 6. We should learn this poem ____________ . a. by soul b. by heart c. by many times d. by millions 7. Where ____________ before you moved here? a. did you use to live b. did you use to living c. used you to live d. used to you living 8. The doctor he should take a few days off. a. ask b. tell c. said d. say 9. His ____________ towards me is very strange. a. behave b. behavior c. behaved d. behaving 10. It is better for us ____________ the important words in or lessons. a. underline b. underlined c. to underline d. underlining II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. She said me to work hard on the next semester. A B C D .............................................. 2. Different people learn a foreign language in difference ways. A B C D .............................................. 3. Tim promised trying his best in learning Spanish. A B C D .............................................. 4. He said me that I should work harder on my English pronunciation. A B C D .............................................. 5. Tom had to do his homework’s again because he made so many mistakes. A B C D .............................................. III. Read the passage carefully, then choose the correct answers. Trang 46

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 There are several features of spoken English that make it difficult for me to understand. First, many words are not pronounced as they are spelled, so when I learn new words through reading, I sometimes don’t understand them when they are spoken. Second, native speakers contract words and phrases. “What are you doing?” becomes “What cha do in’?”. In my opinion, people should write clearly. Third, native speakers have a wide range of accents. A British accent is very different from a Texas one. Fourth, there are lots of idioms and slang expression. These expressions also differ depending on the area a speaker is from. Finally, there are sounds that don’t exist in my language that do exist in English and vice versa. These sounds are difficult for me to distinguish. 1. The writer finds it ____________ to understand spoken English. a. easy b. interesting c. difficult d. useful 2. The writer doesn’t sometimes understand new words when they are spoken because of ____________. a. their pronunciation b. their spelling c. their expression d. their meaning 3. Native speakers ____________ . a. have the same accent b. have a wide range of accents c. speak English with a strong accent d. speak heavily accented English 4. Idiom and slang expressions are ____________ . a. different from area to area b. not difficult to learn c. dependent on the speakers d. widely used in English 5. The writer finds it hard to distinguish ____________ . a. vowel sounds b. familiar sounds c. soft sounds d. strange sounds IV. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. We (not/go)____________ to school tomorrow. 2. She (talk) ____________ to Peter now. 3. They (buy) ____________ a new LCD TV set last week. 4. I’m planning (fly)____________ to Chicago next week. 5. The child (be) ____________ seriously ill last night. 6. Lan’s sister always (brush) ____________ her teeth after dinner. 7. My sister often (finish) ____________ her homework before meals. 8. Last year, I (not / visit) ____________ Nha Trang because I (be)____________ busy. I (feel) ____________ sad. I hope that, next year, I (travel) ____________ there. I can (see) ____________ many things and I can (enjoy) ____________ the fresh air. V. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. His Mom seemed very ____________ of him. (PRIDE) 2. He is an ____________ student. (EXCELLENCE) 3. Thank you for your ____________ party. (ENJOY) 4. Her parents are pleased with her good ____________ . (BEHAVE) 5. His ____________ of some words is not correct. (PRONOUNCE) 6. The teacher is pleased with the ____________ in my study. (IMPROVE) 7. Our project wouldn’t be successful without your kind ____________ . (CO-OPERATE) 8. He has great ____________ in his doctor. (BELIEVE) VI. Choose the word or phrase that best fits each blank. Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union is an organization for Vietnamese youth from 16 to 30 years of age. The Union (1) ____________ good character, love for the nation, and encourages good citizenship, soft skills and personal (2) ____________ . The Union was founded on March 26, 1931 (3) ____________ the beloved President Ho Chi Minh. The Youth Union together with other youth organizations often hold social activities (4) ____________ helping the handicapped, cleaning the environment, green summer volunteers campaign, and other (5) ____________ movements. These activities aim to help the Young develop their public awareness and form their personality. 1. a. building b. builds c. to build d. builded 2. a. activity b. fitness c. principle d. aim 3. a. in b. on c. by d. at 4. a. and b. such c. such as d. example Trang 47

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. a. similar b. similarly c. similarity d. similarities VII. Rewrite the sentences, using reported speech. 1. Peter said, “Can you help me, Juan?" Peter asked Juan .................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The tiger said to the farmer, “Show me your wisdom!” The tiger asked ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They said to me, “Don't drive too fast, please” They told ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. John said to me, “Please wait for me outside my office.” John asked ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The doctor said to Linh, “You should stay in bed.” The doctor told ........................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word or phrase that best complete the sentence. 1. He always gets excellent grades because he studies (hard / hardly / good / goodly). 2. Would you like (have / to have / having / had) a drink? 3. How does Mary get to school? - She gets to school (on foot / on bike / in car / of motorbike). 4. Can you participate (at/for/ ỉn/ with) this program? 5. Mr. Jackson (told to me bring / told me to bring / said me bring / said to me to bring) this machine to your office. 6. My mother enjoys (gardening / to garden /gardened/gardens) in her free time. 7. She’s very proud (at / of/for / with) her only son. 8. Do you believe (on / in / at/ to) God? 9. He got good grades for English but his math result was (rich / bad /poor / quite). 10. His parents are (good/fond/ like /proud) of him. 11. Can I use your (dictionary / report / list / semester)? I don't understand its meaning. 12. She's from France. French is her (second language / mother tongue / native speaker / result). 13. I often (stick / sound / like / tie) a piece of paper on wall to learn new words. 14. We try (to learn / learn / learning / learnt) as hard as we can. 15. You can (improve / improving / to improve / improved) your speaking by listening to cassettes. 16. I’ll help you (on/with/to/for) your homework. 17. Tom should spend more time (for / with / to / on) learning. 18. I'm sorry because I behave (bad/good/ well/ badly). II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. The man speaks English so fastly that I hardly understand him A B C D .............................................. 2. I often use a dictionary so that as to learn new words and pronunciation. A B C D .............................................. 3. Some people learn a language by read passage aloud. A B C D .............................................. 4. It doesn’t matter if you don’t win - just try your most. A B C D .............................................. 5. It didn’t take her long to learn her lines with heart. A B C D .............................................. 6. They didn’t try learning all new words they came across. A B C D .............................................. III. Read the passage then decide TRUE (T) or FALSE (F). Dear Tuan, I arrived in Australia a week ago and I think that my English is improving! I’m living in a small flat near the center of Sydney. It’s cheap and quite combatable. In your letter you ask what I’m going to do to improve my English. Well, tomorrow I’m going to visit the language centre to see what English classes they offer there in the evenings. Of course, I’m going to read a newspaper every day. I’m going to spend a lot on cassettes because listening is so important! There are some good bookshops here, so I’m also Trang 48

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 going to look for some other books to read before bedtime. I’m going to write a diary in English - that’s a good way to learn English. How are you getting on? I was sorry I had to leave in the middle of the course. Are you going to write to me again? Hope to hear from you all soon. Nam 1. Nam came to Australia last week. .............................................. 2. He is staying in a small house near the centre of Sydney. .............................................. 3. He is not pleased with his accommodation. .............................................. 4. He is going to visit a language centre tomorrow. .............................................. 5. He is going to have a lesson tomorrow evening. .............................................. 6. He is going to talk with Australian students. .............................................. 7. Every day he is going to read a newspaper. .............................................. 8. Listening is less important to him. .............................................. 9. There are many bookshops in the neighborhood. .............................................. 10. He is going to read books and write a diary in English. .............................................. IV. Choose the best answer to complete the passage. Mrs. Marlene often spends too much money on clothes. She needs no new (1) ____________ but she loves (2)____________ them. Yesterday, she (3) ____________ a beautiful coat in a shop window. She went in and put it on. It was just the right size but it was expensive. Mrs. Marlene did not have (4) ____________ money, so she got back home and told her husband (5)____________ this coat. He liked it very much, but he did not like the price. It was $ 2000. 1. a. clothes b. ties c. rug d. rags 2. a. bought b. buys c. buying d. buy 3. a. seen b. saw c. see d. sees 4. a. more b. much c. many d. enough 5. a. in b. of c. about d. with V. Supple the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. The football team is the ____________ of our city. (PROUD) 2. You have to ____________ these English vocabularies every day. (REVISION) 3. Your ____________ before your test is very important. (REVISE) 4. Her Spain ____________ very fast. (IMPROVEMENT) 5. They collect over 1000 ____________ for the petitions. (SIGN) 6. Sleep is ____________ for health. (NEED) 7. Her school report says her French is ____________ . (SATISFY) 8. Write ____________ sentences from the given words. (MEAN) VI. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets. E Yesterday Nam (go) ____________ to the bookstore to buy some books. 2. Em thinking about (go) ____________ to Hawaii. 3. I would like (visit) ____________ the Grand Canyon. 4. Ngan always (go) ____________ to school on time. 5. I (do) ____________ my homework now. 6. Ngan (buy)____________ a yellow cap yesterday. 7. She (buy) ____________ a new house next month? 8. He (write) ____________ this essay last night. VII. Rewrite the sentences, using reported speech. 1. The teacher told us, "Don’t put your legs on the table." The teacher ordered ............................................................................................................................................................. 2. I said to her, “Don't make noise in class!” I told ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. I wanted him to put his shoes on the rack. I said to him, "Please ............................................................................................................................................................ 4. “You should practice playing the guitar every day”, the teacher said. The teacher told ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The weather was so bad that we couldn’t go out. (enough) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 49

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 --------------------------------------------------------

UNIT 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB I. LISTEN AND READ 1. Pioneer (n) : người tiên phong -» enrollment (n) : sự tuyển, đăng ký -» Young Pioneer (n) : thiếu niên tiền phong 6. application (n) : đơn, đơn xin -» Young Pioneer Organization (n): Đội Thiếu -» application form (n): bản mẫu đơn Niên Tiên Phong -» applicant (n) : ứng viên -» Youth Organization (n): Đoàn Thanh Niên 7. fill out (v) : điền vào 2. participate (in) (v) = take part in: tham gia 8. hobby (n) : sở thích 3. handicapped (a): bị tật nguyền, bị khuyết tật 9. outdoor activities (n): những hoạt -» the handicapped (n): người bị tật nguyền động ngoài trời 4. blind (adj) : mù 10. sign (v) : ký (tên) 5. enroll (v) : đăng kí, ghi danh -» signature (n) : chữ ký II. SPEAK 11. favor (n): sự chiếu cố, đặc ân, sự giúp đỡ 14. respond (v) : đáp lại 12. offer (v) : đề nghị 15. tire (n) = tyre (n) : lốp, vỏ xe 13. assistance (n) : sự giúp đỡ -» a flat tire : 1 cái lốp xe bị xẹp -» assist (v) : giúp đỡ, cộng sự 16. fix (v) : sửa III. READ 17. Communist Youth Union (n): Đoàn 26. Vietnam Students Union (n): Hội Thanh Niên Cộng Sản Liên Hiệp Sinh Viên Việt Nam 18. character (n) : tính cách 2 7. similar (+ to) (adj) : tương tự 19. encourage (v): khuyến khích, khích lệ -» similarity (n): sự giống nhau, điểm -» encouragement (n): sự giúp đỡ, niềm tương đồng động viên -» similarly (adv) : tương tự, giống nhau 20. citizenship (n): quyền công dân, ý thức 28. campaign (n) : chiến dịch công dân 29. volunteer (v, n) : tự nguyện, tình -» citizen (n) : công dân nguyện / người tình nguyện 21. fitness (n): tình trạng cơ thể khỏe -» voluntary (adj) : tự ý, tự nguyện mạnh, sự khỏe mạnh 30. aware (adj) : có nhận thức, nhận ra 22. found (v) : thành lặp, sáng lập -» awareness (n) : nhận thức, ý thức 23. beloved (adj) : được yêu mến 31. principle (n) : nguyên tắc 24. official (adj): chính thức, trịnh trọng 32. guideline (n) : nguyên tắc chỉ đạo, lời -» officially (adv) : (một cách) chính thức khuyên đúng đắn 25. Vietnam Youth Predation (n): Hội 33. aim (n) : mục đích Liên Hiệp Thanh Niên Việt Nam 34. establish (v) : thành lập, thiết lập IV. WRITE 35. community (n) : cộng đồng 39. fund (n) : quỹ, tiền quỹ 36. recycle (v) : tái sinh, tái chế -» raise fund (exp) (for): gây quỹ -» recycled (adj): làm từ vật liệu phế thải 40. sidewalk = pavement (n): vỉa hè -» recycling (n) : sự tái chế 41. register (v) : đăng kí 37. resource (n) : tài nguyên 42. bank (n) : bờ -» natural resources (n): tài nguyên thiên 43. support (v) : ủng hộ nhiên 38. earn money (v) : kiềm tiền V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. GERUNDS (Danh động từ) * Form: V + ing = Gerund * Function: a. Chủ ngữ của câu Ex: (1) Driving fast causes accidents. (2) Swimming is her hobby. Trang 50

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 b. Bổ ngữ của chủ từ Ex: (1) My hobby is reading comic books. (2) Her habit is getting up early in the morning. c. Tân ngữ của giới từ Ex: (1) She is fond of dancing. (2) I’m interested in learning English. 4. Tân ngữ trực tiếp của động từ Ex: (1) They enjoy teaching. (2) I usually avoid driving in the rush hour. ❖ VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUND (Động từ theo sau bởi danh động từ) 1. admit: thừa nhận 10. escape : trốn thoát 19. miss: nhớ, bỏ lỡ 2. advise: khuyên 11. face: đổi mặt 20. postpone: hoãn lại 3. avoid: tránh 12. feel like: cảm thấy thích 21. practice: thực tập 4. complete: hoàn thành 13. finish: hoàn tất 22. quit: bỏ 5. consider: xem xét 14. forgive: tha thứ 23. recollect: hồi tưởng 6. delay: hoãn lại 15. imagine: tưởng tượng 24. resist: cưỡng lại 7. deny: phủ nhận 16. keep (on): tiếp tục 25. risk: liều 8. discuss: thảo luận 17. mention: đề cập 26. suggest: đề nghị 9. enjoy : thích 18. mind: phiền 27. understand: hiểu ❖ Một sổ động từ có thể theo sau là TO-INF hoác GERUND a. Nghĩa không đổi begin like dislike start love cease continue hate intend Ex: (1) She loves to go /going shopping all day. (2) I hate to wait / waiting. (3) That department has ceased to exist / existing. b. Nghĩa thay đổi - stop + to V ngừng lại để làm việc khác. Ex: On the way home, I stop to get some petrol. + V-ing: ngừng hẳn việc đang làm Ex: I stopped smoking two years ago. - forget + to V: quên làm một trách nhiệm, nhiệm vụ nào đó ở tương lai Ex: Don't forget to do your assignments tonight! + V-ing: quên đã thực hiện một việc gì trong quá khứ Ex: ru never forget seeing you for the first time. - remember + to V: nhớ làm một việc gì đó trong tương lai Ex: Remember to buy 3 eggs for me, please. + V-ing: nhớ lại điều gì xảy ra trong quá khứ Ex: I still remember my grandpa teaching me to play cards. - regret + to V: dùng để thông báo những tin tức xấu Ex: We regret to inform you that you haven’t passed the exam. + V-ing: nói về việc trong quá khứ mà người ta đã lở làm (hối hận) Ex: He regretted not saying goodbye to her. - try + to V: cố gắng làm việc gì. Ex: She tried to answer my questions. + V-ing: thử. Ex: I tried sending her flowers, writing her letters, giving her presents, but she still wouldn‘t speak to me. - need + to V: nghĩa chủ động (active meaning) Ex: She needs to buy some stamps. + V-ing: nghĩa bị động (passive meaning) Ex: Your room needs tidying immediately. 2. PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE (Thì hiện tại đơn) a. FORMATION: Positive (+) Negative (-) Interrogative (?) b. USAGE: Trang 51

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 • Chân lý, Sự thật hiển nhiên Ex: (1) The earth moves around the sun. (2) Water bolls at 100°c. • Thói quen, một hành động xảy ra thường xuyên hay tình trạng ở hiện tại. Ex: (1) We live in the City. (2) My brother watches TV every night. • Sự vật, sự việc tổng quát. Ex: (1) Nurses look after patients in hospital. (2) Bad driving causes accidents. • Trạng từ thường gặp: always, usually, often, sometimes, rarely, seldom, never, every, once a week, twice a month, three / four times a year, in one’s free time. ... • Mang nghĩa tương lai được dùng để nói về thời khóa biểu, chương trình hoặc kế hoạch đã được sắp xếp cố định theo thời gian biểu. Ex: (1) The bus leaves at seven thirty tomorrow morning. (2) What time does the film begin? (3) We start our job on Monday. 3. MODALS: MAY, CAN, COULD a. Can, Could: making polite requests, offers (yêu cầu, đề nghị) - Chúng ta có thể dùng can hay could để yêu cầu, nhờ ai làm gì cho mình. - Could thường lịch sự và trang trọng hơn can. Ex: (1) Liz, can you do me a favor? (2) Could you tell me the way to the station? b. May: offering assistance. - Ta có thể dùng may để đề nghị giúp đỡ người khác làm việc gì. Thường bắt đầu bằng May I ...? - Ta có thể dùng Can I/Could I...?, May I ... ? trịnh trọng hơn và ít dùng hơn. Ex: (1) May I help you? (2) May 1 have the postcards, please? --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Kind suitable words to complete the sentences. blind man hospital co-educational handicapped tourist application form natural resources businessman 1. He is unable to see. He is a ____________ . 2. Peter and Susan can neither speak nor hear. They are ____________ . 3. Please fill in an ____________ if you want to join the club. 4. A person who is travelling or visiting a place for pleasure is a ____________ . 5. A man working in business is a ____________ . 6. A school which educates girls and boys together is ____________ . 7. A doctor usually works in the ____________ . 8. Britain's ____________ include coal, oil and gas. II. Fill in the blanks with the gerund of the given words in the box. be _______work _______have _______do _______play _______cook _______ watch _______write _______see _______listen 1. My father started ____________ in this office when he was 25. 2. We like ____________ television on winter evenings. 3. I remember ____________ afraid of the dark as a young child. 4. I prefer ____________ a shower to a bath. 5. I had to stop ____________ badminton when I hurt my back. 6. Do you enjoy ____________ to music? 7. We miss ____________ our friends. 8. After I moved away, we continued ____________ to each other for many years. 9. Song has always hated ____________ his home work. 10. My mother always finishes ____________ dinner at 6 p.m. Trang 52

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 III. Put the verb in the correct form, gerund or infinitive. 1. My sister is old enough (go)____________ to school by herself. 2. I suggest (go) ____________ camping at the weekend. 3. We invited Ann to the party, but she didn’t want (come)____________ . 4. Goodbye. I hope (see) ____________ you again soon. 5. I’m trying (finish) ____________ my work. Please stop (talk) ____________ . 6. You don’t need (iron) ____________ your dress. It doesn‘t need (iron) ____________ 7. Hung is fond of (read)____________ books. 8. Before (go) ____________ to school, Tan always remembers (review) ____________ his lessons. 9. Lan hates (play) ____________ soccer but she likes (watch) ____________ television. 10. I’m pleased (see) ____________ you to stop smoking. 11. Do you expect (pass) ____________ his course? If so, you’d better work harder. 12. We considered (drive) ____________ to New York, but at last we decided (fly) ____________ 13. His doctor advised him (give) ____________ up jogging. 14. After (play) ____________ with his toys for about half an hour, the boy started (cry) ____________ loudly. 15. Please go on (write) ____________ , I don’t mind (wait) ____________ . IV. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. Stop (argue) ____________ and start (work) ____________ . 2. I like (think) ____________ carefully about things before (make) ____________ a decision. 3. Don’t forget (tock) ____________ the door before (go) ____________ to bed. 4. I prefer (walk)____________ than (take) ____________ a taxi. 5. Ask him (come) ____________ in. Don’t keep him (stand) ____________ at the door. 6. Did you succeed in (solve) ____________ the problem? Let me (suggest) ____________ some solutions. 7. Does your jacket need (wash) ____________ ? – No, but you need (iron) ____________ it. 8. Why don’ we (spend) ____________ our summer vacation in France? 9. I prefer (walk) ____________ to (ride) ____________. 10. It was a really good holiday. I really enjoyed (be) ____________ by the sea again. 11. Don’t try (persuade) ____________ me. Nothing can make me (change) ____________ my mind. 12. I don’t mind (walk) ____________ home, but I’d rather (get) ____________ a taxi. 13. Will you help me (move) ____________ the bookcase? 14. He should know how (use) ____________ the lift, but if he doesn’t you'd rather (show)____________ him. 15. The children are too young. They need (take) ____________ care of. V. Put the verbs in brackets in The Simple Present Tense. 1. They (be) ____________ beautiful? 2. They sometimes (visit) ____________ their grandmother on Saturday. 3. Mai and I always (have)____________ a holiday in the summer. 4. Our teacher always (give) ____________ us many exercises. 5. He often (catch) ____________ a train to work. 6. She always (try) ____________ her best in class. 7. My old friend, Minh (write) ____________ to me twice a month. 8. What he says (be) ____________ true. 9. He often (take) ____________ a bus to school? 10. In my country, it (not / rain) ____________ much in the winter. VI. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. The sun always (rise) ____________ in the east. Look! It (rise) ____________ . 2. I don't think I (go) ____________ out tonight. I’m too tired. 3. Where you (spend) ____________ your summer holiday last year? 4. The moon (move) ____________ around the earth. 5. They (not be) ____________ doctors. 6. He often (get) ____________ up late. 7. You often (watch) ____________ TV? 8. I usually (go) ____________ shopping on weekend. Trang 53

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 9. Mai (be) ____________ very happy when she (receive) ____________ a letter from her sister yesterday morning. 10. They usually (not / walk) ____________ to work. 11. Look! The boys (climb) ____________ up the tree. 12. Your father usually (watch) ____________ TV in the evening? 13. Where she (buy)____________ her breakfast every morning? 14. I’ll call you when I (arrive) ____________ . 15. She’ll buy a new car as soon as she (have) ____________ enough money. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. The next meeting of the committee ____________ on November 5th. a. is b. are c. was d. were 2. I remember you ____________ that shirt. a. buy b. to buy c. buying d. for buying 3. You ____________ right. a. may be b. will be c. was d. are being 4. Ten countries participated in the discussions. a. hold b. took part c. told d. spoke 5. You oughtn’t to ____________ the house more. a. get out to b. get off for c. get off d. get out of 6. I got ____________ when I tried to find the station. a. lose b. lost c. loss d. loose 7. ____________ is the people who live in a place. a. Organization b. Environment c. Community d. Program 8. I collect stamps as a ____________ . a. hobby b. pastime c. favor d. a & b 9. If you want to join the library, you’ll need to fill ____________ an application form. a. on b. to c. at d. out 10. The ____________ is the air, water, land, animals and plants around us. a. community b. environment c. organization d. program * Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part. 11. a. volunteer b. support c. century d. fund 12. a. enroll b. both c. lost d. program II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. After you will go another 50 meters, you will see a path to your left. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. Can you help me moving this table? A B C D ....................................................................... 3. I don't enjoy to go on vacation as much as I used to. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. You should participate to the recycling program. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. The first World ____________ Festival was held in Prague in 1974. (YOUNG) 2. We will interview only three ____________ for the job. (APPLY) 3. We should save ____________ resources. (NATURE) 4. I think ____________ activities are necessary for children. (DOOR) 5. He’s involved in the ____________ of a new club. (ORGANIZE) 6. You should give him some ____________ . (ENCOURAGE) 7. Each of my friends has a ____________ character. (DIFFER) 8. Will you please give me some ____________ explanation? (FAR) IV. Put the verb in the correct form gerund or infinitive. 1. Can you help me (fix) ____________ the lamp? Trang 54

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 2. Please give the form to your parents and ask them (sign)____________ it. 3. Have you finished (clean) ____________ the kitchen? 4. Don’t forget (send) ____________ me a postcard when you have arrived. 5. Loan needs (improve) ____________ her English grammar. 6. (smoke) ____________ is harmful to your health. 7. Why does Minh avoid (meet) ____________ his old teacher? 8. Nam promised (try) ____________ his best in (learn) ____________ English. 9. Would you mind (pass) ____________ me the salt? 10. Lan hates (play) ____________ soccer, but she likes (listen) to music. V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Mom : Suri, you look very (1) ____________ today. Anything interesting (2) ____________ school? Suri : Yes. Mom. I’m going to (3) ____________ the Green Club. Mom : Really? What will you do? Suri : We are having an (4) ____________ month. And. we're going to clean the banks of the lakes (5)____________ weekends. Mom : Will you do anything else? Suri : Oh. yes. We're planting young trees and plants to sell to some schools. We hope (6)____________ more green color to the town and earn some money for our club. Mom : That sounds excellent. 1. a. unhappily b. happily c. unhappy d. happy 2. a. in b. at c. on d. with 3. a. participate b. join c. take part d. all are correct 4. a. environment b. camp c. organization d. program 5. a. when b. in c. on d. all are correct 6. a. give b. to give c. giving d. to giving VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Since 1877, the Fresh Air Fund has helped poor children from New York city spend summers in the countries. Each year, over ten thousand children, ages 6 to 18, participate in the program. Some stay at a camp; others live with a host family. The fund pays for all expenses. The camps are for 8-to 15-year-olds. At camp, children can learn about the stars, see deer and cows and other animals, and go hiking, fishing. and of course, swimming. The children learn responsibility by helping out with chores like making beds and waiting on tables. host (n): chú expense (n): chi phí responsibility (n): trách nhiệm 1. The aim of the Fresh Air Fund is to help all children. ....................................................................... 2. Over ten thousand children take part in the program yearly. ....................................................................... 3. Going for a swim is one of the children’s activities at camp. ....................................................................... 4. Ít is compulsory for all children in New York to join the camp. ....................................................................... VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. It’s unsafe to go out alone at night. Going .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Learning English is very interesting. It’s ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Linda thinks it is a good idea to go to Nha Trang by train. Linda suggests ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4. He often participates in outdoor activities during his summer vacation. He often takes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Please fill up this form”, the secretary said. The secretary asked ............................................................................................................................................................. 6. “Please, please, don’t tell anyone”, she said. She begged me ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Don’t worry about anything. Mrs. Pitt,” said her lawyer. “Leave it all to me.” Mrs. Pitt’s lawyer told ......................................................................................................................................................... 8. “Don’t eat too much starch,” I advised her, '‘and avoid fried food.” Trang 55

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 I advised ................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. The sun ____________ at 5.16 tomorrow. a. rise b. rises c. is rising d. is going to rise 2. You need to register now. a. help b. enroll c. list d. name 3. I enjoy ____________ to music. a. listen b. to listen c. listening d. for listening 4. I remember my father ____________ me a superman toy on my 9,h birthday. a. buy b. to buy c. buying d. for buying 5. "Where's Sue?” — "She ____________ be in the garden.” a. can b. has to c. need to d. may 6. She helped me ____________ the box. a. to carry b. carried c. carrying d. for carrying 7. She participates ____________ our Fishing Group. a. into b. at c. on d. in 8. National No-Smoking week ____________ on October 24th. a. start b. starts c. will starts d. will be starting 9. Skateboarding is the favorite pastime of many teenagers. a. subject b. favor c. hobby d. habit 10. The ____________ is people who cannot sec. a. mute b. deaf c. blind d. poor * Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently front the others. 1. a. favor b. able c. support d. offer 2. a. garden b. enroll c. sidewalk d. drawing II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. How many countries will participate on the Olympic Games? A B C D ....................................................................... 2. Is her grandpa live at 73 Albert Street? A B C D ....................................................................... 3. Take this form to your teacher and ask her sign it. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. He can remember to be in the hospital when he was four. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Choose the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. My father used (to smoke / smoking) ____________ a packet of cigarettes a day. 2. Please stop (to ask / asking) ____________ me questions! 3. I’m used to (work / working) ____________ with the television on. 4. She hopes (to have / having) ____________ a suitable job. 5. He enjoys (to get /getting up)____________ late on Sunday mornings. 6. They are thinking of (to move / moving) ____________ to America. 7. You don’t need (to come / corning) ____________ to the meeting. 8. Does she want (to become / becoming) ____________ a singer? 9. My sister hates (to do / doing) ____________ the ironing. 10. It’s very difficult (to reach /reaching) ____________ a decision. IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. Are there any ____________ between them? (SIMILAR) 2. She should say a few words of ____________ . (EXPLAIN) 3. Because of the ____________ of her teacher. she decided to study law. (ENCOURAGE) 4. The scouts do the ____________ work. (VOLUNTEER) 5. One of the aims of the International Scout Association to encourage good ____________ (CITIZEN) 6. His novels have been known ____________ . (WORLD) Trang 56

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 7. ____________ , the barber cut my hair too short. (LUCK) 8. Children need to have a good ____________ . (EDUCATE) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Dear Granddad, I've got some really (1) ____________ news. I may go to Camp Timber with Ace (2) ____________ this summer. Mum (3) ____________ I can go. The only (4) ____________ is that Ace's dad says that it’s too expensive. Still Ace thinks he'll probably be able to make some money by doing jobs around the house. He even promised his dad he would take the dog for a walk! His sister is really angry because she wants (5) ____________ to camp as well, but she’s too young. She's only eight. Anyway, I (6) ____________ he can go. Love, Debbie PS: Tom says he’ll phone you soon. 1. a. great b. good c. wonderful d. all are correct 2. a. in b. at c. on d. Ø 3. a. say b. says c. is saying d. will say 4. a. news b. problem c. event d. occasion 5. a. go b. to go c. going d. to going 6. a. hope b. plan c. look d. seem VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. The Wildlife Treatment Center is a small organization that was set up on the Greek island of Aegina in 1984. Its aims are to protect rare birds and other animals which are in danger and to teach people about the importance of wildlife. At the busy animal hospital, vets and volunteers take care of anything from birds to bears. Many of the animals in the Center arc rare, but not all. The Center accepts any animals that is in trouble, and even takes care of ordinary pets. Ordinary members of the public usually bring sick and injured animals into the hospital. 1. Only Greek birds and animals are protected by the Wildlife Treatment Center. ............... 2. All the animals are taken care of except for rare ones. ............... 3. One of the two aims of the center is that people have to realize the importance of wildlife. ............... 4. It has been 30 years since the Wildlife Treatment Center was founded. ............... VII. Complete the sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. I‘m willing to help you repair the radio. I don't mind ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The film’s ending is dramatic. The film ends .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3. When we were small, our family lived in Hai Phong. Our family used ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4. It’s interesting to take part in the young pioneers club. We are interested ................................................................................................................................................................. 5. “Don’t spend too much money on your holiday,” my mother said. My mother told ...................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Dad advised me to get up early. Dad said to me ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “You should spend time on learning. Tom”, said I. I advise ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. "Could I borrow’ your Physics paper?” Nga said to him. Nga ............................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. Wait here until I ____________ you. Trang 57

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 a. call b. will call c. am going to call d. called 2. Suddenly every body stopped ____________ . There was silence. a. talk b. to talk c. talking d. for talking 3. Mike’s hobbies include reading and chess. a. habits b. favors c. favorite d. pastimes 4. I helped him ____________ his clothes. a. finding b. to find c. on finding d. found 5. Eating too much fat can ____________ heart disease. a. lead to b. led to c. lead for d. led for 6. Our product is sold ____________ . a. world b. worldwide c. worldly d. worldliness 7. We received 400 ____________ for the job. a. favors b. hobbies c. activities d. applications 8. I like ____________ activities such as walking and camping. a. outdoor b. indoor c. outside d. inside 9. You need to enroll before the end of August. a. encourage b. join c. register d. participate 10. The temperature ____________ sometimes reach 35°C in July. a. can b. ought c. need d. must * Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. 11. a. similar b. assistance c. register d. citizen 12. a. education b. academic c. application d. voluntary II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. Take this map so that you don't go lost! A B C D ....................................................................... 2. All of them agreed to participate for the program. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. They are going to clean the banks of the lakes in weekends. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. It was kind to you to take me to the station. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Put the verb in the correct form, gerund or infinitive. 1. They stopped (sing) ____________ to listen the news broadcast. 2. Would you like (listen) ____________ to some music? 3. The teacher tries (explain) ____________ the lesson for his students. 4. Lan’s mother wanted her (become) ____________ a famous actress. 5. My father gave up (smoke) ____________ two years ago? 6. She suggested (have) ____________ a picnic at the weekend? 7. They agreed (spend)____________ $ 10.000 (rebuild) ____________ the hall 8. He stopped (have)____________ dinner on the way home. 9. That house looks awful. It needs (paint)____________ . 10. Most people prefer (spend) ____________ money to (earn) ____________ it. IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. The collected over 1000 ____________ for the petition. (SIGN) 2. The World Health ____________ is an interactional one. (ORGANIZE) 3. My father is working ____________ at the new house. (HAPPY) 4. We need many special classes for ____________ children. (HANDICAP) 5. There is a big ____________ between the new shopping mall and present shopping area. (DIFFER) 6. My brother likes acting and outdoor ____________ . (ACT) 7. You should fill in this ____________ before the interview. (APPLY) 8. This box is made of ____________ paper. (RECYCLE) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage.

Trang 58

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 Have you ever wanted to do something (1) ____________ ? Five years ago Bill Slade read about an organization (2) ____________ Earth watch. Earth watch finds (3) ____________ for expeditions to study and explore different parts of the world. Bill decided (4) ____________ an expedition to study elephants in Africa. And he counted birds in the rain forests of South America. He planted (5) ____________ in Europe and he studied whales in the Pacific Ocean. Bill said, “It was hard work, but he had (6) ____________ fun, and I learned a lot, too.” 1. a. different b. the same c. differently d. difficultly 2. a. call b. calls c. calling d. called 3. a. volunteers b. activities c. programs d. resources 4. a. join b. to join c. joining d. to joining 5. a. parks b. trees c. lakes d. banks 6. a. many b. much c. a lot of d. more VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Care Organization was established in 1945 to help people after World War II. It distributed over 100 million food packages. Meanwhile, it was starting self-help programs. Today it has development programs in 37 countries. Care gives equipment and teaches people how to build water Systems, roads, school, houses, and health centers. It also teaches people how to increase production on their farms, how to reforest areas, and how to start small village Industries. Care also provides food for about 30 million people, most of whom are children. It gives special help where there is a flood, an earthquake, a drought or a war. 1. Care Organization was established before World War II. ..................... 2. There are over 37 countries starting development programs from Care Organization. ..................... 3. Care Organization teaches people how to develop and protect their life. ..................... 4. Care Organization provides food, equipment for millions of people. ..................... VII. Complete the sentences so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. He often participates in outdoor activities during his summer vacation. He often takes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2. Why don’t you finish the work soon? You ought .................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Let’s go out for dinner tonight. I suggest ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She doesn’t live with her parents any more. She used ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Please tell your son to write the lesson carefully, Mrs. Brown,” Mr. Gates said. Mr. Gates asked ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “Don’t use the telephone after eleven o’clock,” the landlady said to us. The landlady told ................................................................................................................................................................. 7. “Can you explain the answer to me again, Lan?” Mai said. Mai asked ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. “You shouldn’t listen to that kind of music, Tim” said his mother. Tim’s mother told him ........................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 59

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD I. GETTING STARTED 1. grocery store (n) : cửa hàng bách hóa 3. wet market (n) : chợ cá tươi sống 2. hairdresser’s (n) : tiệm hớt tóc II. LISTEN AND READ 4. neighborhood (n) : khu vực lân cận, làng 7. pancake (n) : bánh kếp, bánh khoái xóm 8. delicious (adj) : ngon, thơm ngon -» neighbor (n) : hàng xóm 9. tasty (adj) : ngon, hợp khẩu vị 5. area (n) : vùng, khu vực -» taste (v) : nếm 6. serve (v) : phục vụ -» taste (n) : vị, mùi vị -» service (n) : sự phục vụ, ngành dịch vụ III. SPEAK 10. parcel (n) : gói hàng 12. surface mail (n) : thư / bưu phẩm gởi 11. airmail (n) : thư / bưu phẩm gởi bằng bằng đường bộ / sắt / biển đường hàng không 13. weigh (v) : cân nặng IV. LISTEN 14. exhibition (n): cuộc triển lãm, trưng bày 15. contest (n) : cuộc thi -» exhibit (v) : triển lãm, trưng bày -» contestant (n) : thí sinh V. READ 16. mall (n) = shopping mall (n): khu thương 28. selection (n) : sự lựa chọn mại, thương xá -» select (v) : chọn lựa 17. roof (n) : mái nhà, vòm -» selective (adj) : có lựa chọn 18. convenient (adj) : tiện lợi, thuận tiện 29. produce (v) : sản xuất -» conveniently (adv): tiện lợi, thuận tiện -» product (n) : sản phẩm -» convenience (n): sự thuận tiện -» production (n) : sự sản xuất 19. especially (adv) : đặc biệt -» productive (adj) : đạt năng suất 20. humid (adj) : ẩm ướt 30. resident (n) : cư dân 21. customer (n) : khách hàng 31. concerned (adj) (about / for): quan 22. comfort (n) : sự thoải mái tâm, lo lắng -» comfortable (adj): thoải mái, dễ chịu, tiện 32. organize (v) : tổ chức, thiết lập nghi -» uncomfortable (adj) -» organization (n) : tổ chức, sự tổ chức 23. notice (v) : để ý, chú ý, nhận biết 33. discuss (v) : thảo luận, tranh luận -» notice (n) : thông báo, yết thị -» discussion (n) : (sự) thảo luận 24. owner (n) : chủ nhân, người sở hữu 34. situation (n) : tình trạng, tình hình -» own (v) : sở hữu, có 35. air - conditioned (adj): có điều hòa 25. business (n) : việc buôn bán, kinh doanh -» air - conditioner (n): máy điều hòa 26. goods (n) : hàng hóa nhiệt độ 27. offer (v) : cung cấp 36. discount (n) : sự giảm giá, chiết khấu VI. WRITE 37. effect (n) : ảnh hưởng, tác động 40. celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm -» effective (adj) : có hiệu quả / hiệu lực -» celebration (n) : sự tổ chức ăn mừng 38. contact s.b (v) : tiếp xúc, liên lạc với 41. hardware store (n): cửa hàng kim khí 39. purse (n): ví tiền VII. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 .PRESENT PERFECT TENSE (Hiện tại hoàn thành) * Form: (+) S + have / has + V3 / Ved + O. (-) S + have / has + not + V3 / Ved + O. (?) Have / Has + S + V3 / Ved + O? - Rút gọn: have -» ’ve has -» ’s have not -» haven’t has not -» hasn’t Ex: She has seen that film before. (-) ............................................................................................................................................................................................. (?) ............................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 60

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 * Usage: Thì hiện tại hoàn thành dùng để diễn tả: a. Hành động vừa mới xảy ra Ex: (1) He has just bought a new car. (2) They have just eaten at an expensive restaurant. b. Hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng không có thời gian xác định hay không đề cập đến thời gian. Ex: (1) They have already done their homework. (2) She has read this novel three times. c. Hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng vẫn kéo dài tới hiện tại. Ex: (1) John’s family has lived here for 10 years. (2) My father has worked here since 2005. d. Hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng vẫn ảnh hưởng tới hiện tại. Ex: (1) The 1999 flood has destroyed our city. (2) He forgot his pen and he has used his pencil instead. e. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành được dùng trong cấu trúc: This is /It is + the first time/the second time/... + S + have/has + V3 / Ved ... Ex: (1) This is the first time I have met such a pretty girl. (2) It is the second time you have broken my glasses. * Một số trạng từ và giới từ đi kèm: 1. just: vừa mới 6. since: từ khi 11. so far / by far / up to 2. already: đã...rồi 7. for: trong khoảng now / up to the present / 3. ever: đã từng 8. recently/ lately: gần đây till now / until now / 4. never: chưa bao giờ 9. not...yet: chưa until the present: cho đến 5. never ... before: trước 10. many times / several bây giờ đây chưa bao giờ times: nhiều lần Ex: (1) Have you ever seen such a beautiful landscape? (2) I have never talked to such a cute person. (3) Until now, she hasn’t come back to her hometown. 2.The PRESENT PERFECT with FOR and SINCE • FOR + khoảng thời gian để nói sự việc tiếp diễn bao lâu. Ex: (1) She has worked for this bank for three years. (2) They have built this house for ages. (3) That child has slept for 3 hours. • SINCE + mốc thời gian để nói sự việc tiếp diễn khi nào. Ex: (1) I have learnt English since last year. (2) It hasn’t rained since the beginning of July. (3) We haven ’t met each other since we left high school. 3. COMPARISON ■ Like + N / Pronoun : diễn tả sự giống nhau Ex: (1) He ran like the wind. (2) I love peace like you. ■ The same as: diễn tả sự đồng nhất Ex: (1) Her dress isn’t the same color as her sister’s. (2) The book on the table is the same as the one in your bag. ■ Different from: diễn tả sự khác nhau, Ex: (1) He is very different from his brother. (2) The new house isn’t much different from the old one. ■ As.. .as : diễn tả sự ngang bằng S + V + as + Adj / Adv + as + N / Pro. S + be not + as / so + Adj + as + N / Pro. S + do / does not + V + as / so +Adv + as + N / Pro. Ex: (1) She is as tall as her mother. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 61

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 (2) I can speak Korean as fluently as Korean. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. TOO ... TO (quá ... không thể...) S + be + too + Adj + (for O) + to inf. Ex: (1) She is short. She can’t reach the bookshelf -» She is too short to reach the bookshelf. (2) This math is difficult. I can’t do it. -» The math is too difficult for me to do. (3) Hoa is too young. She can’t get married. -» Hoa .................................................................................................................................................................................. (4) The garden is too small. They can’t play football in it. -» The garden ................................................................................................................................................................. (5) Unfortunately, our stay here will be very short. We can’t visit them. -» We .................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Complete the sentences. Put for or since into each gap. 1. My mother has worked in this hospital ____________ 9 years. 2. India has been an independent country ____________ 1947. 3. I’m hungry. I haven’t eaten anything ____________ breakfast. 4. Lots of things have happened ____________ I last wrote to you. 5. How long has it been raining? - It has been raining ____________ two hours. 6. That’s a very old car. I’ve had it ____________ ages. 7. ____________ Christmas, the weather has been quite mild. 8. It’s nice to see you again. We haven’t seen each other ____________ a long time. 9. It is two years ____________ I last had a holiday. 10. My boss will go away ____________ the next ten days. II. Write sentence with the cue words. Use the present perfect tense of the verb. 1. My father / teach / English / twenty years. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I / not speak / to him / last week. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. You / do / your homework/ yet? ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The Johnsons / live / in this house / 1986. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. He / just / go / out. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Jane / not meet / her brother / ages. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. I / wait / for him / two o’clock. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Mrs. Brown / work / in a bank / a long time. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. My family / be / here / Christmas. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. They / not have / dinner / yet. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Use the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. Put for or since into each gap. 1. We (have) ____________ terrible weather ____________ last month. 2. I (earn) ____________ my own living ____________ I left school. 3. They (not/have) ____________ a holiday ____________ 5 years. 4. Mr. Smith (be) ____________ in hospital ____________ his accident last month. Trang 62

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. Alice (work)____________ in a bank ____________ 3 years. 6. He (not /speak) ____________ to me ____________ the last committee. 7. I (use) ____________ this machine ____________ ages. 8. India (be) ____________ an independent country ____________ 1947. 9. He had a bad fall last week and ____________ then he (not/leave) ____________ home. 10. She (live) ____________ in this town ____________ nearly 20 years. IV. Put the verbs into correct present perfect form, then complete the sentences with FOR or SINCE. 1. I (know) ____________ George ____________ a long time. 2. We (live) ____________ in this city ____________ ten years. 3. I (learn) ____________ French ____________ six months. 4. Nobody (see) ____________ him ____________ last week. 5. The bus is late. We (wait) ____________ for it ____________ twenty minutes. 6. My brother (join) ____________ in the army ____________ he left school. 7. Farmers (wait) ____________ for rain ____________ many months. 8. This hotel (not/have)____________ any visitors ____________ last spring. 9. She (noi/see) ____________ her closest friend ____________ several years. 10. They (live) ____________ here ____________ 2000. V. Complete the second sentences, using the words given in brackets. 1. He is wearing a red cap, and she is wearing a red cap too. (like) He ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. He has a harsh voice, but his sister has a sweet voice. (different from) His voice...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Jane likes spaghetti, but John likes hamburger. (different from) Jane’s taste ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Ann’s salary is 800 dollars; her husband’s salary is 800 dollars. (the same... as) Ann gets ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My birthday is 12 August. Tom’s birthday is 12 August. (the same as) My birthday .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6. My bicycle is nice but yours is nicer. (as...as) My bicycle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. I speak English very well, and my sister speaks well too. (as... as) I ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Jill is more intelligent than Bill. (as... as) Bill ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. He got up late. He couldn’t catch the first bus. (too... to) He .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10. She spoke very softly. We couldn’t understand what she said. (too... to) She ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11. Thu’s shirt is green. My shirt is green, too. (like) The color of .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12. Mr. Brown speaks English. Mrs. Green speaks English, too. (the same... as) Mr. Brown ................................................................................................................................................................................. 13. Viet is 14 years old. Nam is 14 years old, too. (as... as) Viet is .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. This bike is 800.000 VNĐ. That bike is 500.000 VNĐ. (different from) The price .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15. Peter plays soccer better than Mike. (as... as) Mike doesn’t ............................................................................................................................................................................. VI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. When did people first use the telephone? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. She last heard that song three years ago. It’s ................................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 63

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 3. The last time I visited Malaysia was two years ago. I last ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. I have never eaten with knives and forks before. It’s ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. He hasn’t met his classmates since he graduated from school. He didn’t .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I haven’t been to the cinema for 3 years. The last ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. I have studied English for three years. I began ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8. She has lived in Hue since she was an eleven-year-old girl. She started ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9. Tom and Mary have worked in that factory since 1990. Tom and Mary started .......................................................................................................................................................... 10. She began to give up smoking last year. She ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11. When did you start studying medicine? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. We haven’t visited my grandparents for two months. The last time ........................................................................................................................................................................... 13. The last time we saw her was on Christmas Day. We haven’t ................................................................................................................................................................................ 14. I haven’t written to you for a month. I last ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15. It’s five years since I last met Mary. I have ........................................................................................................................................................................................... VII. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. Exercise 1: 1. They are getting along with their ____________ . (NEIGHBORHOOD) 2. There was an ____________ of paintings at the Art Gallery. (EXHIBIT) 3. My car has been given excellent ____________ . (SERVE) 4. They ____________ the straw on the farm every afternoon. (COLLECTIVE) 5. Nam thinks the food in this restaurant is ____________ (TASTE) 6. How ____________ of you to break that cup! (CARE) 7. My grandmother can read ____________ without glasses. (GOOD) 8. We must arrange a ____________ time and place for the meeting. (CONVENIENCE) Exercise 2: 1. It’s very different from the present ____________ area. (SHOP) 2. ____________ , I lost my key on the way home. (FORTUNATE) 3. The shoes were nice, but they were ____________ . (COMFORT) 4. Surface mail is much ____________ than airmail. (CHEAP) 5. Who is the ____________ of that new car? (OWN) 6. There are not enough doctors in this ____________ . (NEIGHBOR) 7. The ____________ in the area are against the building of the new highway. (RESIDE) 8. We’re here to ____________ his joining the club. (DISCUSSION) --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase that best to complete each of the sentences. 1. Are you hungry? - No, I ____________ lunch. a. have just had b. already had c. just have 2. While I ____________ TV last night, Tom telephoned me. a. watch b. was watching c. watched 3. How long ____________ Jane? - Since she was a child. a. do you know b. did you know c. had you known

d. had had d. am watching d. have you known Trang 64

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Robert is going to be famous someday. He ____________ in three movies. a. appeared b. has appeared c. had appeared d. has been appearing 5. There were a lot of people on the bus. It was ____________ than usual. a. as crowded b. more crowded c. so crowded d. much crowded 6. That garden is ____________ the one in the park. a. as beautiful like b. beautiful as c. as beautiful as d. beautifuller than 7. This shirt is ____________ as that one. a. as expensive b. expensive c. more expensive d. the same expensive 8. Mary looks ____________ her mother. a. as b. the same c. like d. as same as 9. My neighbor ____________ to me ____________ more than two months. a. didn’t talk / since b. doesn’t talk / for c. hasn’t talked / for d. haven’t talked / for 10. If you want any further information please ____________ the head-office. a. contact b. relate c. connect d. combine 11. As a member of the Y& Y Green Group, Nam wanted ____________ in a recycling program. a. to participate b. to take part c. to join d. all are correct 12. Some people in the neighborhood, however, are not happy ____________ the changes. a. of b. about c. for d. in II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. The city center wasn’t as crowded this morning like it usually is. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. She has become extremely successful since she has been in Switzerland. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. Shopping in the mall is more comfort than in the market. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. My uncle has lived in London for ten years, but now he lives in Bristol. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Kate and Jenny plan (1) ____________ on holiday together this year. They both enjoy traveling, so they’ve decided to go on a tour of the United States. They’ve arranged (2) ____________ with friends and relatives, so they’ll avoid spending a lot of money on hotels. Jenny suggested (3) ____________ California first, but Kate wasn’t (4) ____________ the idea. She doesn’t like beaches, and she hates sunbathing. So she’s managed to persuade Jenny that they should start their tour in New York. Kate’s uncle (5) ____________ near New York, and he’s offered to meet them at the airport. Kate’s really (6) ____________ about seeing her uncle again. 1. a. go b. to go c. going d. to going 2. a. stay b. to stay c. staying d. to staying 3. a. visit b. to visit c. visiting d. b & c 4. a. keen on b. interested in c. fond of d. all are correct 5. a. live b. lives c. lived d. is living 6. a. excite b. exciting c. excited d. excitedly IV. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are TRUE or FALSE. Marie was bom in Poland in 1876. She learned to read when she was 4 years old. She was intelligent and had an excellent memory. She finished high school when she was only 15 years old. When she grew up, Marie went to Paris to study Mathematics and Chemistry at the University. She won the Nobel Prize for Physics in 1903 and 8 years later she received the Nobel Prize for Chemistry. Marie Curie died 1934. 1. She finished high school in 1891. ............................................................ 2. She studied Mathematics and Chemistry at the University at Paris. ............................................................ 3. She won the Novel Prize for Physics when she was 28. ............................................................ 4. Marie is Dutch. ............................................................ V. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. My mother is busy (cook) ____________ meal. 2. It’s dangerous (let) ____________ children (play) ____________ with matches. 3. He tried (forget) ____________ his sorrow by (write) ____________ . Trang 65

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Did you succeed in (solve) ____________ the problem? 5. These boys stopped (play) ____________ football because of the rain. VI. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. She looks very ____________ in her traditional costume. (BEAUTY) 2. A lot of ____________ come to Van Mieu every day. (VISIT) 3. Does she have a ____________ of coins? (COLLECT) 4. You should ____________ for an hour. (RELAXATION) 5. Jeans and T-shirt are my ____________ clothes. (FAVOR) VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. Novels are more interesting than comic books. Comic books ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Lan is the best student in my class. No one else ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. Nobody helped Mike fix the CD player. Mike ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Eating Chinese food is new to me. I have ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. My brother hasn’t seen his best friend for nearly five years. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. When did you start learning English? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word or phrase that best to complete each of the sentences. 1. I have lived in this area over ____________ ten years. a. since b. for c. until d. during 2. Is there a post-office ____________ ? a. close b. next c. nearby d. neighborhood 3. A Coke is different ____________ a Pepsi. a. for b. to c. from d. than 4. Em going to the ____________ to buy some food for my family. a. grocery store b. drugstore c. stadium d. exhibition 5. ____________ a backpack, a schoolbag is used for students at school. a. As b. Like c. Same d. The same 6. Since all the shops are under one roof, it is very ____________ for customers. a. pleased b. convenient c. inconvenient d. complex 7. All the shops are air-conditioned so that customers will shop in ____________ . a. ease b. relax c. happy d. comfort 8. Have you been to Japan? – ____________ . a. Until now not b. Already not c. Still not d. Not yet 9. You work isn’t very good. Em sure you can do ____________ this. a. more good than b. better than c. as well as d. better as 10. You ____________ be hungry after your long walk. a. have to b. has to c. must d. ought to * Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 11. a. pancake b. surface c. situation d. tasty 12. a. family b. grocery c. try d. happy II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. Most people want to live in comfortable in their old age. A B C D ............................................................ 2. For January, he has taken five exams and hasn’t got any poor grade. A B C D ............................................................ 3. We must arrange a convenience time and place for the meeting. A B C D ............................................................ Trang 66

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Millions of people have visit Disney World in Florida, since it opened. A B C D ............................................................ 5. I don’t know where is he living now. A B C D ............................................................ III. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Being a student involves taking responsibility for (1) ____________ your own time. So, you need (2) ____________ about planning your time and workload effectively. Don’t try (3) ____________ too much at one have regular breaks. If you fail to finish a piece of work as (4) ____________ as you wanted, don’t feel bad, just be (5) ____________ realistic in your planning (6) ____________ time. 1. a. organize b. organizes c. organized d. organizing 2. a. learn b. to learn c. to learning d. learning 3. a. do b. doing c. to do d. to doing 4. a. quick b. quickly c. fast d. b & c 5. a. more b. much c. many d. few 6. a. near b. then c. next d. b & c IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. ____________ won’t mind the weather outside. (CUSTOM) 2. Coffee is Brazil’s main ____________ . (PRODUCE) 3. The children are very busy with ____________ The Halloween Day. (CELEBRATE) 4. Mr. Chung is a famous stamp ____________ . (COLLECT) 5. My house is ____________ near the bus-stop. (CONVENIENCE) V. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. She asked her grandmother (tell) ____________ her story. 2. Stop (argue) ____________ and start (work) ____________ . 3. My brother (leave) ____________ home 10 years ago. I (never/meet) ____________ him since then. 4. Yesterday I (be) ____________ busy, so I (not have) ____________ time to phone you. 5. I don’t mind (walk) ____________ home, but I’d rather (get) ____________ a taxi. VI. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are TRUE or FALSE. Since 1990s there has been an important change in Ho Chi Minh city - the growth of shopping centers, or shopping malls. Today we find many shopping centers on the main streets of residential areas. A large shopping center, or mall, usually has about 50 to 100 Stores of all kinds and a large parking lot for vehicles. Most malls have two or more department Stores that sell everything you can imagine clothes, toys, cameras, sports equipment, etc. These department Stores also sell furniture and household appliances. Some shopping centers have supermarket that sell food and a lot of things for the home. The other Stores in a shopping center usually each sell only one kind of thing - cosmetics, books, shoes, clothes, music cassettes and CDs, etc. A shopping center often has one or more special restaurant that serves fast food. People like malls for many reasons. They feel safe because malls have security guards. Parking is usually free, and the weather inside is always fine. They are offered a wide selection of Products, so it’s easy for them to find anything they need. Sometimes they will be offered special discounts or get promotions. 1. More and more shopping centers have been built since 1990. ........................................ 2. It’s very difficult to find a park lot at a shopping center. ........................................ 3. You can have hamburgers or fried chickens in a shopping center. ........................................ 4. It’s more comfortable and convenient to shop in the mall than in the market. ........................................ VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. The river is too wide. I can’t swim across that river. (too...to) The ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The box is too heavy for the little boy to carry. (enough...to) The ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I last wrote to my friend in June. I haven’t ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. This Street is more dangerous than that one. That Street is ............................................................................................................................................................................ Trang 67

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. I have never eaten with knives and forks before. It’s ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. “Don’t make so much noise”, my father said My father told .......................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word or phrase that best to complete each of the sentences. 1. Smith writes very quickly. He’s ____________ finished his essay. a. already b. been c. for d. yet 2. What are you going to do? - I don’t know. I haven’t decided ____________ . a. just b. long c. since d. yet 3. We will shop in the new ____________ which just opened in our neighborhood. a. shopping center b. shopping mall c. shopping plaza d. all are correct 4. Look at Tom’s suit. Is it ____________ mine? a. the same style that b. the same style than c. as same as d. the same style as 5. We ____________ in our present house ____________ five years. a. live / for b. have lived / for c. have lived / since d. lived / since 6. People who live in a place for long time are ____________ . a. livers b. residents c. neighbors d. residence 7. With modem facilities ____________ , the new shopping mall surely pleases every customer. a. ready b. waiting c. available d. left 8. Mrs. John will go to the department store before she ____________ home. a. goes b. has gone c. will go d. is going 9. I don’t believe it! It’s three in the morning and that party ____________ . a. hasn’t finished b. doesn’t finish c. didn’t finish d. won’t finish 10. I ____________ home until I finish my work. a. haven’t come b. don’t come c. won’t come d. didn’t come 11. There is nothing exciting ____________ in the countryside. a. doing b. to do c. done d. do 12. Please contact ____________ me if you have any question. a. with b. to c. for d. on II. Choose the words or phrases that need correcting. 1. The shop offers a wide selection of wine. A B C D ........................................ 2. For Ronnie began classes, he has met an average of 1.324 people a month. A B C D ........................................ 3. Petrol is twice as expensive as it is a few years ago. A B C D ........................................ 4. Please contact me with the above address for more information. A B C D ........................................ 5. We arrived early in order to buying our tickets. A B C D ........................................ III. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. How long you (know) ____________ Paul? - I (know) ____________ him for five years. 2. She (feed) __________ the cat yet? 3. Would you mind (make) ____________ some coffee? 4. Be careful! The teacher (look) ____________ at you. 5. I forgot (lock) ____________ the door when I left my apartment this morning. 6. I won’t be late. I promise (be) ____________ on time. 7. When you last (talk) ____________ to your uncle? 8. We (not / see) ____________ Lan since we (be) ____________ on holiday last summer. IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. They work hard, but their efforts are not very ____________ . (PRODUCE) 2. Coffee is Brazil’s main ____________ . (PRODUCE) Trang 68

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 3. That car went out of ____________ five years ago. (PRODUCE) 4. They ____________ the straw on the farm every afternoon. (COLLECTIVE) 5. We find advertising on TV very ____________ . (EFFECT) 6. We are very ____________ for her safety. (CONCERN) 7. The supermarket offers a wide ____________ of summer clothes for you to choose from. (SELECT) 8. She says shopping can be very ____________ . (TIRE) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. The Youth and Young Pioneers (1) ____________ was founded in Viet Nam on March 26th, 1931. It built character and (2) ____________ good citizenship and personal fitness. The Y & Y has many planes to help community. It encourages all (3) ____________ to take part in different programs. The (4) ____________ program can help people save natural resources. The “Rosy Smile” program helps (5) ____________ funds for poor children. The “Green Sunday” program makes the city more (6) ____________ with clean streets, plenty of trees and flowers. It gives more green colors to the city and it is done on Sunday so it has the name “Green Sunday”. 1. a. organize b. organization c. organized d. organizing 2. a. encouraged b. encourages c. encouraging d. encourage 3. a. member b. membership c. members d. memberships 4. a. helping b. raising c. recycling d. painting 5. a. raising b. making c. taking d. getting 6. a. beautiful b. helpful c. hopeful d. enjoyable VI. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are TRUE or FALSE. Tom loves the summer holidays. He always goes to visit his grandparents in the summer. They live on a farm on the North of Scotland. Tom lives in the South of England and he goes to his grandparents’ house by car. He usually stops in a hotel in Edinburgh for one night on the way there. He loves driving through Scotland. The mountains are beautiful and there are not too many cars on the roads. His grandparents are old but they work hard on the farm. He likes helping them when he is there. They live near the sea and there is a beautiful beach not far from their house. The sea is usually quite cold but he goes swimming most days. He loves visiting his grandparents and he is always sad when it is time to come back home. 1. Tom lives in North of s Scotland. ........................................ 2. He goes to visit his grandparents every summer. ........................................ 3. His grandparents work hard on the farm. ........................................ 4. Tom doesn’t like helping them when he is there. ........................................ VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. 1. A magazine is more expensive than a newspaper. A newspaper is not ................................................................................................................................................................ 2. This is the cheapest dish on the menu. No other dishes on the menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3. “Please do the homework by yourself.” He told me ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. “Shut the door but don’t lock it”. They told me ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5. I often listen to music in my free time. I often spend ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6. I have never visited Nha Trang before. . This is ......................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 69

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE I. SETTING STARTED 1. fresh (adj) : (về không khí) mát mẻ, 4. entertainment (n) : sự giải trí trong lành, (về thực phẩm) tươi -» entertain (v) : giải trí, tiêu khiển -» fresh air (n) : không khí mát mẻ trong -» entertaining (adj): thú vị lành -» entertainingly (adv): (một cách) hấp -» fresh food (n) : thực phẩm tươi dẫn, thú vị 2. goods (n) : hàng hóa 5. traffic jam (n) : sự ách tắc giao thông, vụ 3. view (n) : cảnh, quang cảnh ùn tắc giao thông II. LISTEN AND READ 6. away (adv) : ở xa, cách xa 11. to bring (v) (brought, brought): đưa đến, 7. relative (n) : người bà con thân thuộc mang đến 8. peaceful (adj) : thanh bình 12. facility (n) : cơ sở vật chất -» peacefully (adv): (một cách) yên bĩnh, -» medical facilities (n): cơ sở vật chất y tế thanh thản 13. accessible (adj) : có thể sử dụng được, có -» peace (n) : sự yên bình, hoà bình thể tiếp cận được 9. permanently (adv): vĩnh viễn, mãi mãi 14. definitely (adv) : (một cách) rõ ràng, chắc -» permanent (adj): lâu dài, vĩnh cửu, chắn thường xuyên -» definite (adj) : rõ ràng, chắc chắn ≠ impermanent (adj): tạm thời, không lâu 15. offer (v) : đề nghị, mời bền 16. simple (adj) : đơn giản, giản dị 10. remote (adj) : xa xôi, hẻo lánh III. SPEAK AND LISTEN 17. hometown (n) : thành phố quê nhà 18. a moment (n) : một chốc lát IV. READ 19. rural (adj) : thuộc nông thôn 28. strain (n) : tình trạng căng thẳng, sức ép -» rural area (n) : vùng nông thôn 29. result (n) : kết quả 20. urban (adj) : thuộc đô thị, thành phố 30. tragedy (n) : thảm kịch, bi kịch -» urban area (n) : khu đô thị 31. supply (n) : nguồn cung cấp 21. to believe (v) : tin tưởng, cho rằng -» to supply (v) : cung cấp, đáp ứng -» belief (n) : lòng tin, niềm tin -» supplier (n) : người / công ty cung cấp, 22. plentiful (adj) : nhiều, dồi dào tiếp tế -» plentifully (adv): phong phú, dồi dào 32. movement (n) : chính quyền, chính phủ 23. struggle (n) : cuộc đấu tranh, chiến đấu 33. migrant (n) : người di cư, dân di cư -» to struggle (v) : đấu tranh, đánh nhau -» migrate (v) : di cư, di trú 24. typhoon (n) : cơn bão 34. create (v) : tạo nên, gây nên 25. flood (n) : cơn lũ lụt -» creative (adj) : sáng tạo 26. drought (n) : hạn hán 35. adequate (adj) : đầy đủ, thoả đáng 27. overcrowding (n): tình trạng dân cư quá 36. pressure (v) : sức ép, áp lực đông đúc 37. delay (v) : làm chậm trễ, trì hoãn V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. THE PR.ESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE (Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn) a. Form: (+) S + am / is / are + Ving + ... (-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving + .. . (?) Am / Is / Are + S + Ving + ... ? Ex: (+) She is playing the piano at the moment. (-) .............................................................................................................................................................................................. (?) .............................................................................................................................................................................................. b. Usage: • Diễn tả 1 hành động đang diễn ra ngay tại thời điểm nói. Ex: (1) My mother (cook) ____________ in the kitchen right now. (2) Look! The little girl (run) ____________ after the bus. Trang 70

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 • Diễn tả 1 hành động sắp xảy ra ở tương lai, có kế hoạch từ trước. Ex: (1) I (go)____________ to the English Club tonight. (2) His parents (take) ____________ him to the zoo next weekend. • Diễn tả tình trạng đang tiến triển và thay đổi (thường được dùng với 2 động từ to get và to become) Ex: (1) The weather (get) ____________ hotter. (2) She (become) ____________ more beautiful. • Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn sử dụng với “always ” diễn tả 1 thói quen xấu của người khác hay 1 sự việc lặp đi lặp lại quá mức bình thường ở thời điểm hiện tại khiến người nói có thái độ bực mình. Ex: (1) The boss is angry because Jane (always use) ____________ the office telephone for personal calls. (2) He (always borrow) ____________ books from me but he never remembers to pay me back. * TRẠNG TỪ THƯỜNG GẶP: (1) now, right now, at the moment, at present, for the time being,... Sau Look!, Listen!, Be careful!, Watch out!, Keep silent!... (2) tonight, tomorrow, this week, next weekend... * NOTES: Các lưu ý khi đổi V -» Ving ■ -e -» -ing (Ex: : write -» writing; ride -» riding) ■ phụ nguyên phụ: - 1 âm tiết: put -» putting - 2 âm tiết + dấu nhấn ở âm cuối: reset -» resetting ■ Trường hợp đặc biệt: - fix -» fixing - play -» playing - flow -» flowing 2. COMPARATIVES (So sánh) a. Short Adjective: ♦ So sánh hơn : S + be + short Adj + ER + than + N / P.N. ♦ So sánh nhất: S +be + the + short Adi + EST. Ex: (1) Tom is older than Mary. (2) This book is thicker than that one. (3) She is the youngest daughter in the family. (4) This city is the biggest of three cities. ♦ NOTE: Nếu tính từ tận cùng bằng: ❖ phụ âm“e” : chỉ thêm R, hoặc ST. Ex: large -» the ❖ nguyên âm + phụ âm: ta phải gấp đôi phụ âm cuối trước khi thêm ER / EST. Ex: big -» ……………………………….. -» the ……………………………….. thin -» ……………………………….. -» the ……………………………….. ❖ phụ âm + y : đổi y -+ i trước khi thêm ER / EST Ex: happy -» ……………………………….. -» the ……………………………….. pretty -» ……………………………….. -» the ……………………………….. ❖ Những tính từ có hai âm tiết nhưng tận cùng là “y”, “er”, “ow” như: happy, clever, narrow, .. .cũng được xem như tính từ ngắn và áp dụng theo công thức của Adj ngắn. b. Long Adjective: ♦ So sánh hơn: S + be + more + long Adj + than + N / P.N. ♦ So sánh nhất: S + be + the most + long Adj. Ex: (1) She is more beautiful than her sister. (2) Benches are more comfortable than armchairs. (3) It’s the most expensive house of three houses. (4) Huy is the most intelligent student in our school. * Các trường hợp ngoại lệ: ADJ Comparative Superlative Trang 71

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 1. good better the best 2. bad worse the worst 3. many / much more the most 4. little less the least 5. far farther / further the farthest / the furthest --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE

I. Give the COMPARATIVE and SƯPERLATIVE forms of the following adjectives and adverbs. ADJECTIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE 1. high .................................................................. ................................................................. 2. careful .................................................................. ................................................................. 3. slow .................................................................. ................................................................. 4. hot .................................................................. ................................................................. 5. expensive .................................................................. ................................................................. 6. cheap .................................................................. ................................................................. 7. slowly .................................................................. ................................................................. 8. good .................................................................. ................................................................. 9. dangerous .................................................................. ................................................................. 10. modem .................................................................. ................................................................. 11. happy .................................................................. ................................................................. 12. popular .................................................................. ................................................................. 13. bad .................................................................. ................................................................. 14. valuable .................................................................. ................................................................. 15. boring .................................................................. ................................................................. 16. big .................................................................. ................................................................. 17. clever .................................................................. ................................................................. 18. comfortable .................................................................. ................................................................. 19. fast .................................................................. ................................................................. 20. early .................................................................. ................................................................. II. Write the comparative form of the words in blankets. 1. My father is (fat) ____________ me. 2. Milk is (expensive) ____________ water. 3. Mike is (healthy) ____________ Tim. 4. Which is (interesting)____________ , film or play? 5. That woman looks (pretty) ____________ than my mother. 6. She has (many)____________ books than I. 7. Health and happiness are (important) ____________ than money. 8. Who is (good)____________ , Minh or Nam? HI. Write the superlative form of the words in blankets. 1. Ann is (tall) ____________ in his class. 2. This hotel is (cheap) ____________ in the town. 3. Yesterday was (hot) ____________ day of the year. 4. He is (intelligent) ____________ in my class. 5. This is (happy)____________ woman of the three women. 6. He dances (beautifully) ____________ in the village. 7. He is (careful)____________ driver I’ve known 8. Do you know which animal is (dangerous) ____________ in the world? IV. Write the comparative or superlative form of the words in blankets. 1. That was (funny) ____________ play we have ever seen. 2. Between 2 games you played last night, which one was (funny) ____________ ? 3. “The ring” is (horrible) ____________ ” The strangers . 4. It was (horrible) ____________ feeling he has ever had. 5. It’s (big) ____________ company in this City. Trang 72

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 6. I can’t put the book into the box. It’s (big) ____________ the box. 7. It was (boring) ____________ speech we’ve ever heard. 8. Oops! This book is even (boring) ____________ my grandma’s 9. At least, Mark can paint the house. He is (helpful) _____________ Peter. 10. That’s (helpful) ____________ idea so far. 11. This is (far) ____________ place I can take you to! 12. The way from my house to school is (far)____________ the way from your house. 13. It was (sad) ____________ day of her life. 14. This story is (sad) ____________ all the stories I’ve read. 15. This is (early) ____________ time she’s ever got up. 16. Wait till 8:00 !He has never come (early) ____________ . 17. Going on a trip is (interesting) ____________ staying at home. 18. This is (interesting) ____________ book that I’ve ever read. V. Put the verbs in blankets into Present Progressive tense. 1. Why you (look) ____________ at me like that? Have I said something wrong? 2. It (rain) ____________ ? Yes, it (rain) very hard. You can’t go out yet. 3. I can’t hear what you (say) ____________ , the traffic (make) ____________ too much noise. 4. A: You (do) ____________ anything this evening? B:No, I’m not. A: Well, we (go) ____________ to the cinema. Would you like to go with us? 5. It’s a grey day today. The sun (not/shine) . VI. Put the verbs into the present continuous or the present simple. 1. Please do not make so much noise. I (study) ____________ 2. This machine (not/work) ____________ I have not worked with it for years. 3. Hurry! The bus (come) ____________ . I (not/want) ____________ to miss it. 4. George says he is 80 years old but I (not / believe) ____________ him. 5. I usually (enjoy) parties but I (not/enjoy) this one very much. 6. The moon (go) ____________ round the earth. 7. A: What your father (do) ____________ ? B: He is a teacher, but he (not/ work) ____________ at the moment. 8. A: You (do) ____________ anything tonight? B: Yes, I (go) ____________ to the station to meet Richard. He (stay) ____________ here for the weekend, remember? His train (get) ____________ in at 8. A: Oh, of course, I had forgotten about that. B: Maybe we’ll see you later. What you (do) ____________ tonight? A: Oh, I (go) ____________ to the cinema with Vicky and Rachel. The film (finish) ____________ quite early, so we (go) ____________ to the Pizza place afterwards. 9. A: You (do) ____________ anything tonight? B: Yes, I (go) ____________ to the station to meet Richard. He (stay) ____________ here for the weekend, remember? His train (get) ____________ in at 8. A: Oh, of course, I had forgotten about that. B: Maybe we’ll see you later. What you (do) ____________ tonight? A: Oh, I (go) to the cinema with Vicky and Rachel. The film (finish) ____________ quite early, so we (go) ____________ to the Pizza place afterwards. 10. I (not/work) ____________ this week. I am on holiday. VII. Complete the second sentence without changing the first one’s meaning. 1. This train is more convenient than all the others. This train .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. This living room isn’t as big as the kitchen. (bigger) That kitchen ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3. She’s not as fitted as you. You’re .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My shirt is cheaper than my skirt. (expensive) My skirt ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 73

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. This exercise is the easiest. No ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. We’ve never read a more romantic story before. (most) It’s the ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Nam’s better at mathematics than Linh. (worse) Linh .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. My room and your room are the same size. (as) My room ..................................................................................................................................................................................... VIII. Choose the suitable preposition to complete the following sentences. 1. Do you know the girl ____________ a curly hair? (on / with / of) 2. I can’t get to sleep ____________ Christmas Eve. I am so excited. (on/in/at) 3. I waited twenty minutes ____________ a bus yesterday. (for / by/ on) 4. My parents are Corning to stay with me ____________ 15 July. (on / at / in) 5. I’m looking ____________ a pair of black shoes. (for / at / up) 6. I haven’t eaten ____________ breakfast. (from / since /for) 7. You should ask your parents ____________ some advice. (off /for / with) 8. Shall we go for a picnic tomorrow? It depends ____________ the weather. (on / at/ in) 9. Your parents always proud ____________ your success. (at / of 7 ỉn) 10.1’m not very keen ____________ the ideal of going out. (at / in / on) --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence. 1. I ____________ to the office every day last week. a. drove b. drive c. have driven d. had driven 2. When does he come? - He’s been there ____________ . a. next week b. already c. yesterday d. tomorrow 3. The wallet was ____________ in my pocket. a. so big to put b. bigger can’t put c. too big to put d. too big for putting 4. I am not prepared to discuss ____________ the matter any further. a. about b. on c. for d. Ø 5. The President ____________ a speech about international situation on TV tonight. a. made b. makes c. has made d. is going to make 6. I ____________ Jack since I ____________ a student. a. know / am b. knew / was c. have known / was d. have known / am 7. I actually enjoy ____________ shoes. It’s relaxing! a. clean b. cleans c. to clean d. cleaning 8. That receptionist looked ____________ but he spoke ____________ . a. polite / rude b. politely / rudely c. polite / rudely d. politely / rude 9. The price on this packet is wrong. It says 65 pence but it ____________ 50. a. has to be b. ought to c. should be d. may be 10. I asked Peter ____________ . a. to lend me his pencil for a moment b. lend me his pencil for a moment c. lend to me his pencil in a moment d. to lend me his pencil in a moment * Choose the word whose main stress pattern is not the same as that of the others. 11. a. accessible b. definite c. neighborhood d. government 12. a. remote b. peaceful c. dirty d. modem II. Choose word or phrase that need correcting. 1. He is always getting angrily about something. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. Richer countries could do more to help poorest countries. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. I like everybody who works here, but you’re the nicer of all. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. Not only the bathroom was flooded, also the rest of the house. Trang 74

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 A B C D ....................................................................... HI. Supply the correct tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. The weather (become) ____________ colder in December. 2. A: He (cut) ____________ my hair too short. B: Don’t worry! It (grow) ____________ again very quickly. 3. I (not/go) ____________ out this evening. I (stay) ____________ at home. 4. The film (begin) ____________ at 7.30 or 8.00? 5. A: You (be) ____________ away? B: Yes, I (go) ____________ to the countryside last Sunday. IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. Many of these ____________ have lived here all their lives. (VILLAGE) 2. ____________ activities should be promoted widely in our country. (CULTURE) 3. My sister speaks English very ____________ . (GOOD) 4. He is the most ____________ guest. (ENTERTAINMENT) 5. I need a ____________ answer “yes” or “no”. (DEFINITELY) 6. People in the country are often more ____________ than people in the city. (FRIEND) 7. Nowadays many remote areas of Vietnam are getting ____________ . (ELECTRIC) 8. There’re many kinds of ____________ these days. (ENTERTAIN) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. My name is Pallapah and I live in Bangkok (1) ____________ Thailand. We (2) ____________ live in the country. My dad and his brothers were farmers. But due to money problems, my dad decided (3) ____________ to Bangkok, our Capital city. None of us really like (4) ____________ here because of all the traffic and (5) ____________ . And because of the high cost of living, we canh buy a house yet. (6)____________ we would all prefer to live on the farm, we can earn more money here in the city. So despite all the problems, we will probably stay here. 1. a. in b. on c. at d. of 2. a. use to b. used to c. got used to d. were used to 3. a. move b. to move c. moving d. to moving 4. a. live b. to live c. living d. b & c 5. a. pollution b. crowded c. noisy d. quietly 6. a. Because b. However c. Although d. So VI. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are TRUE or FALSE. Living in the country is something that people from the city often dream about. However, in reality, it has both advantages and disadvantages. There are certainly many advantages to living in the country. First, you can enjoy peace and quietness. Moreover, people tend to be friendlier. A further advantage is that there is less traffic, so it is safer for young children. However, there are certain disadvantages or drawbacks to life outside the city. First, because there are fewer people, you are likely to have few friends. In addition, entertainment is difficult to find, particularly in the evening. Furthermore, the fact that there are fewer shops and Services means that it is hard to find jobs. In short, it can be seen that the country is more suitable for some people than others. On the whole, it is often the best for those who are retired or who have young children. In contract, young people who have a career are better provided in the city. 1. Living in the country has no disadvantage. ................................................. 2. It’s hard to find entertainment in the country. ................................................. 3. Having few friends is one of certain drawbacks to life outside the city. ................................................. 4. The country is only suitable for retired people. ................................................. VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning. 1. Sang isn’t as good at geography as Nam. Nam is ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I don’t play football as well as Maradona does. Maradona plays ...................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 75

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 3. No other city in Vietnam is so large as HCM City. HCM city...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My brother can’t cook as well as my sister does. My sister cooks ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5. It’s not as cheap as it was. It’s more ..................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fill in the blank. 1. ____________ the piano but also the violins. a. Not only she plays b. She plays not only c. Neither she plays d. She plays either 2. Italy ____________ against France in tomorrow’s final. a. has played b. played c. is playing d. play 3. People used to believe that the world was flat. a. think b. say c. claim d. hear 4. ____________ is a longtime when there is not enough rain. a. Storm b. Drought c. Typhoon d. Flood 5. Strawberries are ____________ at the moment. a. a lot of b. plentiful c. much d. many 6. I’m sorry, but I can’t come for dinner because I ____________ to York tonight. a. has driven b. drives c. drove d. am driving 7. That child is getting ____________ every day. a. big b. bigger c. biggest d. biger 8. It’s becoming ____________ to go out alone at night. a. danger b. dangerous c. dangerously d. dangerousness 9. The number of cars on the road ____________ . a increase b. is increasing c. are going to increase d. are increasing 10. The giraffe is ____________ the man. a. taller than b. tall than c. tallest than d. the tallest than * Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from that of the other. 11. a. away b. facility c. migrant d. nature 12. a. urban b. pollution c. ruler d. supermarket II. Choose word or phrase that need correcting. 1. All the car parks were full, so we had to look at somewhere to park. A B C D .................................................... 2. They often look after other work when they need more money for their family. A B C D .................................................... 3. People are becoming increasingly anger about the delay. A B C D .................................................... 4. The situation is already very badly and it is getting worse. A B C D .................................................... III. Supply the correct tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. They (just /phone) ____________ to say that they (not/come) ____________ back till Friday night. 2. We are now living at 72nd Street where we (live) ____________ for two years. 3. They (live) ____________ in Washington from 1950 to 1955. 4. The river Nile (flow) ____________ into the Mediterranean 5. It (ever / snow) ____________ in India? 6. A: Can you drive? B: No, but I (learn) ____________ . My father (teach) ____________ me. IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. Ho Chi Minh city is a(n) ____________ city. (OVERCROWD) 2. The ____________ here are increasing more and more. (MIGRATE) 3. I’m visiting my ____________ this weekend. (RELATION) 4. Farmers are always faced with _________brought about by typhoons, floods or droughts. (DESTROY) Trang 76

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 5. The remote desert area is ____________ only by helicopter. (ACCESS) 6. Air ____________ is a big problem in big cities. (POLLUTE) 7. Increased pollution is another ____________ result. (PLEASE) 8. He refused to tell exactly how he made his ____________ . (LIVE) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Peter’s uncle lived in the country. Once Peter (1) ____________ to stay with him for a few weeks. Wherever they went for a walk or for a drive in the car and they passed someone, his uncle waved. Peter was very (2) ____________ , and said, “Uncle Sam, you know everyone here. Where did you meet them all?” “I don’t know all these people,” said his uncle. “Then why do you wave (3) ____________ them?” asked Peter. “Well, Peter,” answered his uncle, “When I wave to someone and he knows me, he is (4) ____________ . He continues his journey with a happier heart. But when I wave to someone and he doesn’t know me, he is surprised and says to (5)____________ , “Who is that man? Why did he wave to me?”. So he has something to think about during the rest of the journey, and that makes his journey seem shorter. So I (6) ____________ everyone happy. 1. a. go b. goes c. went d. gone 2. a. boring b. bored c. surprising d. surprised 3. a. for b. to c. at d. from 4. a. please b. pleasant c. pleasure d. pleased 5. a. himself b. him c. he d. his 6. a. do b. give c. make d. bring VI. Read the passage carefully and decide the statements are TRUE or FALSE. The ancient town of Hoi An lies on the river Thu Bon, more than 30 kilometers to the South of Da Nang. Occupied by early westem traders, Hoi An was one of the major old- time commercial ports of South Asia in the 16th century. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled-roof houses and narrow streets. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham cavitation. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the river Thu Bon, Cua Dai beach, etc. In recent years, Hoi An has be come a very popular tourist destination in Viet Nam. Importantly, the committee of the world. Heritages of UNESCO officially certified Hoi An as a world heritage site in 1999. 1. Hoi An is the ancient town in Quang Nam. .................................................... 2. It is famous for high building. .................................................... 3. Tourists can visit old temples, pagodas and tiled-roof house in Hoi An. .................................................... 4. Hoi An was recognized as a world Heritage site in 1999. .................................................... VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning. 1. Have you got a cheaper schoolbag than this? Is this the ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. No one in her class is younger than her. She is the .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Lance Armstrong is the best cyclist in the world. No one in the world ............................................................................................................................................................... 4. My brother is taller than any other student in his class. My brother is the ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5. This story is more interesting than any other story that we have ever read. This is the .................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the most suitable word or phrase to fill in the blank. 1. We're looking forward to ____________ you earlier. a. see b. seeing c. saw 2. I ____________ Cuba in 1990. a. visit b. visited c. have visited 3. It is ____________ to find an expensive hotel in this town. a. difficult b. difficultly c. difficulty

d. by seeing d. was visiting d. differ Trang 77

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 4. The question sounds very ____________ . a. easy b. easily c. ease d. at ease 5. I put my hat on ____________ protect my face from the sunlight. a. for b. in order c. in order to d. to 6. We have learned English ____________ 2000. a. since b. for c. in d. from 7. Lan is ____________ than her sister. a. as beautiful b. beautifuler c. more beautiful d. the most beautiful 8. We must be there ____________ 7.30 and 9.30 a. at b. after c. before d. between 9. I prefer lemon juice ____________ orange juice. a. rather b. to c. more d. than 10. I’d love to go to the theatre to night, Em too busy. a. but b. and c. because d. if II. Choose word or phrase that need correcting. 1. The government tried providing facilities for these migrants. A B C D ...................................... 2. She thinks Dan is enjoying living away from home when he goes to University. A B C D ...................................... III. Supply the correct tense of the verbs in the parentheses. 1. Excuse me! I (look) ____________ for a bookstore. Is there one near? 2. He (learn) ____________ English since he was ten. 3. You (make) ____________ a lot of noise. Can you speak a bit quietly? 4. Look! It (snow) ____________ . 5. My friend (not do) ____________ his homework yet. 6. It is easy (do) ____________ that exercise. 7. He often (buy) ____________ books at this shop. 8. Listen to those people. What language they (speak) ____________ ? IV. Supply the correct forms of the words in brackets. 1. She likes a ____________ evening in the countryside. (PEACE) 2. They decided to close down the factory ____________ . (PERMANENT) 3. He is the ____________ football player in this match. (GOOD) 4. Shut up! I don’t ____________ you anymore. (BELIEF) 5. Hotel rooms here are ____________ and cheap. (PLENTY) 6. Stop, Nam! It's ____________ to be near the stove. (DANGE) 7. Please confirm your ____________ date and time if you want to come with us. (ARRIVE) 8. My elder brother studies hard this year in order to pass the _______exam to the university. (ENTER) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Twenty years ago only large companies (1) ____________ computers. They were large (2) which filled rooms and they always had big tapes which went round and round. (3) ____________ the 1980s one in every town families (4) ____________ Britain had a micro-computer- most schools also had several. (5) ____________ new machines were much cheaper and much smaller (6) ____________ the older ones. People used them (7) ____________ pleasure as well as business. A recent survey showed that over 40% of home computer owners used them mainly for (8) ____________ . 1. a. have b. had c. has d. having 2. a. machines b. matches c. metal d. factories 3. a. on b. at c. in d. of 4. a. in b. at c. on d. over 5. a. They b. This c. That d. These 6. a. that b. over c. than d. as 7. a. to b. for c. with d. of 8. a. games b. lines c. plays d. changes VI. Read the passage carefully, then check True (T) or False (F). In a discussion at Kenton Primary School parents were warned against the bad influence TV might Trang 78

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ 1 have on their children. Mr. Parker, a teacher at Kenton Primary, pointed out that this was bad influence on the children. One mother protested. She said that it was a mistake to blame the “ox” for everything. Real people had more influence on children than any characters they might see on TV. Mr. Parker agreed but added that children became more aggressive when watching TV. Parents should find out about the shows their children watch and perhaps offer suggestion. When a worried mother asked how many hours of TV, she suggested for 10 -year - old children, Mr. Parker said “the fewer the better”. 1. TV had good influence on children. ...................................... 2. Children might be affected by TV. ...................................... 3. Real people influence a child, not TV. ...................................... 4. For 10 - year - old children, it is better to spend as little time watching TV as possible. ..................... VII. Rewrite the sentences without changing the meaning. 1. You’re the most beautiful girl I have ever met. I have never .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. This is the best motorbike I have ever used. I have never .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3. She failed in the exam because of her laziness. Because ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I had a dog once, but I don’t have anymore. I used ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The front yard is too small for children to play soccer in. The front yard ......................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 79

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

MỤC LỤC UNIT 1: A VISIT FROM PEN PAL UNIT 2: CLOTHING UNIT 3: A TRIP TO THE COUNTRYSIDE UNIT 4: LEARNING A FOREIGN LANGUAGE UNIT 5: THE MEDIA

Trang 2 Trang 13 Trang 24 Trang 35 Trang 47

Trang 1

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 1: A VISIT FROM PEN PAL I. GETTING STARTED 1. Temple of Literature (n): Văn Miếu 3. Đồng Xuân market (n): chợ Đồng Xuân 2. Revolutionary Museum (n): Viện bảo tàng Cách Mạng B. LISTEN AND READ 4. pen pal (n) : bạn qua thư 11. mosque (n) : thánh đường Hồi Giáo 5. correspond (v) : trao đổi thư từ 12. to pray (v) : cầu nguyện, cầu khẩn -» correspondence (n): việc trao đổi thư từ -» prayer (n): lễ cầu kinh, kinh cầu nguyện -» correspondent (n): người trao đổi thư 13. peace (n) : hòa bình tín, phóng viên -» peaceful (adj): hòa bình 6. impress (v) : gây ấn tượng 14. atmosphere (n) : bầu không khí -» impressive (adj) : để lại ấn tượng -» atmospheric (adj): thuộc không khí -» impression (n) : ấn tượng, cảm giác 15. abroad (adv) : nước ngoài 7. modem (adj) : hiện đại 16. depend (v) : phụ thuộc vào -» to modernize (v) : hiện đại hóa -» dependence (n): sự phụ thuộc -» modernization (n): sự hiện đại hóa ≠ independence (n): sự độc lập 8. beauty (n) : cảnh đẹp -» dependent (adj): phụ thuộc -» beautiful (adj) : đẹp # independent (adj): độc lập -» beautifully (adv) : rất đẹp -» dependently (adv) -» beautify (v) : làm đẹp ≠ independently (adv) -» beautification (n): việc làm đẹp 17. in touch with sb: liên lạc với ai 9. friendly (adj) : thân thiện ≠ out of touch with sb: mất liên lạc -» friendliness (n) : sự thân thiện -» to keep in touch with sb (v): giữ liên -» friendship (n) : tình bạn, hữu nghị lạc với ai 10. mausoleum (n) : lăng tẩm, lăng mộ III. READ 18. ASEAN (abbr) : Association of South -» Islamic (adj) : thuộc về đạo Hồi East Asian Nations: Hiệp hội các nước 28. religion (n) : tôn giáo Đông Nam Á -» religious (adj) : thuộc về tôn giáo 19. divide (v) : chia ra 29. Buddhism (n) : đạo Phật -» division (n) : sự phân chia, phép chia -» Buddhist (adj) : thuộc về đạo Phật 20. region (n) : khu vực -» Buddhist (n) : phật tử -» regional (adj) : thuộc địa phương 30. Hinduism (n) : đạo Hin-đu 21. separate (v) : ngăn cách, tách ra 31. instruct (v) : hướng dẫn -» separate (adj) : riêng biệt, khác nhau -» instruction (n) : sự hướng dẫn -» separation (n) : sự ngăn cách, sự tách ra -» instructor (n) : người hướng dẫn 22. comprise (v) : bao gom, tạo thành 32. primary (adj) : chính, quan trọng 23. tropical (adj) : thuộc vùng nhiệt đới 33. option (n) : sự chọn lựa 24. climate (n) : khí hậu, thời tiết -» optional (adj) 25. currency (n) : tiền tệ 34. compulsory (adj) : bắt buộc, cưỡng -» unit of currency (n): đơn vị tiền tệ bách 26. official (adj) : chính, chủ yếu -» to compel (v): bắt buộc, cưỡng bách 27. Islam (n): đạo Hồi -» compulsion (n) : sự cưỡng bách SOME COMMON PREPOSITIONS 1. include = comprise = be comprised of = 8. impolite of sb : bất lịch sự với ai consist of = be composed of = be made up 9. impressed by : gây ấn tượng bời of: bao gồm 10. impression on : có ấn tượng về 2. correspond with : trao đôi thư tín với 11. In addition to : thêm vào đó 3. compulsory for : bắt buộc đối với 12. kind of sb : ai đó tốt bụng 4. depend on / upon : lệ thuộc vào -» kind to sb : tốt bụng với ai ≠ independent of : không lệ thuộc 13. pray for : cầu nguyện cho 5. divide into : chia thành 14. rich in : giàu có về Trang 2

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 6. famous for : nổi tiếng về 15. separate from : chia tách khỏi 7. for fun : cho vui IV. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. THE PAST SIMPLE (Thì quá khứ đơn) a. Form: Positive (+) S + was / were + A / N. S + V2- ed + O. Negative (-) S + was / were + not + A / N. S + did not / didn’t + V1 + O. Was / Were + S + A / N ? Did + S + V1 + O? Interrogative (?) Wh- + was / were + S +....? Wh- + did + S + V1 +...? b. Usage: - Thì quá khứ đơn được dùng để diễn tả một hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ khi đề cập đến thời điểm hành dộng đó xảy ra. - Các trạng từ chỉ thời gian thường dùng: ago, yesterday, the other day, last year, last month, last week, at that time,... Ex: (1) They bought this house two years ago. (2) The tree fell on the roof of the house last night. (3) He was at home yesterday. - Thì quá khứ đơn được dùng để diễn tả một thói quen trong quá khứ với các trạng từ như every, last, often Ex: (1) My brother often went fishing when he was young. (2) Did you cook dinner every Saturday? - Thì quá khứ đơn được dùng để diễn tả một hành động kéo dài một quãng thời gian trong quá khứ và chấm dứt hẳn trong quá khứ. Ex: (1) Bob lived in London for two years. Right now he is living in Philadelphia. (2) My father served in the army from 1965 to 1975. - Thì quá khứ đơn được dùng để diễn tả một chuỗi hành động trong quá khứ, hành động này xảy ra sau hành động kia. Ex: He stopped his car, got out of it, shut all the windows, locked the door, then entered the house. 2. CLAUSES AFTER WISH ❖ Future wish: S + wish(es) + S + would(not) + V1 Ex: (1) They will not visit their grandmother next week. -» They wish they would visit their grandmother next week. (2) Paul will make noise tonight because of his party. -» I wish Paul wouldn’t make noise tonight. ❖ Present wish: S + wish(es) + S + were (not) +… S + wish(es) + S + V-ed /V2 / didn’t V1 + O S + wish(es) + S + could (not) + V1 +O Ex: (1) My life isn’t interesting now. -» I wish my life were more interesting. (2) I cannot go to the party. -» I wish I could go to the party (3) She doesn’t have enough money to buy that house. -» She wishes she had enough money to buy that house. ❖ Past wish: S + wish(es) + S + had(not) + V3/ed Ex: (1) He didn’t have time to attend the meeting yesterday. -» He wishes he had had time to attend the meeting yesterday. (2) What a pity! It rained so heavily last night. -» I wish it hadn’t rained so heavily last night.

EXERCISE

Trang 3

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 I. Use the simple past tense: 1. I (wake) ____________up at five minutes past seven this morning. 2. While her husband was in the army, Joyce (write) ____________ to him twice a week. 3. She (study) ____________ English for two years, but she doesn’t study it now. 4. She (not know) ____________much about Marxism-Leninism at that time. 5. When I was a boy, I often (not go) ____________fishing with my uncle Jim. 6. They (go) ____________home after they had finished their work. 7. He (go) ____________ abroad last week? 8. My elder brother (join) ____________ the army when he was seventeen. 9. When I last saw him, he (not be) ____________ in good health. 10. When I was a boy, every holiday (seem) ____________ideal. 11. My brother (serve) ____________ in the army from 1980 to 1983. 12. Men have traveled since they first (appear) ____________on the earth. 13. She was fond of him, but 1 (not believe) ____________ that she (love) ____________ him. 14. Why the old lady (fall) ____________as she was getting into the taxi? 15. Jenny (study) ____________French for a few months last year. II. Fill each gap in the sentences with a suitable word from the box. food currency religion education language climate beauty capital atmosphere vacation 1. Australia’s ____________city is Canberra. 2. ____________is the money that is used in a particular country at a particular time. 3. This is an area of outstanding natural ____________. 4. The ____________in the room was so stuffy that I could hardly breathe. 5. When we retire, we’re going to move to a warmer ____________. 6. ____________is the belief in and worship of a god or gods. 7. Have you decided where you’re going for your ____________ this year? 8. She does research into how children acquire ____________. 9. As a child, he received most of his____________ at home. 10. There was lots of ____________and drink at the party. III. Put the verb into the correct form. 1. I wish I (know) ____________how to dance. 2. Jane wishes she (go) ____________ to bed earlier last night. 3. I wish my friend (lend) ____________me his car for my date tomorrow night. 4. Jimmy wishes he (be) ____________old enough to drive a car. 5. I wish we (spend) ____________ our last vacation in Hawaii. 6. I wish I (lie) ____________on the beach now. 7. It would be nice to stay here longer. I wish we (not have) ____________to leave now. 8. I’m fed up with this rain. I wish it (stop) ____________. 9. Do you wish you (live) ____________ near the sea? 10. Sarah wishes she (can speak) ____________every language in the world. 11. Khalid wishes he (visit) ____________Big Ben when he was in London. 12. We all wish our team (play) ____________ better next time. 13. I wish I (can go) ____________to the moon for a vacation. 14. I wish you (not complain) ____________ all the time. 15. I often wish I (be) ____________really wealthy. IV. Rewrite sentences, using “I wish…”: Part A: 1. It won’t be fine tomorrow. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2. He will leave for Ha Noi next Sunday. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. She won't take this course. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. Maryam will tell me the truth about the murder tomorrow. Trang 4

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5. Jane wan't stop smoking. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ Part B: 6. My friend cannot stay with me longer. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. I don’t have time to take my friend to many beauty spots in my city. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8. My motorcycle is very old. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 9. My son plays video games during the day. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10. He speaks English badly. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ Part C: 11. He didn’t study hard last school year. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 12. He was late for class last school year. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 13. I was disappointed that the thief stole the picture. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 14.1 was Sony she didn’t come to the party. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15. I failed my exam last year. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................ V. For each situation, write a sentence with “wish”: 1. Everybody in our village is poor. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. It will be very cold tomorrow. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Henry regretted not inviting Jane to his birthday party. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I‘m sorry I didn’t come to the meeting yesterday. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I don’t like Peter at all but he lives next to my house. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. My sister always complains about my voice. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. My sister won’t lend me her car. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. I regret speaking to him so rudely yesterday. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. John would like to be a pilot when he grows up. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. It is a pity Tom missed Mr. Baker’s class yesterday afternoon. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11. There is some red pepper in my food. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. She doesn’t send me her recent photos. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13. I didn’t have time to see all the things we wanted to see. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. Mary can’t sing well and she is not happy about that. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 5

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 15. It is a pity that he will not attend the conference. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... VI. For each situation, write a sentence with “wish”: 1. I can't buy a car because I don’t have enough money. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I want to buy a bike but I don't have enough money. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I regret that you didn’t give me a chance to tell you the truth. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Mary is afraid she won’t be able to attend your wedding next week. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The weather in Hue is too cold and damp for us in winter. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Nam was sorry that he didn’t accept the job. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. I won’t take the trip with you next Sunday. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. The children like candy but their parents don’t allow them to eat sweet food. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. It’s pity that you were not here last week. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. I feel sick because I ate too much candy. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11. He cannot compose a song although he really wants to do it. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. The exercises are long. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13. The book isn’t interesting. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. I didn’t learn to play a musical instrument when I was young. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15. The teacher will give us a test tomorrow. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... VH. For each situation, write a sentence with “wish". 1. She loves her father but he doesn’t love her. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I’m sorry I didn’t book a seat. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. The weather is very hot today. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I’m sorry he isn’t strong enough. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We live in a very old house. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. He didn't work hard during the term. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. I’d like it to stop raining. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. My brother cannot go to the car show at the city show ground. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. She doesn’t know the way to the mosque in Hang Bun street. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. She is not able to pass her English test. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 6

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 11. I’d like Tom to drive more slowly. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. My students spoke English unnaturally. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13. I’d like you to wait for me. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. I called him a liar. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15. She didn’t say goodbye to him at the airport. .................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Choose the most suitable words or phrases to complete the sentences. 1. They have been pen pals and ____________at least once every month. a. speak b. stay c. take d. correspond 2. Last week. I ____________my children to the biggest zoo in the town. a. got b. brought c. fetch d. took 3. Can everyone listen carefully to my ____________, please? a. instructing b. instructive c. instruct d. instructions 4. Mathematics and Literature are ____________for children in our country. a. option b. religious c. adding d. compulsory 5. Can you tell me how many chapters this book ____________? a. consist of b. consists c. comprises of d. includes 6. My mother wishes she ____________beautiful and young forever. a. can b. can be c. could d. could be 7. The children were ____________their presents on Christmas day. a. pleased with b. pleased about c. happy about d. happy on 8. Every Sunday, they go to the church and pray very ____________ indeed. a. harder b. hard c. hardly d. a lot 9. All the students are looking forward____________ their summer vacation in the countryside. a. to spend b. spend c. to spending d. spending 10. I can’t speak English fluently. I wish I speak it fluently. a. can b. could c. couldn’t d. can’t * Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. mosque b. optional c. notice d. tropical 2. a. divide b. impress c. official d. comprise II. Choose the word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. I strong believe that friends play a very important role in our life. A B C D ...................................... 2. The landlady says that the house comprises of a bedroom, a bathroom and a kitchen. A B C D ...................................... III. Supply the correct tenses or forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. My parents (arrive) ____________ home while I (write) ____________a letter yesterday. 2. A: Jack didn’t come to the party. B: What a pity! I’m sure he (enjoy) ____________ it. 3. Mrs. Watson (often / go) ____________for a walk every morning before her death. 4. They (finish / build) ____________ this house before the end of October last year. 5. She (break) ____________ her leg yesterday, so she cannot now play tennis. 6. I’d like (lie) ____________on the beach today. It’s too hot to do anything else. 7. Lan suggested (go) ____________to the cinema. IV. Use the correct forms of the word given in each sentence. 1. There are some very ____________buildings in the town. (IMPRESS) 2. Thank you for a most ____________evening. (ENJOY) 3. Drug ____________led to her early death. (DEPEND) Trang 7

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 4. She has some very ____________things to say on the subject. (INTEREST) 5. Her ____________with Jim lasted many years. (CORRESPOND) 6. No one like her because of her ____________. (FRIENDLY) 7. The flowers vase helps ____________the living room. (BEAUTY) 8. She’s always does things ____________. Everything goes wrong. (CARE) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. Dear Juan, Hello! I’m your new pen friend. My name is Helen. That’s my first name. My (1) ____________ is Jones. I’m from Cardiff, in Wales. I’m fifteen years (2) ____________. The name of my school is the Central Cardiff Comprehensive. I am in Year 8. There (3) ____________ twenty-seven students (4) ____________my class. My (5) ____________singer is Justin Timberlake. Who is your favorite? Best wishes, Helen P.S: This is a (6) ____________ of me! 1. a. second name b. nickname c. middle name d. family name 2. a. age b. ages c. old d. ago 3. a. is b. are c. was d. were 4. a. in b. at c. on d. of 5. a. favorite b. interesting c. pleased d. best 6. a. photo b. photograph c. book d. a &b VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. India is a country in Southern Asia. It is shaped like a triangle. It stretches from the bottom of Asia into the Indian Ocean. India is sometimes called a subcontinent. Is this because India is big? Not really. Six countries, including Russia, Canada, and the United States, arc bigger. India is a subcontinent because it is cut off from the rest of Asia. Mountains, jungles, and the Indian Ocean make India a separated world. India’s neighbors, Pakistan and Bangladesh, also form part of the Indian subcontinent. These lands were once a part of India. 1. India is a triangle - shaped country in Southern Asia. ...................................... 2. This subcontinent stretches from the bottom of Asia into the Indian Ocean. ...................................... 3. Mountains, jungles, and the Pacific Ocean make India a separated world. ...................................... 4. Pakistan and Bangladesh used to be a part of India. ...................................... VII. Rewrite the following sentence so that it has the similar meaning to the first. 1. He learned to drive when he was 18. He has ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Why don’t we go away more often? I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It’s a pity she couldn’t attend the meeting yesterday. She wishes ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I would like it to stop raining. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I spent two hours doing this exercise. It took ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I Choose the most suitable words or phrases to complete the sentences. 1. The Sword Lake is set in beautiful ____________. a. situation b. views c. surroundings d. environment 2. They haven’t seen each other, but they write to each other frequently. They are____________. a. pen pals b. writers c. co-writer d. paper pals 3. Churches, temples and pagodas are places of____________. a. gossip b. warship c. worship d. friendship 4. Their friendliness makes a deep ____________on tourists. Trang 8

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 a. correspondence b. beauty c. recreation d. impression 5. Children in this poor village are allowed to go to school without ____________. a. education b. instruction c. tuition fee d. impression 6. In Singapore, education is free and compulsory ____________ children from 6 to 16. a. to b. at c. between d. for 7. Now I think she is____________ to living in the city. a. happy b. anxious c. accustomed d. interested 8. Is military service compulsory in your country? a. may be chosen or not b. must be done c. not requiring a payment d. give support 9. We cannot understand the ____________given in English on the label of the bottle. a. instructions b. language c. difference d. atmosphere 10. ____________English is their official language, most of them can speak Chinese. a. Although b. So c. Despite d. If * Choose the word whose main stress syllable is placed differently from the others. 1. a. region b. climate c. monster d. comprise 2. a. tropical b. religion c. primary d. Buddhism II. Choose the word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. Are you sure that this amount of money include service as well? A B C D ...................................... 2. Tet is considered the biggest festival in Vietnam because of its tradition meaning. A B C D ...................................... III. Supply the correct tenses or forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. The train (not arrive) ____________ on time yesterday. It (be) ____________ ten minutes late. 2. They (arrive) ____________ at the meeting last Thursday on time? 3. Before help (reach) ____________us, a child had died of fever. 4. Where you (go) ____________for your holiday last year? 5. While he was getting off the train, he (fall) ____________ and (cut) ____________ his face. 6. It is over 20 years since he last (come) ____________ back to his hometown. IV. Use the correct forms of the word given in each sentence. 1. We can find a lot of ____________zones in this area. (INDUSTRY) 2. The man performed the song ____________. (IMPRESS) 3. The country has more than ten ____________ newspapers. (NATION) 4. Children are allowed much more ____________ these days. (FREE) 5. Wearing Seat belts in cars is ____________by law. (COMPEL) 6. The match is really ____________. Most people love it. (ENJOY) 7. HSBC is one of the ____________banks in Vietnam. (INTERNATION) 8. You must check if these Products are ____________. (DIFFER) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage. More than one billion people (1) ____________in India, and only China has more people. The people of India speak (2) ____________than 100 different languages. Calcutta is India’s largest city. Bombay is the country’s most (3) ____________urban area. They are among the world’s largest cities, too. New Delhi is the Capital of India. More than sixteen (4) ____________people live in or near the port City of Bombay. Bombay is a center of trade and the center of India’s movie business. India (5) ____________ about 800 movies a year, more than any other country in the world. In spite of its large cities, India is primarily a country of villages. Most of India’s people (6) ____________their living by farming. 1. a. live b. immigrate c. stay d. survive 2. a. many b. much c. more d. most 3. a population b. popularity c. popularization d. populated 4. a. million b. millions c. billion d. billions 5. a makes b. make c. does d. do 6. a. do b. find c. take d. earn Trang 9

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Some friends come into our lives for just a short time. Others come and stay forever. Think about your closest friends. How Jong have you known each other? Sonic people say that their spouse or family member is their best friends. Others say they have known their closest friends for many years. And some great friends haven't known each other all that long, but knew right away that there was a connection, or bond, between them. What tums a stranger or acquaintance into a friend? Do you know right away if you are going to like someone? Some people think that any stranger can become a friend if they spend enough ti me together. That may be true for satiate people. But one thing most of us agree on is that true friendships seem to happen when people ha ve something in common. Perhaps we see a part of ourselves ín our friends. May be seeing the good in them helps us to see the good in us as well. 1. Your sister or brother cannot be your best friend. ...................................... 2. Many friends feel a connection when they first meet. ...................................... 3. A stranger is the same as a friend. ...................................... 4. Most friends have similar likes and dislikes. ...................................... VII. Rewrite the following sentence so that it has the similar meaning to the first. 1. What is your date of birth? When ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2. My hometown doesn’t have any lakes. I here ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. He Learned Spanish when he was six. He has........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Lan took Maryam to Ben Thanh market yesterday. Maryam....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I would like every country to stop killing whales. I wish............................................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the most suitable words or phrases to complete the sentences. 1. Islamic people usually go to the ____________to pray. a. pagoda b. mosque c. temple d. church 2. People aged 65 over now ____________nearly 20% of the population. a. comprise b. contain c. consist d. combine 3. “How long have you been with the company?” - I____________ there for three years." a. will work b. was working c. work d. have worked 4. I wish Beth ____________trying to be so nice. a. would stop b. will stop c. stops d. stop 5.. He was so____________ by Cindy’s singing that he asked her to sing on the radio. a. shocked b. impressed c. admiring d. surprised 6. There are a lot of different ____________groups living in London. a. ethnic b. ethnical c. ethic d. ethnicity 7. What is the ____________ cause of the illness? a. primary b. essential c. possibly d. most 8. The new country hopes to establish ____________ relations with all its neighbors. a. friend b. friendly c. friendliness d. friendship 9. The book is ____________into ten chapters. a. divided b. formed c. changed d. shared 10. Would you mind ____________the phone number? I could not hear. a. repeat b. to repeat c. repeating d. being repeated * Choose the word whose main stress syllable is placed differently from the others. 11. a. worship b. divide c. enjoy d. abroad 12. a. prayer b. Hinduism c. beauty d. instruction II. Choose the word or phrase that needs correcting. Trang 10

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 1. Tom wishes his neighbors don’t make so much noise. A B C D ...................................... 2. Last Monday Henry had saw a wallet on a lonely street in Montreal. A B C D ...................................... III. Supply the correct tenses or forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. I wish that you (not make) ____________noise while Pam is studying. 2. The girl wishes she (can make) ____________ her room more beautiful. 3. What have you learnt since you (come) ____________ here? 4. How long (you / work) ____________ in this company up to now? 5. He doesn't know much about his parents because he (separate) ____________ from them since he (be) ____________ a child. 6. The window needs (paint) ____________. You need (paint) ____________them. IV. Use the correct forms of the word given ỉn each sentence. 1. ____________landscapes in Vietnam have attracted lots of foreign tourists. (BEAUTY) 2. The ____________we made at school will last forever. (FRIEND) 3. Though the country life is more ____________ young people still prefer city life. (PEACE) 4. Thanks for your ____________to your party. I’ll come. (INVITE) 5. Lan took Maryam to____________ places in Hanoi. (FAME) 6. Their holiday was spent on the mountain. (ENJOY) 7. We can find lots of ____________and drink at the supermarket. (FEED) 8. Every summer thousands of people flock to the ____________. (COUNTRY) V. Choose the correct answers to complete the passage: When Malaysia become (1) ____________, Malay language was chosen as the National Language. The reason (2) ____________ this choice is that it is the language of the Malays who are the natives of Malaysia, The Government of Malaysia takes pride in promoting this language among all the races in Malaysia. The Chinese, the Indians and other non-Malay communities have accepted the decision of the government. It is the (3) ____________ language of the country. In Malaysia, the nation language is (4) ____________ the Bahasa Malaysia. It is the language of (5)____________in schools. Since the introduction of Malay in schools, it has become the most (6) ____________ used language in Malaysia. 1. a. independence b. independ c. dependent d. independent 2. a. for b. in c. since d. at 3. a. office b. official c. officer d. officially 4. a. call b. calling c. to call d. called 5. a. instruction b. instruct c. instructive d. instructively 6. a. wide b. widen c. widely d. widening VI. Read the passage carefully. Then decide whether each of the following statements is TRUE or FALSE. Every nation and every country has its own customs and traditions. In Britain, traditions play a more important part in the life of the people than in other countries. Englishmen arc proud of their traditions and carefully keep them up. It has been the law for about 300 years that all theatres are closed on Sundays. No letters are delivered; only a few Sunday papers are published. To this day an English family prefers a house with a garden to a flat in a modern house with Central heating. English people like gardens. Sometimes the garden in front of the house is a little square covered with cement painted garden in imitation of grass and a box of flowers. Holidays are especially rich in old traditions and are different ìn Scotland, Ireland, Wales and England. Christmas is a great English national holiday, and in Scotland it is not kept, except by clerks in banks, all shops and factories are working. 1. There are different customs and traditions in the same country. ...................................... 2. Traditions in Britain are more important than those in other countries. ...................................... 3. In Great Britain, all shops and factories are working at Christmas. ...................................... 4. In Scotland, Christmas is a great national holiday. ...................................... VII. Rewrite the following sentence so that it has the similar meaning to the first. Trang 11

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 1. Maryam and Lan have been pen pals for over two years. Maryam and Lan have written .................................................................................................................................................... 2. I’d like Kevin to drive more slowly. I wish .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I am sorry I didn’t book the seat. I wish ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Mary hasn’t made any long trip for five years. The last ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The bad news made her cry. She was ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 12

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 2: CLOTHING I. SETTING STARTED 1. Kimono (n) 2. kilt (n)

: Ki mô nô 4. jeans (n) : váy ngắn truyền thống 5. scarf (n) Scotland 6. veil (n) : xa-ri của Ấn Độ

: quần jean : khăn quàng cổ : mạng che mặt

3. sari (n) II. LISTEN AND READ 7. clothing (n) : quần áo -» occasional (adj): thỉnh thoảng 8. music (n) : âm nhạc 19. convenient (adj): tiện lợi -» musician (n) : nhạc sĩ ≠ inconvenient -» musical (adj) : thuộc về âm nhạc -» convenience ≠ inconvenience (n) 9. poet (n) : nhà thơ 20. fashion (n) : thời trang -» poetry (n) : thơ ca -» fashionable (adj): hợp thời trang -» poem (n) : bài thơ 21. print (v) : in ấn 10. mention (v) : đề cập 22. inspiration (n) : cảm hứng 11. consist of (v): bao gồm -» inspire (v) : gây câm hứng 12. tunic (n) : áo dài và rộng 23. minority (n) : thiểu số 13. slit - slit - slit (v) : xẻ, cắt, rọc -» ethnic minority (n): dân tộc thiểu số -» slit (n): đường xẻ, khe hở 24. symbol (n) : biểu tượng 14. loose (adj) : rộng ≠ tight (adj): chật -» symbolize (v): tượng trưng 15. tradition (n) : truyền thống 25. cross (n) : chữ thập -» traditional (adj) : thuộc truyền thống 26. stripe (n) : sọc, viền -» traditionally (adv): theo truyền thống -» striped (adj) : có sọc 16. design (v) : thiết kế 27. pattern (n) : hoa văn, mẫu vẽ -» design (n) : kiểu dáng thiết kế 28. add (v) : thêm vào -» designer (n) : nhà thiết kế -» addition (n) : sự cộng thêm 17. material (n) : vải, nguyên liệu -» in addition to (exp): thêm vào đó 18. occasion (n) : dịp, cơ hội 29. unique (adj) : độc đáo III. SPEAK 30. T-shirt (n) : áo thun 35. plain (adj) : trơn (không hoa văn hay 31. skirt (n) : váy hình vẽ) 32. sleeve (n) : tay áo 36. plaid (n) : loại vải caro -» sleeved (adj) : cổ tay 37. baggy (adj) : rộng thùng thinh, thụng -» sleeveless (adj) : không tay 38. fade (v) : bạc màu, phai màu 33. sweater (n) : áo len -» faded (adj) : bi bạc màu 34. suit (n) : bộ com lê 39. pants (n) : quần dài IV. READ 40. be named after sb (v): được đặt theo 44. embroider (v) : thêu tên của ai -» embroidery (n): sự thêu thùa 41. sailor (n) : thủy thủ 45. label (n) : nhãn hiệu 42. wear out (v) : làm mòn, làm rách 46. go up (v) : tâng lên ≠ go down (v) 43. match (v) : hợp với, xứng với 47. worldwide (adj): khắp thế giới 48. economic (adj) : thuộc về kinh tế 49. grow (v) : lớn lên, phát triển -» economics (n) : kinh tế học -» growth (n) : sự phát triển -» economy (n) : nền kinh tế 50. generation (n) : thế hệ -» economical (adj) : tiết kiệm ≠ uneconomical (adj) SOME COMMON PREPOSITIONS 1. all over the world = over the world: 11. mention sth /sb to sb: đề cập việc gì với ai khắp thế giới 12. inspiration for: ngồn cảm hứng cho 2. at work : tại nơi làm việc 13. made of : làm bằng 3. attitude towards : thái độ đối với 14. named after : lấy tên 4. different from : khác với 15. on occasion : vào dịp 5. equal to : bằng với 16. out of fashion : lỗi thời 6. experiment on : thí nghiệm lên 17. prefer ...to... : thích ...hơn Trang 13

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 7. fond of : thích 18. solution to : giải pháp cho 8. go up : tăng lên 19. wear out : mòn 9. in many ways : bằng nhiều cách 10. introduce sb to sb : giới thiệu ai với ai V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. THE PASSIVE (Thể bị động) a. Passive transformation (Cách chuyển sang câu bị động) - Lấy tân ngữ của câu chủ động làm chủ từ của câu bị động - Lấy động từ chính trong câu chủ động chuyển thành quá khứ phân từ ở câu bị động - Chia động từ “to be” theo thì của câu chủ động và chia “to be” sao cho phù hợp với chủ từ của câu bị động. Active S Va o Passive

by agent

Vp (be + V3/ed )

b. Notes: - Các chủ ngữ I, you, he, she, it, we, they, one, people, someone, something, anything trong câu chủ động thường được bỏ, không dùng trong câu bị động. - Trạng từ chỉ thể cách thường đứng giữa “to be” và quá khứ phân từ trong câu bị động. - Trạng từ hoặc cụm trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn đứng trước “by + agent”. - Trạng từ hoặc cụm trạng từ chỉ thời gian đứng sau “by + agent”. c. Đổi passive trong các thì: Active voice 1. Simple present S + V (s,es) Ex: He learns English. 2. Present continuous S + am/ is/ are + V-ing Ex: He is learning English 3. Simple past S + V2/ed Ex: He learnt English 4. Past continuous S + was/ were + V-ing Ex: He was learning English 5. Simple future S + will + V Ex: He will learn English 6. Present perfect S + have/has + V3/ed Ex: He has learnt English 7. Modal verbs (can, may, could, would...) S + Modal verb + V Ex: He can learn English 8. “Be going to” S + am/ is/ are + going to + V Ex: He is going to learn English

Passive voice 1. Simple present S + am/is/are + V3/ed Ex: English is learnt. 2. Present continuous S + am/is/are + being + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 3. Simple past S + was/ were + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 4. Past continuous S + was/ were + being + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 5. Simple future S + will + be + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 6. Present perfect S + have/has + been + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 7. Modal verbs (can, may, could, would...) S + Modal verb + be + V3/ed Ex:………………………………………………………….. 8. “Be going to” s + am/ is/ are + going to + be + V3/ed Ex:…………………………………………………………..

EXERCISES I. Change these sentences into PASSIVE VOICE. Exercise 1: Trang 14

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 1. The police arrested a robber in the forest yesterday. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Her parents are going to take her to Da Lat next week. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. John is doing his homework in his room now. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. A lion is attacking a zebra in the jungle at the moment. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The police will tow away cars left here. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Luckily, the car didn't run over the dog on the street three days ago. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Lan is flying the kite on the paddy field now. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Huong spends a lot of money on advertising every year. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. The boy broke the window and took away some pictures in the art gallery last year. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. I told my friend, Jane not to come here again. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... Exercise 2: 1. Ha has to finish the exercises in this book before 9 pm. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The Principal may use this room this year. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. You must clean the wall before you paint it. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. People speak English in almost every comer of the world nowadays. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. No one can do anything unless someone gives us more information. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. It’s high time someone told her to stop behaving like a child. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. My mother sent us a lot of moon cakes. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. My teacher ga ve me an interesting book. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. You should pay your bill before you leave the hotel. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. You mustn’t touch this button while the experiment is in progress. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... Exercise 3 1. Why didn't Huong help Hoa at that time? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. How many games has the team played up to now? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Who looked after the children for you? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. When did they decorate your kitchen? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How do people pronounce this word? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Has your father repaired the car? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 15

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 7. Does Jack learn English here twice a week? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Is she making big cakes for the party? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Must we finish the test before ten? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. Will buses bring the children home? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... Exercise 4 1. People believe that 13 is an unlucky number. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They say that John is the brightest student in class. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. They think that he has died a natural death. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. They reported that the troops were corning. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. People believed that the earth stood still. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. He made her run away. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. His parents made him study hard for the exam. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. The comedy made the children laugh a lot. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Toshico had a mechanic repair her car. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. The president had his advisors arrange a press conference. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Change the following sentences from PASSIVE VOICE into ACTIVE VOICE. 1. The dog is slapped in the garden by the cat every day. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The buffalo was being attacked in the zoo by six flies at 5pm yesterday. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Love should be painted with colorful flowers. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. This machine mustn’t be used. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The test had been done by Ly before we came. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The room has to be tidied up before going out. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. That lovely cat was raised by Ms. Ann two years ago. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. All the arrangements have been made since last week. ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Is a poem going to be written by three poets? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. Will the children be brought home by buses? ................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets: Exercise 1 1. People often wear modem ___________ at work. (CLOTH) 2. ___________, the boys told their grandpa about their trip to the zoo. (INTEREST) Trang 16

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 3. They left the movie theater early as the film was so ___________. (INTEREST) 4. The ___________of employees have university degrees. (MAJOR) 5. Children of the ethnic ___________can now afford to go to school. (MINOR) 6. This band consists of twelve ___________. (MUSIC) 7. ___________, Ao dai is worn by men and women at wedding. (TRADITION) 8. Red ___________danger. (SYMBOL) 9. It’s not ___________to wear short skirts at the moment. (FASHION) 10. What are you going to do this ___________? (WEEK) Exercise 2 1. In the 1801 century, jeans cloth was ___________made from cloth. (COMPLETE) 2. These clothes are attractive but entirely ___________. (PRACTICE) 3. What type of clothing is for ___________survival at these situations? (NEED) 4. He needs all the support and ___________he can get. (ENCOLIRAGE) 5. Don’t you believe in ___________ between men and women? (EQUAL) 6. He always wears a ___________shirt. (STRIPE) 7. Many designers took from Vietnam’s ethnic minorities. (INSPIRE) 8. You’ve made your parents very___________. (PRIDE) 9. Some designers have the ___________Ao Dai by printing lines of poetry on it. (MODERN) 10. People crowded the streets on national day to watch ___________ parades. (COLOR) Exercise 3 1. Many teenagers are now dressed. (FASHION) 2. He is a leading ___________of our country. (DESIGN) 3. It’s too ___________ to call anyone at night. (CONVENIENCE) 4. Mai ___________Maryam to Hanoi last year. (INVITATION) 5. Do you ___________meet each other after leaving school? (OCCASION) 6. Do it by yourself. It’s not ___________to the one you did yesterday. (DIFFERENCE) 7. X and Y are the two ___________values in this exercise. (KNOW) 8. No one like her because of her ___________. (FRIENDLY) 9. The old people love ___________moment in the countryside. (PEACE) 10. She’s too young, so she has to___________ on her parents. (DEPENDENT) Exercise 4 1. The man performed the song ___________. (IMPRESS) 2. HSBC is one of the ___________banks in Vietnam. (NATION) 3. Lan took Maryam to ___________places in Hanoi. (FAME) 4. Islam is the ___________religion in Malaysia. (OFFICE) 5. We’ll try our best to make our school more ___________. (BEAUTY) 6. ___________of mobile products have always gone up these years. (SELL) 7. I enjoy the ___________atmosphere of the meeting. (FRIEND) 8. I hope our ___________ since childhood will last forever. (FRIEND) 9. The flowers vase helps ___________ the living room. (BEAUTY) 10. Most rooms in this building are ___________decorated. (BEAUTY) IV. Simple Past tense and Present Perfect tense Exercise 1: 1. My father started to give up smoking last year. My father has ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They began to learn French two years ago. They have ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. He started to learn how to play the piano in 2005. He has ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4. I last saw my grandma ten years ago. I haven’t .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I last read War and Peace in 2005. I haven’t .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The last time I visited Malaysia was two years ago. Trang 17

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 I haven’t .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. The last time Hoa met her old friends was when they left school. Hoa hasn’t ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. It’s two years since I saw her. I haven’t .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. It has been a long time since Lan left her school. Lan has ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. The last time she went out with him was 9 months ago. It is ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... Exercise 2 1. When did you start learning English? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. When did you first know Maryam? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. How long have you known him? How long ago ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. We haven’t corresponded for at least five months. The last time we .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. I haven’t seen her for a long time. I didn’t ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. He last wrote to me three months ago. It’s ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. He has lived in Ha Noi since he was 12. He started ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8. He hasn’t written to me for two months. It has been ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. When was the last time you met Maryam? How long ............................................................................................................................................................................. ? 10. I haven’t eaten this kind of food before. This is ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... V. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets: 1. The animals in the zoo (feed) ___________regularly by the zoo-keeper. 2. Tim felt happy when he (award) ___________the first prize of the contest. 3. Rice (grow) ___________in many tropical countries in Asia. 4. On our trip to Sa Pa last year. many interesting customs, delicious food, and delightful people (introduce) ___________to us. 5. My father put an advertisement in the newspaper to sell his old motorbike. Yesterday it (buy) ___________ by a college student. 6. Bananas from our countries (export) ___________ to many parts of the world and they are enjoyed by people who live in all climates. 7. The sun and the moon (worship) ___________ by early inhabitants of this region. 8. Their children often (visit) ___________their grandparents on the weekend. 9. The fashion designer (interview) ___________ by one of the local reporters about her new collection tomorrow. 10. Wearing uniform helps students (feel) ___________equal in many ways 11. I still can’t believe. My bicycle (steal) ___________last night. 12. Harry (not look) ___________ well since he (go) ___________on a diet. 13. She (often take) ___________to the theater by the Greens. 14. ___________your house (rebuild) ___________ next year? 15. Must this test (finish) ___________on time? 16. ___________English (learn) ___________all over the world? 17. My car (not repair) ___________ yet. 18. I (invite) ___________to her party last night. 19. You (eat) ___________spaghetti every day when you lived in Europe? Trang 18

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 20. It’s terrible that people (throw) ___________garbage onto this river. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

1. Choose the best answer to complete each sentence. 1. Workers like wearing jeans because they don't ___________easily. a. make off b. wear off c. wear out d. make out. 2. The ___________ of jeans stopped in the 1990s. a. sell b. sold c. selling d. sale 3. Nowadays, many Vietnamese women prefer to wear modem ___________at work. a. cloth b. cloths c. clothing d. clothes 4. Her jacket is made ___________very soft leather. a. by b. of c. with d. in 5. Could you help me, please? ___________. a. No problem b. No, thank you c. I need a favor d. That’s great 6. Wearing uniforms encourages students to be proud ___________their school. a. with b. at c. for d. of 7. What ___________is this shirt made of? a. material b. thing c. object d. container 8. My friend is one of the famous fashion ___________ nowadays. a. actors b. designers c. singers d. writers 9. The word “jeans'' comes from a kind of ___________that was made in Europe. a. substance b. form c. element d. material 10. In the 1980s jeans finally became high fashion clothing. ___________of jeans went up and up. a. sales b. buying c. selling d. making II. Choose the underlined word or phrase (A. B, C, D) that needs correcting: 1. Can you tell me when penicillin is discovered? - In 1928 A B C D ...................................... 2. When he went to work in the library, he became interesting in books. A B C D ...................................... 3. He has worked for the same company since he leaves school. A B C D ...................................... 4. Do you know “Farad”, a unit in electricity is named after Faraday? A B C D ...................................... 5. The girl was last saw wearing a pink dress a brown shoes. A B C D ...................................... III. Use the correct form of the word given in each sentence: 1. Some young people today have a very strange___________. (APPEAR) 2. Her clothes look very modem and___________. (FASHION) 3. Many___________ are normally inspired with beauty. (WRITE) 4. I don’t like to wear ___________ jeans. (EMBROIDER) 5. I’m old enough to be ___________of my parents. (DEPEND) IV. Use the correct form of the verb in parentheses in each sentence. 1. We (not see) ___________Mary since last year. 2. These shirts (make) ___________ by my sister. 3. Wearing uniforms encourages students (be) ___________proud of their school. 4. She hates being (recognize) ___________. 5. Did the movie make you (cry) ___________? V. Read the passage and then decide whether the statements that follow are TRIIE or FAESE. Jeans arc most popular kind of clothing in the world. They are popular almost everywhere, In Japan. Prance, Indonesia, Canada and Brazil. Rich people and poor people wear them. Youth people and even some old people wear them, loo. In the United States, jeans are only kind of traditional clothes. In other countries, young people wear them because they want to look modem. Jeans are Symbol of youth and independence. Everybody wants to be modem, young and independent. 1. Jeans can’t be seen in ASLA. ...................................... Trang 19

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 2. Only poor people wear jeans. ...................................... 3. Jeans arc traditional clothes in USA. ...................................... 4. Jeans are the symbol of youth and independence. .......................................... VI. Read the following passage carefully and choose the correct answer. Poor farmers use the (1) ___________land over and over. The land needs a rest so it (2) ___________ be better next year. (3) ___________, farmers must have food. Poor people cut down (4) ___________for firewood. In some areas when the trees are gone, the land (5) ___________desert. However, people need wood to cook their food now. Poor people cannot (6) ___________ the environment for the future. 1. a. similar b. same c. likely d. alike 2. a. will b. have c. should d. seems 3. a. therefore b. however c. so d. moreover 4. a. trees b. plants c. bushes d. leaves 5. a. seems b. has c. becomes d. returns 6. a. reserve b. serve c. save d. rescue VII. TRANSFORMATION: 1. You have to finish this work on time. This work ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2. She doesn’t know the way to the mosque. She wishes .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. Must the test be finished before ten? Must they ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4. She has never been to HN before. This is the first time .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5. How long is it since they last saw that film? When did ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6. Is he proud of his country greatly? Does he ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. When was this car bought? (active) When .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Are the lessons learnt carefully? (active) Do ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ? --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the best answer: 1. I don’t want a pattern. I prefer a ___________color. a. plain b. simple c. single d. clear 2. The work of designer Sonia Ryrie was the original inspiration ___________the movie. a. of b. for c. to d. in 3. Mike decided to buy a ___________shirt. a. stripe b. striped c. striping d. strip 4. At my school, the children have to wear a special ___________. a. clothes b. style c. uniform d. clothing 5. It seems like the most logical solution___________ the problem. a. of b. to c. with d. from 6. In the summer, my brother always wears shirts with short ___________. a. hands b. arms c. sleeves d. shoulders 7. I don't like that dress; it is out of ___________. a. fashion b. order c. date d. luck 8. I didn’t get wet because I put on mv plastic ___________. a. raincoat b. tunic c. jacket d. shirt 9. This new blouse is lovely, and very ___________. a. fashion b. style c. lifestyle d. fashionable 10. They receive an income equal ___________the value of the goods they produce. a. of b. for c. to d. no preposition Trang 20

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 II. Error identification 1. This is one of the best designed I have ever seen and I wonder if you like it. A B C D ...................................... 2. The piano concerto was beautifully performed by a sixteen-years-old. A B C D ...................................... 3. This will be an occasional for us to make a new star. A B C D ...................................... 4. We hope to increase sells this year to $ 50 million. A B C D ...................................... 5. Will the new road being built soon? A B C D ...................................... III. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each of the passage. We don’t only choose clothes to make us look (1) ___________. We also use them to tell the world (2) ___________ our personality. The clothes we wear and our (3) ___________as the hole give other people. Useful information about what we think and (4) ___________we feel. If we feel cheerful, we usually wear (5) ___________ clothes and if we feel (6) ___________ we sometimes put on dark clothes. 1. a. attract b. attractive c. attractively d. attraction 2. a. of b. with c. by d. about 3. a. equal b. appear c. logical d. appearance 4. a. which b. what c. how d. when 5. a. colorful b. colors c. colorfully d. colorless 6. a. depress b. depressed c. depressing d. depression IV. Read the passage and then decide if the statements that follow are True, False. The zipper is a wonderful invention. They are very common so we forget that they are wonderful. They are strong, but they open and close very easily. They come in many colors and sizes. In 1980s, people in the US wore high shoes or clothes with a long row of buttons. It was hard for them to wear anything. They wanted an easier way to put on and take off clothes. Whitcomb Judson invented the first zipper in 1839. He called it a slide fastener. A zipper has three parts. There are dozens of metal or plastic teeth in two rows. There are fastened to two flexible strips of cloth. A fastener slides along and fastens the teeth together. When it slides the other way, it takes the teeth apart. 1. The people in the USA have used zippers since 1810s. ...................................... 2. Zippers are hard for us to wear anything. ...................................... 3. Whitcomb Judson was the first zipper invention. ...................................... 4. Zippers are only made of metal. ...................................... V. Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets: 1. It (take) ___________me 5 minutes (walk) ___________to school last year. 2. A new bridge (build) ___________next year. 3. He made them (work) ___________ without (pay) ___________. 4. When the war (break) ___________out in 1945, his father (join) ___________ the army. 5. He asked me (give) ___________ him a lift. VI. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets: 1. Dreams can be a rich source of ___________for an artist. (INSPIRE) 2. You could be a little more ___________. (ENCOURAGE) 3. She’s wearing a ___________ white blouse. (SLEEVE) 4. I don't want to wear a long ___________ shirt in the summer. (SLEEVE) 5. These clothes are modem but entirely ___________. (PRACTICE) VII. Rewrite the following sentences. 1. Is she going to write poem? Is a poem .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Somebody was recording our conversations. Our conversations ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3. He would go hunting when he was in Africa. He used to .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. We haven’t been to the concert for over a year. Trang 21

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 The last time .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I last saw my grandparents three years ago I haven’t seen ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6. Weeds cover the river bank. The river bank ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. I’ve seen a lot of things made from rubber. A lot of ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Have they cut grass for hay? Has .............................................................................................................................................................................................................? --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the correct answer. 1. What do you do to ___________your friends when they fail? a. proud b. encourage c. embroider d. convenient 2. Nguyen Du is considered a famous Vietnamese ___________. a. poem b. poet c. poetry d. poetic 3. These shirts and jeans are ___________of Viet Tien Company. a. produce b. products c. production d. producer 4. I find that problem is extremely hard to ___________. What’s your idea? a. solve b. think c. do d. make 5. For most people, ___________is the most precious thing in their life. a. free b. freedom c. freely d. freeing 6. Her new clothes look modem and ___________. a. fashion b. fashionable c. fashionably d. simply 7. That man was a ___________. He has a large collection of ___________ instrument. a. music-musical b. musician-music c. musical-musician d. musician-musical 8. Since the economic___________ gets better, the sale of jeans increases. a. convenience b. situation c. risk d. style 9. ___________can take inspiration from dai ly life. a. poets b. poems c. poetry d. poetic 10. They have ___________ this problem in many discussions. a. talked b. told c. mentioned d. spoke. II. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. A new school is going to build in that area. A B C D ...................................... 2. This is the first time I tried to play badminton. A B C D ...................................... 3. She has been seriously sick since two months already. A B C D ...................................... 4. Wearing casually clothes like jeans and T-shirt, students feel more comfortable. A B C D ...................................... 5. His jacket is made from leather, which is a material made from animal’s skin. A B C D ...................................... III. Choose the correct answer to fill the gap. Choosing clothes can be difficult. Some people want to be (1) ___________, but they don’t want to look exactly (2) ___________ everybody else. Not all clothes are (3) ___________ for work or school, perhaps because they’re not formal enough, or simply not (4) ___________. It is easy to buy the wrong size, and find that your trousers are (5) ___________ tight, especially if you are little bit overweight. Very (6) ___________ clothes make you feel slim, but when they have shrunk in the washing machine, then you have the same problem. 1. a. fashion b. fashioned c. fashionable d. fashionably 2. a. alike b. like c. similar d. same 3. a. fitted b. equal c. logical d. suitable 4. a. comfort b. comforting c. comfortful d. comfortable Trang 22

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 5. a. too b. enough c. so d. such 6. a. loosen b. loosened c. loose d. loosely IV. Read the passage, then decide if the statements that follow are True or False. We li ve in Yorkshire, on the farm in the country. The farmhouse is a quite old building. It is about 150 years old. There aren’t many houses near us. There is a pub in the village about three miles away, but we are over twenty miles from the nearest town. That can be difficult for shopping, but we love living here. It is very quiet, there is nearly traffic and the view is wonderful. Our uncle's family, however, don’t live in a house or the flat. They live in a houseboat. The boat looks small but it is quite big inside. Apart from the bathroom, it only has one room, so they have to do everything there-eat, cook, sleep and watch TV. 1. The writer lives in a new farmhouse. ...................................... 2. The house is about twenty miles from the nearest town. ...................................... 3. The writer doesn’t like his village. ...................................... 4. There is one room in the house of the writer’s uncle. ...................................... V. Supply the correct verb form or tenses. 1. Some designers have the ___________ao dai printing lines of poetry' on it. (MODERN) 2. She likes to wear___________ jean cloth. (FADE) 3. In the 18th century, jean cloth was made ___________from cotton. (COMPLETE) 4. Our ___________situation is getting better and better. (ECONOMY) 5. She was really___________ by the beauty of Ha Noi. (IMPRESS) VI. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. She wishes today (not be) ___________Monday. 2. Ba and Phong (know) ___________each other quite well for years. 3. We (sleep) ___________well last night when the phone (ring) ___________. 4. They are used to (take) ___________ care of by others. 5. Please don’t make noise! Everyone (sleep) ___________. VII. Rewrite the following sentences. Use the word in bracket. 1. It is said that he is 99 years old. He ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. My neighbor always makes a lot of noise at night. I wish .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. When did you start to listen to classical music? How long .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. It is interesting to go out with friend at weekends. Going out .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. It is not necessary for you to finish the test by Saturday. You don’t need ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. It is said that many Vietnamese women today prefer to wear modem clothing at work. People ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7. My mother always has me empty the basket. My mother always has the basket ............................................................................................................................................ 8. She has had a friend type all of her papers. She has had all of.................................................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 23

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 3: A TRIP TO THE COUNTRYSIDE I. GETTINS STARTED 1. to water (v) : tưới nước 4. to plow (v) : cày ruộng 2. to feed - fed - fed (v) : cho ăn 5. buffalo (n) : con trâu 3. to harvest (v) : thu hoạch, gặt lúa II. LISTEN AND READ 6. to lie (v) : nằm, ở vị trí -» enjoyment (n) : sự thích thú rest (n) : sự nghỉ ngơi 14. relax (v) : thư giản -» rest (v) : nghỉ ngơi -» relaxation (n) : sự thư giản -» restful (adj) : nghỉ ngơi, thư giản -» relaxing (adj) 7. journey (n) : chuyến đi, cuộc hành trình -» relaxed (adj) 8. banyan (n) : cây đa 15. village (n) : ngôi làng 9. entrance (n) : cổng vào, lối vào -» villager (n) : dân làng -» to enter (v) : bước vào 16. admire (v) : ngưỡng mộ 10. snack (n) : bữa ăn nhẹ -» admiration (n) : sự ngưỡng mộ 11. shrine (n) : đền thờ 17. arrive (v) : đến 12. hero (n) : anh hùng -» arrival (n) : sự đến -» heroic (adj) : anh hùng, quả cảm 18. mountain (n) : núi 13. enjoy (v) : thích, thưởng thức -» mountainous (adj): thuộc về miền núi -» enjoyable (a): thú vị III. LISTEN (none) IV. READ 19. exchange student (n): lưu hoán sinh -» collection (n) : sự thu hoạch, thu gom 20. maize (n) : ngô, bắp -» collective (adj) : tập thể, chung 21. part-time (adv) : bán thời gian -» collector (n) : người sưu tập ≠ full time 24. to feel like (v) : cảm thấy thích 22. grocery (n) : cửa hàng tạp phẩm 25. itinerary (n) : hành trình, nhật kí đi -» groceries (pl.n) : hàng tạp phẩm, tạp hoá đường -» grocer (n) : người bán tạp phẩm 26. lay - laid - laid (v) : đặt, để, trải 23. to collect (v) : thu hoạch, thu gom -» lay out (v) : bày, phơi bày, trình bày V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. Prepositions of time (giới từ chỉ thời gian) * AT: dùng cho thời gian trong ngày và những dịp lễ Ex: - at sunset (lúc hoàng hôn) - at 12 o’clock - at noon (lúc giữa trưa) - at night (vào ban đêm) - at dawn (lúc bình minh) - at midnight (lúc nửa đêm) - at Easter (vào lễ Phục Sinh) - at lunchtime (lúc ăn trưa) - at Christmas (vào lễ Giáng Sinh),... * ON: dùng cho ngày, ngày tháng, ngày tháng năm và các ngày cụ thể Ex: - on 23 July 1996 - on Wednesday - on Christmas Day (vào ngày Giáng Sinh) - on 17 February - on Sunday morning (vào sáng Chủ Nhật) - on my birthday (vào ngày sinh nhật của tôi) - ... * IN: dùng cho thế kỉ, năm, tháng, mùa và các buổi trong ngày Ex: - in the 21st century – in January - in 1970s - in the winter / fall / summer / spring - in 1998 - in the morning / afternoon / evening,... * FOR (trong khoảng thời gian) Ex: for two hours, for five minutes, for a long time, for ages, for a week,... * SINCE (từ, từ khi) Ex: since 1997, since last week, since yesterday, since Monday, since last year,... * TILL / UNTIL (cho đến khi) * BEFORE (trước khi) * AFTER (sau khi) Trang 24

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 * UP TO (đến, cho đến) * BETWEEN (giữa) * DURING (trong suốt 2. Adverbial clause of result: mệnh đề trạng ngữ chỉ kết quả * So: vì vậy, vì thế, cho nên - So là liên từ được dùng để diễn đạt kết quả của một sự việc hoặc hành động. - Mệnh đề bắt đầu bằng so được gọi là mệnh đề trạng ngữ chỉ kết quả. Ex: (1) It was cold. I turned the heating on. -» It was cold, so I turned the heating on. (2) The computer didn’t work. He took it back to the shop. -» The computer didn’t work, so he took it back to the shop. * Ngoài ra, để diễn tả mối tương quan giữa nguyên nhân và kết quả, chúng ta có thể áp dụng các cấu trúc sau đây: a. SO...THAT / SUCH...THAT S+ V+ so + adj / adv + that + S + V + O. S+ V+ such + a/an + adj + N+ that + S + V + O. Ex:: (1) He's so tall that everyone looks at him (2) He's such a tall man that everyone looks at him b. TOO...TO... S + V + too + adj / adv + (for O) + to V. Ex:: The weather was too bad for us to have a picnic. c. ENOUGH ...TO... S+V + adj / adv + enough + (for O) + to V. S+V + enough + N + (for O) + to V. Ex:: (1) The room is big enough for all of us to stay in. (2) We don’t have enough money to buy that car. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISES

I. Write sentences using “WISH/ WISHES”. 1. I don’t know many people in Hanoi. I wish ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I don’t have a car. He wishes ................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. Lan isn’t here and I need to see her. I wish ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. I’d like to go to the party but I can’t. I wish ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. I am in the swimming pool all day because it’s very hot today. My child wishes ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I don’t understand what the man says. The foreigner ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7. My best friend will leave for Bangkok tomorrow and I’m very sad. I ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. We can’t live together forever! We ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. My grandmother always complains about something or other. Ted ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10. My little brother makes a lot of noise when he comes back from school. I ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11. I don’t know many people in the town. My new neighbor .................................................................................................................................................................. 12. It would be nice to be able to fly a plane. She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. Trang 25

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 13. It’s a shame I don’t have a key. I .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 14. Ann isn’t here and I need to see her. I .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15. I don’t like being so short. The young boy ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16. Unfortunately, I have to work tomorrow. I ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17. Don’t shout all the time. It’s so annoying. I ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18. I’m sorry, I can’t go to the party. I .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19. I’d like to get access to the Internet, but I don’t have a computer. Emily .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20. It’s a pity the weather isn’t better today. They ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 21. Our classroom doesn’t have any windows. We ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 22. The sun isn’t shining right now. The students ........................................................................................................................................................................... 23. Lan doesn’t know how to make a cake. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24. We live in a small flat in the City. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25. Please don’t say things like that. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... II. Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions: 1. They don’t like going out ____________ night. 2. We often give each other presents ____________ Christmas. 3. We’ll wait ____________ half past ten. 4. These old neighbors have lived here ____________ the last 30 years. 5. Do you usually go out ____________ Saturday evening? 6. I’ll see you ____________ the meeting. 7. He wanted me to phone him ____________ lunchtime. 8. Most students look for jobs ____________ the summer holidays. 9. The supermarket will open ____________ two weeks. 10. The house was built the ____________ 15th century. 11. He always leaves for work ____________ 1.30 ____________ the afternoon ____________ having lunch with his wife. 12. They are having a party ____________ Christmas Day. 13. Mozart was born ____________ 1756. 14. They lived in Hue ____________ 1976 ____________ 2000. 15. She regularly goes for a run ____________ breakfast. 16. The meeting won’t end ____________ 12p.m., so you should call me ____________ noon. 17. He works ____________ morning ____________ night. 18. All of you have to finish this report ____________ Thursday. 19. We’ve known each other ____________ being children. 20. I had worked for that company ____________ over 5 years when it went bankrupt. 21. Let’s go away ____________ the weekends! 22. Mr. Emmett said he’d take a day off ____________ his birthday. 23. My country is very beautiful ____________ the spring. 24. A 24-hour store doesn’t close ____________ the night. 25. My father doesn’t come back from work ____________ night. 26. ____________ this time next week, the scientists will be in New York. Trang 26

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 27. This album is supposed to be launched sometime ____________ June. 28. They are always out for fireworks display ____________ New Year’s Eve and never come home ____________ 4 ____________ the morning. 29. There has been a fall in the price of noodles in that supermarket ____________ they started to sell fresh pasta ____________ the first of this month. 30. I’ve got an interview next week. It’s ____________ 9.30 ____________ Tuesday morning. 31. Peter has worked in the bank ____________ five years ____________ he graduated from Harvard University ____________ 1988. 32. The office will be closed ____________ Christmas and New Year. It will be opened ____________ January 25th. 33. It’s rained ____________ the night ____________two or three hours. 34. She’s starting a job in sales ____________ she finishes college. 35. The course begins ____________ 2nd January 2005 and ends sometimes____________ April. 36. The children aren’t here at the moment, but they’ll be back ____________a few minutes. 37. “We’re having a party ____________New Year’s Eve. Can you come?” 38. “Em afraid I can’t. I don’t like going out ____________night.” 39. “Shall we go now?” - “No, let’s wait____________ it stops raining.” 40. Please wait ____________9.30. She’ll definitely be back ____________9.30. II. Rewrite the following sentences: a. TOO... TO... /ENOUGH... TO... / SO... THAT... / SUCH... THAT... 1. The piano was too heavy for me to move. (ENOUGH) The piano wasn’t ............................................................................................................................................ (SO... THAT) The piano was so ........................................................................................................................................ (SUCH...THAT) It was such ................................................................................................................................................ 2. The situations aren’t simple enough for us to explain. (TOO... TO) The situations are too ................................................................................................................................. (SO... THAT) The situations are so ................................................................................................................................. (SUCH... THAT) They are such .......................................................................................................................................... 3. She talked too fast for me to understand. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The man is not tall enough for them to see. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. These books were too bad for her to read from cover to cover. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. The river is not clean enough for us to swim in. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. The food was so hot that I couldn’t eat it. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. The car was so expensive that we couldn’t afford to buy it. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... B. 9. It was such a high wall that we couldn’t climb over the wall. (too... to) Trang 27

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. The room is so tidy that it took us one hour to clean it. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11. It is such a long film that they canh broadcast it on one night. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. The weather was so warm that they had a walk in the garden. (enough... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13. It was such a funny story that he couldn’t stop laughing. (too... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. The match was so exciting that all the fans shouted loudly. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15. There is so much rain that we canh go out. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16. The milk is excellent enough for the children to want some more. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17. My sister is too young to go to the zoo alone. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18. There were so many people in the hall that we couldn’t see him. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19. They drunk such a lot of coffee that they couldn’t sleep all night. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20. The road is too narrow for two cars to pass each other. (enough... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21. The game is too difficult for the children to play. (enough... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22. Alice had so many exercises to do that she couldn’t go out. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23. He runs so slowly that he canh win a prize. (too... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24. The downtown area is too crowded for you to get a taxi. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25. The weather was lovely enough for us to spend the whole day in the garden. (such...that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26. He drank such a lot of coffee that he couldn’t get to sleep. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27. I was so tired that I fell asleep in the armchair. (enough... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28. The exam was so difficult that most of the students couldn’t do it. (such... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29. My father is such a busy man that he doesn’t have any free time. (too... to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30. It is such an illegible handwriting that I can’t figure out what this sentence says. (so... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31. His son’s feet are so big that he has difficulty finding slippers to fit him. (too...to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32. The composition was so bad that I couldn’t read it (too...to) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33. The book is so interesting that we have read it many times. (such...that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34. He drives too fast for me to call. (so...that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35. The food is too hot for the old woman to eat. (enough) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36. This folk song is simple. Everybody can sing it. Trang 28

TEST 1

I. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space in each sentence. 1. Linh was out when we came ____________ we left a message a. so b. as c. because d. but 2. Liz was very tired after the trip ____________ she went to bed very early. a. because b. so c. as d. but 3. Van is a (n) ____________ student in the USA a. bright b. foreigner c. exchange d. intelligent 4. My father ____________ a lot but he doesn't any more. a. was traveling b. was used to travel c. used to travel d. has traveled 5. This isn't my first visit to England. I ____________ here before a. I'm b. I'm going to c. I've been d. I was 6. There is a river ____________ across the village. a. flowing b. running c. lying d. reaching 7. They put ____________ the blanket and laid ____________ food. a. in /on b. down / over c. down /out d. on/in 8. People go to the countryside to have a ____________ after a hard working week. a. break b. rest c. trip d. tour 9. He used to ____________ full time, but now he is a part time worker. a. work b. works c. worked d. working 10. My village is about 80 kilometers ____________ the west of HCM City. a. in b. at c. to d. for II. Choose the underlined word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that needs correcting. 1. He was bom on France, so he also has a French passport. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. A tree had fallen across the road, so they had to tum around and gone back. A B C D....................................................... 3. Have you any comments to make at the recent developments? A B C D ....................................................................... 4. On the next hour we shall be presenting news and comments from around the world. A B C D ............................................................ III. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space ỉn the following passage. Singapore is an island nation in Southeast Asia. It (1) ____________ one major island and more than 50 small adjacent islets. Singapore is one of (2) ____________ important port cities and commercial centers of Southeast Asia. Singapore has a wet tropical (3) ____________ . Considered as one of the Asia’s four dragons, Singapore has one of the highest standards of living of all countries in Asia. The economy (4) ____________ heavily on exports, particularly in consumer electronics and information technology (5)____________. Singapore has one of the largest international airports in Asia, and a 26-kilometer rail line (6) ____________ crosses Johor Strait and links with the Malaysian railroad system. Singapore has been considered by international travelers as an exciting travel destination. 1. a. contents b. includes c. comprises d. consists 2. a. least b. the more c. the most d. better 3. a. climate b. weather c. temperature d. rainfall Trang 29

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 4. a. belongs b. replies c. depends d. revives 5. a. factories b. products c. manufactures d. companies 6. a. that b. which is c. what d. where IV. Read the passage, then decide if the statements that follow it are TRUE or False. AN EXCURSION When our teacher suggested an excursion during the last June holidays, we chose the Botanic Garden, the place we all wanted to visit. All the boys and girls of the class assembled in our school one day and started our bus journey at 9.00 am. As soon as we arrived at the garden, our teacher took us to an open grass patch and told us about the program for the day. The Botanic Garden has a variety of flowers and trees, each and everyone is labeled. The air was very cool and clean so we felt very refreshed. It was so pleasing to see the well cut grass, hedges and flowering plants all around. Our teacher told us about the history of the Botanic Garden. We spent some time cracking jokes and telling stories. After that we had lunch. Our teacher took a few photographs of us in the garden. 1. This passage is mainly about the history of the Botanic Garden. ....................................................................... 2. The program for the day was told on the bus. ....................................................................... 3. The air was very clean and cool. ....................................................................... 4. After having lunch, they cracked jokes and told stories. ....................................................................... V. Use the correct form of the word given in each sentence. 1. Every summer thousands of people flock to the ____________ . (COUNTRY) 2. We stopped at some ____________ shops to buy some food. (NEAR) 3. I can see the ____________ between you and your mother. (SIMILAR) 4. It is always ____________ to hear other people’s point of view. (INTEREST) 5. Most modem buildings have underground ____________ lots. (PARK) 6. He's the best fashion ____________ that I've known. (DESIGN) 7. The ball was followed with great ____________ . (EXCITE) 8. She speaks English so well that her friends are filled with ____________ . (ADMIRE) VI. Use the correct tense or form of the verb given in each sentence. 1. Maryam (stay) ____________ with us at the moment. 2. Lan (take) ____________ her younger brother to the zoo last Sunday. 3. Her brother (impress) ____________ by the interesting and exciting places. 4. (walk) ____________ around Ho Xuan Huong lake, we enjoyed the fresh air and the peaceful atmosphere there. 5. I wish I (be) ____________ a singer someday. 6. When I get home from work, I like (relax) ____________ with the newspaper. 7. By killing the crocodile, he made the pool safe for (bathe) ____________. 8. I can’t come now. At the moment, I (type) ____________ a letter. VII. Transformation: 1. He is not tall enough to be a good goal keeper. He is too .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The journey is too long for the little boy to stand. The journey is so ................................................................................................................................................................... 3. We don’t have enough sugar to make coffee. We wish .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. My son didn’t do well in his test. My son wishes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5. Are they holding the meeting in the village hall next week? (Passive voice) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space in each sentence. 1. After school she works ____________ in a supermarket in the afternoon. a. full-time b. time-full c. part-time d. time-part 2. He can help his parents to ____________ eggs. a. feed b. lay c. collect d. exchange Trang 30

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 3. He’ll show the photos he has taken ____________ his parents. a. for b. with c. from d. to 4. ____________ is it from the city Centre? a. How far b. How long c. Where d. How often 5. We will stay ____________ London Tuesday through Friday. a. in b. on c. at d. no preposition 6. I am going to have my car ____________ tomorrow evening. a. wash b. washing c. washed d. being washed 7. “Would you prefer jazz or rock music?” - “I dislike ____________ music in general.” a. to listen b. to listen to c. listening to d. listening 8. I’ve been feeling better since the doctor ____________ . a. comes b. came c. has come d. will come 9. I wish AI ____________ sing a couple of songs. a. would b. will c. can d. is going to 10. I wish it ____________ winter so that I could go skiing. a. were b. are c. is d. be 11. I wish you ____________ go to see a doctor today. a. would b. can c. will d. should 12. Bees ____________ pollen from the wild flowers. a. were gathering b. has gathering c. gathers d. were gatherers 13. I wish Natasha ____________ bring her children with her tomorrow. a. could b. will c. can d. was going to 14. I wish we ____________ everything we want all the time. а. can buy b. could buy c. will buy d. were buying II. Choose the underlined word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that needs correcting. 1. I wish the sun were shine so that we could go swimming. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. I hope the weather will be nice in the weekend. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. I might not be at home on Tuesday morning but I’ll probably be there at the afternoon. A B C D...................................................... 4. I admire him for his succeed in business. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space in the following passage. (1) ____________ country is more beautiful than a town and (2) ____________to live in. Many people think so, and go to the country for the summer holidays though they cannot live there all the year (3) ____________. Some have a cottage (4) ____________in a village (5) ____________they can go there whenever they can find the time. English villagers are not all alike, but in some (6) ____________they are not very different (7) ____________ each other. Almost every village has a church, the round or square tower of which can be seen for many miles around. Surrounding the church is the churchyard, where people are buried. The village green is a (8) ____________ stretch of grass, and houses or cottages are built round it. Country life is now fairly comfortable and many villages have water (9) ____________ through pipes into each house. Most villagers are (10) ____________ close to some small towns that people can go there to buy what they cannot find in the village shops. 1. a. A b. An c. The d. no article 2. a. pleasant b. please c. pleased d. pleasure 3. a. round b. through c. length d. whole 4. a. build b. built c. building d. builds 5. a. because b. if c. such that d. so that б. a. roads b. streets c. ways d. routes 7. a. with b. from c. between d. on 8. a. width b. wide c. wider d. widely Trang 31

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 9. a. brought b. brings c. bringing d. bring 10. a. such b. too c. enough d. so IV. Read the passage. then decide if the statements that follow it are TRUE or FALSE. The weekend picnic I enjoyed most was just a few weeks ago. My class decided to pay a visit to the Botanic Garden. It was a glorious Sunday. We assembled at the school gate punctually and traveled to the Botanic garden by bus. It was a long way to our destination and we sang merrily all the way. The Botanic Garden is a very beautiful place. We made a short tour round the garden and took some pictures of the whole class. Then we played a lot of games on a spacious piece of grassland. One of the boys brought along his guitar and we sang our favorite songs. We laughed, talked and danced, too. After a delicious meal with various kinds of food that we brought, we all took a rest. Some of us slept very soundly because it was so peaceful and quiet there. In the afternoon, we went on playing some more games. Then we packed up the leftovers and started home at four. We all felt very happy. 1. He went for a picnic with his family. ....................................................................... 2. It was a long way from his school to the Botanic Garden. ....................................................................... 3. After lunch everyone started home. ....................................................................... 4. It was an enjoyable picnic. ....................................................................... V. Use the correct form of the word given in each sentence. 1. There are two ____________ - one at the front and one round the back. (ENTER) 2. Thank you for a very ____________ evening at your house. (ENJOY) 3. We can find lots of ____________ and drink at the supermarket. (FEED) 4. All the people walked in a ____________ direction. (SOUTH) 5. I’d like to make an ____________ with Doctor Evans, please. (APPOINT) 6. Da Lat is a beautiful ____________ city in Vietnam. (MOUNTAIN) 7. We should have a moment of ____________ after a time of hard working. (RELAX) 8. My teacher has a nice ____________ of ao dai. (COLLECT) VI. Use the correct tense or form of the verb given in each sentence. 1. We (start) ____________our new school year last month. 2. John and I (be) ____________pen pals for nearly three years. 3. We used (write) ____________to each other every month when we (be) ____________at secondary school. 4. What (you/ do) ____________ last weekend? – I (go) ____________ to the theater with my family. 5. She (receive) ____________ her pen pal’s letter this morning. 6. Lan wishes she (visit) ____________ Ba’s village next summer. 7. I wish my close friend (not leave) ____________for Paris next week. 8. My younger sister wishes she (go/ see) ____________ our grandparents in two days. VH. Transformation: 1. The palace was very large. We couldn’t visit everywhere. The palace was ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2. I can’t speak English as well as I could when I was in high school. I wish ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. It has been raining cats and dogs. (STOP) She wishes ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4. People are destroying large areas of forest every day. (Passive voice) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We haven’t tasted such delicious food before. This is ........................................................................................................................................................................................ --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space in each sentence. 1. The office will be closed ____________ Christmas and New Year. a. between b. behind c. among d. inside 2. She commented ____________me that she liked it. a. to b. on c. at d. with Trang 32

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 3. I’m ____________sightseeing for the rest of the day. a. going to b. making c. having d. going 4. Football fans ____________around the TV in the comer of the bar. a. gathered b. was gathered c. was gathering d. gathers 5. The company wants to ____________the factory on land near the railroad tracks. a. locate b. be located c. locating d. located 6. My father ____________ a lot but he doesn’t anymore. a. was traveling b. was used to travel c. used to travel d. has traveled 7. It’s very crowded here. I wish ____________. a. there was a few people b. there weren’t so many people c. there is no one d. there was somebody here 8. Exchange students in the USA ____________their parents nearly every Sunday. a. phone b. phones c. are going to phone d. phoned 9. When he was four, he ____________walk 5 kilometers to school every morning. a. use to b. used to c. be used to d. used 10. They have lived in this village four ____________years. a. in b. since c. for d. at II. Choose the underlined word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that needs correcting. 1. My thirteen-years-old daughter wishes she weren’t so tall and that her hair A B were black and straight. C D ....................................................................... 2. I wish most world leaders would meet in the nearly future and reach some A B C D ................................................................ agreement on environmental issues. 3. Henry will be retiring from his job in two year’s time. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. I always enjoyed Math in high school since I decided to major it in college. A B C D ....................................................................... III. Choose the word or phrase (a, b, c or d) that best fits the blank space in the following passage. How would you buy something to eat at the restaurant in a foreign country if you (1) ____________ the country language? In most countries, you would have to (2) ____________ or point to items on the menu and take your chances. This is not true in Japan. In Japan, restaurant windows or showcase display samples of every food the restaurant (3) ____________. To make a selection, a customer simply looks the food over, (4) ____________ a decision, and points to the desired item. The samples might look (5) ____________to eat, but you’d better not try them. These mouth-watering dishes are made of plastic! The Japanese first (6) ____________ fake food in the 1920s to introduce people (7) ____________ unfamiliar Western dishes. Now fake food also introduces Westerns to unfamiliar or exotic Japanese dishes. The fake food is not inexpensive to make. A single shrimp might cost $2 and a larger dish of food $15, however, unlike real food, the plastic food (8) ____________forever. 1. a. don’t know b. didn’t know c. haven’t known d. hadn’t known 2. a. go hungry b. went hungry c. go hungried d. went hungried 3. a. to serve b. serving c. serves d. severed 4. a. do b. does c. make d. makes 5. a. good enough b. enough good c. well enough d. enough well 6. a. to develop b. developing c. developed d. develop 7. a. with b. at c. to d. for 8. a. will last b. last c. lasting d. lasted IV. Read the passage, then decide if the statements that follow it are TRUE or FALSE. It was a beautiful day. The sun was shining, the sky was blue, and the weather was perfect. Wendy was outside playing with her dog, Skippy. All of a sudden, the dog began behaving strangely. It kept running around in circles, and didn’t seem to be itself. Wendy ran home with the dog to tell her mother what Skippy was doing. Wendy’s mother, Ms. Karen told Wendy that she heard on TV that there was a Trang 33

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 typhoon Corning. Ms. Karen gathered her family and told them to find the shelter in the home. Wendy’s mother and her family were scared, but soon the storm finished and everyone was glad. What a clever dog! It saves her family. 1. The weather was very beautiful at first. ....................................................................... 2. Skippy ran around in circles. ....................................................................... 3. The storm did not scare Wendy and her family. ....................................................................... 4. Wendy was saved by Skippy from the typhoon. ....................................................................... V. Use the correct form of the word given in each sentence. 1. Since her ____________, the room has been full of laughter. (ARRIVE) 2. I went to the ____________ store to buy something. (GROCER) 3. The ____________ of trees occurs very slowly. (GROW) 4. Her parents are ____________, but not divorced. (SEPARATE) 5. I go hill - walking for ____________. (RELAX) 6. She spent a ____________ evening with friend. (RELAX) 7. I can see the ____________ between you and your mother. (SIMILAR) 8. They have a good ____________ of stamps. (COLLECT) VI. Use the correct tense or form of the verb given in each sentence. 1. They used (go) ____________ swimming when they lived in the countryside. 2. I wish your family (be) ____________ here with you now. 3. Is Lan used to (live) ____________ alone in the City? 4. I would rather you (do)____________ your test well. 5. I wish you (not arrive) ____________ home late next time. 6. I wish I (know) ____________ something about computers. 7. Before you (leave) ____________, don't forget to shut the windows. 8. I wish the traffic (not make) ____________ so much noise everyday. VII. Rewrite each of the following sentences in another way so that it means almost the same as the sentence printed before it. 1. This skirt is too short for the girl to wear. (enough) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. The film was so boring that I turned off the TV set and went to bed. It was such ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3. He wants to become a doctor someday. He wishes ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. She is the tallest girl in her class. Nobody ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. We haven’t met our son for years. It has ......................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 34

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 4: LEARNING A FOREIGN LANGUAGE I. SETTXNS STARTED 1. learn by heart (idm) : học thuộc lòng 4. look forward to sth / doing sth (v): 2. text (n) : bài khóa trông mong, mong đợi 3. fee (n) : học phí 5. State (v) : phát biểu, chỉ ra tuyên bố II. LISTEN AND READ 5. examine (v) : kiểm tra 10. oral (n) = oral examination (n): cuộc -» examiner (n) : giám khảo thi vấn đáp -» examinee (n) = candidate (n): người dự -» oral (adj) : nói miệng, không viết thi, thí sinh 11. written exam (n) : cuộc thi viết 6. go on (v) = continue (v): tiếp tục 12. royal (adj) : hoàng gia 7. aspect (n) : mặt, khía cạnh 13. stage (n) : giai đoạn 8. attend (v) : tham gia, tham dự 14. candidate (n) : thí sinh -» attendance (n) : sự tham dự, có mặt 15. describe (v) : mô tả 9. terrible (adj) : khủng khiếp, ghê tởm -» description (n) : sự mô tả -» terribly (adv) : rất tệ 16. passage (n) : bài văn, bài đọc III. SPEAK 17. award (v) : thưởng, tặng thưởng 22. reputation (n) : sự nổi danh 18. scholarship (n) : học bổng -» repute (v) : cho là, đồn là; nghĩ về, nói 19. persuade (v) : thuyết phục về -» persuasion (n) : sự thuyết phục 23. institute (n) : viện, học viện -» persuasive (adj) : có tính thuyết phục -» institution (n) : cơ quan, trụ sở 20. dormitory (n) : ký túc xá 24. scenery (n) : phong cảnh, cảnh vật 21. campus (n) : khuôn viên trường 25. native speaker (n) : người bản địa IV. READ AND WRITE 26. intermediate (adj) : trình độ trung cấp 32. tuition (n) : học phí, sự dạy kèm 27. council (n) : hội đồng 33. edition (n) : lần xuất bản, bản in 28. academy (n) : viện hàn lâm, học viện 34. detail (n) : chi tiết 29. well - qualified (adj): đủ trình độ 35. record of study (n): học bạ chuyên môn, đủ khả năng 36. polite (adj) : lịch sự, lễ phép 30. course (n) : khóa học ≠ impolite (adj) : bất lịch sự, vô lễ 31. advertisement (n) : mẫu quảng cáo -» politeness (n) : cử chỉ lịch sự, lễ phép -» advertise (v) : quảng cáo -» politely (adv) : một cách lịch sự V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. STATEMENTS IN REPORTED SPEECH (Câu trần thuật trong lời nói gián tiếp) Ex: Trinh said: “ I am doing my homework now.” (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) -» Trinh said that she was doing her homework then. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1): unchanged (không thay đổi) (2): say -» say; said -» said ; sail to sb -» told sb (3): “ ...” -» that (4) (6): đổi đại từ và tính từ sở hữu nếu cần thiết (5): đổi thì của mệnh đề phụ khi động từ tường thuật (2) ở các thì quá khứ. (7): đổi trạng từ hoặc cụm trạng từ chỉ thời gian và nơi chốn * Cách đổi thì của động từ trong mệnh đề phụ (5) 1. Simple present -» Simple past ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Present continuous -» Past continuous ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Present perfect -» Past perfect ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 35

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 4. Simple past -» Past perfect ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. Past continuous -» Past perfect continuous ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Past perfect -» Past perfect ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. Simple future -» Future in the past ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Future continuous -» Future continuous in the past ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... * Cách đổi của một số động từ đặc biệt: 1. can -» could 7. have to / has to -» had to 2. will -» would 8. had to -» had to 3. shall -» should 9. mustn’t -» mustn’t 4. should -» should 10. used to -» used to 5. may -» might 11. had better -» had better 6. must -» had to 12. ought to -» ought to * Cách đổi một số trạng từ hoặc cụm trạng từ chỉ thời gian và nơi chốn: DIRECT INDIRECT / REPORTED 1. today that day 2. tonight that night 3. yesterday the day before 4. last night / week year / month the night/ week ... before / the previous night / week... 5. tomorrow the following day / the next day 6. tomorrow night the following night 7. next week / month / year the following week / month / year 8. now then 9. ago before 10. here there 11. from here from there 12. this that 13. these those * Put the following into indirect speech. 1. She said, “I can’t find my umbrella.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. They said, “We are learning English now.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. Tom said, “My friend is Corning next week.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. Lynne said, “I will help my mum with housework this weekend.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. The headmaster said, “You must do it now.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Her father told her, “Never tell lie to your teacher.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. ‘Tm going away tomorrow, mother”, he said. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. “Don’t tell anyone or you’11 be Sony” Mary warned her friend. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Peter invited Nick “Would you like to stay for lunch?” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. Tom said, “Go and see me tomorrow.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. QUESTIONS IN REPORTED SPEECH (Câu hỏi trong lời nói gián tiếp) Trang 36

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 * Yes - No questions: - Khi đổi một câu hỏi Yes /No từ trực tiếp sang gián tiếp, ta cần lưu ý: + Dùng động từ tường thuật là ask, wonder, want to know + Dùng “if” hoặc “whether” (nghĩa là có... không) sau động từ tường thuật. - Đổi cấu trúc câu hỏi thành câu trần thuật (S + V) Ex: (1) He said: “Can you speak any foreign languages?” -» He asked me if / whether I could speak any foreign languages. (2) “Are you hungry?” she asked us. -» She asked us if / whether we were hungry. * WH - questions: - Khi đổi một câu hỏi WH từ trực tiếp sang gián tiếp, ta cần lưu ý những điểm sau: + Dùng các động từ tường thuật là ask, inquire, wonder, want to know + Lặp lại từ để hỏi sau động từ giới thiệu. + Đổi cấu trúc câu hỏi thành câu trần thuật. Ex: (1) He said: “What time does the film start?” -» He wanted to know what time the film started. (2) “Where are you going for your summer holiday?” I asked them. -» I asked them where they were going for their summer holiday. NOTES: - Không thay đổi động từ trong lời nói gián tiếp, khi động từ trong mệnh đề chính (động từ tường thuật) ở thì hiện tại đơn, hiện tại tiếp diễn, hiện tại hoàn thành, tương lai đơn. Ex: (1) She says, Tm very tired.” -» She says that she is very tired. (2) They say to me, “We will invite you to our house for dinner.” -» They tell me (that) they will invite me to their house for dinner. * Put the following into indirect speech 1. “What country do you come from?”, said Bill. Bill wanted to know ............................................................................................................................................................. 2. “Do you want to buy any second hand - books?”, asked Ann. Ann asked me ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Will you have time to play regularly.”, asked Tom. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. “Why is the sky blue?” my young daughter often asks. My young daughter often asks me ................................................................................................................................. 5. “How long do you stay here, Lisa?” asked John. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “How will you use English in the future, Peter?” Bill said. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Do you always go to church on Sundays?” she asked me. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8. “Who put salt in my coffee?” he asked. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9. “What’s your favorite color?” she said to Tim. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. “Why aren’t you taking the exams?” said Helen. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

I. Complete the sentences to report what was said. 1. “You can sit here”. The steward said I could sit there. 2. ‘Tm taking my driving test tomorrow.” She said ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Jim is arriving late today.” Trang 37

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 She told me .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. “I‘ve only had this new Computer since yesterday.” Louis said ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. “John left here an hour ago.” She told .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “I don't want anything to eat now.” He said .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “I posted the card yesterday.” Joanna told ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8. “You must do your homework every day.” Jane ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. “You should go to the library more often.” Tom ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10. “There isn't any milk in this bottle, Ann.” Mike ............................................................................................................................................................................................ II. Sally registered for a French course. She and the secretary both asked a lot of questions. Now Sally told you about them. Report all these questions. 1. “What's your name?” -» She asked me what my name was. 2. “Are you a student?” -» She wanted to know if / whether I was a student 3. “What school are you going to?” She wanted to know ............................................................................................................................................................ 4. “Can you speak any foreign languages?” She asked ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. “How many languages can you speak? She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6. “Have you got any certificates?” She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7. “Why do you want to take the course?” She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. “How did you hear about the course?” She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 9. “Do you have any French friends?” She ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 10. “Do you like French music?” She ............................................................................................................................................................................................. III. Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. John (read) ____________ a book when I (see) ____________ him. 2. He said he (return) ____________ later. 3. She said she (not come) ____________ the next day. 4. The house (build)____________ a hundred years ago. 5. I don’t know how (play) ____________ the game. 6. Blaire Pascal (invent) ____________ the adding machine in 1642. 7. Neither Margaret nor her sisters (have) ____________ long hair. 8. At the interview, you will (ask) ____________ a lot of questions. 9. The boy is looking forward to (go) ____________ to the beach. 10. She (look) ____________ angrily at me when I (break) ____________ the vase. IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase A, B, c, or D that needs correcting. 1. If I cannot finish the job this weekend, I will try to get it does during the week. A B C D ....................................................................... 2. If John is pick for the team, he will be boasting about it for weeks. A B C D ....................................................................... 3. Maria suggested that we cooked a meal with each other. A B C D ....................................................................... 4. Last year, Tim comes to the school for the first time. Trang 38

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 A B C D ....................................................................... V. Word form: 1. Let me introduce you a ____________ university. (REPUTE) 2. This is a ____________ journey for the little girl. (LENGTH) 3. We have to ____________ our knowledge. (WIDE) 4. People in the countryside enjoy the ____________ atmosphere. (PEACE) 5. If we try to recycle things, we will save ____________ resources. (NATURE) 6. It's ____________ to speak when you are eating. (POLITE) 7. They did the exercises ____________. (EFFECT) 8. He spent his ____________ in the countryside. (CHILD) 9. The school is performing well, but we recognize the need for further ____________. (IMPROVE) 10. English spelling presents special ____________ for foreign learners. (DIFFICULT) --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2

I. Change Reported speech. 1. “I like your new dress.” Peter said ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. “You look nice today.” Peter told me that ................................................................................................................................................................. 3. “I’m waiting for my parents.” Mary said ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4. “I’ll help you whenever you need me, Lisa.” John told .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. “I’m planning to go to America for my higher studies next year.” My sister said ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “This is the longest film that I’ve ever seen.” Kate said ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “I’ll come with you as soon as I’m ready.” His sister told ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8. “There will be a good cartoon on TV tomorrow evening.” My friend said ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9. “You can use my telephone if you need it.” She told ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. “You are my best friend, Lisa.” Tommy told ............................................................................................................................................................................. II. Put the following sentences into reported speech. 1. "Can you show me how to work this out?" She said to him. She .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2. The teacher said “We should collect old books for the poor students”. The teacher said .................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Why were you so late for the party last night?” He said to his friend. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. "Could you buy me an English exercise book, Ha?" Nam asked Ha ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5. “Will you ever come here again, boys?”, said the old woman. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “Why are you looking at me like that?”, said the girl to the boy. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “How long does the course take?” I asked him .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8. “When will the course begin?” I asked her ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9. “How much do you think it will cost?”, said Nam. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 39

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 10. “What are you going to buy for your sister on her birthday, David?”, said Ann. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... III. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answers. Every year, people in many countries learn English. Some of them are young children. Others are teenagers. Many are adults. Some learn at school. Others study by themselves. A few learn English just by hearing the language in films, on television, in the office or among their friends. But not many are lucky enough to do that. Most people must work hard to learn English. Why do all these people learn English? It's not difficult to answer this question. Many boys and girls learn English at school because it is one of their subjects. Many adults learn English because it is useful for their work. Teenagers often learn English for their higher studies because some of their books are in English at the college or university. Other people learn English because they want to read newspapers or magazines in English. 1. According to the writer, ____________ . a. only young people learn English c. all people learn English at school b. English is useful only for students d. English is popular all over the world 2. Most people learn English by ____________ . a. watching films c. working hard on the lessons b. hearing the language on TV d. speaking English to their friends 3. Many boys and girls learn English because ____________ a. it is included in their study courses c. it's their own language b. it's useful for their higher studies d. they are forced to learn it 4. Many adults learn English ____________ . a. in order to be able to read newspapers in English b. because it helps them in their work c. because of their higher studies d. to communicate with their colleagues in the office. 5. Which of the followings is NOT mentioned? ____________ . a. English is widely used c. English is spoken in the office b. English is a compulsory subject d. English is the language of Britain IV. Write the correct form of the verbs in brackets in each of the following sentences. 1. The Zipper (invent) ____________ by w. L. Judson in 1893. 2. “Are you looking forward to (see) ____________ Ann again?” “Well, I expect (meet) ____________ her soon” 3. When I (come) ____________ to see them yesterday, they (play) ____________ volleyball. 4. This computer is the best one I (ever/use) ____________ . 5. When I last saw him, he (still work) ____________ in London. 6. Can you please (close) ____________ the door? 7. I (study) ____________ English since 1990. 8. Hoang (live) ____________ in Hue for four years. Now he is living in Hanoi. 9. He used (play) ____________ volleyball when he was young. 10. Would you mind (open) ____________ the door? V. Use the correct form of the word given in each sentence: 1. I went to the store ____________ to buy something. (GROCER) 2. He is now studying in the USA as an ____________ student. (CHANGE) 3. Their holiday was spent ____________ on the mountain. (ENJOY) 4. However, life in the town is certainly more ____________ . (EXCITE) 5. Everyone should be allowed ____________ of choice. (FREE) 6. Lan is a good student. She ____________ plays Computer games. (HARD) 7. Jack is so ____________ . He helps everyone. (HELP) 8. The university has a reputation as a center of ____________ . (EXCELLENT) 9. A course for ____________ will be available on November 1st. (BEGIN) 10. Lam Truong is a good singer. He sings ____________ . (BEAUTY) -------------------------------------------------------Trang 40

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

TEST 1 I. Find the once choice that best completes the sentence. 1. Besides in-class assignments, our teacher often gives some ____________ for us to do at home. a. housework. b. class work c. homework d. teamwork 2. Jack has a good memory. He can learn these vocabulary items ____________ easily. a. with heart b. in mind c. by heart d. of mind 3. It's difficult to remember these grammar rules. - Oh, try to do all ____________ exercises in this grammar book. a. learning b. studying c. working d. grammar 4. Use a ____________ to check up the words you want to know about. a. book b. magazine c. dictionary d. newspaper 5. What time does your English class ____________ and end? a. start b. to start c. starting d. to be started 6. My sister works ____________ a big law firm in the city. a. in b. at c. for d. with 7. What's your address? -We live ____________ 23 Brookfield Avenue. a. in b. at c. on d. to 8. The first courses were offered ____________ I January 2007. a. in b. at c. on d. since 9. If you want to ____________ your speaking, you should speak English with friends. a. pass b. describe c. express d. improve 10. Students will ____________ a two-hour examination at the end of the year. a. take b. make c. do d. come II. Choose the underlined word or phrase A, B, c, or D that needs correcting. 1. If he doesn’t hurry, the plane will be leaving by the time he gets to the airport. A B C D ...................................... 2. If I have time tonight, I will finish the novel I was reading. A B C D ...................................... III. Read the following passage, then choose the correct answer I went to Australia on a student program last year and I like to (1) ____________ you about it. I was very (2) ____________ when I knew I was going to Australia because I had never been there before. I didn’t think about the problems of speaking English (3) ____________ I met my host family. At first I couldn’t communicate (4) ____________ them because my English was so bad. All the five years I had been learning English wasn’t much used at all (5) ____________ we didn’t have real practice at school. Even though my grammar was good, my pronunciation wasn’t. My problem is (6) ____________ “I” and “r”. For example, Australian people often asked “What do you eat in Vietnam?” I wanted to tell them that we eat rice, but they didn’t understand when I said “We eat lice”... 1. a. say b. tell c. talk d. speak 2. a. exciting b. excites c. excited d. excite 3. a. after b. until c. when d. while 4. a. with b. without c. to d. for 5. a. although b. even c. because d. so 6. a. pronouncing b. speaking c. reading d. telling IV. Read the passage carefully. then decide whether the following statements are True ro or False Learning a foreign language is, in some ways, like learning how to fly. There are some differences, but there is a very important similarity. It is this: learning how to do these things needs a lot of practice. It is never enough to read a book on how to fly a plane. A book can give you a lot of inebriation about how to fly, but if you only read that book, then try to fly without any practice, you will kill yourself. The same is true of learning a foreign language. For example, can you speak English well without having lots of practice? "Practice makes perfect" is what every learner of a foreign language should know. 1. Learning a foreign language and learning to fly are the same in an important way. .................................. 2. Information about flying from books is enough for someone to fly a plane. ...................................... 3. You can learn English well only by reading books in English. ...................................... 4. Talking to a native speaker can be a good way to speak a foreign language well. ...................................... Trang 41

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 5. Practicing a foreign language regularly makes you very good at it. ...................................... V. Put the verb in. brackets in the correct tense. 1. What were you doing a short time ago while I (wash) ____________ the dishes? 2. The job (finish) ____________ by the workers yesterday. 3. I (go) ____________ home when they (watch) ____________ soccer last night. 4. She stopped (get) ____________ some petrol. VI. Word form: 1. We felt ____________ in the program, so we turned on the TV set. (INTEREST) 2. The song seemed ____________ to me, so I turned off the hi-fi system. (INTEREST) 3. They had an ____________ picnic by the river bank. (ENJOY) 4. English is his ____________ . (NATION) 5. I’m going to apply for a __________to attend an English language summer course abroad. (SCHOLAR) 6. This answer is less ____________ . (PERSUADE) VII. Rewrite the following sentences: 1. She said to me , “I can help you with your homework.” She told me .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2. Daisy said, “Please help me, Tom.” Daisy told ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3. They will get bad marks, because they don’t study hard. (so) They ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. The last time we saw him was on Monday. We have .................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Choose to the best answer: 1. You ____________ pass the driving test if you follow the instructor's advice. a. must b. can c. could d. shall 2. If you want to lose weight, you ____________ go on a strict diet. a. can b. should c. could d. may 3. Tommy asks his teacher ____________ . a. where is New York b. where was New York c. where New York was d. where New York is 4. “What’s on TV tonight?” she asked. -» She asked me ____________ . a. what was on TV that night b. what on TV that night was c. what is on TV tonight d. what is on TV that night 5. That man can tell us where ____________ . a. does Tony live b. Tony lives c. Tony living d. is Tony living 6. A computer can gather a lot of ____________ for many different ____________ . a. informations / purpose b. informations / purposes c. information / purposes d. information / purpose 7. Please let us know if the new teacher ____________ . a. comes b. will come c. corning d. came 8. She asked me ____________ . a. if I am thirsty b. if I were thirsty c. if was I thirsty d. if I was thirsty 9. The boy asked his mother ____________ . a. if he can eat he cake b. if he could eat the cake c. can he eat the cake d. could he eat the cake 10. She said “I have lived here for 10 years.” She told me ____________ . a. that she has lived there for 10 years b. she had lived here for 10 years c. that she had lived there for 10 years d. that she had lived here for 10 years ỊL Choose the underlined word or phrase A, B, c, or D that needs correcting. 1. If it rains next weekend, we would be able to plant the vegetables. A B C D ...................................... 2. If he is leaving at 6 o’clock, I will ask him give me a lift. Trang 42

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 A B C D ...................................... III. Read the following passage, then choose the correct answer. A good memory is a great help in learning a language. Everybody learns his own language by (1)____________ what he hear when he is a small child, and some children like boys and girls who live (2) ____________ with their parents seem to learn (3) ____________ languages almost at easily as (4)____________ . In school, it’s not so (5) ____________ to learn a second language because the pupils have so little (6) ____________ for it. 1. a. forgetting b. remembering c. doing d. calling 2. a. house b. town c. abroad d. country 3. a. two b. three c. four d. five 4. a. two b. one c. three d. four 5. a. hard b. difficult c. easy d. enough 6. a. money b. work c. job d. time IV. Read the passage carefully. then decide whether the following statements are True or False. Last Sunday, Nam went on excursion to Oxford. He got up early and took a bus, so arrived on time. In the morning, he visited the National Gallery, Big Ben and the Hyde Park. In the afternoon, he bought a dictionary and a small disc with the words “Oxford University”. He met some English students in the bookshop. He was happy to practice speaking English with many foreigners. Although he felt a bit tired, he had a nice day. 1. Nam went on excursion to Oxford last Saturday. ............ 2. He went there by bus. ............ 3. He visited the National Gallery, Big Ben and the Hyde Park in the morning. ............ 4. He had an opportunity to practice speaking English with many foreigners in the bookshop. ............ V. Word form: 1. They are ____________ - qualified teachers. (GOOD) 2. We need further ____________ but we are uninformed about anything. (INFORM) 3. This book is ____________ We hardly find what we need. (INFORM) 4. Look at the ____________ , Rain Bi looks handsome. (ADVERTISE) 5. They are studying hard for their corning ____________ . (EXAMINE) 6. His English is good enough to make a ____________ . (SPEAK) VI. Put the verb in. brackets in the correct tense. 1. The president (try) ____________ to contact his advisors now. 2. I (not finish) ____________ the work that I was assigned to. 3. I don’t smoke while I (drive) ____________ a car. 4. When we (go) ____________ to see them last night, they (play) ____________ cards. VII. Rewrite the following sentences: 1. “Can I have a sweet?” said the small boy. The small boy ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2. “Will you be here tomorrow?” she asked. “Yes,” I answered. She asked me .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Why don't you take up the oboe (kèn ô boa) again?” said my friends. My friends advised .............................................................................................................................................................. 4. “All right, ru wait a week,” she said. She agreed ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5. “Would you like to have lunch with me on Sunday?” he said to me. He invited ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6. “I come here today just to congratulate you on passing your exam.” John said to me that ............................................................................................................................................................. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Find the once choice that best completes the sentence. 1. The perfume has been ____________ in all the women's magazines. a. recognized b. advertised c. impressed d. read 2. Learning a foreign language also includes learning the ____________ of that country. Trang 43

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 a. reputation b. scenery c. culture d. nature 3. The university has an international ____________ as a center of excellence. a. academy b. experience c. scenery d. reputation 4. What ____________ of learning English do you find most difficult? a. aspect b. side c. detail d. position 5. We can't hear you clearly. Get ____________ the microphone, please. a. far away b. close to c. next to d. out of 6. First we have to pass the written ____________ , then we take the oral exam. a. questions b. quiz c. exam d. form 7. I like learning languages. I want ____________ an expensive course of English. a. to come b. to attend c. to get d. to have 8. I think we can practice our listening and speaking skills by ____________. a. joining an English speaking club b. watching English TV programs c. speaking English with friends d. all are correct 9. The United Nations ____________ an important part in preserving in the world. a. play b. was playing c. played d. plays 10. He is too busy ____________ care of her. a. taking b. to take c. took d. taken II. Choose the underlined word or phrase A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. Francesca said that she will see him the following year. A B C D ...................................... 2. If she has driven all that way since this morning, she will tired and hungry. A B C D ...................................... III. Read the following passage, then choose the correct answer ENGLISH UNIVERSITIES AND COLLEGES All English universities except Oxford and Cambridge (1) ____________ fairly new. London University is the biggest of modem English universities and consists of a great variety (2) ____________ colleges and other institutions including medical schools. A university usually has faculties and departments. The (3)____________ common faculties are medicine, law, arts and science. The departments include engineering, economics, etc. (4) ____________ taking examinations, a university graduate is awarded the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Engineering, etc. (5) ____________ faculty is headed by one or more professors, who (6) ____________ helped by the staff of teachers called lectures. 1. a. is b. are c. was d. were 2. a. of b. in c. on d. at 3. a. many b. much c. more d. most 4. a. Because b. Because of c. Before d. After 5. a. None b. no c. Each d. All 6. a. were b. was c. are d. is IV. Read the passage carefully, then decide whether the following statements are True or False. There are about 5.000 living languages in the world today, but only about six of them are major languages of the world. Two-thirds of the world’s population speaks those languages. More than 350 million people speak English as their first language. Nobody knows exactly how many people speak it as a foreign language. Chinese is the only language with more speakers than English. This is because of the huge population of China. It is true that English is the most widespread language on Earth. It is the language of business, technology, sports and aviation. 1. Only about six of about 5.000 living languages are major languages of the world. ................................ 2. Two-thirds of the world’s population speaks English. ................................ 3. Chinese is the only language which is spoken more than English. ................................ 4. English is often used in business, technology, sports and aviation. ................................ V. Put the verb in. brackets in the correct tense. 1. He will go out after (finish) ____________ the homework. 2. They (go) ____________ to Vung Tau next week. That is their plan. 3. I met a friend while I (do) ____________ the shopping. 4. He will come and see you before he (leave)____________ for America. Trang 44

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 VI. Word form: 1. These actors performed ____________ . (BEAUTIFUL) 2. Since the ____________ was poor, they had to cancel the course. (ATTEND) 3. They enjoy talking to ____________ in English. (FOREIGN) 4. They are having a ____________ time on the beach. (WONDER) 5. The second ____________ of the book adds a more detailed appendix. (EDIT) VII. Rewrite the following sentences: 1. “When the rain stops, can we go out?” said the children. The children ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2. This city had old buildings, but none can be found nowadays. There used................................................................................................................................................................................ 3. “Where do you live?” The interviewer said to me. The interviewer ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4. “I’m very busy. I’ll ring you tomorrow,” Susan said to me. Susan .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “You must follow your parent’s advice.” John said ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “My father teaches me English at home, so I don’t go to evening classes” John told Fiona ...................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

REPORTED SPEECH

1. “Don't put your hands near the bars,” the zoo keeper warned us. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. “Buy a new car,” I advised him. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Don't drive too fast,” she begged him. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4. “Don't lean your bicycles against my windows, boys,” said the shopkeeper. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Cook it in butter,” I advised her. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. “Don't touch the gates, madam,” said the lift operator. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Do you think your hearing will be better ?” He ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. “Are you tired of the noise from the Street here ?” My mother ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9. “Is your hearing aid good ?” My father ................................................................................................................................................................................... 10. “Can you hear me clearly now ?” Lucy ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 11. “I’ll be here again tomorrow”, he said ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12. “I see her today”, he said. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13. “I don’t like this film”, John said to Mary. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14. Hoa said to David “I can’t go to the movie with you tomorrow” Hoa ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15. We said to them, “Your house is very nice.” We ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 16. Van said, “I like oranges better than bananas.” Van............................................................................................................................................................................................... 17. “We’ll stay at home” , Ba and Liz said. Trang 45

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 Ba ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18. “ I play a game with him”, Bill said ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19. Mr. Pike said, “I need an aspirin now.” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20. “I may have a new job here”, Mrs. Hoa said. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21. “The subject is interesting”, the students said. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22. “How old are you?” she asked me, ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23. “Where do you live?” she asked. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24. “What’s your favorite color?” she said to me. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25. “Can you speak French and English?” she asked. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26. “Do you listen to music a lot?” she said. She ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 27. The policeman said, “What is happening?” The .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 28. “Are you hungry?” She asked us. She ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 29. “Who put salt in my coffee?” he asked. He ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30. “Who is going to live in the big house?” an old man said. An ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 31. “Do you always go to church on Sundays?” she asked me, ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32. “ What is your new English teacher like?” John asked his friends ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 33. The doctor asked the woman, “ How often do you go swimming?” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34. “ Where will you spend your vacation this summer, Peter?” said Many. ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35. Mr. Harry asked me, “Why are you often late for school ?” ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

Trang 46

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1

UNIT 5: THE MEDIA I. SETTINS STARTED 1. watching TV : xem ti vi 4. reading magazines : đọc tạp chí 2. reading newspapers : đọc báo 5. using the Internet : lên mạng Internet 3. listening to the radio: nghe radio II. LISTEN AND READ 6. media (n): phương tiện truyền thông. 12. vary (v) : làm cho khác 7. cry (v) : kêu, rao. -» variety (n) : nhiều, đủ loại -» crier (n) : người rao -» various (adj) : khác nhau 8. shout (v) : kêu to, la lớn, hét to 13. channel (n) : kênh (truyền hình) -» shout (n): tiếng gọi lớn, tiếng la thét 14. interaction (n) : sự tương tác. 9. widely (adv) : rộng lớn. -» interactive (adj) : có tính tương tác -» wide (adj) : rộng, rộng lớn -» interact (v) : ảnh hưởng lẫn nhau, -» widen (v) : mở rộng, nới rộng ra tương tác. -» width (n) : bề rộng 15. remote control (n) : thiết bị điều 10. adult (n) : người lớn khiển từ xa. 11. stage (n) : giai đoạn. III. SPEAK 16. violent (adj) : bạo lực 21. garden (v) : làm vườn 17. documentary (n) : phim tài liệu 22. wildlife (n) : thú vật, chim 18. informative (adj) : cung cấp nhiều muông... hoang dã thông tin 23. drama (n) : kịch -» inform (v) : báo, khai báo 24. telegraph (n) : điện báo, máy điện -» information (n) : thông tin báo 19. folk Music (n) : nhạc dân ca -» telegraph (v) : (gửi) điện báo. 20. battle (n) : trận đánh, cuộc chiến IV. READ 25. forum (n) : diễn đàn -» exploration (n) : hoạt động thăm 26. surf (v) : lướt dò, thám hiểm 27. communicate (v) : liên lạc, trao đổi -» explorer (n) : nhà thám hiểm, thông tin 35. wander (v) : lang thang -» communication (n): sự liên lạc, sự giao 36. purpose (n) : mục đích tiếp 37. limitation (n) : sự hạn chế, giới hạn -» communicative (a): cởi mở, hoà đồng -» limit (v) : giới hạn, hạn chế 28. increasingly (adv) : ngày càng tăng 38. time-consuming (adj): tốn thời 29. respond to (v) : đáp trả gian 30. means (n) : phương tiện 39. costly (adj) : tốn tiền 31. deny (v) : phủ nhận 40. suffer (v) : chịu, chịu đựng -» denial (n) : sự phủ nhận. 41. electronic junk mail (n): thư rác 32. benefit (n) : lợi ích 42. leak (n) : lỗ rò, khe hở -» beneficial (adj) : có ích 43. alert (adj) : tỉnh táo, cảnh giác 33. get access to (exp) : truy cập, tiếp cận 44. disadvantage (n) : bất lợi, khuyết -» accessible (adj) : có thể tiếp cận. điểm 34. explore (v) : thám hiểm, thăm dò ý -» advantage (n) : tiệm lợi, lợi thế V. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. TAG QUESTION (Câu hỏi đuôi) a. Definition: - Câu hỏi đuôi là câu có dạng cụm từ dùng để hỏi - được đặt ở cuối câu. b. Function: - Để kiểm tra thông tin hoặc để hỏi ngắn gọn. 3. Usage: - Động từ ở câu hỏi đuôi - sẽ trái ngược lại với động từ chính ở vế câu trước. + Nếu động từ ở vế trước là khẳng định thì động từ ở câu hỏi đuôi phải ở thể phủ định. + Nếu động từ ở vế trước ở thể phủ định thì động từ ở câu hỏi đuôi phải ở thể khẳng định. Trang 47

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 Ex: The house is beautiful, isn’t it? Ex: The house isn’t cheap, is it? + , ? ,+ ? khẳng/ phủ - (cộng/ trừ) phủ/ khẳng - (trừ/ cộng) * NOTE: - Không dùng câu hỏi đuôi trong câu hỏi Yes/ No. Ex: Is she intelligent, isn’t she? - Nếu vế trước câu có can/ could, may/ might, hoặc động từ “Be (is/are/were/was)”, thì dùng lại chính các động từ này ở đuôi. Ex: (1) He can swim, can’t he? (2) There is a cat, isn’t there? - Nếu vế trước câu là động từ thường ở thì hiện tại đơn (hoặc quá khứ đơn), thì dùng các trợ động từ do/ does/ did - sao cho ứng với thì của động từ vế trước. Ex: (1) He likes coffee, doesn’t he? (2) They play football, don’t they? (3) We saw her yesterday, didn’t we? (khẳng/ phủ) * Các trường hợp đặc biệt trong câu hỏi đuôi: - Nếu vế trước là “I am” - thì vế sau: “aren’t I” Ex: I am late, aren’t I? - Nếu vế trước câu là “nobody/ no one”, “somebody/ someone”, “everybody/ everyone”, và “those”, thì vế sau dùng chủ từ “they”. Ex: (1) Somebody will do it, won’t they? (2) Those are children, aren’t they? - Nếu trong câu có các từ phủ định như “never, no, nobody, hardly, scarcely, little...” thì động từ trong câu hỏi đuôi phải ở thể khẳng định. Ex: (1) It is no good, is it? (2) Nobody likes the film, do they? (phủ/ khẳng) - Nếu vế trước là “nothing”, “everything”, “something”, “this”, “that”, thì vế sau dùng chủ từ “it”. Ex: (1) Nothing is good, is it? (2) Everything is good, isn’t it? (3) This is a book, isn’t it? - Nếu là câu mệnh lệnh cách, thì dùng “won’t you” để mời ai làm gì (giọng lịch sự) Ex: (1) Sit down, won’t you? (2) Go to the beach with me, won’t you? (3) Take care, won’t you? - Nếu là câu mệnh lệnh cách ở dạng phủ định, thì dùng “will you?” Ex: (1) Don’t give up hope, will you? (2) Don’t talk in class, will you? - Sau “Let’s” là “Shall we?” Ex: Let’s go, shall we? - Trường hợp có “have got / has got” thì mượn trợ động từ (do/ does) hoặc dùng lại chính trợ động từ ở vế trước (have/ has). Ex: (1) You have got a lot of money, haven’t/ don’t you? (2) She hasn’t got a big villa in district 7, has/ does she? 2. GERUND after SOME VERBS (Danh động từ theo sau một số động từ) * Một số động từ thường được theo sau bởi một danh đông từ (V-ing) 1. admit: thừa nhận 14. excuse: tha thứ 27. pardon: tha thứ 2. advise: khuyên 15. face: đối mặt 28. postpone: hoãn lại 3. anticipate: đoán trước 16. fancy: tưởng tượng 29. practice: thực tập 4. appreciate: đánh giá cao 17. feel like: muốn 30. quit: bỏ 5. avoid: tránh 18. finish: hoàn tất 31. recall: nhớ 6. complete: hoàn thành 19. forgive: tha thứ 32. recollect: hồi tưởng 7. consider: xem xét 20. imagine: tưởng tượng 33. recommend: giới thiệu 8. delay: hoãn lại 21. involve: liên quan đến 34. resent: ganh tị 9. deny: phủ nhận 22. keep (on): tiếp tục 35. resist: cưỡng lại Trang 48

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 10. detest: ghét 23. mention: đề cập 36. risk: liều 11. discuss: thảo luận 24. mind: phiền 37. suggest: đề nghị 12. endure: chịu đựng 25. miss: nhớ, bỏ lỡ 38. tolerate: dung thứ 13. enjoy: thích 26. omit: bỏ sót 39. understand: hiểu Ex: (1) Harriet suggested having a party. (2) He tried to avoid answering my question. * NOTES: 1. Can’t bear, can’t face, can’t stand (không thể chịu đựng...) V-ing can’t help (không thể nhịn...), can’t resist (không thể cưỡng lại...) 2. It’s no use / It’s no good / There is no point in (thật vô ích khi...) V-ing it’s not worth (thật không đáng để...) 3. Have a good / hard time + V-ing (có 1 khoảng thời gian vui vẻ / khó khăn khi...) Have + difficulty (in)+ V-ing (gặp khó khăn trong việc...) trouble 5. Be busy + V-ing (bận với việc...) 6. Be / get used to + V-ing (quen với / trở nên quen với việc) 7. Spend / waste + thời gian / tiền + V-ing (dành ra / lãng phí tiền bạc vào việc...) 8. Would rather +V1 + than +V1 thích...hơn... Would prefer + to V +rather than +V1 Prefer + V-ing + to + V-ing 9. Một số động từ có thể được theo sau bởi cả to V lẫn V-ing (nghĩa không thay đổi): like, love, hate, start, begin, continue,... 10. Một số động từ có thể được theo sau bởi cả to V lẫn V-ing (nghĩa thay đổi): a. Remember/ forget + to V : nhớ/quên rằng cần phải... (nhiệm vụ) Remember/forget + V-ing : nhớ/quên rằng trước đó đã... (hồi tưởng). b. Try + to V : cố gắng... Try + V-ing : thử... c. Regret + to V : tiếc vì sắp phải... (đi với tell, inĩorm...) Regret + V-ing : hối hận vì đã... d. Stop + to V : dừng lại dể... Stop + V-ing : ngừng .. .lại. e. Need + to V : cần... (nghĩa chủ động). Need + V-ing/to be V3 : cần... (nghĩa bị động) --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 1

A. TAG QUESTION

I. Add question tags to the following statements. 1. You take sugar in tea, ____________ ? 2. Nothing went wrong, ____________ ? 3. But you don’t take it in coffee, ____________ ? 4. It is a pity Ann didn’t come with us, ____________ ? 5. The lift isn’t working today, ____________ ? 6. There used to be trees here, ____________ ? 7. It never works very well, ____________ ? 8. There isn’t any point in waiting, ____________ ? 9. There was no panic, ____________ ? 10. He TI hardly come now, ____________ ? 11. Open the door, ____________ ? 12. She out the bag here, ____________ ?

B. GERUND ORINFINITIVE

II. Put the verbs between brackets ỉn their correct infinitive or gerund form: 1. The children are busy (collect) ____________ shells on the beach. 2. I don’t much care (go) ____________ to that restaurant. It’s dirty. Trang 49

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 3. Would you be so good as (answer) ____________ the phone when it rings? 4. She had to ask the boys (stop)____________ (make) ____________ noise. 5. Our teacher has promised (help) ____________ us (prepare) ____________ for the exam. 6. I would love (have) ____________ an opportunity (meet) ____________ you again. 7. He resents (be) ____________ told what (do) ____________ . 8. I love (eat) ____________ apples, but dislike (peel) ____________ them. 9. There is no (deny) ____________ that he enjoys (listen) ____________ to radio. 10. Is (boil)____________ or (fry)____________ the best way of (cook)____________ this fish? 11. Where there is work (do) ____________ , you should be ready (help) ____________ . 12. It’s no use (ask) ____________ him (lend) ____________ any money. 13. Can you manage (finish) ____________ (write) ____________ these reports by yourself? 14. She stopped (talk) ____________ as if waiting for him (speak) ____________ . 15. We regret (say) ____________ that the lecture wasn’t worth (listen) ____________ to. 16. You begin (learn) ____________ a language by (listen) ____________ to new sounds. 17. I’ve come (make) ____________ peace, not (start) ____________ another war. 18. There is nothing (be) ____________ done about it now. 19. He advised me (consider) ____________ all the facts before (decide)____________ (accept) ____________ the job. 20. I appreciate your (want)____________ (help) ____________ my brother, but it’s time he learnt (practice)____________ (do) ____________ his work alone. 21. They don’t want (risk) ____________ g(set) ____________ it on fire. 22. I was lonely at first, but after a time I got used to (live) ____________ alone. 23. We stopped once (buy)____________ petrol and then we stopped (ask) ____________ someone the way. 24. When I caught them cheating me, I stopped (buy) ____________ petrol there and started (deal) ____________ with their station instead. 25. She remembers (go) ____________ to school the first time and (be) ____________ frightened and (put)____________ her finger in her mouth. 26. She remembers her teacher (tell) ____________ her (take) ____________ it out. 27. I’m delighted (hear) ____________ that you can (come) ____________ on Sunday. 28. We are all looking forward to (see) ____________you. Remember (bring)__________your rubber boots. 29. Jack suggested (take) ____________ me one flat and (keep) ____________ the other for me. 30. Tom advised me (sell) ____________ the whole house. 31. They don’t allow (smoke)____________ in this room. --------------------------------------------------------

EXERCISE 2 A. TAG QUESTION

I. Add question tags to the following statements. 1. Mary hardly ever cooks, ____________ ? . 2. They should have planned the expedition more carefully, ____________ ? 3. She’d save money if she bought fresh food, ____________ ? 4. He ought to have made a note of it, ____________ ? 5. Neither of them offered to help you, ____________ ? 6. Nobody has lived in the house for years, ____________ ? 7. They don’t allow pet dogs in this shop, ____________ ? 8. There was a lot of noise, ____________ ? 9. He hardly ever leaves the house, ____________ ? 10. Lions are loose in this safari park, ____________ ?

B. GERUND ORINFINITIVE

II. Put the verbs between brackets in their correct infinitive or gerund form: 1. They refused (allow) ____________ us (go) ____________ in without (sign) ____________. 2. You’re too young (start) ____________ giving up (build) ____________ a career. 3. I like (come)____________to school by bus, but I hate (stand) ____________and (wait)__________ in the Trang 50

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 rain. 4. My uncle used to (show) ____________ me where (go)____________ and what (buy)____________. 5. There is nothing like (walk) ____________ as a means of (keep) ____________ fit. 6. The soldiers were ordered (stand) ____________ at attention. 7. I couldn’t resist (ask) ____________ him why he was trying (avoid) ____________ (meet) ____________ me. 8. Your doctor advise (go) ____________ to bed early, so I really can’t understand your (want) ____________ (stay) ____________ up late. 9. We considered (buy) ____________ her dress for her birthday. 10. I remember (hear) ____________ him (say) ____________ the grass needed (cut)____________ 11. Forgive my (ring) you up so late, but I couldn’t allow your victory (pass)____________ without (congratulation)____________ you. 12. When I travel, I prefer (drive)____________ to (take)____________ a plane. 13. I always remember (turn)____________ off all the lights before I leave my house. 14. Did you remember (give)____________ Jack my message? 15. What do you remember (do)____________ before you leave for class? 16. What do you remember (do)____________ when you were a child? 17. What did you forget (do)____________ before you left for class this morning? 18. I’ll never forget (see)____________ her dance the first time. 19. Don’t forget (do)____________ your work tonight. 20. I regret (inform)____________ you that she has just left for 10 minutes. 21. I regret (lend)____________ him some money. He never paid me back. 22. I can’t stand (live)____________ with him anymore. 23. I have to work (earn) ____________ money. 24. I hope (have) ____________ the good marks in the following exam. 25. Tom begins (build) ____________ a happy house with new wife. 26. My class stopped (talk) ____________ when my teacher shouted at. 27. I can remember (be) ____________ very proud and happy when I graduated. 28. I remember (play) ____________ with dolls when I was a child. 29. I’ll never forget (carry) ____________ my wife over the threshold when we moved into our first home. 30. I can’t ever forget (watch)____________ the film “Titanic”. 31. I regret (not listen) ____________ to my father’s advice. He was right. 32. Do you regret (choose) ____________ this job? It’s tiring. 33. I forgot (take) ____________ a book back to the library, so I had (pay) ____________ a fine. 34. Did you remember (lock) ____________ the car? - No, I didn’t. I’d better (go) ____________ back and (do) ____________ it now. 35. She remembers (spend) ____________ her childhood here very clearly. --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 1

I. Put a question tag on the end of these sentences: 1. Tom won't be late, ____________ ? No, he never late. 2. You're tired, ____________ ? Yes, a little. 3. You haven't seen Mary today, ____________ ? No, I'm afraid not. 4. You've got a camera, ____________ ? Yes, why? 5. There aren't many people here yet, ____________ ? No, but it’s still quite early. 6. Sue doesn't know Ann, ____________ ? No, they’ve never met. 7. You came in your sports car, ____________ ? No, I came in a taxi. 8. These cakes look good, ____________ ? I can’t wait to try them. 9. You can speak German, ____________ ? Yes, but not very fluently. 10.1'm too impatient, ____________ ? Yes, you are sometimes. II. Put the verbs in parentheses in the correct verb form: the gerund or the inflictive. 1. We plan (take) ____________ our holidays abroad this year. 2. The headmaster doesn’t permit (smoke) ____________ during the meetings. 3. He remembered (pass) ____________ on most of the information, but omitted (mention) ____________ Trang 51

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 one or two of the most important facts. 4. The reporters asked many questions which the freed men declined (answer) ____________ 5. “I'm trying (repair) ____________ my radio, but it doesn't work.” - “Why don't you try (change) ____________ the batteries. I think the batteries in the radio need (change) ____________. 6. We stopped (have) ____________ dinner on the way home. 7. Mary needs (find) ____________ another job. Her company is going out of business. 8. He tried (avoid / answer) ____________ my question. III. Fill in each gap with a suitable preposition. 1. The farmhouse is remote ____________ any other buildings. 2. Don’t worry- everything’s ____________ control! 3. Did you see the film ____________ 10 p.m ____________ HBO channel last night? 4. You can e-mail me ____________ pd@freeserve.co.uk. 5. There was nothing interesting ____________ , so I turned the TV ____________ . IV. Read the passage carefully, then decide whether the following statements are True or False. It is estimated that about 200 million people who use the Internet Computer network around the world. Most people use the Internet to get information or for entertainment. A new study, however, says that almost 6% of internet users are using it so often that it is seriously harming their lives. The study says these people may find it difficult to stop using the Internet because they have become addicted. Someone who is addicted finds it extremely difficult to stop an activity. According to Mr. Greenfield, a psychologist, 30% internet users say that they use the internet to escape from problems or emotions. The study also shows that having discussions with strangers in internet areas called chat room is one of the most addictive activities. 1. An estimated 200 million people get access to the Internet every year. ................................ 2. Most people like to go on the Internet for information or entertainment ................................ 3. Using the Internet so often can do more harm than good. ................................ 4. Someone who is addicted to the Internet spends just a little time going on it. ................................ 5. Some people use the Internet to get away from their unpleasant situations. . ................................ 6. One of the most addictive activities is chatting. ................................ V. Choose the best answer to complete the sentence. 1. What benefit does interactive television bring ____________ people’s life? a. along b. around c. among d. about 2. Do you ____________ the internet useful? a. think b. guess c. find d. wish 3. Viewers are ____________ to ask questions about shows on TV by using their remote Controls. a. capable b. possible c. enable d. able 4. It’s convenient ____________ you to stay here. a. to b. about c. for d. when 5. Viewers can watch a ____________ of programs on TV nowadays. a. lots b. many c. variety d. plenty 6. This program will help you learn English ____________ popular songs. a. to b. through c. from d. for 7. ____________ my opinion, don’ts waste time ____________ and playing games on line. a. for/ chatting b. in/ chatting c. in/ to chat d. from/ to Chat 8. I don't like watching action films. I think they are so ____________ . a. violent b. romantic c. peaceful d. funny 9. A computer can help us to ____________ with people around the world. a. respond b. transmit c. interact d. contact 10. While you enjoy ____________ the internet, be alert. a. responding b. surfing c. consuming d. waving VI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. I can do what I want and you canh stop me. You can't.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Please don't interrupt me all the time. Would you mind ................................................................................................................................................................... Trang 52

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 3. My father said I could use his car. My father allowed ................................................................................................................................................................. 4. It's not a good idea to travel during the rush hour. It's better to avoid ................................................................................................................................................................ 5. Michael laughed when I told him the joke. The joke .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. Don't stop him doing what he wants. Let ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7. We like to lie on the beach all day. We enjoy ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8. I wish I hadn't taken your advice. I regret ....................................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 2

I. Put a question tag on the end of these sentences: 1. Jack's on holiday, ____________ ? Yes, he's in Portugal. 2. You couldn't do me a favor, ____________ ? It depends what it is. 3. Let's go out tonight, ____________ ? Yes, let's. 4. Don't drop that vase, _____________ ? No, don't worry. 5. He won't mind if I use his phone, ____________ ? No, of course not. II. Put the verbs in parentheses in the correct verb form: the gerund or the intensive. 1. He’d prefer you (go) ____________ to his place, if that’s convenient. 2. The film was so terrifying that she could hardly bear (watch) ____________ it. 3. Would you mind (lend) ____________ $5? I need (buy) ____________ a pen. 4. An instructor is corning (show) ____________ us how (use) ____________ the machine. 5. I suggest (telephone) ____________ the hospitals before (ask) ____________ the police (look) ____________ for him. 6. Come over here I’d like you (see)____________ this. 7. Children should start (learn) ____________ a foreign language at primary school. 8. The Union leaders urged their members (think)____________ again before (decide)____________ (strike)____________ . 9. I can’t stand (listen) ____________ to his complaints any longer. 10. Tom avoids (study) ____________ his lessons as long as possible. III. Choose the best answer to complete the sentence. 1. Alice didn't expect ____________ to Bill's party. a. asking b. being asked c. to ask d. to be asked 2. I regret all ____________ that money. I've got none left. a. to spend b. spend c. spending d. being spent 3. Don't forget ____________ home as soon as you arrive at your destination. a. to call b. calling c. having called d. to be called 4. The new students hope ____________ in many of the schools social activities. a. including b. to include c. being included d. to be included 5. Please forgive me. I didn't mean ____________ you. a. upsetting b. to upset c. being upset d. to be upset 6. Jack got into trouble when he refused____________ his briefcase for the customs officer. a. opening b. to open c. being opened d. to be opened 7. “What should I tell the mechanic?” The oil needs____________ . a. changing b. to change c. being changed d. to changing 8. The children enjoy to____________ the countryside on weekends. a. taking b. to take c. being taken d. to be taken 9. I really dislike ____________ to answer questions in class when I haven't prepared my lessons. a. asking b. to ask c. being asked d. to be ask 10. Would you mind not____________ the radio until I have finished with this phone call? a. turning on b. to tum on c. being turned on d. to be turned on Trang 53

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 IV. Choose the underlined word or phrase that needs correcting. 1. If a drop of oil is placed in a glass of water, it would float to the top. A B C D ................................ 2. The Tuoi Tre is a daily newspaper that is wide read by both teenagers and adults. A B C D ................................ 3. My parents wouldn't let me staying up late when I was a child. A B C D ................................ 4. Her children are used to picking-up after school every day. They don't have to walk home. A B C D ............................. 5. I’m usually right about the weather, amn’t I? A B C D ................................ V. Supply the correct form of the word in bold. 1. Is there too much sex and ____________ on TV? (VIOLENT) 2. Language games are usually intended to encourage students’ ____________ . (INTERACT) 3. It’s about 10 meters in ____________ . (WIDE) 4. She has to make a difficult ____________ . (DECIDE) 5. The prime minister issued ____________ of the report that she is about to resign (DENY) 6. Putting these files in order is a very time -____________ task. (CONSUME) 7. Using these machines with care because they are very ____________ . (COST) 8. There is an interesting ____________ on VTV1 tonight. (DOCUMENT) VI. Choose the correct answer to fill each gap. Television is one of man's most important (1) ____________ of communication. It brings (2)____________ and sounds from around the world into millions of homes. A person with a television set can sit in his house and watch the President (3)____________ a speech or visit a foreign country. Through television, home (4)____________ can see and learn about people, places, and things in (5)____________ lands. Television even takes its viewers out of this world. It brings them coverage of American's astronauts as the astronauts (6)____________ outer space. In (7)____________ to all these things, television brings its viewers a steady stream of programs that are (8)____________ to entertain. In fact, television provides many more (9) ____________ programs than any other kind. The programs include action-packed dramas, light comedies, sporting (10)____________ and motion pictures. 1. a. ways b. means c. aspects d. kinds 2. a. voices b. portraits c. pictures d. films 3. a. make b. do c. speak d. take 4. a. spectators b. observers c. students d. viewers 5. a. close b. faraway c. nearby d. isolated 6. a. explore b. discover c. develop d. exploit 7. a. increase b. development c. addition d. advantage 8. a. responded b. published c. broadcasted d. designed 9. a. entertain b. entertaining c. entertained d. entertainment 10. a. events b. programs c. channels d. Teams VII. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. It was difficult for me to stop laughing at Wendy's letter. I couldn't help ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2. Shall I phone you this evening? Do you want ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3. It will be good to see them again. I'm looking ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. I'd prefer not to go out tonight. I'd rather .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5. You'd better put your money in the bank, Jack. I advised ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6. I haven’t eaten this kind of food before. This is ........................................................................................................................................................................................ Trang 54

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 7. He can repair this machine. This machine .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8. Watching TY consumes a lot of time. Watching TV is ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9. Seeing Nelson Mandela will always stay in my memory. I’ll never forget .................................................................................................................................................................... --------------------------------------------------------

TEST 3

I. Vocabulary and expressions: 1. Have you read this article ____________ the website? a. in b. at c. on d. for 2. There is a comedy on ____________ 10: 15 and 11:00. a. from b. at c. between d. since 3. The BEC World Service broadcasts all ____________ the world. a. over b. around c. through d. throughout 4. You need a password to get ____________ to the computer system. a. access b. information c. programs d. connection 5. The information is freely available on the Internet. a. taken b. stored c. passed d. contained 6. She spends hours every day just ____________ the Net. a. making b. breaking c. surfing d. looking 7. What benefits does TV bring about to people's life? a. events b. advantages c. programs d. information 8. Some people think using - the internet is very ____________ because it takes a lot of time. a. convenient b. informative c. interesting d. time-consuming II. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in brackets. I. My friend promised (return) ____________ the book very soon. 2. Most people enjoy (write) ____________ letters to their friends. 3. David finished (write) ____________ the report about four o’clock. 4. How soon do you expect (leave) ____________ for South America? 5. Have you considered (try)____________ something different? 6. Are you going to suggest (travel) ____________ by plane or not? 7. I’d rather Mỹ Tâm (sing) ____________ “Ước gì”. III. Supply the correct form of the word in bold. 1. Watching TV has become one of the most popular forms of ____________ . (ENTERTAIN) 2. Nowadays, the internet is __________used. We can see many Products advertised on it. (COMMERCE) 3. Computer are becoming ____________ popular. They make everything faster and more reliable. (INCREASE) 4. Although the laptop is ____________ , I will buy it. (COST) 5. My brother would like to be a ____________ . (JOURNAL) IV. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first. 1. I was surprised I passed the exam. I didn’t expect ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2. My teacher allowed me to wear casual clothes last Sunday. My teacher let ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3. I think you should use the English dictionary. What about .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4. Most students like Chinese more than Tamil. Most students prefer ........................................................................................................................................................... 5. It isn’t necessary for you to learn all these expressions by heart. You don’t ................................................................................................................................................................................... -------------------------------------------------------I. Grammar and structures:

TEST 4 Trang 55

ĐỀ CƯƠNG TIẾNG ANH 9 HỌC KỲ 1 1. People use the Internet for many purposes, ____________ ? a. do they b. don't they c. does it d. doesn't it 2. Did you congratulate Ann ____________ the exam? a. of passing b. on passing c. passing d. to pass 3. You don't know where Karen is, ____________ ? a. don't you b. do you c. is she d. isn’t she 4. Look at these trees! They really need ____________ . a. to water b. watering c. to be watered d. b and c 5. Let's go to the movie, ____________ ? a. do we b. don't we c. shall we d. shan’t we 6. Jack made me ____________ him next week. a. to promise to call b. promise to call c. to promise calling d. promise calling 7. I'm angry because you didn't tell me the truth. I don't like ____________ . a. deceiving b. to deceive c. being deceived d. having deceived 8. Please remember ____________ your hand if you have a question. a. to raise b. raising c. being raised d. to be raised 9. Are you looking forward ____________ on your vacation? a. you go b. going c. to going d. to go 10. We advised Virginia ____________ TV all time. a. don't watch b. not watching c. not to watch d. not watch II. Put in the right prepositions. 1. Was there anything good ____________ TV last night? 2. Remote Controls are used to interact ____________ TV. 3. I prefer sports programs ____________ others, but there is no sports programs ____________ Saturday afternoon. 4. The information is posted ____________ Jim ____________ 10 December 2002. 5. It's not easy to get access ____________ the Internet ____________ the countryside. III. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in brackets 1. My father is retired. He stops (work) ____________ now. 2. We had the water pipe (repair) ____________ by the plumber. 3. Mrs. Baker got them (keep) ____________ her house. 4. My children have to (learn) ____________ the lesson now. 5. I look forward to (hear) ____________ from you. 6. Andrew doesn't mind (walk) ____________ home, but his sister would like (get) ____________ a taxi. 7. Sandra gave up (try) ____________ to find a job in this country and decided (go) ____________ abroad. 8. The teacher told everybody (be) ____________ quiet, but they just went on (talk) ____________ . IV. Use the correct forms of the words given to complete each sentence. 1. I watch the news every day because it's very ____________ . (INFORM) 2. I enjoy the constant ____________ with students from other classes. (INTERACT) 3. The show brought ____________ to millions of viewers. (ENJOY) 4. The Internet is a very useful means of ____________ . (COMMUNICATE) 5. There is an ____________ documentary on Channel 4 tonight. (INTEREST) V. Write the second sentence so that it has the same meaning to the first. 1. Your parents’ house is still in Nha Trang, isn’t it? Your parents still .................................................................................................................................................................. 2. My brother spends three hours surfing the Net every night. It takes ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3. She asked Joanna how she thought of her new dress. “How ...................................................................................................................................................................................... ?” 4. The stick is too hard for him to break. (so ... that) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Do you like watching documentary?” he said to me. He asked ................................................................................................................................................................................... -------------------------------------------------------Trang 56